PV Elite: User's Guide

PV Elite
User's Guide
Version 2013 (V15)
November 13, 2012
DICAS-PE-200108D
Copyright
Copyright © 1985-2012 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite,
CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands
and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc ..................................................................................................... 11
PV Elite Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 13

What Distinguishes PV Elite From our Competitors? ........................................................................... 14
What Can Be Designed? ...................................................................................................................... 14
Licensing .................................................................................................................................................... 17
ESL Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 18
Install a local lock ........................................................................................................................... 18
Install a network lock ...................................................................................................................... 18
SmartPlant License Manager Installation ............................................................................................. 20
Quick Installation Workflow ............................................................................................................ 22
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ............................................................................................... 23
Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 27
Before You Begin PV Elite Installation .................................................................................................. 27
Installing PV Elite from the Product Media ........................................................................................... 28
Installing PV Elite in Silent Mode .......................................................................................................... 29
Verifying the Installed Product Program Structure................................................................................ 30
Getting Started and Workflows ................................................................................................................ 31

Understanding the Interface.................................................................................................................. 31
Set Interface Language .................................................................................................................. 32
Input Processors............................................................................................................................. 33
Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 34
Adding Details ................................................................................................................................ 34
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints ............................................................... 35
Error Checking................................................................................................................................ 38
Modeling Basics .................................................................................................................................... 38
Defining the Basic Vessel ............................................................................................................... 39
Building a Heat Exchanger ............................................................................................................. 40
Analysis ................................................................................................................................................. 49
Performing the Analysis.................................................................................................................. 50
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details ........................................................................................... 50
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details .......................................................................... 52
Output Review and Report Generation ................................................................................................. 53
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image................................................................................. 55
DXF File Generation Option.................................................................................................................. 56
File Tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 57

Open ..................................................................................................................................................... 57
Save ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Save As ................................................................................................................................................. 58
Import/Export......................................................................................................................................... 58
Print Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 58
Preview/Print ......................................................................................................................................... 58
PV Elite User's Guide 3

Contents
Exit ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
Home Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 61

File Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 61
New................................................................................................................................................. 62
Elements Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 62
Details Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 63
Add a Detail .................................................................................................................................... 64
Modify a Detail ................................................................................................................................ 65
Common Detail Parameters ........................................................................................................... 65
Stiffening Ring ................................................................................................................................ 67
Nozzle ............................................................................................................................................. 70
Weight ............................................................................................................................................ 96
Force and Moment ......................................................................................................................... 99
Platform ........................................................................................................................................ 100
Packing ......................................................................................................................................... 102
Saddle .......................................................................................................................................... 104
Tray............................................................................................................................................... 111
Lug ................................................................................................................................................ 111
Legs .............................................................................................................................................. 115
Liquid ............................................................................................................................................ 120
Insulation ...................................................................................................................................... 123
Lining ............................................................................................................................................ 124
Halfpipe Jacket ............................................................................................................................. 125
Tubesheet ..................................................................................................................................... 128
Generic Clip .................................................................................................................................. 165
Lifting Lug Data ............................................................................................................................ 168
ASME Appendix 9 Jacket ............................................................................................................. 172
API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis .......................................................................................... 181
Input/Output Panel .............................................................................................................................. 186
Input .............................................................................................................................................. 186
Component Analysis..................................................................................................................... 186
Review Database ......................................................................................................................... 186
Utilities Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 187
Flip Element Orientation ............................................................................................................... 188
Auxiliary Panel .................................................................................................................................... 188
Seamless Pipe Selection Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 189
List Dialog ..................................................................................................................................... 189
Setting Up the Required Parameters ........................................................................................... 190
Create Database .......................................................................................................................... 191
Analyze Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 191
Analyze ......................................................................................................................................... 191
Error Check Only .......................................................................................................................... 192
Review Reports ............................................................................................................................ 192
DXF File Generated by PV Elite During Runtime ......................................................................... 192
Units/Code Panel ................................................................................................................................ 193
Tools Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 195

Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 196
Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog)......................................................... 196
DXF Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)...................................................................................... 202
Set Default Values Tab (Configuration Tab) ................................................................................ 202
4 PV Elite User's Guide

Contents
Select Units ......................................................................................................................................... 203

Create / Review Units ......................................................................................................................... 203
Create a new units file .................................................................................................................. 204
Edit an existing units file ............................................................................................................... 204
Units File Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 205
Material Database Editor .............................................................................................................. 205
Calculator ............................................................................................................................................ 218
Enter U-1 Form Information ................................................................................................................ 218
Compute Ligament Efficiencies .......................................................................................................... 218
View Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 223
3D Tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 225

3D Graphics Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 226
Diagnostics Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 229
Esl Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 231

Phone Update ..................................................................................................................................... 231
Enter Re-Authorization Codes ............................................................................................................ 231
Help Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 233
General Input Tab .................................................................................................................................... 235

Element Data (General Input Tab) ...................................................................................................... 236
Additional Element Data (General Input Tab) ..................................................................................... 246
Elliptical (Additional Element Data) .............................................................................................. 246
Torispherical (Additional Element Data) ....................................................................................... 247
Spherical (Additional Element Data) ............................................................................................ 247
Conical (Additional Element Data) ............................................................................................... 248
Welded Flat (Additional Element Data) ........................................................................................ 250
Body Flange (Additional Element Data) ....................................................................................... 252
Skirt (Additional Element Data) .................................................................................................... 274
References .......................................................................................................................................... 296
Report Headings (Heading Tab) ............................................................................................................. 297
Design Constraints Tab .......................................................................................................................... 299

Design Data (Design Constraints Tab) ............................................................................................... 299
Datum Line Options Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 305
Design Modification (Design Constraints Tab) ................................................................................... 305
Load Cases Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 307

Stress Combination Load Cases (Load Cases Tab) .......................................................................... 308
Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Options Dialog Box ................................................... 311
Nozzle Design Options (Load Cases Tab) ......................................................................................... 313
Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab) .................................................................................................................. 315

As/Nz 1170:2002 Wind Data............................................................................................................... 317
ASCE-93 Wind Data ........................................................................................................................... 322

Contents
ASCE-95, ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC 2006 Wind Data............................................................ 324

ASCE-2010 Wind Data ....................................................................................................................... 325
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Data................................................................................................................ 326
BS6399-97 Wind Data ........................................................................................................................ 330
China GB 50009 Wind Data................................................................................................................ 332
EN-2005 Wind Data ............................................................................................................................ 334
Euro Code Wind Data ......................................................................................................................... 335
IBC-03 and IBC 2006 Wind Data ........................................................................................................ 337
IS-875 Wind Data ................................................................................................................................ 338
JPI-7R-35-2004 Wind Data ................................................................................................................. 340
Mexico 1993 Wind Data ...................................................................................................................... 341
Mexico 1993 En Español .............................................................................................................. 345
NBC-95 and NBC-2005 Wind Data..................................................................................................... 350
NBC-2010 Wind Data ......................................................................................................................... 351
UBC Wind Data ................................................................................................................................... 353
User-Defined Wind Data ..................................................................................................................... 354
Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab) ........................................................................................................ 355

AS/NZ 1170.4 Seismic Data ............................................................................................................... 357
ASCE-88 Seismic Data ....................................................................................................................... 359
ASCE 7-98 Seismic Data .................................................................................................................... 364
ASCE 7-02/05 Seismic Data ............................................................................................................... 366
ASCE-2010 Seismic Data ................................................................................................................... 369
Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data ............................................................................................................. 371
Chile NCh2369 En Español .......................................................................................................... 373
China GB 50011 Seismic Data ........................................................................................................... 379
Costa Rica 2002 Seismic Data ........................................................................................................... 379
G Loading Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 382
IBC 2000 Seismic Data ....................................................................................................................... 382
IBC 2003 Seismic Data ....................................................................................................................... 385
IBC 2006 Seismic Data ....................................................................................................................... 387
IBC 2009 Seismic Data ....................................................................................................................... 390
IS-1893 RSM Seismic Data ................................................................................................................ 392
IS-1893 SCM Seismic Data ................................................................................................................ 394
Mexico Sismo Seismic Data ............................................................................................................... 395
Mexico Sismo En Español ............................................................................................................ 396
NBC 1995 Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 397
NBC 2005 Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 399
NBC 2010 Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 401
PDVSA Seismic Data .......................................................................................................................... 401
PDVSA En Español ...................................................................................................................... 406
Res. Spectrum Seismic Data .............................................................................................................. 412
UBC 1994 Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 416
UBC 1997 Seismic Data ..................................................................................................................... 417
PV Elite Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 423

Calculating and Displaying Vessel Analysis Results .......................................................................... 423
Optional Steps..................................................................................................................................... 428
Nozzle Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 429

Contents
Output Processor .................................................................................................................................... 431

Customize report header .................................................................................................................... 432
Customize company name ................................................................................................................. 432
Customize the title page ..................................................................................................................... 432
Setting default fonts ............................................................................................................................ 432
Save reports to Microsoft Word .......................................................................................................... 432
Material Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................................................. 433

Material Database Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 433
Material Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 474
Vessel Example Problems ...................................................................................................................... 485
Keyboard and Mouse Commands ......................................................................................................... 487
Appendix: PV Elite Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 489

FATAL ERROR #5000 ........................................................................................................................ 491
FATAL ERROR #5001/5307 ............................................................................................................... 491
FATAL ERROR #5002 ........................................................................................................................ 491
FATAL ERROR #5003 ........................................................................................................................ 491
FATAL ERROR #5004 ........................................................................................................................ 492
FATAL ERROR #5005 ........................................................................................................................ 492
FATAL ERROR #5006 ........................................................................................................................ 492
FATAL ERROR #5007 ........................................................................................................................ 492
FATAL ERROR #5008 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5009 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5010 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5011 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5012 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5013 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5014 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5015 ........................................................................................................................ 493
FATAL ERROR #5016 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5017 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5018 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5019 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5020 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5021 ........................................................................................................................ 494
FATAL ERROR #5023 ........................................................................................................................ 495
FATAL ERROR #5024 ........................................................................................................................ 495
FATAL ERROR #5205 ........................................................................................................................ 495
FATAL ERROR #5300 ........................................................................................................................ 495
FATAL ERROR #5301 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5302 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5303 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5304 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5305 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5306 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5308 ........................................................................................................................ 496
FATAL ERROR #5309 ........................................................................................................................ 497
FATAL ERROR #5310 ........................................................................................................................ 497

Contents
FATAL ERROR #5311 ........................................................................................................................ 497

FATAL ERROR #5312 ........................................................................................................................ 497
FATAL ERROR #5313 ........................................................................................................................ 497
FATAL ERROR #5314 ........................................................................................................................ 497
FATAL ERROR #5315 ........................................................................................................................ 497
FATAL ERROR #5316 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5317 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5318 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5319 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5320 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5321 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5322 ........................................................................................................................ 498
FATAL ERROR #5323 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5324 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5325 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5326 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5327 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5328 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5329 ........................................................................................................................ 499
FATAL ERROR #5330 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5331 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5332 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5333 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5334 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5335 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5336 ........................................................................................................................ 500
FATAL ERROR #5337 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5338 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5339 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5340 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5341 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5342 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5343 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5344 ........................................................................................................................ 501
FATAL ERROR #5345 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5346 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5347 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5348 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5349 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5350 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5351 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5352 ........................................................................................................................ 502
FATAL ERROR #5353 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5354 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5355 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5356 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5357 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5358 ........................................................................................................................ 503
FATAL ERROR #5359 ........................................................................................................................ 504
FATAL ERROR #5360 ........................................................................................................................ 504
FATAL ERROR #5361 ........................................................................................................................ 504
FATAL ERROR #5362 ........................................................................................................................ 504
FATAL ERROR #5363 ........................................................................................................................ 504

Contents
FATAL ERROR #5364 ........................................................................................................................ 504

FATAL ERROR #6001 ........................................................................................................................ 504
FATAL ERROR #6002 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6003 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6004 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6005 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6006 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6007 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6008 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6009 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6010 ........................................................................................................................ 505
FATAL ERROR #6011 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6012 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6013 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6014 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6015 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6016 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6017 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6018 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6019 ........................................................................................................................ 506
FATAL ERROR #6020 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6021 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6022 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6023 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6024 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6025 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6026 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6027 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6028 ........................................................................................................................ 507
FATAL ERROR #6029 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6030 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6031 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6032 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6033 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6038 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6039 ........................................................................................................................ 508
FATAL ERROR #6040 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6041 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6042 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6050 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6500 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6501 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6502 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6503 ........................................................................................................................ 509
FATAL ERROR #6525 ........................................................................................................................ 510
FATAL ERROR #6698 ........................................................................................................................ 510
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 511
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 513

Contents

What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc
Below are the new features for Version 2013 (V15) of PV Elite and CodeCalc. New features and
improvements come directly from your comments as well as updates to the previous version.
Code Updates and Analysis changes:

 PD 5500 2012 added
 PD 5500 jackets and limpet coils added
 TEMA 9th edition added
 API 579 -1/ FFS-1 (2007 edition), Part 4: General Metal Loss added to PV Elite
 Upgrade ASME VIII, Div 1 Fatigue Analysis using Div 2 (2007, 2011a version)
 MDMT for UHA 51 stainless steels
 EN-13445: expansion joint calculations (bellows) added (2012 R1)
 ASME Tubesheet MDMT calculations available
 Differential pressures on tubes for differential pressure design
 A number of user requested EN-13445 enhancements have been added
Internationalization
 Australian/ New Zealand 2011 Wind Code update
 Vertical acceleration component for Indian seismic calculation
 Update to European Wind Code to 2011 version
 European Nozzle load table is now available (2012 R1)
 Inclusion of European shapes in structural database (2012 R1)
 Rounded metric defaults in basering and nozzle dialogs and tools à configuration(2012 R1)
 Multiple languages (French, Portuguese, Spanish, and Italian)
Productivity Enhancements
 Superseded ASME materials dating back to 1947
 Sort capabilities for materials database dialog – sort by any column
 Zick saddle analysis now uses 95% Yield (Hydro) or 80% Yield (Pneumatic) Allowables
 Miscellaneous weight percentages for component details such as saddles and nozzles
 Template file, *.pvpt, that will change all the files in the same folder if modified
Print directly to PDF printing in all modules

 Multicolored output for stainless steels in the MDMT report
Output Reports
 Search (ctrl + F), copy (ctrl + C) and select all (ctrl + A) are available
 Reports that fail will be shown in red in the report menu
 Users can now drag and drop the order of the reports in the output menu
 Multicolored table for tubesheets indicating shellside and tubeside components
User Interface
 New updated ribbon toolbar

What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc
 Office 2010 style themes

 New icons
 Ability to change graphics driver from within PV Elite
 Codecalc interface updated
 Users can now change the elements’ colors based on material, wall thickness, temperature,
and pressure
 2D and 3D views are now tabbed

SECTION 1
PV Elite Overview
PV Elite consists of nineteen modules for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and heat
exchangers, and assessment of fitness for service. The software provides the mechanical
engineer with easy-to-use, technically sound, well-documented reports. The reports contain
detailed calculations and supporting comments that speed and simplify the task of vessel
design, re-rating, or fitness for service. The popularity of PV Elite is a reflection of Intergraph
CADWorx and Analysis Solutions' expertise in programming and engineering, and dedication to
service and quality.
Calculations in PV Elite are based on the latest editions of national codes such as the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or industry standards such as the Zick analysis method for
horizontal drums. PV Elite offers exceptional ease of use that results in dramatic improvement in
efficiency for both design and re-rating.
PV Elite features include:

 A graphical user interface allowing you to add model data while seeing the vessel elements
as they are added.
 Horizontal and vertical vessels of cylinders, conical sections, and body flanges, as well as
elliptical, torispherical, hemispherical, conical, and flat heads.
 Saddle supports for horizontal vessels.
 Leg and skirt supports at any location for vertical vessels.
 Extensive on-line help.
 Dead weight calculation from vessel details such as nozzles, lugs, rings, trays, insulation,
packing, and lining.

PV Elite Overview
 Wall thickness calculations for internal and external pressure according to the rules of
ASME Section VIII Divisions 1 and 2, PD 5500, and EN-13445.
 Stiffener ring evaluation for external pressure.
 Wind and seismic data using the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) standard, the
Uniform Building Code (UBC), the National (Canadian) Building Code, India standards, as
well as British, Mexican, Australian, Japanese, and European standards.
 A user-defined unit system.
 A complete examination of vessel structural loads, combining the effects of pressure, dead
weight, and live loads in the empty, operating, and hydrotest conditions.
 Logic to automatically increase wall thickness to satisfy requirements for pressure and
structural loads, and introduce stiffener rings to address external pressure rules.
 Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios to the
allowable limits.
 Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.
 Material libraries for all three design standards.
 Component libraries containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure vs. temperature charts, and section properties for AISC, British, Indian, Japanese,
Korean, Australian and South African structural shapes.
 Thorough and complete printed analysis reports, with definable headings on each page.
Comments and additions may be inserted at any point in the output.
What Distinguishes PV Elite From our Competitors?

Our staff of experienced pressure vessel engineers are involved in day-to-day software
development, software support, and training. This approach has produced software that closely
fits today's requirements of the pressure vessel industry. Data entry is simple and
straightforward through annotated input fields. PV Elite provides the widest range of modeling
and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. You can
tailor PV Elite through default settings and customized databases. Comprehensive input
graphics confirm model construction before analysis is made. The software's interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file,
printer or Word document. PV Elite is an up-to-date package that not only uses standard
analysis guidelines, but also provides the latest recognized opinions for these analyses.
PV Elite is a field-proven engineering analysis program and is a widely recognized product with
a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.
What Can Be Designed?

PV Elite can design and analyze:
General Vessels
Enables users to perform wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic
combinations of pressure, deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with
ASME Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules, PD 5500, and EN-13445. These
calculations address minimum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress
(both tension and compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load combinations.

PV Elite Overview
Complete Vertical Vessels

Enables users to define vessels supported by skirts, legs or lugs for complete dead load and live
load analysis. Stacked vessels with liquid are also addressed. Enables users to specify
Hydrotest conditions for either vertical or horizontal test positions. Vessel MAWP includes
hydrostatic head and ANSI B16.5 flange pressure limitations.
Complete Horizontal Vessels

Enables stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L. P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel and in the heads.

PV Elite Overview

SECTION 2
Licensing
PV Elite supports three types of licensing:
 Local External Software Lock (ESL) - Hardware-based licensing using a green USB
dongle. A local ESL can be moved between computers (such as between desktops and
laptops).
 Network External Software Lock (ESL) - Hardware-based licensing using a red USB
dongle. A network ESL is installed on a computer that is network accessible from the
computer, or multiple computers, running PV Elite.
 License Manager - Software-based licensing using SmartPlant License Manager (SPLM).
For more information, see SmartPlant License Manager Installation (on page 20). Refer to
the SmartPlant License Manager documentation for complete installation and configuration
instructions.
External Software Lock (ESL) Keys

The External Software Lock (ESL) is the security protection method used by Intergraph CAS,
Inc. The software cannot execute unless an appropriate ESL (green or red USB key) is
connected locally to the computer, or to another computer in the network (red USB key).
The ESL contains the PV Elite licensing data, and other client-specific information. This
information includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may be
stored on the ESL depending on the specific program and the specific client.
There are two different ESL types, local and network. Both types of ESLs are intended to be
attached to the USB ports of the applicable computers. The appropriate ESL(s) are shipped with
your product according to the licensing type purchase.
 Local ESLs provide the maximum flexibility in using the software in that they can be moved
between computers (for example, between desktops and laptops).
 Network ESLs must be attached to a computer on the network, either a computer or the
server. In order for the network to respond to software requests for the ESL, the NetHASP
License Manager utility must also be running on the computer where the network ESL is
attached.
The HASP drivers for ESL usage can be found in the sub-directory ASSIDRV beneath the PV
Elite program directory. The documentation files in this sub-directory contain instructions for a
variety of networks and operating systems. Note that there are periodic updates to these ESL
drivers and they can be downloaded from the Intergraph eCustomer
https://crmweb.intergraph.com website.
Do not connect two locks to the same computer. The software finds the first lock and
returns its code. For example, you have a lock for CAESAR II and CADWorx and plug both into
the same computer. You start CAESAR II, but the software might find the CADWorx lock first
and return an error. If the same computer is going to run more than one Intergraph CAS, Inc.
product, then contact the Sales Department (icaslicenserequests@intergraph.com (see
CADWorx Sales - mailto:icaslicenserequests@intergraph.com)) to request that both products be
licensed from the same lock.

Licensing
ESL Installation
The following topics explain how to install the different hardware locks supported by PV Elite.
What do you want to do?

 Install a local lock (on page 18)
 Install a network lock (on page 18)
Install a local lock

1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. If you are installing CAESAR II, PV Elite, or TANK, navigate to c:\Program Files\Intergraph
CAS\Product\Assidrv and double-click HASPUserSetup.exe.
-OR-
If you are installing CADWorx, navigate to c:\CADWorx Version\Product\Assidrv and
double-click HaspHLDriverSetup.exe
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the driver.
Install a network lock

The following list details general information about red network ESLs.
 The red network ESL should be set up by a Network Administrator or someone who familiar
with Windows-based networks. If you are not familiar with concepts such as network
protocols, broadcast, IP addresses, TCP, UDP, and Windows Services, please do not
attempt to setup the red network ESL.
 The red network ESL does not have to be attached to the network server. We recommend
attaching the red network ESL to a computer that is always up and running, can be
re-booted without impact to users, and is not the primary computer for any user on the
network.
 If you install an Intergraph CAS product on a network drive for multiple users to access,
assign read/write privileges for all users to the [Product Folder]\System folder. Intergraph
CAS applications write temporary files to the [Product Folder]\System folder that pertains to
the installation. The [Product Folder]\System folder also needs to have read/write privileges
for all users.
 If you are using other network protocols, such as NetBIOS or IPX, check the SafeNet web
site for instructions. The only protocol tested with Intergraph CAS products is TCP/IP.
 The information provided in PV Elite Help file is a supplement to the NetHasp User's Guide,
which is delivered as a PDF(_NETHASP.pdf) in Assidrv folder. Review the PDF file for any
issues not addressed in the Help file.

Licensing
Notes on Network ESLs

A network ESL has advantages and disadvantages. One big advantage is that many client
computers can access the software from a single server. Additional points for consideration are
listed below.
 Depending on the number of licenses allowed by the network ESL, some users may receive
error messages when attempting to access the software. For example, if the ESL has been
configured to allow four simultaneous users, an error message stating that no licenses are
available when the fifth user attempts to access the software. Consequently, the fifth user is
not able to access the software until one of the first four users exits the software and
releases a license.
 Because of the communication procedures between the client computer and the file server,
memory access to the network ESL is much slower than to a local ESL. This access time
delay only occurs when the software is first started after installation.
 Because there is no network specific version of the software, the software looks first for a
local ESL, and then for a network ESL. This allows both a network ESL and several local
ESLs to be used on the same system. This transparent ESL access procedure allows a
single version of the software to be used on the network and on remote computers.
 We recommend that only 70 to 80 percent of the required licenses be assigned to a network
ESL, with the remaining 20 to 30 percent assigned to local ESLs. This enables the local ESL
to be moved between computers. If all of the licenses are on the network ESL, a user must
be logged into the network to access the software. As such, a few local ESLs provide much
greater operating flexibility.
NetHASP License Manager / NETHASP.INI Instructions

You must have Administrator privileges to perform the following procedure.
1. Attach the red network hardware lock to the parallel port or USB port of the computer.
2. On the computer where the hardware lock is attached, navigate to the [Product
Folder]\Assidrv folder and double click Lmsetup.exe. Follow the on-screen instructions to
install the NetHASP License Manager as a service.
3. The NetHasp License Manager starts automatically each time you re-boot the computer.
This occurs because the NetHasp License Manager is set up as a start up service inside
Windows XP/Vista/7. To verify that the service is running, click Start > Control Manager >
Administrative Services, and then double-click Services. In the Services dialog box,
locate HASP Loader in the Name list. The HASP Loader Service starts even if no one logs
into the computer.
4. Determine what protocols the NetHasp License Manager is listening to. The NetHasp
License Manager displays a message similar to those list below:
Server is listening to IPX : Loaded
Server is listening to TCP/IP : Loaded
Server is listening to NetBIOS : Loaded
Loaded means that this protocol is active on the computer.
5. Open the Activity Log menu. This displays the activity log that confirms which protocols are
loaded. Do not be alarmed if the activity log reports that the NHSRV.ini file is not found.
6. Use the box in the top-left corner of the activity log to display only the information specific to
each protocol. Open the activity log for the protocol you want to use, and verify that it
contains no error messages.
7. For TCP/IP protocol, the activity log should report something similar to the following:

Licensing
Server IP address: 111.111.111.111

Server Host Name: PDC_NT01
8. To speed up response time to the network key, use the Remove menu to unload any
protocols that you are not planning to use with the NetHasp License Manager.
Modify NetHASP.ini for TCP/IP Protocol

If you still cannot access the network ESL you need to configure this NetHASP.ini
file. You must know the IP address of the computer where the red network hardware lock is
attached. All lines with a semi-colon at the start are considered not used.
1. Modify the NetHASP.ini file, located at in the [Product Folder]\Assidrv folder under
[NH_COMMON], as follows:
a. NH_TCPIP = Enabled
AND under [NH_TCPIP]
b. NH_SERVER_ADDR = 111.111.111.111
c. NH_USE_BROADCAST = Disabled
You may also have to modify other entries in the [NH_TCPIP] section depending on
your network setup. The most common entry to modify is NH_TCPIP_METHOD.
2. Copy the NetHASP.ini file to the AutoCAD folder.
Example: C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
Example: C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD
3. For CADWorx Design, copy the NetHASP.ini file to the [Product Folder]\Intergraph
CAS\CADWorx Design folder.
4. Start PV Elite .
Troubleshooting Network Locks

1. Verify that the NetHasp License Manager is running on the computer where the red network
ESL is attached.
2. Verify the protocols that NetHasp License Manager is broadcasting. Make sure that these
protocols are installed on the client computers.
3. Install and run the Monitor Utility. This file, NetHASPMonitorSetup.exe, is located in the
[Product Folder]Assidrv folder. If NetHASP Monitor cannot find the red network ESL, then
PV Elite cannot find the red network ESL.
SmartPlant License Manager Installation

Before beginning the product installation, refer to the delivered SmartPlant License Manager
readme file for the latest product installation updates. The readme file is delivered in the top
level product folder of the product media. Be sure you have the latest version of the SmartPlant
License Manager software before beginning the installation. If you do not have the latest version
of the software, you can install it using http://ppmapps.intergraph.com/elicense
(http://ppmapps.intergraph.com/elicense).
SmartPlant License Manager 2010 (v11) can be upgraded to SmartPlant License
Manager 2012 (v12). Any existing license key will be invalidated after the upgrade to SmartPlant
License Manager 2012 (v12). You will also need to generate a new computer ID and request a
new key. If you upgrade the SmartPlant License Manager 2010 (v11) license computer to a
SmartPlant License Manager 2012 (v12) client by mistake, you will have to un-install the

Licensing
SmartPlant License Manager client and reinstall SmartPlant License Manager 2012 (v12)
license computer.
Hardware Configurations
The SmartPlant License Manager licensing computer software should be installed on a stable,
single node, hardware configuration (such as a simple PC), with a static IP address, because
license key installation and license seat usage authentication depends on the information
gathered from the physical hardware. Any automated changes that cause the hardware
information not to match with the information used to generate the license key will result in a
failure of the authentication process.
Virtual (including VMware®), shadowed, mirrored, dynamic, or distributed hardware
configurations cannot be used as a SmartPlant License Manager licensing computer. This
includes terminal (application) servers, networked and distributed storage management
systems, and so forth. When these specialized systems occur in the user's network, the
SmartPlant License Manager Server licensing computer should be installed on a separate
dedicated hardware configuration system. The SmartPlant License Manager licensing computer
should be situated on the user's network where it can be accessed by all systems that are
running application software that relies on the SmartPlant License Manager licensing computer
for license management.
Multiple SmartPlant License Manager licensing computers can be used in the user's network as
long as each system is a unique hardware system/installation. If SmartPlant License Manager
licensing computers are cloned after the license key has been installed, then the license
management will fail on the cloned system. Each SmartPlant License Manager licensing
computer requires its own unique license key.
 RAID (redundant array of independent disks) and SAN (storage area networks) are not
supported on a SmartPlant License Manager license computer.
 The license computer must have the same version (or later) of SmartPlant License Manager
installed as any client computers. In other words, you cannot use a newer version on a client
computer to retrieve a license from an older version of SmartPlant License Manager on the
licensing computer. The license computer must have the same version (or a newer version)
installed than the clients.
You must log in as Administrator to install this software.
1. Insert the Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager media. If the media does not start
automatically, double-click Setup.exe in the root folder of the media.
During SmartPlant License Manager installation automatically turns on a product
usage log file in C:\Win32App\Ingr\SPLM\bin\loggingfileV12.txt. You can
change this location and name of this file as it can grow to be a large file. If you stop and
restart logging, you need to define the output location.
This file can grow very large and users can redefine the location and name of this file.
2. Select SmartPlant License Manager Installation.
3. Click Next on the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for SmartPlant License Manager
page.
4. Enter your name and company name in the User Name and Company Name fields on the
Customer Information page. Click Next.
5. On the Software License Agreement page, select your country from the list and click
Display to view the license agreement.
The license agreement is delivered as a PDF file.

Licensing
6. Carefully read the license agreement. Close the PDF document, and click Yes on the
License Agreement page to accept the terms.
7. Select either License Client or License Machine.
8. On the Choose Destination Location page, click Next to install SmartPlant License
Manager in the default location. If you want to install the software in another location, click
Change and select the new location.
It is recommended that you install SmartPlant License Manager using a path that
contains no spaces, such as c:\win32app\Ingr (the default path).
9. Click Install on the Ready to Install the Program page. A status bar displays the progress
of the installation on the Status Setup page.
10. Click Finish on the InstallShield Wizard Complete page to complete installation of
SmartPlant License Manager.
Do not delete any files that are created during installation or as a result of using
SmartPlant License Manager. Removal of any files causes the license system to fail and
can require install, repair, or possibly removal and re-install of SmartPlant License Manager.
11. Add pdlice.exe to both the license computer and the client computer after installing of
SPLM. You may need to remove pdlice.exe and re-add it if you uninstall and reinstall
SPLM to upgrade SPLM from previous version to a current version. Otherwise, you may
receive a Connection timed out error message when you start your application. You may
also see the same error in your scavenging log file.
Silent Mode and SmartPlant License Manager Installation
Quick Installation Workflow

Use this workflow for all products that require SmartPlant License Manager concurrent licensing.
The System Administrator completes or gives guidance about most of these steps. Administrator
rights are required to install and setup SmartPlant License Manager. If you need more
information, follow the detailed procedures in the other sections. For more information, refer to
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Functions of SmartPlant License Manager, and
Troubleshooting and Error Messages.
Please refer to the delivered SmartPlant License Manager Readme for all the latest
product installation updates.
1. Designate a computer as the SmartPlant License Manager license computer. This computer
must be on the network and have a name with no spaces and a static IP address.
2. Install SmartPlant License Manager on the license computer and generate a computer ID.
3. Request a license key from the Intergraph Order Desk or generate a license key using
eLicense.
4. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager > SmartPlant
License Manager.
5. Click Install and Remove and Install License Key commands.
6. Click License Machine and enter the license key you received. If the license key installs
correctly, SmartPlant License Manager software automatically closes.
7. Next, install SmartPlant License Manager on each client computer.
8. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager > SmartPlant
License Manager.
9. Click Configure and Test and Select License Machine for Client.

Licensing
10. Enter the SmartPlant License Manager computer name. Exit SmartPlant License Manager.
11. Install the software that requires licensing. For example, SmartPlant Review, PDS or
SmartPlant P&ID. Use that product's installation and configuration guides to install each
product.
12. Use the Test Seat Reservation and Test Seat Release commands to ensure that
communication is working between the license computer and the client. Successful
messages show appropriate communication.
13. Click Test Seat Reservation. Select the license computer name and Batch or Interactive
mode. Note the seat number in the SmartPlant License Manager Information dialog box to
enter.
14. Click Test Seat Release and enter the seat designated in the SmartPlant License Manager
Information dialog box.
15. Start the software product that requires SmartPlant License Manager licensing.
16. For information about firewalls, please refer to Appendix E: Microsoft Windows Firewall
and SmartPlant License Manager.
See Also
General Topics FAQ (on page 24)
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Refer to the SmartPlant License Manager FAQ on the Web in the eCustomer system for the
most current FAQ. It is continually updated. Click
https://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu and select Services > Download Software
Updates > Products > SPLM.
Will providing the Machine ID make my computer less secure?
No. The Machine ID allows the license manager to uniquely identify your computer from a
collection of hardware and software identifiers without explicitly publishing your computer's
TCPIP address. Because the computer identifier cannot be used like a TCPIP address, it is
actually more secure than publishing your computer's TCPIP address.
Where can I find SmartPlant License Manager and other products to download?
SmartPlant License Manager is available from the following web page:
https://crmweb.intergraph.com
Select Services > Download Software Updates > Products > SPLM.
You do not need a serial number to install SmartPlant License Manager.
Can I divide the licenses for one LAN into several license computers for the purpose of
managing project access, for example, or as coverage in the event that my license
computer goes down?
Yes, you can divide the licenses.
What happens if I install the new license key prior to expiration of the old license key?
The new license will overwrite the existing key independent of the expiration date.
Is my existing key still running if I regenerate the Machine ID?
Yes, but you will not be able to reinstall the old key. You will need to request a new key for
the new machine identifier.
See Also
Purchasing Licenses FAQ (on page 24)
PDS, FrameWorks Plus, and ISOGEN FAQ

Licensing
Purchasing Licenses FAQ

Do I have to request a software upgrade from my local office before requesting a license?
No, you can request licenses without upgrading the software. If you are upgrading software,
you must request the upgrade before you request licenses. A license request does not
include a software upgrade and a software upgrade does not include a license request.
See Also
General Topics FAQ

What is a license machine?
The license machine is the computer where the license key is loaded; it can be a standard
computer or a server. The license key tells the license machine how many licenses it can
issue. Clients of a license machine are computers where SmartPlant License Manager is
installed and pointing to the license machine. The computer where you start the software
(for example, PDS or SmartPlant P&ID) asks the license machine for a license. If a license
is available, the license machine provides it. If all licenses are in use, the client is not
granted a license.
How can I tell what version of SPLM was used in the Machine ID or license key file?
Please check the starting number in your Machine ID or license key. See the table below.
Version Machine ID starts with License key starts with
2012 (v12) 5 3
2010 (v11) 6 2
2008 (v10) 7 1
Do I have to have one license computer for each LAN?
No, your configuration is entirely up to you. A persistent network connection is required if
you want to connect to a license server that belongs to a different LAN.
Can I make an educated guess at my installation date?
Yes. Intergraph provides a key within 48 hours of receipt of your request (via mail or phone).
Please ensure that the date you request is the actual date that you install the key, making
sure that all necessary software is available and loaded before that date. We request that
you notify us as early as possible.
What happens if my license machine goes down?
You are unable to check out licenses from this machine until it is back in use. Processes
that already have licenses checked out are not affected by the fact that the license computer
is unavailable.
It is possible in critical situations to request emergency licenses from Intergraph. They are
installed on the client computer rather than a licensing machine. Contact Intergraph Support
at 1-800-766-7701 or your local Intergraph office for more information.
What happens if the license machine is rebooted in the middle of my design session?
Nothing. Licensing does not depend on maintaining a continuous communication link to the
license computer.
What happens if my local computer goes down after I've obtained a license?

Licensing
If the scavenger cannot contact the client computer during scavenging, the license is
marked for a 16-hour hold before it is released. The scavenger periodically advances this
16-hour timer for each license. It is important to schedule the scavenger to run regularly, at
least every hour or two. If the client is in contact sooner, the hold is voided and normal
scavenging takes over.
I am running out of licenses earlier than I believe I should be. How can I troubleshoot to
understand what is happening?
Have your users click Scavenge for Keys on the Scavenge Options dialog box or you can
type pdlice -n in a Command Prompt window.
If you think that client nodes are improperly holding onto licenses, examine the results of the
pdlice -M command. This shows you which client nodes have licenses checked out. If a
client computer has no plant design-related activity and it is still holding licenses, rebooting
that client and then scavenging from the license computer may free some licenses.
If possible, find out what was processing when the job stopped. This information can help
you and/or Intergraph determine the underlying cause of the termination. Save the output of
any scavenging process that returns a license. This information provides the reasons why
the license was returned. The output of the scavenger includes the following information:
nodename, product tag, batch mode (Yes/No), process ID, and checkout time.
What do I type to see the number of licenses?
Click Show Key Status from the Display Options dialog box to show the status of your
keys.
How can I tell who is using a license?
Click Display Status of Reserved License on the Display Options dialog box or in the
license log file.
We installed a key for three licenses, but we can operate only two licenses at the same
time. Why?
There can be several reasons.
Click Display Status of Reserved License on the Display Options dialog box to
determine the number of licenses that your key contains.
Click Scavenge for Keys on the Scavenge Options dialog box to scavenge for the third
license that you are unable to use.
Verify that clients and servers can telnet to each other. Look for anomalies such as two
nodes on the network with the same name or the reuse of an old name for a new computer,
but with some traces of the old computer still existing in files on the network.
When an application is on a computer that is disconnected from the network without
exiting the product, how long is the license held?
16 hours.
How long would a daily license last?
Daily license expires after 12 hours.
See Also
Purchasing Licenses FAQ (on page 24)

Licensing

SECTION 3
Installation
Prior to installing PV Elite, verify that your computer meets the required hardware and software
requirements. For more information, see Before You Begin PV Elite Installation (on page 27)
The PV Elite installation DVD contains the following options:
 Install PV Elite- Launches the main installation process, which installs PV Elite, the HASP
drivers, and all associated documentation.
 PV Elite Information - Opens the PV Elite Product Details page on the Intergraph CAS web
site.
 ReadMe File - Opens a text file discussing the installation steps, the system requirements,
and the DVD contents.
 License Agreement - Opens an RTF file containing the PV Elite License Agreement.
 HASP Network Licensing Overview - Opens a DOC file containing a summary of the
Aladdin (SafeNet) HASP Licensing System.
 HASP Trouble Shooting - Opens a DOC file containing troubleshooting procedures for
issues with HASP licensing.
DVD Content:
 Browse the DVD - Displays the DVD contents in Windows Explorer.
 Additional Products - Displays additional Intergraph CAS products.
 Contact Intergraph - Displays contact information for Intergraph CAS Support.
Services:
 Training - Opens the PV Elite Course Details page on the Intergraph CAS web site.
 Support Forum - Opens the PV Elite Discussion Forum on the Intergraph CAS web site.
In This Section
Before You Begin PV Elite Installation .......................................... 27
Installing PV Elite from the Product Media .................................... 28
Installing PV Elite in Silent Mode ................................................... 29
Verifying the Installed Product Program Structure ........................ 30
Before You Begin PV Elite Installation

Verify that your system meets the requirements before installing PV Elite.
 Close all other software before running the PV Elite installer. Most unsuccessful installations
are caused by other software running at the same time as the installer.
 Note that the product installation is a DVD. The product DVD is not readable in a CD drive.
 Verify that the software and hardware requirements are met.
Processor
 Intel Pentium IV or higher AMD Athlon dual-core processor or higher
 3.0 GHz or higher

Installation
Memory
 2 GB RAM or higher for Windows XP
 4 GB RAM or higher for Windows 7/8
Display
 Video card with at least 256MB video RAM
 Video card support for OpenGL 1.1 or later
 Video card support DirectX 9.0 or later
 Video card drivers updated with the latest manufacturer's drivers
 1280 x 1024 minimum resolution or better with TrueColor
 Motherboard-integrated video cards are not recommended for desktop systems.
Operating System
 Windows 7/8 Ultimate, Enterprise, or Professional (32-bit/64-bit)
 Windows XP Professional with SP3 (32-bit)
 Windows Vista, Starter, and Home editions are not supported.
 Windows Server versions are only supported for the installation of network licensing
systems.
 PV Elite is a native 32-bit application that runs with Windows 64-bit. PV Elite does not take
advantage of any Windows 64-bit specific features.
Installing PV Elite from the Product Media

 Close all other software before running the PV Elite installer. Most unsuccessful installations
are caused by other software running at the same time as the installer.
 The installation DVD is not readable in a CD drive.
1. Insert the Intergraph PV Elite DVD. If the DVD does not start automatically, double-click
CDSpawn.exe in the root folder of the DVD.
The PV Elite launch screen opens in your default internet browser.
2. Click Install PV Elite.
3. Click Next on the Welcome to the Installation Wizard for PV Elite screen.
4. On the License Agreement screen, carefully read the license agreement.
5. Click I accept the terms in the license agreement, and then click Next.
6. On the Customer Information page, enter information in the User Name, Organization,
and Serial number boxes. The serial number is provided to you by Intergraph CAS in your
product shipment.
7. On the Destination Folder page, review the default folder path. If needed, click Change
and select the folder location. Click Next.
8. On the Select License Type page, select the needed license type: network ESL, local ESL,
or SPLM license. For more information, see Licensing (on page 17).
9. On the Ready to Install the Application screen, click Install to begin installing the
software.
As the installation progresses, the status displays in a series of progress bars. If an ESL
license type was selected, the Aladdin device driver installation begins. Click OK on each

Installation
dialog box.
10. Click Finish to exit the installer.
11. In the Installer Information dialog box, click OK to restart the computer and complete the
installation.
You must restart your computer for PV Elite to run correctly.
Installing PV Elite in Silent Mode

You can use the Windows Installer to install and uninstall PV Elite using a command line instead
of the normal installer interface. You can then perform an unattended installation without dialog
boxes, such as when performing a network installation or a corporate repackaging. The
following command line arguments and parameters can be used with Windows Installer
(msiexec.exe) and the PV Elite setup (setup.exe) to perform a silent installation of the product.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
The Command Prompt screen opens.
2. Enter the drive letter where the PV Elite DVD is located. For example, type:
E:
3. Change the path to the PV Elite folder where Setup.exe is located on the DVD. For
example, type:
cd PVElite_2011
4. Enter the installation command:
 For silent installation with English language and green ESL color, type:
Setup.exe /v"/qb INSTALL_SILENT="Yes" LANG="Eng" ESL_COLOR="Green""
 For silent installation with Red ESL color and ESL installed locally, type:
Setup.exe /v"/qb INSTALL_SILENT="Yes" LANG="Eng" ESL_COLOR="Red"
ESL_ON_MACHINE="Yes""
 For silent installation with SPLM, type:
Setup.exe /v"/qb INSTALL_SILENT="Yes" LANG="Eng" ESL_COLOR="SPLM"
SERIALNUMBER="<serial number>""
Arguments
/v - Pass msi commands
/qb - Silent installation with basic user interface
Parameters for Setup.exe

INSTALL_SILENT - Sets silent installation.
 Yes - Installation is silent.
 No - Normal installation dialog boxes appear.
LANG - The language to install.
 Eng - English
 Span - Spanish
 Ger - German
 Fren - French
SERIALNUMBER - The product serial number provided to you by Intergraph CAS.
ESL_COLOR - The ESL license type.

Installation
 Red - Network ESL

 Green - Local ESL
 SPLM - SmartPlant License Manager (no ESL)
ESL_ON_MACHINE - Only used when ESL_COLOR is Red. Identifies the ESL location.
 Yes - ESL is on the local machine.
 No - ESL is on the server.
INSTALLDIR - The path to load the installation files.
 The general format of the command is:

setup.exe /v"/qb PROPERTY_NAME="value" PROPERTY_NAME2="Value""
 For a complete list of command line arguments for msiexec.exe, type the following in a
Command Prompt window: msiexec.exe /?
 For a complete list of command line arguments for setup.exe, type the following in a
Command Prompt window: setup.exe /?
Verifying the Installed Product Program Structure

A typical PV Elite hard disk configuration is structured as follows after PV Elite completes
installation:
PVELITE: Root Installation PV Elite directory
Project #1: Data files for Project #1
Project #2: Data files for Project #2
\SYSTEM: Program database & control files
\EXAMPLES: Sample input files
Most files in the data subfolders are identified by a user-defined filename with a given extension.
The remaining files hold data controlling the software's operation. These files and their
description follow:
jobname.pvdb PV Elite input file
jobname.PVU Form information results file
jobname.TAB Temporary results file
jobname.T80 Results file used by the output review processor
jobname.CCI Input file for component analysis
units.FIL User units file (relating user's units and program
units)
*.BIN PV Elite Material Database
UMAT1.BIN Binary file holding the user-defined materials

SECTION 4
Getting Started and Workflows

This section focuses on getting started and the fundamental workflows PV Elite.
 Input - Enter information required to define the vessel, its service requirements, and its
design guidelines.
 Analysis - Translate the input data with design and analysis algorithms, apply the rules of
the appropriate code or standard, and generate results.
 Output - Present a comprehensive final report of the results.
Understanding the Interface

The main PV Elite window has a quick access toolbar in the top left corner (indicated with a red
1 in the picture below), which you can customize with the commands that you use most. Directly
below the quick access toolbar is a series of ribbons (indicated by the red 2) and panels. On the
Home tab, are data file command (3 File Panel (on page 61)), add elements (4 Elements Panel
(on page 62)), and add details (5 Details Panel (on page 63)) to the current element.
PV Elite breaks a vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads, shells, cones, body
flanges, and/or a skirt—and the components on these elements. A quick look at the screen
(above) shows the data (near red 11) defining one element in the graphic view (red 13). Except
for From Node and To Node, the data is common to all vessel wall thickness calculations. The
From Node and To Node inputs are necessary to assemble the individual elements into the
complete vessel and are automatically assigned by PV Elite. A complete vessel is required if all

dead and live loads are to be included in the design or analysis. However, PV Elite will run wall
thickness calculations on elements without constructing the entire vessel.
The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Data (red 11
above), a table of the Element Additional Data (red 12 above when required) and the graphic
area which contains an image of the current status of the entire vessel or the current element
(red 13 above). A status bar displays (red 17) across the bottom of the screen and displays the
element count, the position and orientation of the current element, quick internal pressure
calculations for the current element.
When you click in the data areas (red 11 and 12), the Tab key moves the highlight (and control)
through its input cells. In most element data areas, press Enter registers the data and move the
focus to the next field. The exception is at combo boxes where clicking the arrow displays the
available choices. Throughout the program, F1 displays help for the highlighted data item. After
you are familiar with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands
will provide the most efficient navigation through the program.
Some of the data input in PV Elite is controlled through a data grid (red 11 and 12). To enter the
data, click the mouse on the data text, such as Inside Diameter, and type the input value. The
cursor will not blink over the numeric/alphanumeric values until typing has begun. After the data
is entered, press Enter or Tab to proceed. The arrow keys can also be used to navigate
between the input fields.
The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic. Combo
boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
When the 3D View (red 13) is active, a few more keys are available. No special highlight
appears, but the string PgUp/PgDn/Home/End displays at the bottom graphics area. This
indicates that these keys are now active. The image in the graphics area shows the current state
of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the details on these elements. Switch
between 2D and 3D views using the tabs at the bottom of the screen (red 16).
When the 2D View is active, one of the elements is highlighted. The element data (Element
Data 11 and Element Additional Data 12) shown on the screen defines this element. By
pressing Page Up or Page Down, the highlight changes from one element to the next through
the vessel. Press the Home and End keys to move the highlight to the first and last elements in
the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button while selecting the element will also highlight it. After
an element is highlighted, detail information for that element may be accessed. With the mouse,
click the right mouse button for the existing detail image to display. To add details to the current
element, click the appropriate detail on the Details panel (red 5) and enter the necessary data.
Set Interface Language

The PV Elite interface is available in several languages. Use Options > Language to select the
language that you want to use.

La interfaz de PV Elite está disponible en varios idiomas. Utilice Opciones> Idioma para
seleccionar el idioma que desea utilizar.
L'interface PV Elite est disponible en plusieurs langues. Utilisez Options> Langue pour
sélectionner la langue que vous souhaitez utiliser.
L'interfaccia PV Elite è disponibile in diverse lingue. Utilizzare Opzioni> Lingua per selezionare
la lingua che si desidera utilizzare.
O interface de PV Elite está disponível em vários idiomas. Use Opções> Idioma para
selecionar o idioma que você deseja usar.
Input Processors
The Input items are used to define the other types of data that might be necessary for an
analysis: design constraints, report headings, general input data, and live (Wind Loads and
Seismic Loads) load definitions. Each command activates an input data tab in the bottom-left
corner of the window. You can re-order the tabs as you like. The Design Constraints data is
important because this is where the overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.
The Component Analysis option allows you to enter data and analyze without building a
vessel. These are Intergraph's CodeCalc analysis modules, some of which are not incorporated
directly into PV Elite. CodeCalc, Intergraph's popular vessel component analysis package is
included in PV Elite.

Status Bar
The status bar across the bottom of the window displays information about your vessel in real
time. Values that display in red need attention. You can show or hide the status bar using the
Toggle Status Bar option on the View tab.
Wgt Cor - Displays the corroded weight.

Vol Cor - Displays the corroded volume.
t/L - Displays the thickness to length ratio.
OutDepth - Displays the head depth for a torispherical head.
El# - Displays the current element location relative to the start of the vessel. For example, a
value of 4 of 11 means the active element is the fourth element from the start of the vessel and
that there are eleven elements in total that define the vessel.
Fr - Displays the starting and ending distances from the Datum point for the current element.
Left / Right / Up / Down - Displays the element orientation.
Tr - Displays the computed thickness for the internal pressure.
Mawp - Displays the maximum allowable working pressure of the vessel and flange.
MAPnc - Displays the maximum allowable pressure in a new and cold condition.
Trext - Displays the computed thickness for the external pressure.
EMawp - Displays the external maximum allowable working pressure.
Slen - Displays the maximum length between ring stiffeners. When >>> displays, no reinforcing
ring is required for this element for external pressure purposes. For more information, see
Stiffening Ring.
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calculations
but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as element details.
Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as details on the
various elements. PV Elite calculates the weight of each of these items and account for them in
the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs are also used to locate support
points on the vessel—important data for load calculations.
Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight (make
current) the element, which will hold the detail and click the appropriate DETAIL command.
Allowing the cursor to rest on the toolbar button displays a tool tip definition of the button. Select
the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. For more information, see Details Panel
(on page 63).

Use the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested data.
Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints

Although default values allow the analysis to proceed, other data should be set before the
analysis continues. These data are the required live loads and design constraints, and the
optional vessel identification and report headings. These data are accessed and entered
through the Input panel on the Home tab. The Headings input allows the specification of three
lines of data, which appears at the top of each page in the printed output. The heading data also
includes title page entry, which appears at the beginning of the input echo report.

Select Input > Design Constraints and then select the Design Constraints tab to display the
design data.
Design Data includes vessel identification along with items that affect the design and analysis of
the vessel; items such as type of hydrostatic testing and degree of radiographic examination
appear here. It is important to note that this is where the design code is set - Division 1, Division
2, PD:5500 or EN 13445.
The Design Modification area holds four inputs that control the redesign of the vessel should
the user-entered wall thickness be insufficient for the analyzed loads. If a box is checked, the
software increase the element's wall thickness so that it meets or exceeds the requirements for
that load category. There are four boxes for three load types: one box for internal pressure, two
boxes for external pressure (either increase the wall thickness or locate stiffener rings along the
vessel to satisfy the buckling requirements), and one box for the variety of structural loads that

develop longitudinal stresses in the vessel wall. The software provides the option of rounding up
a required thickness to a nominal value (such as the next 1/16 inch or 1 mm) in the
Configuration (on page 196) dialog box.
The Load Cases tab displays nineteen default structural load cases for the analysis. These
cases cover the extent of structural loads on the vessel wall. Each case contains a pressure
component (axial) 1, a weight component (both axial and bending), and a live load component
(bending). The axial stresses are combined with the bending stresses to produce a total stress
in the vessel wall. Both tensile and compressive stresses are compared to their allowable limits.
Refer to the table below for a definition of terms used in the Load Case input.
These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall
thickness requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD:5500. Here, internal and
hydrostatic pressures are used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in the vessel wall and
the external pressure a similar compressive stress in the wall.
Pressure Weight Live Load

NP - No Pressure EW - Empty Weight WI - Wind
IP - Internal Pressure OW - Operating Weight EQ - Earthquake
EP - External Pressure HW - Hydrostatic Weight HI - Wind at Hydrostatic Weight
conditions
HP - Hydrostatic CW - Empty Weight No CA HE - Earthquake at Hydrostatic Weight
Pressure conditions
VF - Vortex Shedding Filled
VO - Vortex Shedding Operating
VE - Vortex Shedding Empty
WE - Wind Bending Empty New and
Cold
WF - Wind Bend Filled New and Cold
CW - Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
FS - Axial Stress, Seismic
PW - Axial Stress Wind
Nozzle Design Options are used to set the overall pressure requirements for the nozzles on
this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure - new and cold (MAP nc) case
in the nozzle checks. The Installation | Misc. Options option displays a screen to specify
where certain vessel details will be added - either at the fabrication shop or in the field. This data
is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and operating conditions.
Wind and earthquake information is entered on the Wind Data or Seismic Data tabs. PV Elite
generates live loads based on the criteria established by one of many standards, including the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the (Canadian)
National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads can also be
specified directly as a wind pressure profile. PV Elite references these codes for live loads only.
ASME Section VIII or PD:5500 rules apply for all other calculations. The screen below shows
the data required for the default codes. PV Elite uses these criteria to set the magnitude of the
live load and bending moment on each element of the vessel.
After the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for error
processing and analysis.

Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor creates an error message if you try to specify a nozzle 20 feet from the
bottom of a 10-foot shell element. However, not all data can be confirmed on input so a general
error processor is run prior to the analysis. This error processor can be run in a stand-alone from
the Analyze panel, Error Check Only (on page 192) .
In addition to the notes that are presented on the screen during error checking, these error
messages appear in the output report and are accessible through the output review processor.
As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst must use common sense to
insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D graphics as it reveals
obvious errors.
Modeling Basics
PV Elite breaks a vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads, shells, cones, body
flanges, and/or a skirt—and the components on these elements. Vessels are defined one
element to the next - from bottom to top for vertical vessels and from left to right for horizontal
vessels.
Before starting PV Elite, most users collect the necessary data for the vessel design or analysis.
Collecting data to define these elements before starting the program is not required but it will
make the most efficient use of the designer's time. Typical input items include actual or
proposed values for vessel material, inside diameter, operating temperatures and pressures,
wind and seismic site data, nozzle and ring location to name a few. If necessary, the input
processor can be terminated at any time and restarted later if any missing data need be
collected. With the program's graphic display of the vessel input, it is easy to recall the current
state of an unfinished model or identify where data is missing or incomplete.
1. Start PV Elite by clicking the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Start > All
Programs > Intergraph CAS > PV Elite > PV Elite.

PV Elite starts with a Vessel Input screen for the job called "Untitled."
Defining the Basic Vessel

You should build vertical vessels from bottom to top and horizontal vessels from left to right. It is
not necessary to build an entire vessel if only the thickness for pressure is needed. The Element
Data (the grid on the left side of the interface) must be specified before the first element can be
placed on the screen.
1. Start with the Inside Diameter, as both the Node Numbers and the Element Type are set
by using the Element toolbar.
2. After the Element Data is entered, elements are quickly assembled one after another by
clicking the Element toolbar and making any changes to the Element Data.
The complete vessel is created from the following elements (in their toolbar order):
 Shell
 Elliptical Head
 Torispherical Head
 Spherical Head
 Cone
 Welded Flat Head
 ANSI/Bolted Flange
 Skirt
If the vessel begins with a skirt element, it is a vertical vessel. Vertical vessels on legs and
horizontal vessels start with a head element.

If that first head element is improperly oriented for the vessel in mind (horizontal or
vertical), click Flip Element Orientation on the Home tab, Utility panel to correct the
orientation. Later, if heads, body flanges, or cone elements show incorrect orientation, click Flip
Element Orientation to fix the orientation.
After the second element is added, use the Flip Model Orientation on the Tools tab to flip
the entire model flip between horizontal and vertical.
From Nodes and To Nodes values are automatically assigned by the software; they start with
node 10 and are incremented by 10 throughout the model. The element data set at the
beginning of the session carries forward from one element to the next. Any data changes on the
last element carry forward onto any new elements that are added. The element data displayed
belongs to the highlighted element in the vessel image.
1. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and displayed element by clicking on the element
of interest.
Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to change an
item through several elements; for example, if the circumferential weld joint efficiency for the
skirt (from node 10 to 20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not changed to 1.0 on the bottom
head as it was created, this (incorrect) value is carried from one element to the next in the
Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (such as, From Node 50 and To Node 60). In
this situation, it is easiest to change the data on the bottom head element (20 to 30), and
then click Share to "share" this item through the elements in the list with From Node 30
through From Node 50. Certain data is automatically "shared". Inside diameter, for example
is automatically changed for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to the element where
the change occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immediately appear on the
vessel image.
2. To refresh the image, press F5.
Building a Heat Exchanger

This section provides the workflow of how to build a heat exchanger using PV Elite.
1. Launch PV Elite.
The General Input screen displays.
2. Select an ellipsoidal head by clicking Ellipse .
3. Click Flip Elements Orientation on the Home tab to build the heat exchanger in the
horizontal orientation.
4. Enter the information for the head exactly as shown below. Check your input before you
move on. Remember to click on the text in the left column and then start typing. The cursor
automatically moves to the right column for you to begin typing. Pressing [F1] displays the
corresponding help information for that input.

The screen should then look exactly like this when you are finished with your input.
5. When you are finished typing all the data, press Enter twice.
6. Click Cylinder to add a cylinder to the head.

The screen should then look exactly like this when you are finished with your input.
7. Click ANSI/Bolted Flange to add a body flange to the right hand end of the channel
shell.

8. After adding the flange, enter all the values exactly as shown below.
9. Select the Perform Flange Calculation check box.
The Flange dialog box displays.

You must correctly dimension the flange. To do this, change the flange as it appears to a 24
inch Class 150 flange, which will fit into the heat exchanger.

10. At the bottom of the new Flange dialog box you see a section that resembles this:
11. Select the Is this a Standard Flange (No Calculation performed)? check box.
12. Select 150 as the Class
13. Select 24 for the Nom.
14. Click Get Flange Dimensions now!.
The Flange screen is now set up for the 24 inch Class 150 dimensions and bolting.
15. Verify your screen looks like the following figure:
16. Click OK on the Flange Dialog.

17. Click Save to save your work. Use My First Model or something similar for the file
name.

18. Your model should look similar to this.
Up to this point, you have been using the normal PV Elite vessel building techniques for
non-heat exchanger pressure vessels. You are now ready to start modeling the heat exchanger
main elements, the tubesheets, tubes, and main shell that enclose the tube bundle.
1. Click Tubesheet Analysis .
The Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog displays.
You will now construct an ASME Section UHX exchanger, which requires a large amount of
input data.
2. Select Fixed for Tubesheet Analysis Method:
3. Select the Tubesheet Properties tab.

4. For Tubesheet Type, select b Fixed Tubesheet, shell integral, extended as flange.
5. Select Tubesheet Extended as Flange?

6. Select the Tube Data tab and enter the information as shown below.
7. Select the Load Cases tab and enter the pressures and temperatures for the heat
exchanger to complete the tube sheet and tubes data. You can enter multiple combinations
of pressures and temperatures for heat exchangers.
8. Click OK.
9. Near the bottom-center of the window, select the 3D View tab.

Look at the 3D model on your screen, and it should resemble this figure.
There are only two rows of tubes displayed. Because of the intensive nature of 3D
graphics it is impractical to show hundreds of tubes.
Notice that there is no cylindrical shell between the two tubesheets. PV Elite cannot perform
tubesheet analysis unless the shell is present because the thermal load from the shell is needed
to complete this analysis. You must add the shell between the tubesheets. Before you do this,
recall that that the tubes are 60 inches long in the Heat Exchanger dialog. This is the distance
between the tubesheets. So for a good match, the outer shell must also be 60 inches long.

1. Click Cylindrical to add a cylindrical shell to your model. This shell is 60 inches or 5 feet
long as discussed above. Verify your entries match those below:
2. Click Tubesheet Analysis again and go to the Tubesheet Type and Design Code tab.
3. Select the Main Shell check box, and then click OK.

4. All that remains is to add the body flange to the right end of the heat exchanger, then
another channel shell and the final right channel head. By doing so, your model should look
like this.
5. For the remaining steps, add other details to the elements using the commands on the
Detail toolbar. You can add details such as saddle supports, nozzles, and loads.
Analysis
PV Elite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The program
also provides direct design capabilities with which the wall thickness of individual elements is
increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure and longitudinal
stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program changes wall thickness
during the analysis is controlled through a Design/Analysis Constraint specification under
Design Modification. For more information see Design Constraints Tab (on page 299).
A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags under Design Modification are all
unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program automatically increases the wall
thickness until the constraint is satisfied. Your input in the resulting output report is automatically
updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addition to wall thickness, a fourth
flag can be set - Select Stiffener Rings for External Pressure. In this case, rather than
increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the external
pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings are added to
the model input for this analysis.
PV Elite analyzes each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal and
external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN-13445
rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to four categories of
vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel attachments or applied
loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake. These four categories are set
for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The sensible combination of
these various categories and conditions produce the default set of 19 load cases that are found
in the Design/Analysis Constraints processor. For each load case, PV Elite will calculate the
maximum longitudinal stress around the circumference of the elements and compare these
values to the allowable stress for the material, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the

vessel wall exceed the design limits, PV Elite will proceed according to the design modification
settings in the input.
After the software finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program design
modifications. If PVElite changed any data, then the program automatically re-runs the complete
analysis to review the impact of the changes.
There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These controls,
however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job. Instead, these
seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the Data sub-directory.
These controls are viewed and modified on the Tools tab, Set Configuration Parameters ,
for more information, see Configuration (on page 196).
Performing the Analysis

In the Analyze panel on the Home tab, are two options: Error Check Only and Analyze
. Use the Error Check Only option immediately after any questionable data is entered.
Analyze automatically performs an error check before the analysis starts. Comments from an
error check can be examined using Review Reports (on page 192) .
Errors must be corrected before the analysis can proceed.
As the analysis proceeds, PV Elite displays the step or component being analyzed. If any
Design Modification (Design Constraints Tab) (on page 305) were set, PV Elite resets the
thickness to the necessary value and exports these increased thicknesses to all output reports
and in all other calculations. For example, if the user-entered wall thickness of 1/2 inch is
insufficient for the load and the design flag is enabled, the program will calculate the required
thickness (for example, 5/8 inch) and replace the user-entered input value (1/2) in the output
report with the calculated required thickness (here, 5/8). The program does not change the
original model data. PV Elite checks the element wall thicknesses for the various pressure cases
(internal, external, and hydrostatic) and then assemble the axial and bending loads to construct
each load case defined in the Global Design data. PV Elite also calculates the longitudinal
stress on both sides of the vessel (for example, both windward and leeward for loads with wind)
and compare the calculated stresses with the allowable stresses, both tensile and compressive.
PV Elite displays the windward or leeward side stress, which is closest by ratio to the allowable
limit, again either tension or compression.
After the analysis is complete, the Review Reports (on page 192) processor displays the results
of the analysis on the screen.
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details

At this point in the analysis the vessel details have been defined only so that their weights could
be included in vessel calculations. With the structural analysis of the vessel complete and the
wall thickness set, vessel details can be evaluated.

To access the input processor for these vessel details, click Component Analysis on the
Home tab. This activates CodeCalc. The component selection is available on the Home tab.
WRC 107/537 Input Screen

WRC 107/537 Results
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details

PV Elite provides for the analysis of a variety of vessel components that are not included in the
overall vessel analysis: Appendix Y Flanges, Floating Heads, Lifting Lug, Pipe & Pad, WRC
107/537 and 297, Thin Joints, Thick Joints, ASME Tubesheets, TEMA Tubesheets, Halfpipe
Jackets, Large Openings, and Rectangular Vessels.
To access the input processor for these vessel details, click Component Analysis on the
Home tab. This activates CodeCalc. The component selection is available on the Home tab.

Output Review and Report Generation

Output from PV Elite analysis is stored in a binary data file that has the same name as the input
file but with a ".T80" extension. Use Review Reports (on page 192) to review every report
contained in the output from input echo through stress reports.
Select the report to view from the Report List. Reports can be reviewed on the screen, sent to a
printer, or sent to a file for review later.
Each analysis module creates its own report in the output data file. Most of the reports take the
form of tables with the rows related to the elements and the columns holding the values such as
thickness, MAWP, and stress.
These are some reports available from PV Elite. Depending on the type, position, geometry and
configuration settings the list of reports will vary.
Step 0 Vessel Element Error Checking
Cover Cover Sheet
Title Title Page
Step 1 Vessel Input Echo
Step 2 XY Coordinate Calculations
Step 3 Internal Pressure Calculations
Step 4 External Pressure Calculations

Step 5 Weight of Elements & Details

Step 6 ANSI Flange MAWP
Step 7 Natural Frequency Calculations
Step 8 Forces & Moments Applied to Vessel
Step 9 Wind Load Calculation
Step 10 Earthquake Load Calculation
Step 11 Wind and Earthquake Shear, Bending
Step 12 Wind Deflection
Step 13 Longitudinal Stress Constants
Step 14 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses
Step 15 Longitudinal Stresses Due to Load Components
Step 16 Stress Due to Combined Loads
Step 17 Basering Calculations
Step 18 Center of Gravity Calculation
Cone 1-N Conical Sections
Nozl 1-N Nozzle Calculations
Step 20 Nozzle Schedule
Step 21 Nozzle Summary
Step 22 Vessel Design Summary

Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image

At any point during the input process, a standard PCX file with the vessel image is available.
This file can then be incorporated into reports or printed directly (on all printers) through most
Microsoft Windows™ packages with graphics capabilities (such as Microsoft Word™ or
Paintbrush™). The 3D graphic can also be plotted. Click on the background of the 3D View tab
before pressing the print button.

The vessel graphic may also be sent directly to the printer using File > Preview/Print .
DXF File Generation Option

PV Elite can write out Data Interchange Files (3 all together) using File > Import/Export >
Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File. This DXF file is a text file that contains commands
for generating a 2D CAD drawing of the vessel that is on a one to one scale. The border and
text are scaled by the diameter conversion constant and the scale factor generated by the
program or defined by you. Many popular drawing programs such as AutoCad ® and
MicroStation ® can read and process these files. The DXF files produced by PV Elite are
release 12 compatible. Any version of AutoCad including release 12 and after should be able to
read the DXF file.
Three files are produced: the vessel drawing, the nozzle schedule, and the Bill of Material. The
files are written in the folder where the input file for the vessel file is located. These files are
written at the end of the program's calculation execution. Nearly every individual has his/her own
way of drafting. A conscious effort was made not to be too specific. This approach allows the
drafter to take the vessel drawing file and edit it as necessary.

SECTION 5
File Tab
Controls general operations of PV Elite files.
Open - Opens an existing .pvi file. For more information, see Open (on
page 57).
Recent - Displays recently-opened files and folder. Select a file to open.
Save - Saves the open .pvi file. For more information, see Save (on page
58).
Save As - Saves the open .pvi file with a new name. For more information,
see Save As (on page 58).
Import/Export - Exports the open .pvi file to a .pcx or .dxf file. For more
information, see Export (see "Import/Export" on page 58).
Print Setup - Selects a printer and printer options. For more information,
see Print Setup (on page 58).
Preview/Print - Prints the graphics in the open file. For more information,
see Print (see "Preview/Print" on page 58).
Help - Displays help, getting started, contact information, and version
number for PV Elite.
System Folder - Opens the System folder in Windows Explorer.
Exit - Closes the software.
Open
File tab: Open
Activates the Open dialog box from which you can open a previously saved PV Elite file for
editing. You can also open one of the many example files delivered with PV Elite.
Open is also available on the quick access toolbar in the top-left corner of the PV Elite window.

File Tab
Save
File tab: Save
Saves the PV Elite file that you have open. When you save a file for the first time, the Save As
dialog box appears so that you can name the file and select a folder location.
Save is also available on the quick access toolbar in the top-left corner of the PV Elite window.
Save As
File tab: Save As
Saves the open file with a different name or to a different folder location.
Import/Export
File tab: Import/Export
Select one of the following:
 Import a HTRI Model - This command is not available at this time.
 Import a Project Template - Imports a PV Elite project template into the current file.
 Export Vessel Picture to PCX File - Sends the vessel graphics to a .PCX file. This file can
be printed at a later date or added to other documents. The .PCX file is created in the same
folder and with the same name as the .PVI file.
 Export Screen to PCX File - Sends a snapshot of the entire screen to a .PCX file. The
.PCX file is created in the same folder and with the same name as the .PVI file.
 Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File - Exports the vessel to a DXF file. For more
information, see Export to DXF File (see "Setting Up the Required Parameters" on page
190).
Print Setup
File tab: Print Setup
Selects a printer and defines printer options in the Print Setup dialog box.
Preview/Print
File tab: Preview/Print
Prints the model to a printer or to PDF file. Options are available for print range, number of
copies, and other printing characteristics.
You must have access to a printer, either locally or over your network, before you can
use this command.

File Tab
Exit
File tab: Exit
Closes the open file and exits the software. If you have changed data since the file was last
saved, or if you have not saved a new file, the Save As dialog box appears and the software
prompts you to save your changes.

File Tab

SECTION 6
Home Tab
The Home tab contains the most common commands that you use in PV Elite.
Panel Description
File Provides file management commands, such as Open, Save,
and Print. For more information, see File Panel (on page 61).
Elements Provides commands for elements used to create a vessel, such
as cylinders, spheres, and cones. For more information, see
Elements Panel (on page 62).
Details Provides commands to add details to a vessel element, such as
stiffeners, nozzles, forces, moments, lining, half-pipe jackets,
and tubesheets. For more information, see Details Panel (on
page 63).
Input/Output Provides commands to add load and restraint information. For
more information, see Input/Output Panel (on page 186).
Utilities Provides miscellaneous element commands, for functions such
as insert, delete, update, share, and flip. For more information,
see Utilities Panel (on page 187).
Auxiliary Provides miscellaneous model commands for functions such as
manipulating of the model, creating drawings, and viewing
properties. For more information, see Auxiliary Panel (on page
188).
Analyze Provides commands for analyzing the model. For more
information, see Analyze Panel (on page 191).
Units/Code Provides commands for changing units and the design code. For
more information, see Units/Code Panel (on page 193).
File Panel
The following commands are available on the File panel on the Home tab.
New - Creates a new .pvi file. For more information, see New (on
page 62).
Open - Opens an existing .pvi file. The Open command is also
available on the Quick Access bar at the top. For more information,
see Open (on page 57).

Home Tab
Save - Saves the open .pvi file. The Save command is also available
on the Quick Access bar at the top. For more information, see Save
(on page 58).
New
Home tab: File > New
Creates a new PV Elite input file (.pvi). You can also press Ctrl+N on the keyboard to create a
new input file.
You can select a specification (ASME Section VIII-Division 1, ASME Section VIII-Division 2,
British Standard PD:5500, or EN-13445) or just create an empty .pvi file.
Elements Panel
Provides commands for elements used to create a vessel, such as cylinders, spheres, and
cones. The Elements panel is available on the Home tab.
Cylinder - Cylindrical shell

Ellipse - Elliptical head
Torisphere - Torispherical head
Sphere - Spherical head or shell
Cone - Conical head or shell segment
Welded Flat Head - Places a welded flat
head.
ANSI/Bolted Flange - Bolted body flange
Skirt - Skirt support with base ring
The software does not require the complete construction of a vessel for analysis. Individual
elements or groups of elements may be defined and partially analyzed. Only complete vessels
with proper supports can be analyzed for dead weight and live loads.
All elements, except Skirt, can be used to create either horizontal or vertical vessels.
 Models for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top.
 Models for horizontal vessels are built from left to right.
The vessel orientation is established with the first element. If starting with a skirt, it is a vertical
vessel. If starting with a head, the head can be flipped between a bottom head (vertical vessel)
and a left head (horizontal vessel) by clicking Flip Orientation on the Utilities panel. After
the second element is added to the model, the orientation is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel
supports that are modeled as elements. Other supports, such as legs and lugs for vertical
vessels and saddles, are modeled as details on the elements. For more information, see Details
Panel (on page 63).

Home Tab
Details Panel
Details can only be specified on the currently selected element (see Elements Panel (on page
62) for more information on placing elements). Details, such as nozzles, insulation, operating
fluid, platforms and the like, define the vessel's weight information for load calculations. These
commands are available on the Details panel of the Home tab.
Stiffening Ring - Add stiffening rings on the selected cylinder element.

For more information, see Stiffening Ring (on page 67).
Nozzle - Add nozzles on the selected cylinder or head element. For more
information, see Nozzle (on page 70).
Weight - Add piping and miscellaneous weight added to the selected
cylinder or head element. For more information, see Weight (on page 96).
Force and Moment - Add external forces and moments to the selected
cylinder or head element. For more information, see Force and Moment
(on page 99).
Platform - Add a platform to the selected element. For more information,
see Platform (on page 100).
Packing - Add packing to the selected element. For more information, see
Packing (on page 102).
Saddle - Add saddles to the selected horizontal cylinder element. For
more information, see Saddle (on page 104).
Tray - Add a set of equally spaced trays to the selected vertical cylinder
element. For more information, see Tray (on page 111).
Lug - Add support lugs to the selected vertical cylinder element. For more
information, see Lug (on page 111).
Legs - Add support legs to the selected vertical cylinder element. For more
information, see Legs (on page 114).
Liquid - Add liquid data to the selected element. For more information, see
Liquid (on page 120).
Insulation - Add insulation to the selected element. For more information,
see Insulation (on page 122).
Lining - Add lining to the selected element. For more information, see
Lining (on page 123).
Halfpipe Jacket - Add half pipe jackets to the selected cylinder element.
For more information, see Halfpipe Jacket (on page 124).
Tubesheet - Add a tubesheet to the selected element. For more
information, see Tubesheet (on page 127).
Generic Clip - Add a clip to the selected element. For more information,
see Generic Clip (on page 165).

Home Tab
Lifting Lug Data - Add lugs to the selected element. For more information,
see Lifting Lug Data (on page 168).
ASME Appendix 9 Jacket - Add a jacket to the selected element. For
more information, see ASME Appendix 9 Jacket (on page 172).
API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis - Add a flaw to the selected
element. For more information, see API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis
(on page 181).
Add a Detail
Details are assigned to elements using the commands on the Details panel on the Home tab.
1. Select an element in the graphics view.
2. Click the command on the Details panel on the Home tab.
The dialog box for the command displays.
3. Enter the needed information, and click OK.
The detail is added to the element and displays in the graphics view.

Home Tab
Modify a Detail
To modify one or more existing details:
1. In the graphic view, click the element having the existing detail that you want to modify.
2. Click the corresponding command on the Details panel.
The dialog box for the command displays.
3. If there is only one detail, make the needed changes, and click OK.
4. If there is more than one detail, click Previous or Go To Next to modify the needed detail.
In the graphic view, you can also right-click a detail on the selected element to open the
dialog box for that detail.
Common Detail Parameters

The following fields appear in the dialog box for most details.
From Node - Displays the From Node for the selected element. The From Node is the
software-generated node number describing the starting location of the element. The value
cannot be modified.
Distance from "From" Node - Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to
the detail at the following locations:
Detail Location
Stiffening Ring Centerline of the first ring.
Nozzle Centerline of the nozzle.
If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the head
centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.
Weight Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment Point at which the force or moment acts.
Platform Bottom of the platform.
Packing Start of the packed section.

Home Tab
Detail Location
Saddle Vertical centerline of the saddle.
Tray Bottom of the lowest tray.
Lug Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs Centroid of the leg attachment weld.
The software uses the value of Overall Length of Legs when
performing AISC unity checks.
Liquid Start of the liquid section.
Insulation Start of the insulated section.
Lining Start of the lined section.
Halfpipe Jacket The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this
element. This value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket
Section, is used to determine the weight of the jacket.

Home Tab
Detail Location
Tubesheet The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.
Generic Clip Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the
base of the lug + 1/2 the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug.
If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance from the left end or tangent
of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.
Appendix 9 Jacket Bottom of the jacket.
Detail Description - Enter an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique
value compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when 10 is
the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.
Stiffening Ring
Home tab: Details > Stiffening Ring
Adds one or more stiffening rings to the selected cylinder element.
As stiffening ring data is entered, the software automatically calculates the required inertias,
except when the ring is at a cone-to-cylinder junction. For bar rings, the software sizes a new
ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the element value entered for Bar
thickness to use when designing new rings on the Equipment Installation and
Miscellaneous Options Dialog Box of the Load Cases tab.
The maximum length between stiffeners is shown on the Status Bar (on page 34) as
Slen. When >>> displays, the element does not require a reinforcing ring for external pressure
purposes.
Previous Ring - If you created more than one ring on the element, click to go back to the
previous ring.
Go To Next Ring - If you created more than one ring on the element, click to go to the next ring.
Add New Ring - Click to add a new ring to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current ring.
Common Detail Parameters (on page 65)
Ring Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of
the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows a material to

Home Tab
be selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To modify the
material properties of the selected element, click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box
(on page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element for this analysis. It does not
modify the database.
Ring Location - Select the location of the ring. Select ID if the ring is on the inside diameter of
the cylinder. Select OD if the ring is on the outside diameter of the cylinder. OD is the most
common selection.
Ring Type - Select Bar Type for a flat bar stiffener ring. Select Section Type for a more
complex structural cross-section.
For Bar Type, click Check "Standard" Bars. The Bar Selection dialog box displays, where
you select the flat bar size, and enter values for Axial Thickness and Radial Width. Bar type
stiffeners have a simple rectangular cross section and the software calculates the ring properties
based on the width and thickness of the ring. Most stiffeners are bar type.
For Section Type, select a standard cross-section in Choose a Section or click Section
Calculator to create a custom fabricated section. You need the following properties for the
section: Moment of Inertia, Cross Sectional Area, and Distance to Ring Centroid. The
software provides these values for standard cross-sections. You must enter the values for a
custom section, as defined in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually equal to
the outside diameter of the vessel shell (when OD is selected for Ring Location), except for the
less common case of a stiffening ring on the inside of the vessel (when ID is selected for Ring
Location).This value is used both to calculate the weight of the ring and the stiffness of the ring
for external pressure purposes. This entry is only available when Bar Type is selected for Ring
Type.
Thickness - Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring. This value is used to calculate the
weight of the ring and the stiffness of the ring for external pressure purposes. This entry is only
available when Bar Type is selected for Ring Type.
Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually
greater than the outside diameter of the vessel shell (when OD is selected for Ring Location),
except for the less common case of a stiffening ring on the inside of the vessel (when ID is
selected for Ring Location).This value is used to calculate both the weight of the ring and the
stiffness of the ring for external pressure purposes. This entry is only available when Bar Type
is selected for Ring Type.
Structural Database - Select the structural specification database to use for cross-sections.
This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring Type.
Moment of Inertia - Displays the moment of inertia of the stiffening ring about its neutral axis
from the specification selected for Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for
Choose a Section. If you created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a value
according to the selected specification. The software uses this value to determine the adequacy
of the ring for external pressure calculations, and for conical calculations according to Appendix
1 of the ASME Code. This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring Type.
Cross Sectional Area - Displays the cross sectional area of the stiffening ring from the
specification selected for Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for Choose
a Section. If you created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a value according to
the selected specification. This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring
Type.
Distance to Ring Centroid - Displays the distance from the surface of the shell to the ring
centroid from the specification selected for Structural Database, when a standard section is
selected for Choose a Section. If you created a custom section using Section Calculator,

Home Tab
enter a value according to the selected specification. This entry is only available when Section
Type is selected for Ring Type.
Section Ring Height - Displays the depth of the cross-section from the specification selected
for Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for Choose a Section. If you
created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a value according to the selected
specification. This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring Type.
Section Name - Displays the section name from the specification selected for Structural
Database, when a standard section is selected for Choose a Section. If you created a custom
section using Section Calculator, enter a name. This entry is only available when Section
Type is selected for Ring Type.
Choose a Section - Select a section type and a section size:
I - Beam
W Section
Channel
WT Section
MT Section
ST Section
(strong axis out)
Angle
(weak axis out)
Angle
(strong axis out)
Double Angle
(weak axis out)
Double Angle
(strong axis out)
WT Section
MT Section
ST Section
(weak axis out)
Ring Fillet Weld Leg Size - Enter the size of the leg of the ring fillet weld.
Ring Attachment Style - Select the type of fillet weld. Select Intermittent, Continuous, or
Both.
Number of Rings to Add - Enter the number of rings to place on the cylinder element.

Home Tab
Ring Spacing - Enter the ring spacing. The first ring is placed at the distance entered for
Distance from "From" Node. The rest of the rings are placed after the first ring by the Ring
Spacing increment. If you are adding one ring, a value is not needed.
Cone to Shell Junction Ring? - Select to attach the ring at the junction of the cone and
cylinder elements. In this case, the software does not design the ring for external pressure
considerations, but considers it for junction reinforcement according to App. 1-5 and 1-8 (Div. 1)
or AD 360.3 (Div. 2).
Nozzle
Home tab: Details > Nozzle
Adds a nozzle to the selected cylinder or head element. Nozzles add to the total dead weight of
the vessel and are used to evaluate the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of the
vessel and flange.
Previous Nozzle - If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go back to the
previous nozzle.
Go To Next Nozzle - If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go to the next
nozzle.
Add New Nozzle - Click to add a new nozzle to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current nozzle.
Plot - Click to open the Nozzle Graphics dialog box. A cross-section view of the nozzle design
is shown.

Home Tab
Topics
Nozzle Main Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box) ................... 71
Local Stress Analysis (WRC 107, 297 or Annex G) Tab (Nozzle
Input/Analysis Dialog Box) ............................................................. 90
Nozzle Main Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box)

Defines physical and weld parameters for the nozzle.
Previous Nozzle - If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go back to the
previous nozzle.
Go To Next Nozzle - If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go to the next
nozzle.
Add New Nozzle - Click to add a new nozzle to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current nozzle.
Plot - Click to open the Nozzle Graphics dialog box. A cross-section view of the nozzle design
is shown.
Nozzle Attachment - Select the type of nozzle:
Inserted nozzle with reinforcing pad
Inserted nozzle without reinforcing pad
Abutting nozzle with reinforcing pad
Abutting nozzle without reinforcing pad
Heavy Barrel Type, HB
Type “F” connection
FVC Catalog - Select FVC Catalogue to select a nozzle from the Forged Vessel Connections
catalog. For more information about FVC, see http://www.forgedvesselconn.com/
(http://www.forgedvesselconn.com/).
 Nominal Diameter - Select the nominal diameter that you need.
 Flange Class - Select the pressure rating that you need.
 Connection Type - Select the connection type that you need.
 Overall Length Oal - Enter the length that you need from the surface of the vessel to the
flange face.
 Nozzle does not have a "Nut Relief" - Select if the nozzle does not have a nut relief.
 Select Now - Loads the FVC nozzle data from the catalog into the main Nozzle Input dialog
box.
Coupling Lookup - Select Coupling Lookup to find coupling properties for the nozzle. Select
the pressure rating and the diameter, and then click Select Now.
Just like - Select to place another nozzle just like an existing nozzle.

Home Tab
Nozzle Description - Enter an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique
When using ASME VIII - 1, a special directive is available for small nozzles. If the text
directive #SN is placed anywhere in the description, the software calculates the areas and
MAWP of this nozzle connection. This directive overrides the global directive set in Tools >
Configuration. It may be necessary to use this directive when required by UG-36. This
paragraph in the code defines a small nozzle.
Nozzle Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most
of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows a material
to be selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To modify the
Schedule - Specify the thickness of the nozzle by selecting the schedule of the nozzle neck
pipe. Acceptable schedules are:
SCH 5S SCH 30
SCH 10 SCH 40
SCH 10S SCH 40S
SCH 20 SCH 60
SCH 30 SCH 80
SCH 40 SCH 80S
SCH 40S SCH 100
SCH 60 SCH 120
SCH 80 SCH 140
SCH 5S SCH 160
SCH 10 SCH STD
SCH 10S SCH X-STG
SCH 20 SCH XX-STG
 DIN schedules are also available.

 All schedules of pipe might not have a corresponding diameter associated. In this case, the
software displays an error stating the thickness of the nozzle was not found.
Diameter - Enter the actual diameter of the nozzle when Actual is selected for Thickness
Basis. Enter the nominal diameter, or click to select a diameter when Nominal or Minimum
is selected for Thickness Basis. Values are given in English units and must be multiplied by the
diameter conversion constant so that the software arrives at the correct diameter when it
calculates the English value of the diameter. Valid English-unit nominal diameters range from
0.125 to 30.0 inches.
Dia. Basis - Select the type of diameter to use for the element. Select ID for the inside diameter.
Select OD for the outside diameter. ID and OD are available for ASME Division 1. Only OD is
available for ASME VIII-1.
The ASME code provides different equations for required thickness based on whether the
geometry is specified on ID or OD. By using the ID basis, the software computes a thinner
required thickness, Tr, for the nozzle, such as in high-pressure, thick-wall geometries.

Home Tab
Thickness Basis - Select the thickness basis:

 Actual - The software uses the actual values entered for Diameter and Actual Thk. Select
this value if the nozzle is fabricated from plate.
 Nominal - The software uses Diameter as the nominal diameter and looks up the actual
diameter. The software also looks up the nominal thickness based on the selection for
Schedule.
 Minimum - The software uses Diameter as the nominal diameter and looks up the actual
diameter. The software also looks up the nominal thickness based on the selection for
Schedule. It then multiplies the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Total CA. - Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts both the actual thickness and
the inside diameter for the corrosion allowance. For ASME VIII-1, if the nozzle has an external
corrosion allowance, add the external corrosion allowance to the internal corrosion allowance
and enter the total value.
Actual Thk - If you selected Actual for Thickness Basis, enter the minimum actual thickness
of the nozzle wall.
Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab) (on page 73)
Pad or Hub Properties (Nozzle Main Tab) (on page 80)
Additional Weld Data (Nozzle Main Tab) (on page 82)
Miscellaneous (Nozzle Main Tab) (on page 83)
Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab)

Defines orientation parameters for the nozzle.
Is this nozzle connected to another nozzle? - Select this option if the nozzle is connected to
another nozzle.
Parent Nozzle - Select the parent nozzle for this nozzle.
Offset Dimension L - Enter the axial distance from the From Node to the centerline of the
nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the head centerline. This
dimension should always be entered if it is not zero. This option is similar to Distance from
"From" Node and is available when the nozzle is on a head element.
Distance from Shell Surface - Enter the axial distance from the From Node to the centerline of
the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the head centerline.
This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero. This option is similar to Distance from
"From" Node and is available when Is this nozzle connected to another nozzle? is selected.
Layout - Click to open the Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box (on page 78) and set
the nozzle orientation independent of the coordinate system of the model.
Layout Angle
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel drawing
and the centerline of the nozzle at the point where it is attached to the shell.

Home Tab
For a horizontal vessel, the zero degree line is at 12:00 (looking at a clock); 90 degrees is at
3:00. Entering these layout angles is important if the horizontal vessel has a liquid level and the
nozzles are being designed using Design P + Static Head, selected for Nozzle/Clip Design
Pressure Options on the Load Cases tab.
For a vertical vessel, the angle is more arbitrary. For purposes of rendering the graphics, the
assumption is that the zero degree line is at 3:00 and 90 degrees is 12:00.
The position of the zero degree reference direction (North, West or East) and the angular
rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) are set in Tools > Configuration on the Set Default
Values tab:
If the new orientation is different from the orientation of the current model, the software asks to
update the model with the new settings. If the settings are updated, the weights and areas of
platforms must be recalculated:
 Click List Dialog (on page 189) . On the Detail Listing dialog box, click the Platform
tab so that platform data is visible. Click Platform Wind Area and Platform Weight to
recalculate.
 Click Platform Input for each platform. Tab through the fields in the Platform dialog
box, causing the weight and area to be recalculated
The angular settings apply to nozzles, clips, legs, lifting lugs, support lugs, baserings,
platforms, weights and half-pipe jackets.
Examples
Default Orientation

Home Tab
Angle Position: North

Rotation Direction: Clockwise
Radial Nozzle - Select to specify a radial nozzle.
Angle or Lateral Nozzle - Select to specify an angled or lateral nozzle. Also enter a value for
Centerline Tilt Angle, and — if needed — for Cyl./Cone Offset Dimension L.
Centerline Tilt Angle
Enter the angle for a non-radial nozzle when Angle or Lateral Nozzle is selected.

Home Tab
Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and nozzle
centerlines and the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle can vary
from 0 to a limiting value depending upon specific geometry. For nozzles on top heads, this
value will generally range between 0 and 90 degrees. On bottom heads, this value would be
between 90 and 180 degrees:
The input specification for non-radial and non-hillside nozzles changed starting with
version 2008. The angle is measured between the centerline of the nozzle and the centerline of
the vessel. This value can be determined from an electronic drawing of the model.
Cyl./Cone Offset Dimension L

Enter an offset dimension from the vessel centerline for hillside nozzles (neither Radial Nozzle
or Centerline Tilt Angle are selected) and angled nozzles (Centerline Tilt Angle is selected).
Hillside nozzles and some tilted nozzles are subject to calculations to meet ASME area
requirements in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases, the software automatically checks
area requirements in both planes using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle opening. For
integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 is automatically applied in the hillside
direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 is used. The F factor is used to
account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one-half of the hoop stress. The use of the F
factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and conical sections under internal pressure.

Home Tab
Projection Outside - Enter the nozzle projection distance outward from the surface of the
vessel. The distance is usually to the attached flange or cover. This length is used for weight
calculations and for external pressure calculations.
Projection Inside - Enter the nozzle projection distance into the vessel. The software uses the
least of Projection Inside and Limits (Thickness) with no pad to calculate the area available in
the inward nozzle. Therefore, you may safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches
if the nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
For some nozzle types such as those shown in ASME VIII-1 UW-16.1 sketch K, the inside
projection is the distance from the inside surface of the vessel to the inside edge of the nozzle.
This distance must be less than the shell thickness.
Limits (Diameter) - Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle
reinforcement. For example:
 Where two nozzles are close together and the reinforcements overlap.
 A vessel seam for which you do not want to take an available area reduction.
Limits (Thickness) - Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle
reinforcement. For example, where a studding pad or nozzle stub do not extend normal to the
vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.
Overriding Weight - Enter a weight if the nozzle is significantly different from a standard weight
nozzle. The weight overrides the software-calculated weight that is based on other entered
values and internal tables of typical weights.

Home Tab
Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box

Provides an alternative and more versatile method of nozzle orientation. You are not confined to
having nozzles point in the directions of the coordinate system axes of the model. For example,
when using the standard parameters (such as Offset Dimension L and Layout Angle) on the
Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog box, hillside nozzles may only point in the X, Y and Z directions:
When using the Layout command and the Nozzle Layout and Placement dialog box, a hillside
nozzle can point in any direction by using Reference Angle alpha instead of Layout Angle:
Nozzle Style - Select a nozzle orientation style:
Nozzle Style Cylinder Element Head Element

Radial Nozzle

Home Tab
Hillside Nozzle
Lateral Nozzle
Reference Angle alpha - Enter the angle of the line to use as reference for Nozzle Offset
Dimension L.
Nozzle Offset Dimension L - Enter the distance from the reference line to the centerline of the
nozzle. This option is not available for a radial or lateral nozzle.
Nozzle "X" Dimension and Nozzle "Y" Dimension - For nozzles on heads, enter values for
Nozzle "X" Dimension and Nozzle "Y" Dimension to calculate Reference Angle alpha and
Nozzle Offset Dimension L from the X-Y coordinate location. Nozzle locations on heads are
often given in the X-Y coordinate system.

Home Tab
Projection Dimension "Proj" - For a radial or hillside nozzle, enter the projection from the
centerline of the cylinder to the end of the nozzle. The software calculates the projection ho.
For a nozzle on a cylinder:
For a nozzle on a head:
Hillside Nozzles
Hillside nozzles in heads are often arranged with flange faces level in the same plane. Due to
the curvature of the head, each nozzle has a different value for outside projection ho:
Because the value of Projection Dimension "Proj" is the same for each nozzle, this
arrangement is simple.
Click OK to save parameter values and return to the Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog box
with new orientation values displayed.
Pad or Hub Properties (Nozzle Main Tab)

Pad Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of
Pad Diameter / Width - Enter the diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is the length
along the vessel shell, not the projected diameter around the nozzle.

Home Tab
Alternatively, you can enter in the width of the pad. The software then calculates the pad
diameter.
Pad Thickness - Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should
be taken into account for the pad thickness.
Groove Weld Depth - Enter the total depth of the groove weld between the pad and the nozzle
neck. Most groove welds are full penetration welds. The depth of the weld is the same as the
thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, enter the depth of the
partial penetration. If the pad is attached with a fillet weld, enter zero.
Weld Leg at Pad OD - Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad outside
diameter and the shell. If any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, only the part of the
weld inside the diameter limit is included in the available area.
For VIII-1 split pads, multiply A5 by 0.75 per UG-37(h) -

Home Tab
Hub Thickness - Enter the thickness of the thicker part of the nozzle at the base. This value is
equal to (Nozzle OD at the base - Nozzle ID at the base)/2.
Hub Height - Enter the hub height. This value is equal to (overall length - nut relief height -
flange thickness - raised face dimension).
Bevel Height - Enter the bevel height.
Obtain ASME Bevel Angle - Obtain the ASME bevel Angle.
Additional Weld Data (Nozzle Main Tab)

Nozzle to Pad/Shell Outside Fillet Weld Leg - Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld
between the nozzle and the pad or the nozzle and the outside shell.
Nozzle to Shell Inside Fillet Weld Leg - Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the
inward nozzle and the inside shell.
Nozzle to Shell Groove Weld Depth - Enter the total depth of the groove weld between the
nozzle and the vessel. Most groove welds are full penetration welds. The depth of the weld is
the same as the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, enter
the depth of the partial penetration. If the pad is attached with a fillet weld, enter zero.
ASME VIII-1 Weld Type - Select an ASME VIII Division 1 weld type:
A, B, C, D, E, F-1, F-2, F-3, F-4, G, X-1, Y-1, Z-1 - For these weld detail sketches, according to
UW-16.1, the software does not perform the weld strength calculation. In these cases, the

Home Tab
code does not require weld strength/path calculations for full penetration groove welds for
pressure loadings.
I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 - For these weld types, the software performs the additional weld size
calculations according to UW-16(d)(1).
None - The software performs the calculation regardless of the type of weld.
Some sketches such as UW-16.1 (K) or UG-40 (n) show that the nozzle does not completely
extend to the inner surface of the shell. If this is the appropriate sketch, please be sure to enter
the inside projection correctly.
 Some sketches, such as UW-16.1 (K) or UG-40 (n), show that the nozzle does not
completely extend to the inner surface of the shell. In these cases, be sure to enter the
correct value for Projection Inside.
 This entry only available when ASME Section VIII-Division 1 is selected for File > New (on
page 62).
Miscellaneous (Nozzle Main Tab)

Select how the area contributed by the shell or nozzle is handled. Some vessel design
specifications mandate that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the shell or nozzle.
 A1 - Exclude the available area in the vessel wall.
 A2 - Exclude available area in the nozzle wall.
 A1 A2 - Exclude the available areas in both the vessel and nozzle walls.
 ACWLD - Exclude the available area in the cover weld.
 None - Include all areas.
Flange Class - Select the pressure rating class for the ANSI B16.5 or DIN flange, based on the
pressure rating class for the attached nozzle. Select 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500, NP6,
NP10, NP24, NP40, NP63, NP100, or None.
Flange Grade
Select the flange material grade (group). Please note that there are certain advisories on the
use of certain material grades. Please review those cautionary notes in the ANSI B16.5 code.
ASME B16.5-2003 and ASME B16.5-1996 flange grades are available:
Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-2003)

Material Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates
Group
1.1
C-Si A 105 A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2 A 516 Gr. 70
A 537 Cl. 1
C-Mn-Si-V A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1
3½ Ni A 350 Gr. LF3
1.2 C-Mn-Si A 316 Gr. WCC

A 352 Gr. LCC
2½Ni A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. B
3½Ni A 352 Gr. LC3 A 203 Gr. E

Home Tab

Group
1.3 C-Si A 352 Gr. LCB A 515 Gr. 65
C-Mn-Si A 516 Gr. 65
2 ½Ni A 203 Gr. A
3 ½Ni A 203 Gr. D
C-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC1
A 352 Gr. LC1
1.4 C-Si A 515 Gr. 60

C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 516 Gr. 60
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 204 Gr. A

A 204 Gr. B
1.7 ½C-½Mo A 182 Gr. F2

Ni-½Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC4
¾Ni-¾Cr-1Mo A 217 Gr. WC5
1.9 1¼Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC6

1¼Cr-½Mo-Si A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2
1.10 2¼Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2
1.11 Cr-½Mo A 204 Gr. C
1.13 5Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. C5

A 182 Gr. F5a
1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12
1.15 9Cr-1Mo-V A 182 Gr. F91 A 217 Gr. C12A A 387 Gr. 91 Cl.2
1.17 1Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2
5Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F5
2.1 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304 A 351 Gr. CF3 A 240 Gr. 304
A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8 A 240 Gr. 304H
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316 A 351 Gr. CF3M
2.2 A 240 Gr. 316
A 182 Gr. F316H A 351 Gr. CF8M
A 240 Gr. 316H
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 182 Gr. F317
A 240 Gr. 317
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M
2.3 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L A 240 Gr. 304L
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316L A 240 Gr. 316L
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 182 Gr. F321 A 240 Gr. 321
A 182 Gr. F321H A 240 Gr. 321H
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F347 A 240 Gr. 347

A 182 Gr. F347H A 240 Gr. 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr. 348H
2.6 23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309H
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 240 Gr. 310H
2.8 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo A 182 Gr. F44 A 351 Gr. CK3McuN A 240 Gr. S31254
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N A 182 Gr. F51 A 240 Gr. S31803
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V A 351 Gr. CE8MN
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W A 240 Gr. S32760
2.9 23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309S

25Cr-20Ni A 240 Gr. 310S

Home Tab

Group
2.10 25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8
A 351 Gr. CH20
2.11 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 351 Gr. CF8C
2.12 25Cr-20Ni A 351 Gr. CK20

3.1 35Ni-35Fe-10Cr-Cb B 462 Gr. N08020 B 463 Gr. N08020
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02200

3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201 B 162 Gr. N02201
3.4 67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr. N04400

67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600 B 168 Gr. N06600
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800 B 409 Gr. N08800
65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 462 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10665

3.7
64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-Mn-W B 462 Gr. N10675 B 333 Gr. N10675
3.8 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 B 575 Gr. N10276
60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb B 564 Gr. N06625 B 443 Gr. N06625
62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 B 333 Gr. N10001
70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe B 573 Gr. N10003 B 434 Gr. N10003
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 B 575 Gr. N06455
42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu B 564 Gr. N08825 B 424 Gr. N08825
55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo B 462 Gr. N06022 B 575 Gr. N06022
55Ni-23Cr-16Mo-1.6Cu B 462 Gr. N06200 B 575 Gr. N06200
3.9 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe B 572 Gr. N06002 B 435 Gr. N06002

3.10 25Ni-46Fe-21Cr-5Mo B 672 Gr. N08700 B 599 Gr. N08700
3.11 44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo B 649 Gr. N08904 B 625 Gr. N08904

47Ni-22Cr-20Fe-7Mo B 581 Gr. N06985 B 582 Gr. N06985
46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu-N B 462 Gr. N08367 A 351 Gr. CN3MN B 688 Gr. N08367
3.13 49Ni-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo B 581 Gr. N06975 B 582 Gr. N06975

Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C B 462 Gr. N08031 B 625 Gr. N08031

3.15 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08810 B 409 Gr. N08810

3.16 35Ni-19Cr-1¼Si B 511 Gr. N08330 B 536 Gr. N08330
3.17 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo A 351 Gr. CN7M

Group
1.1 C-Si A 105 A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2 A 216 Gr. WCC A 516 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si-V A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 537 Cl. 1
1.2 C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 A 352 Gr. LCC A 203 Gr. B
C-Mn-Si-V A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. E
21/2Ni A 350 Gr. LF3 A 352 Gr. LC3
31/2Ni

Home Tab

Group
1.3 C-Si A 352 Gr. LCB A 515 Gr. 65
21/2Ni A 203 Gr. A
31/2Ni A 203 Gr. D
1.4 C-Si A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 515 Gr. 60
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 217 Gr. WC1 A 204 Gr. A
A 352 Gr. LC1 A 204 Gr. B
A 204 Gr. C
1.7 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F2 A 217 Gr. WC4

1/2Cr-1/2Mo A 217 Gr. WC5
Ni-1/2Cr-1/2Mo
3/4Ni-3/4Cr-1Mo
1.9 1Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 217 Gr. WC6 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2
11/4Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2
11/4Cr-1/2Mo-Si
1.10 21/4Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2
1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F5 A 217 Gr. C5
A 182 Gr. F5a
1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12

A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8 A 240 Gr. 304H
2.2 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 240 Gr. 316
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 182 Gr. F316H A 351 Gr. CF8M A 240 Gr. 316H
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M A 240 Gr. 317
2.3 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L A 240 Gr. 304L
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 182 Gr. F321 A 240 Gr. 321
A 182 Gr. F321H A 240 Gr. 321H
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F347 A 351 Gr. CF8C A 240 Gr. 347
A 182 Gr. F347H A 240 Gr. 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr. 348H
2.6 25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8 A 240 Gr. 309S
A 351 Gr. CH20 A 240 Gr. 309H
23Cr-12Ni
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 351 Gr. CK20 A 240 Gr. 310S
A 240 Gr. 310H
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N A 182 Gr. F51 A 351 Gr. CE8MN A 240 Gr. S31803
25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N A 182 Gr. F53 A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 240 Gr. S32750
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V A 182 Gr. F55 A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN A 240 Gr. S32760
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02200

3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201 B 162 Gr. N02201

Home Tab

Group
3.4 67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr. N04400
67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600 B 168 Gr. N06600
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800 B 409 Gr. N08800

3.7 65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 335 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10665
3.8 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 B 575 Gr. N10276

62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 B 333 Gr. N10001
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 B 575 Gr. N06455
Flange Material - Enter the name of the material. This software contains a database with most
of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Alternatively, you can
click Matl... to select a material directly from the Material Database dialog box.
Flange Type - Select the flange type: Weld Neck, Long WN, Lap Joint, Slip On, Socket
Weld, Threaded, Studding Outlet, FFWn, FFSo, FFThrd, RTJWn, Clpg-Thrd, Clpg-Sw, or
None. This value is not used in the analysis, but is printed in reports.
Neglect Areas - Select how the area contributed by the shell or nozzle is handled. Some vessel
design specifications mandate that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the shell or
nozzle. Select one of the following:
 A1 - Exclude the available area in the vessel wall.
 A2 - Exclude available area in the nozzle wall.
 A1 A2 - Exclude the available areas in both the vessel and nozzle walls.
 ACWLD - Exclude the available area in the cover weld.
 None - Include all areas.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
Enter the area S to exclude when holes are tapped into studding outlets and other similar
connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the area required by the
tapped hole area loss. Values for tapped area loss are shown in the table below, adapted from
the Pressure Vessel Design Manual:
ds (in) S (in2)
5/8 1.280
3/4 1.840
7/8 2.500
1 3.280
1 1/8 4.150
1 1/4 5.120
1 3/8 6.200
1 1/2 7.380
1 5/8 8.660

Home Tab
1 3/4 10.05
1 7/8 11.55
2 13.10
2 1/4 16.60
Nozzle Eff. - Enter the seam efficiency of the nozzle groove welds. For nozzle wall thickness
calculations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0. For more information see the definition of E in
the ASME Code, paragraph UG-37, and Interpretation VIII-89-171 of the A-90 addenda.
Shell Eff. - Enter the joint efficiency of the shell seam. The seam efficiency is used in "area
available" calculations to reduce the area available in the shell. For shell wall thickness
calculations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0. The software accounts for the case where the
nozzle passes through a weld by asking for the joint efficiency of the weld.
C Factor - Enter the PD-5500 C factor used in nozzle compensation calculations. This factor
accounts for the possibility of external loads. When external loads are negligible, the C factor

Home Tab
should not be more than 1.1. When the nozzle is connected to a piping system, where forces
and moments are considered, the C factor should not be greater than 1.0. For vessels operating
in the creep range, C should be less than or equal to 1.
Local Shell Thk. - If your vessel has insert plates, enter the thickness of the plate. Use this
value for vessels having insert plates that are thicker than the surrounding shell. This value is
greater than the course thickness of the shell. If the area immediately adjacent to the opening is
corroded to a greater degree or locally thinner than the rest of the shell, enter the thinner value.
The greater of this value and the element thickness is used in nozzle reinforcement calculations.
User Tr - Enter the minimum required shell thickness tr, the actual thickness of the shell or head
minus the corrosion allowance. For some vessel designs, the nozzle reinforcement is governed
by bending and normal stresses in the local shell area. Under special conditions, project
requirements specify that full area replacement for nozzle reinforcement is required. This value
replaces the value that the software normally calculates for the required thickness based on
internal or external pressure.
Optionally, for vertical vessels, select Consider External Loads for Nozzle Tr in the
Nozzle Design Options section of the Load Cases tab. The software determines the maximum
thickness based on the highest stress ratio and uses that value for tr if it governs over the
required thickness based on internal or external pressure.
Blind Attached? - Select if there is a blind on the nozzle flange. This is used only to determine
the weight of the nozzle. There is no structural effect.
Manway/Acs Ope? - Select if this is a manway, access, or inspection opening to bypass the
UG-45 minimum nozzle neck thickness requirement. In these cases, paragraph UG-45 states
that the minimum thickness requirement according to UG-45 is not required. This option is not
used for PD-5500.
Fatigue Calc?
Select to perform a fatigue analysis of the nozzle-to-shell weld. Along with specification of Weld
Class for PD5500 and EN13445 models, the number and magnitude of fatigue pressure stress
cycles must be specified in Fatigue Analysis on the Load Cases tab.
The table below provides descriptions for ASME VIII-2 2007 and later fatigue curves.
Table Name Description

Coefficients for Carbon, Low Alloy, Series 4xx, High Alloy Steels and High
Table 3.F.1 Tensile Strength Steels for Temperatures not Exceeding 700ºF (371ºC) UTS
less than or equal to 80ksi (552MPa)
Coefficients for Carbon, Low Alloy, Series 4xx, High Alloy Steels and High
Table 3.F.2 Tensile Strength Steels for Temperatures not Exceeding 700ºF (371ºC) UTS
(115-130ksi) (793-892MPa)
Coefficients for Series 3xx High Alloy Steels, Nickel Chromium Alloy, and
Table 3.F.3 Nickel Copper Alloys for Temperatures not Exceeding 800ºF (427ºC) where
Sa > 28.2 ksi (195 MPa)
Coefficients for Series 3xx High Alloy Steels, Nickel Chromium Alloy, and
Table 3.F.4 Nickel Copper Alloys for Temperatures not Exceeding 800ºF (427ºC) where
Sa less than or equal to 28.2 ksi (195 MPa)
Coefficients for Wrought 70 Copper-Nickel for Temperatures not Exceeding
Table 3.F.5
700ºF (371ºC) Sigmays = 18 ksi (134 MPa)
Table 3.F.6

Home Tab

Table 3.F.7
Coefficients for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Iron, Alloys X,G,C-4, and
Table 3.F.8
C-276 for Temperatures not Exceeding 800ºF (427ºC)
Coefficients for High Strength Bolting for Temperatures not Exceeding 700ºF
Table 3.F.9
(371ºC)
Weld Class - Select a weld class when Fatigue Calc? is selected. The weld classes,
descriptions, and illustrations are found in PD:5500 Annex C. Class C is the least severe, while
Class W is the most severe. This entry is only available for PD 5500 and EN 13445 models.
Piping Attached -
Quick Results - Click to see a report of nozzle results.
Local Stress Analysis (WRC 107, 297 or Annex G) Tab (Nozzle

Input/Analysis Dialog Box)
Defines loading information for nozzle stress analysis. Local loads are entered for stress
analysis according to the British code PD:5500. Local or global loads are entered for stress
analysis according to the WRC 107/537 and WRC 297 bulletins. The software also checks
global loads against ASME VIII-2 allowables. Loads are categorized as sustained, expansion,
and occasional.
In 2010 WRC bulletin 537 was released. The results of the local stress calculation of this
bulletin are effectively identical to that of WRC bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply provides
equations in place of the dimensionless curves found in bulletin 107. Please review the
Forward in bulletin 537 for more information.
Calculation Method - Select the needed analysis method. The appropriate force and moment
fields are available for the selected method. Select PD:5500, WRC 107, WRC 297, or No Calc.
When you change the method, the software automatically converts entered loads into the
respective coordinate systems used by each method.
Load Convention System - Select Local to defined loads locally with respect to the vessel and
the nozzle, having the benefit of being independent of the orientation of the vessel. Select
Global to use the global coordinate system. This entry is only available when WRC 107/537 is
selected for Calculation Method.
Quick Results - Click to see a report of local stress analysis quick results.
Nozzle Load Table - Click to open and edit a Microsoft Office Excel workbook with standard
nozzle loads that can be imported into the software. You can modify the nozzle loads for Project
A and AS1210 projects in this file. These loads are typically listed in the specifications of many
engineering companies. After the needed nozzle loads are entered in the workbook, then these
loads can be imported and applied to a nozzle depending upon its size and rating. This saves
time and reduces chances of error. A default sample workbook is provided.
Loading - Click to select the loading project from the Excel load table workbook. Select
Project A Loadings or AS1210 Loadings.
CAESAR II - Click to import nozzle loads from a CAESAR II .C2 file. This command is only
available when Local is selected for Load Convention System and when CAESAR II is
installed. CAESAR II is a separately-purchased Intergraph product.

Home Tab
Node # - Enter the node number of the nozzle used in CAESAR II.
Computed Stress Intensities/Ratios at the Nozzle Edge and Pad Edge - Displays the
calculated stress intensities and stress ratios for Vessel at Nozzle Edge, Vessel at Pad Edge,
and In Nozzle at Vessel. For example:
PD:5500 Annex G Analysis (on page 91)
WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load Convention (on page 92)
WRC 107/537 Analysis - Global Load Convention (on page 94)
WRC 297 Analysis (on page 95)
PD:5500 Annex G Analysis

Enter values for the following options when PD:5500 is selected for Calculation Method. The
software calculates stresses in cylindrical or spherical geometries with or without reinforcing
pads. Only stresses for round hollow nozzle geometries are calculated.
The example in PD:5500 Annex W does not calculate the membrane stress at
attachment edge; you must manually check the membrane stress when selecting the wall
thickness. In addition, the membrane stress calculated at the attachment edge, according to
Annex G, contains intensified stresses due to the presence of the hole.
Loads
Sustained loads (weight+pressure+forces) are used.
The following force/moment convention is used for PD:5500, Annex G:
Fr - Radial Force
Fc - Shear Force
Fl - Shear Force
Mc - Moment, Fl axis
Ml - Moment, Fc axis
Mt - Torsional moment
Length "L" - Enter in the length of the vessel. For vessels without stiffeners or cones this is the
entire vessel length including heads. This value is used along with Tangent Offset Distance to
calculate the equivalent length for off center loading.

Home Tab
Tangent Offset Distance - Enter in the distance of the centerline of the nozzle from the left
tangent line or appropriate line of support. This value is used in conjunction with the Length "L"
to calculate the equivalent length for off center loading.
Allowable Stress Intensity Factors at Nozzle Edge

Factor for Membrane Stresses - Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by
the allowable stress f to obtain the allowable stress for the maximum membrane stress intensity.
These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W. This
factor normally has a value of 1.2 or lower at the edge of the reinforcement pad.
 This factor is higher than Factor for Memb Stresses at pad edge.
 This entry is only available when Print Membrane Stress at Nozzle Edge is selected.
Factor for Membrane + Bend Stresses - Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is
multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain the allowable stress for the maximum membrane
plus bending stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples
in PD 5500 Annex G. This factor normally has a value of 2.25 or lower. At the pad edge, this
factor is normally 2.0.
Print Membrane Stress at Nozzle Edge - Select to calculate membrane stress at the
attachment junction. You must also enter a value for Factor for Membrane Stresses.
Allowable Stress Intensity Factors at Pad Edge

Factor for Memb Stresses - Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by the
allowable stress f to obtain the allowable stress for the maximum membrane stress intensity.
These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W. This
entry normally has a value of 1.2 or lower at the edge of the reinforcement pad.
Factor for Memb + Bend Stresses - Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by
the allowable stress f to obtain the allowable stress for the maximum membrane plus bending
stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500
Annex G. At the nozzle edge, this factor normally has a value of 2.25 or lower. At the pad edge,
this factor is normally 2.0.
WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load Convention

Enter values for the following options when WRC 107/537 is selected for Calculation Method
and Local is selected for Load Convention System. Local has the benefit of being
independent of the orientation of the vessel. The software calculates stresses for sustained,
expansion, and occasional loads and compares stress intensities to allowables.
You can enter values in the following load sets:
 Sustained - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.
 Expansion - (EXP) Secondary thermal expansion loads.
 Occasional - (OCC) Irregularly occurring loads such as wind loads, seismic loads, and
water hammer.
The following WRC 107/537 force/moment convention is used for a cylindrical vessel:

Home Tab
P - Radial Force
Vc - Circ. Shear Force
Vl - Long. Shear Force
Mc - Circ. Moment
Ml - Long. Moment
Mt - Torsional Moment
The following WRC 107/537 force/moment convention is used for a spherical vessel:
P - Radial Force
V2 - Shear Force, D to C
V1 - Shear Force, B to A
M1 - Moment, B axis
M2 - Moment, C axis
Occasional Press Difference - Enter the difference between the peak pressure of the system
and the system design pressure. The value is always positive or zero. This value is
superimposed onto the system design pressure to evaluate the primary membrane stress due to
occasional loads. The additional thrust load due to this pressure difference is accounted for in
the nozzle radial loading if you also select Include Pressure Thrust.
Include Pressure Thrust - Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle axial
load. For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
http://www.coade.com/newsletters/jul01.pdf.
Use Division 2 Stress Indices - Select to include the pressure stress indices described in
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-560.7. This value should only be used to perform a fatigue
analysis. Check ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue effect needs to be
considered. These factors are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal
pressure.
 Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis by selecting Use Kn
and Kb (to find SCF). For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or Use Kn and
Kb (to find SCF).
 The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2 Appendix
4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for fatigue effect
comparison. For more information, see the June 2000 COADE newsletter
http://www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.

Home Tab
Use WRC 368 - Select to compute pressure stresses in the shell and nozzle according to WRC
368. WRC 368 provides a method for calculating stresses in a cylinder-to-cylinder intersection
(such as cylinder-to-nozzle) due to internal pressure and pressure thrust loading.
 Using WRC 368 with WRC 107/297 is not accurate for calculating the combined stress from
pressure and external loads. So, this option is only available when the attachment type is
round and when no external loads are specified.
 For more information on WRC 368 and pressure thrust, see Modeling of Internal Pressure
and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368 in the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF) - Select to include the WRC 107/537 Appendix B stress
concentration factors (Kn and Kb) in a fatigue analysis. This value should only be used to
perform a fatigue analysis. Check ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue
effect needs to be considered. Also enter the needed value for Fillet Radius Nozzle or Fillet
Radius Pad.
 Peak stress intensity due to internal pressure is included in the analysis by selecting
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2?.
 For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or Use Division 2 Stress Indices.
comparison. For more information, see WRC-107 Elastic Analysis v/s Fatigue Analysis in the
June 2000 COADE newsletter http://www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.
Fillet Radius Nozzle - Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The
software uses this value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to
Appendix B of the WRC 107 bulletin. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.
Fillet Radius Pad - Enter the fillet radius between the pad and the vessel shell. The software
uses this value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb for the vessel/pad
intersection, according to Appendix B of the WRC 107 bulletin. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to
1.0.
WRC 107/537 Analysis - Global Load Convention

Enter values for the following options when WRC 107/537 is selected for Calculation Method
and Global is selected for Load Convention System. Global has the benefit of using the
global coordinate system also used by other analyses. When you toggle between the global and
local convention systems, the software converts the loads. Options for the global load
convention are the same as for WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load Convention (on page
92), except as described below.
Direction Cosines - Displays the direction cosines as described below. You do not usually
need to change these values.
The following global convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:

Home Tab
The vessel direction is +Y direction

The nozzle direction is +X direction
(towards the vessel)
Direction cosines of the vessel are:
 VX - 0
 VY - 1
 VZ - 0
Direction cosines of the vessel are:
 NX - 1
 NY - 0
 NZ - 0
The following global convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
The direction of a
spherical vessel is from
points B to A
The software uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from the
global convention into the traditional WRC107 convention.
WRC 297 Analysis

Enter values for the following options when WRC 297 is selected for Calculation Method. The
software calculates stresses in cylindrical nozzles attached to cylindrical shells.
Loads
Sustained loads (weight+pressure+forces) are used.
The following force/moment convention is used for WRC 297:
P - Radial Force
V2 - Shear Force, D to C
V1 - Shear Force, B to A
M1 - Moment, B axis
M2 - Moment, C axis

Home Tab
Stress Concentration Factors

Shell Stress Concentration Factor - Enter a value, typically between 1 and 3, for stress
concentration due to weld quality and dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld. The
stress concentration factor:
 Accounts for peak stresses - local stress risers in the immediate vicinity of vessel welds due
to factors such as sharp corners and lack of fillet weld radii. Peak stresses are considered in
fatigue analysis.
 Applies to the stress calculations in the vessel and the nozzle on both the inside and the
outside of the vessel.
 Is used in pressure stress calculations in the vessel on both the inside and outside of the
vessel.
Nozzle Stress Concentration Factor - Enter a value, typically between 1 and 3, for stress
concentration due to weld quality and dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld. The
stress concentration factor:
 Accounts for peak stresses - local stress risers in the immediate vicinity of vessel welds due
to factors such as sharp corners and lack of fillet weld radii. Peak stresses are considered in
fatigue analysis.
 Applies to the stress calculations in the vessel and the nozzle on both the inside and the
outside of the vessel.
 Is not used in pressure stress calculations.
Include Pressure Thrust - Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle axial
load. For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
Use Division 2 Stress Indices - Select to include the pressure stress indices described in
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-560.7. This value should only be used to perform a fatigue
analysis. Check ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue effect needs to be
considered. These factors are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal
pressure.
 Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis by selecting Use Kn
and Kb (to find SCF). For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or Use Kn and
Kb (to find SCF).
comparison. For more information, see the June 2000 COADE newsletter
http://www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.
Weight
Home tab: Details > Weight
Adds piping and miscellaneous weight to the selected cylinder or head element. This is weight
that cannot be accounted for in other commands. The weight is a static mass, not an applied
force, but affects the natural frequency of the vessel and axial stress calculations. Piping weight
is modeled here. The area and mass of the piping are considered in the same manner as a
weight.
Previous Weight - If you created more than one weight on the element, click to go back to the
previous weight.
Go To Next Weight - If you created more than one weight on the element, click to go to the next
weight.

Home Tab
Add New Weight - Click to add a new weight to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current weight.
Layout Angle - Enter the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the
vessel drawing and the centerline of the weight at the point where it is attached to the shell.
For a horizontal vessel, the zero degree line is at 12:00 (looking at a clock); 90 degrees is at
3:00. For a vertical vessel, the angle is more arbitrary. For purposes of rendering the graphics,
the assumption is that the zero degree line is at 3:00 and 90 degrees is 12:00.
The position of the zero degree reference direction (North, West or East) and the angular
rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) are set in Tools tab, Set Configuration Parameters
, Set Default Values Tab (Configuration Dialog) (see "Set Default Values Tab (Configuration
Tab)" on page 202).
If the new orientation is different from the orientation of the current model, the software asks to
update the model with the new settings. If the settings are updated, the weights and areas of
platforms must be recalculated:
 Click List Dialog (on page 189) . On the Detail Listing dialog box, click the Platform
tab so that platform data is visible. Click Platform Wind Area and Platform Weight to
recalculate.
 Click Platform Input for each platform. Tab through the fields in the Platform dialog
box, causing the weight and area to be recalculated
The angular settings apply to nozzles, clips, legs, lifting lugs, support lugs, base rings,
platforms, weights and half-pipe jackets.
Examples
Default Orientation

Home Tab
Angle Position: North

Rotation Direction: Clockwise
Offset from Element Centerline - Enter the distance of this weight from the centerline of
vessel. The value is multiplied by the weight to obtain a moment that used in stress calculations.
For horizontal vessels, the weight is added to the saddle loads and this value is not used.
Miscellaneous Weight - Enter the weight for items such as: an attached motor or other
equipment, internal piping, or external structural elements. This value is also used for seismic
analysis.
Select the Active Cases for this Weight/Mass - Select the active case for the current
weight/mass. You can select any combination of empty, operating, and hydro test cases.
Is this a Welded Internal? - Select if the weight is for an item that is welded to the vessel
during shop construction. The weight is then added to the fabricated total weight, other weights
that are functions of the fabricated total weight, and the empty total weight.
Area of External Weight/Piping/Equipment - Enter the area to use for the wind load
calculation.
Piping Detail - Select Is this a Piping Detail? to include the weight and moment of overhead
pipelines on vertical pressure vessels. Define the area and weight of the piping with the
following options:
 Pipe Lookup - Click to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box and select values
from the piping database for Pipe Schedule and Nominal Pipe Diameter.
 Pipe Outer Diameter - Displays the OD for the pipe selected in Pipe Lookup. You can also
manually enter a value.
 Pipe Thickness - Displays the nominal thickness for the pipe selected in Pipe Lookup. You
can also manually enter a value.
 Fluid Specific Gravity - Enter the specific gravity of the contained fluid. This value is
usually 1.0.
 Insulation Thickness - If the pipe is insulated, enter the thickness of the insulation. If there
is no insulation, enter 0.
 Insulation Density - Enter the density of the pipe insulation to calculate the weight of the
insulation and the moment effect.

Home Tab
 Compute Weight and Area - Click to calculate the pipe weight and area based on the
entered values.
After weights and offsets are entered, the software calculates the overturning moment due to the
eccentricity of the piping. In most designs, the piping is supported by means of braces and clips
at specified intervals. The element on which the piping weight is added takes the applied load.
If piping is specified on a top head, the software attempts to graphically connect the
piping to the center-most nozzle.
Force and Moment

Home tab: Details > Force and Moment
Adds external forces and moments to the selected cylinder or head element. In most cases
these are operating loads imposed on the vessel, such as piping loads on nozzles.
Previous For/Mom - If you created more than one force/moment set on the element, click to go
back to the previous set.
Go To Next For/Mom - If you created more than one force/moment set on the element, click to
go to the next set.
Add New For/Mom - Click to add a new force/moment set to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current force/moment set.
Applied Forces - Enter the force in each needed direction. For X, positive is from left to right.
For Y, positive is upward. For Z, positive is towards you. Forces perpendicular to the vessel are
resolved into a single vector and applied with live load to create the worst load combination.
Unlike Weight, applied forces are not included in seismic analysis because force does not have
mass.
You should generally enter negative Y forces (downward) because these increase the
loads on the saddles and other supports.
Applied Moments - Enter the moment about each needed axis. For X, positive is from left to
right. For Y, positive is upward. For Z, positive is towards you.
Compute Stresses Due to Applied Loads - Select one or both of the following:
 Compute Longitudinal Stresses BW normally added to the Wind Case - Forces and
moments act during wind analysis.
 Compute Longitudinal Stresses BS normally added to the Seismic Case - Forces and
moments act during seismic analysis.
You must select at least one option.
Force/Moment Combination Method - Select the method for resolving forces and moments
about the support point:
 SRSS - All forces and moments act in the same direction. The software takes the absolute
value of the entered loads to determine the overall effect on the structure. This method,
while not technically correct, yields a conservative result for bending stresses and support
calculations.
 Algebraic - Forces and moments act in their positive or negative directions. Loads that
oppose each other tend to cancel out. If you have an accurate account of the external forces
and moments, due to load conditions such as piping reactions, this option provides more
accurate and less conservative results. The software sums the forces and moments in both
the X and Z planes for vertical vessels. The greater of the two moments is used in
calculations of the stresses and moments at the support.

Home Tab
Platform
Home tab: Details > Platform
Adds a platform to the selected element.
Previous - If you created more than one platform on the element, click to go back to the
previous platform.
Next Platform - If you created more than one platform on the element, click to go to the next
platform.
Add Platform - Click to add a new platform to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current platform.
Non-Circular Platform? - Select if the platform is not circular. This option is selected by default
for platforms that cannot be circular, such as on a horizontal cylinder.
Layout Angle - For a non-circular platform, enter the rotation angle through the centerline of the
platform. For example, on a non-circular top head platform:
Platform Start Angle - For a circular platform, enter the angle between the designated zero
degree line of the vessel and the start angle of the platform.
Platform End Angle - For a circular platform, enter the angle between the designated zero
degree line of the vessel and the ending angle of the platform.
Platform Railing Weight - Enter the weight of the platform railing in units of weight/length. This
value is used as part of calculating the weight of the platform.

Home Tab
Platform Grating Weight - Enter the weight of the platform deck grating or plate in units of
weight/area. This value is used as part of calculating the weight of the platform. To use standard
weights, click and select Open Lattice Grating or Checkered Floor Plate.
Platform Width - Enter the radial width of the platform. This dimension is used to calculate the
weight of the platform in conjunction with Platform Railing Weight and Platform Grating
Weight.
Platform Height - Enter the height from the bottom of the platform to the top rail. Usually this
distance is to be no less than 42 inches. This dimension is used to calculate the wind area of the
platform in conjunction with Platform Width, Clearance, and Force Coefficient Cf.
Offset from End - For a non-circular top head platform, enter the offset as shown below. The
software uses the offset to calculate the distance to the center of the platform. This is then used
as the offset dimension to calculate the eccentric moment for the platform. This value is used in
a .DXF drawing of the vessel when Export (see "Import/Export" on page 58) is used.
Clearance - For circular platforms, enter the distance between the inside edge of the platform
and the outside surface of the cylindrical shell. The platform clearance is used to calculate the
wind area of the platform.
For a circular top head platform, enter 0.

Platform Length (Non-Length) - For a non-circular top head platform, enter the long dimension
of the platform.
Force Coefficient Cf - Enter the platform force coefficient Cf. This coefficient may be specified
in a wind load computation standard, such as Table 6-9 of ASCE7-95. The value is typically
between 1.2 and 1.8. This factor is used to calculate the wind area of the platform in conjunction
with the Platform Height, Platform Width, and Clearance.

Home Tab
Platform Wind Area - Enter the tributary wind area of the platform. This value is typically the
greatest span of the platform perpendicular to the vessel multiplied by a nominal platform height
of between 12 and 36 inches on the hand rails and other equipment on the platform.
To change the platform wind area calculation method, click Installation | Misc. Options on the
Load Cases Tab (see "Stress Combination Load Cases (Load Cases Tab)" on page 308) of
the main window. The methods are:
1. The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative).
2. One-half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient.
3. The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by three.
4. The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by three. This option
yields the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep angle of greater than
180º.
Control Options - Select one or more of these options:
 Do not include platform in analysis - Select to remove platform data from analysis.
 User computes and enters the platform area - Select to manually enter a value in
Platform Wind Area and override software platform area calculations.
 User computes and enters the platform weight - Select to manually enter a value in
Platform and Ladder Weight and override software platform weight calculations.
Ladder Layout Angle - Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel
and the centerline of the ladder.
Ladder Start Elevation - Enter the start elevation of the ladder. This value and Ladder Stop
Elevation are used to determine the overall length of the ladder. The software assumes that the
top of the ladder is attached to the platform.
Ladder Stop Elevation - Enter the stop elevation of the ladder. This value and Ladder Start
Elevation are used to determine the overall length of the ladder. The software assumes that the
top of the ladder is attached to the platform.
Ladder Unit Weight - Enter the unit weight of the ladder in units of weight/length. For example,
in English units this is typically the weight of a one-foot ladder section. The software does not
differentiate between a caged and a non-caged ladder, so the total weight of a ladder and cage
must be included in this value. The total ladder and platform weight at the platform elevation is
used in the calculations.
Is this a Caged Ladder? - Select if the ladder has a cage.
Platform and Ladder Weight - Enter the total weight of the platform, ladders, and associated
hardware. This overrides weight calculated automatically by the software.
Packing
Home tab: Details > Packing
Adds packing data to the selected element.
Previous Packing - If you created more than one set of packing data on the element, click to go
back to the previous set.
Go To Next Packing - If you created more than one set of packing data on the element, click to
go to the next set.
Add New Packing - Click to add a new set of packing data to the shell or head element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current set of packing data.

Home Tab
Height of Packed Section - Enter the height of the packed section along the element. This
value is used to calculate the weight of the packed section. For seismic calculations, the weight
center of the packed section is taken at half this height. In the rare case of a packed horizontal
vessel, the value is the length of the packed section.
Full - If the element is fully filled with packing material, click to calculate the values of Distance
from "From"Node and Height of Packed Section.
Density of Packing - Enter the density of the packing. The following table list typical densities in
lbs/ft3:
Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3) Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3)
Ceramic Raschig Ring Carbon Raschig Ring

1/4 60.0 1/4 46.0
3/8 61.0 1/2 27.0
1/2 55.0 3/4 34.0
5/8 56.0 1 27.0
3/4 50.0 1 1/4 31.0
1 42.0 1 1/2 34.0
1 1/4 46.0 2 27.0
1 1/2 46.0 3 23.0
2 41.0 Carbon Steel Pall Ring
3 37.0 5/8 37.0
4 36.0 1 30.0
Carbon Steel Raschig Ring 1 1/2 26.0
1/4 133.0 2 24.0

3/8 94.0 Plastic Pall Ring
1/2 75.0 5/8 7.25
5/8 62.0 1 5.50
3/4 52.0 1 1/2 4.75
1 39.0 2 4.50
1 1/2 42.0 3 4.50
2 37.0
3 25.0
Packing in place during the field hydrotest? - Select this option if the packing will be in place
when the field hydrotest is performed.
Percent Volume Hold Up - Enter a percentage value between 0 and 100 for the amount of
liquid that the packing retains. Using this value and Liquid Specific Gravity, the software
calculates the weight of liquid trapped in the packing and adds the weight to the operating
weight of the vessel.

Home Tab
Liquid Specific Gravity - Enter the specific gravity of the liquid trapped in the packing. For
more information, see Liquid Density (see "Liquid" on page 120). Using this value and
Percent Volume Hold Up, the software calculates the weight of liquid trapped in the packing
and adds the weight to the operating weight of the vessel.
Saddle
Home tab: Details > Saddle
Adds a saddle to the selected horizontal cylinder element. The size and location of the saddles
are important for Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports.
For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined; however, they do not have to be
symmetrically placed about the center axis of the vessel. If no saddles are defined, dead load
and live load calculations are not performed.
Previous Saddle - If you created more than one saddle on the element, click to go back to the
previous saddle.
Go To Next Saddle - If you created more than one saddle on the element, click to go to the next
saddle.
Add New Saddle - Click to add a new saddle to the shell element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current saddle.
Add Saddle Ring - Click to open the Stiffening Ring dialog box to add a ring to the saddle. For
more information, see Stiffening Ring.
Select Saddle - Click to open the Saddle Properties dialog box, and select a standard saddle
(from SaddleData.txt, found in the PV Elite System folder).
Same as First - Click to copy all data from the first saddle to the current saddle.
Saddle Width - Enter the width of the saddle support. This value does not include any wear pad
on the vessel side, and is used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle
supports.

Home Tab
Centerline Dimension B - Enter the distance from the base of the saddle to the centerline of
the vessel, referred to as dimension B in some pressure vessel texts. This value is used to
determine additional saddle loads due to wind or seismic events.
Saddle Contact Angle - Enter the angle between the two contact points ("horns") of the saddle,
measured from the axial center of the vessel. This value typically ranges from 120.0º to 150.0º.
Wear Plate Width - Enter the width of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle
support. This value is used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle
supports.
Wear Plate Thickness - Enter the thickness of the wear plate between the vessels and the
saddle support. This value is used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle
supports..
Wear Plate Contact Angle - Enter the angle contained from one edge of the wear plate to the
other edge, measured from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value is approximately
130º.
Height of Section Ring - If a custom fabricated composite (usually T type) stiffener is used over
the saddle supports, enter the height from the shell surface to the top of the stiffener. This value
will be used to compute the stress at the tip of the stiffener. If a horizontal vessel does not have
stiffeners over the saddle supports, enter 0. If you selected a stiffener from the AISC structural
steel database in the Stiffening Ring dialog box, enter 0. In this case, the software gets the ring
height from the AISC database.
Friction Coefficient Mu - Enter the coefficient of friction mu between the base of the saddle and
the supporting foundation, piers or structure. A frictionless surface has a mu value of 0. Other
typical values are in the range of 0.3 to 0.5. The software uses this value to determine the
counteracting force caused by thermal expansion and the dead weight of the vessel on the
saddle support. This is essentially a resistive force bending the saddle. The generated force is
proportional to mu times the normal force.
Moment Factor, Ftr - Enter the moment factor for calculating the saddle reaction force due to
the wind or earthquake transverse load. The recommended value is 3.

Home Tab
The value of 6 is conservative in that it assumes that the maximum edge load is uniform across
the entire base, when realistically it occurs only at the edge. A more accurate method converts
this triangular loading into a more realistic uniform load, leading to the value of 3. The following
figure shows an end view of a horizontal vessel with a transverse load, simulating wind/seismic
loading:
The saddle reaction load Fst (or Fwt for wind) due to the transverse load Ft is:
Fst (or Fwt) = (Saddle Moment Factor) * Ft * B / E
Saddle Dimension a - Enter the distance between the centerline of the saddle support and the
tangent line of the nearest head. This dimension is labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
Dimension E at base - Enter the dimension of the baseplate that is less than the distance in
contact with the supporting surface. This entry is optional.
Circ Eff. over Saddle - Enter the circumferential efficiency in the plane of the saddle.
When you create a shell by welding the ends together, there is a longitudinal weld. If that weld is
at the saddle, there are bending moment stress.
Circ Eff. over Midspan - Enter circumferential efficiency at the mid-span.

Home Tab
When you create a shell by welding the ends together, there is a longitudinal weld. If that weld is
between saddles, there are bending moment stress.
Wear Plate and Shell Matls are the same? - Select if the wear plate and shell materials are
the same.
Perform Saddle Check? - Select to add rib, web, and baseplate data, and perform a structural
analysis of the saddle.
Saddle Allowable Stress - Enter the saddle allowable stress. Alternatively, click Matl... to
select a material directly from the Material Database (see "Material Database Dialog Box" on
page 433) dialog box.
Material Yield Stress - Enter the yield stress for the saddles at their design temperature.
Alternatively, click Matl... to select a material directly from the Material Database (see "Material
Database Dialog Box" on page 433) dialog box.
E for Plates - Enter the modulus of elasticity E for the saddle material.
Baseplate Length - Enter the long dimension of the baseplate in the direction of the vessel
diameter.
Baseplate Thickness - Enter the thickness of the baseplate.

Baseplate Width - Enter the short dimension (the width) of the baseplate.

Home Tab
Number of Ribs - Enter the number of ribs on one saddle, running parallel to the long axis of
the vessel.
Rib Thickness - Enter the thickness of the rib supports.
Web Thickness - Enter the thickness of the web. The web is the vertical plate between the
baseplate and the wear plate, to which the ribs are attached.
Height of Center Web - Enter the distance from the bottom of the center rib to the top plus the
thickness of the shell.
Web Location - Select the web location relative to the saddle baseplate and wear plate. Select
Center, Side - Left, or Side - Right.
Perform Anchor Bolts Calculations? - Select to add anchor bolt data, and perform anchor bolt
and baseplate calculations. Enter values for the options below.
PV Elite performs anchor bolt calculations for horizontal vessel saddle supports and skirt
and leg baseplate supports. This analysis determines the uplift on the saddle supports due to
the external loads on the vessel. Loadings include defined forces and moments and wind and
seismic loads. If the vessel is in uplift, the required area of the bolts is determined. More
information on this analysis is found in the Pressure Vessel Design Manual by Dennis R. Moss,
1997 and later editions. In addition to calculation of the required bolt area, this method also
calculates the required thickness of the baseplate due to the applied bolt load. In some cases
the bolt load controls the thickness of the saddle baseplate.
Saddle Bolted to Steel Foundation? - Select if the saddles are welded to a steel substructure.

Home Tab
Number of Bolts - Enter the total number of bolts to be used on the baseplate. The bolts are
assumed to be at the edge of the baseplate along the short side.
Num of Bolts in Tension - Enter the number of bolts in tension, generally the total number of
bolts divided by two.
Edge Distance - Enter the distance from the edge of the baseplate to the centerline of the bolts.
Bolt Corrosion Allowance - Enter the bolt corrosion allowance (BCA). If the bolt corrosion
allowance specified is a "total", then divide it by two; otherwise this calculation will be overly
conservative. When dealing with bolt corrosion, the following equation is used to calculate the
equivalent bolt OD and corresponding reduced area of the bolt:
BOD = ( BLTAREA * 4.0 / ∏ )1/2 - 2.0 * BCA
Bolt Material - Enter the bolt material. Alternatively, click Matl... to select a material directly
from the Material Database (see "Material Database Dialog Box" on page 433) dialog box.
Bolt Allowable Stress - Enter the allowable stress of the bolt. If you select a material directly
from the Material Database dialog box for Bolt Material, the software provides the allowable
stress at ambient temperature. If you need the allowable at an elevated temperature (such as for
an insulated vessel), then you must enter the allowable stress at that temperature.
Thread Series - Enter the thread series identifier:
 TEMA - 8 thread series, adapted from the TEMA Standard
 TEMA Metric
 UNC - Unified National Course Threads, adapted from Mark's Handbook
 BS 3643
 SABS 1700
 User Defined Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Bolt Root
Area. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.
Nominal Bolt Diameter - Select the nominal bolt diameter. In general this value ranges from
1/2 inch to 4 inches.
Bolt Root Area - For nonstandard or metric bolts, enter the root cross-sectional area of the bolt.
If you have entered a value for Bolt Corrosion Allowance, the software modifies the area of
the bolt using the equation described above.
Optional Moments for ASME Saddle Analysis - According to definitions in ASME VIII-2 4.15.6
enter values for the following optional moments:
Moment M1 - Net-section maximum, maximum longitudinal bending moment at the saddle
support. The moment is negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.
Moment M2 - Net-section maximum, maximum longitudinal bending moment between the
saddle support. The moment is negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.

Home Tab
The saddle analysis used in PV Elite can be either the method outlined in ASME VIII-2
paragraph 4.15.3 or PD 5500 Annex G. Both of these analyses are based on the original
method outlined in the September 1951 Paper by L.P. Zick, "Stresses in Large Horizontal
Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports." This paper first appeared in the The
Welding Journal Research Supplement. The basis of the analysis is a typical pressure vessel
with ellipsoidal, torispherical or hemispherical heads at either end, and cylindrical sections in the
middle. The two saddle supports are assumed to be equidistant from the ends. With these
assumptions, the bending moments between the saddles and over the saddles can be
calculated.
Unfortunately, the geometry of many vessels and exchangers do not fall in line with these
assumptions. As a result, the analysis of these vessels may produce moments that are not
correct with regard to the original Zick formulas. The software allows the optional input of
Moment M1 and Moment M2, as defined in ASME VIII-2 4.15.3, for both the operating and
hydrotest conditions. If Moment M1 and Moment M2 are zero, moments are calculated based
on the design information provided in the Saddle dialog. If Moment M1 and Moment M2 are
non-zero, these moment values are used, overriding the calculated moments. Moment M1 and
Moment M2 can be positive or negative.
According to ASME VIII-2, paragraph 4.15.3.2, the moments are calculated for equidistant
saddles with a ≤ 0.25L. If the relationship between a and L is not maintained, the moments
should be calculated using an appropriate engineering beam type analysis method (such as
shear and moment diagrams). From ASME VIII-2 4.15.6:
 a - Distance from the axis of the saddle support to the tangent line on the curve for a dished
head or to the inner face of a flat cover or tubesheet.
 L - Length of the cylindrical shell measured from the tangent line for a vessel with dished
ends or from the inner face to inner face for vessels with flat covers or tubesheets.
These overriding moments are only used in Division 2 saddle analysis and not PD:5500
saddle analysis.

Home Tab
Tray
Home tab: Details > Tray
Adds a set of equally spaced trays with a set liquid height to the selected element on a vertical
vessel.
Previous Tray Group - If you created more than one tray set on the element, click to go back to
the previous set.
Go To Next Tray Set - If you created more than one tray set on the element, click to go to the
next set.
Add New Tray Set - Click to add a new tray set to the element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current tray set.

Number of Trays - Enter the number of trays on the element.
Tray Spacing - Enter the vertical distance between trays.
Tray Weight Per Unit Area - Enter the unit weight of each tray in the set. Do not enter the total
weight, because the software multiplies the unit weight by the cross-sectional area of the
element.
Support Ring and Bolting Bar Weight - Enter the support ring and bolting bar weight.
Height of Liquid on Tray - Enter the height of the liquid on each tray.
Density of Liquid on Tray - Enter the density of the liquid on each tray. For more information,
see Liquid Density (see "Liquid" on page 120).
Lug
Home tab: Details > Lug
Adds support lugs to the selected element on a vertical vessel. If no skirt or legs are defined for
a vertical vessel, the lowest set of lugs are used as the vessel support point for dead load and
live load calculations.

Home Tab
Delete - Deletes all data for the lug.

Lug Type - Select the type of geometry for the support lug:
Simple geometry with gussets
Gusseted geometry with top plate
Gusseted geometry with continuous top encirclement ring
Lug Start Angle - Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and
the start angle of the lug.
Lug Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of
Number of Lugs - Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this
location.
Dist. from OD to Lug MidPt (dlug) - Enter the radial distance from the wall of the vessel to the
midpoint where the lug attaches to the structural steel.
Weight of One Lug - Enter the actual weight of one support lug. The software does not gather
enough information to do the detailed calculation of the support lug weight.
Force Bearing Width (wfb) - Enter the width of the structure that is in contact with the bottom
lug support plate.

Home Tab
Radial Width of Bottom Ring (wpl) - Enter the distance that the bottom support plate extends
from the OD of the vessel. This value must be greater than or equal to Mean Width of Gussets
(wgp).
Effective Force Bearing Length (lpl) - For lug types with a bottom plate and no continuous
rings (Simple geometry with no gussets and gusseted geometry with top plate in Lug Type),
enter the distance between gussets plus two times the gusset plate thickness.
For lug types with continuous top and bottom rings (Gusseted geometry with continuous top
encirclement ring in Lug Type), enter the length of the bottom plate located on a support:
Thickness of Bottom Ring (tpl) - Enter the thickness of the bottom support plate.
Distance Between Gussets (dgp) - Enter the distance between the inside surfaces of the
gusset plates.
Mean Width of Gussets (wgp) - Enter the mean gusset width, defined as the gusset width at
the top plus the gusset width at the bottom divided by two. The software uses this value to
calculate the actual stresses in the gusset plates.
Height of Gussets (tgp) - Enter the height of one gusset.
Thickness of Gussets (tgp) - Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.
Radial Width of Top Ring (wtp) - Enter the radial dimension from the OD of the shell to the
edge of the plate. This value should be less than or equal to Mean Width of Gussets (wgp).
Circumferential Width of Top Ring (cwp) -
Thickness of Top Ring (ttp) - Enter the thickness of the top support plate ring that sits above
the gussets.

Home Tab
Perform WRC 107/537 Calculation - Select to perform the WRC 107 local stress analysis on a
reinforcing pad for the lug. The software calculates the stresses at the edge of the attachment
and the edge of the pad. Enter values for the width, length, and thickness options.
Bolt Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of
Type of Threads - Enter the thread series identifier:
 TEMA Metric
 BS 3643
 SABS 1700
 User Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Bolt Root Area.
This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.
Nominal Bolt Diameter - Select the nominal bolt diameter. In general this value ranges from
1/2 inch to 4 inches.
Bolt Root Area - When User Root Area is selected for Type of Threads, enter the root
cross-sectional area of the bolt.

Home Tab
Legs
Home tab: Details > Legs
Adds support legs to the selected element. Legs can be created for a vertical vessel without a
skirt element.
Leg Input Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box) (on page 115)
Base Plate Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box) (on page 118)
Leg Input Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Defines parameters for the legs and leg pads.
Delete - Deletes all data for the legs.
Leg Centerline Diameter - Enter the distance between the centerlines of two legs on opposing
sides of the vessel. If there are an odd number of legs (therefore, no two legs are opposing),
then enter the diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs. Alternatively, click
Compute Centerline Diameter to calculate the value.
Leg Orientation - Select the orientation of the leg cross-section with respect to the centerline.
Select:
 Strong Axis - The strong axis is perpendicular to the vessel.
 Weak Axis - The weak axis is perpendicular to the vessel.
 Diagonal - The strong axis is diagonal to the vessel.
Number of Legs - Enter the number of legs. You must create at least three legs.
Overall Length of Legs - Enter the distance from the ground to the attachment point of the leg
on the vessel.

Home Tab
Effective Leg Length "L" - Enter the effective leg length L, defined as the free length of the leg
that is subject to bending. This is the value that is used in the AISC formula kl/r. This value
cannot be explicitly calculated because there are numerous configurations of legs. If the value is
zero, the software conservatively uses the overall leg length as the effective leg length in the
calculation.
Leg Database - Select the structural specification database to use for leg cross-sections.
Section Identifier - Enter a section name in the format of the specification selected in Leg
Database, or click LookUp to open the Select a Leg Shape dialog box and select a section
from the database.
L - Equal angle
L - Unequal angle
B/D - Double angles with
large or small sides back
to back
C/HP/M/MC/S -
Channels and other
miscellaneous channels
W - Wide Flanges
ST - Structural Tees
Leg Yield Stress - Enter the yield stress for the legs. Alternatively, click to select a material
directly from the Yield Stress Selection dialog box.
Effective End Condition "K" - Enter the effective end condition K. For pressure vessel legs, a
value of 1.0 or 1.5 is commonly used.

Home Tab
End Condition Theoretical K Recommended K

Fixed - Fixed 0.5 0.65
Fixed - Pinned 0.7 0.80
Fixed - Trans 1.0 1.20
Pinned - Pinned 1.0 1.00
Fixed - Rotates 2.0 2.10
Pinned - Rotates 2.0 2.00
Leg Start Angle - Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and
the start angle of the first leg.
Occasional Load Factor - Enter a factor for irregularly occurring loads. The default value is
1.333.
Perform WRC 107/537 Analysis - Select to perform the WRC 107 local stress analysis on a
reinforcing pad between a leg and the vessel. The software calculates the stresses at the edge
of the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Width - Enter the pad width as measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel.
The pad width must be greater than attachment width.
Pad Length - Enter the length of the pad as measured along the long axis of the vessel.
Pad Thickness - Enter the thickness of the pad.
Compute Centerline Diameter - Click to calculate the value for Leg Centerline Diameter
based on the element OD, Number of Legs, the cross-section selected for Section Identifier,
and the Pad Thickness for Perform WRC 107 Analysis.
Are the Legs Cross Braced? - Select if the legs are diagonally braced. Bracing the legs
reduces bending and increases the axial load in the legs.
Are these Pipe Legs? - Select to analyze pipe legs. Also enter values for Pipe Leg Inside
Diameter and Pipe Leg Outside Diameter.
Pipe Leg Inside Diameter - Enter the corroded pipe inside diameter. Alternatively, click to
open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal
diameter.
Pipe Leg Outside Diameter - Enter the corroded pipe outside diameter. Alternatively, click
to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal
diameter.

Home Tab
This value must be greater than Pipe Leg Inside Diameter. The software uses these
values to calculate moment of inertia, section modulus and radius of gyration for the legs. These
values are used in the AISC unity check and natural frequency calculations.
Vessel Translates during Occasional Load? - Select to calculate a more conservative
longitudinal moment when Perform WRC 107 Analysis is also selected.
Employ Directional Check for W and C Types -
Base Plate Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Defines parameters for the leg base plates.
Perform Baseplate Analysis? - Select to place a baseplate on the bottom of each leg and
analyze baseplate, bolt, and foundation loads and enter values for the options below. The
software assumes the leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate.
Length, B - Enter the length along the bolt side.

Width, D - Enter the width.
Thickness - Enter the thickness of the baseplate.
Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows a material to be
selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To modify the material
properties of the selected element, click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box (on
page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element for this analysis. It does not
Thread Series - Enter the thread series identifier:
 TEMA Metric
 BS 3643
 SABS 1700
 User Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Root Area. This
information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.
Nominal Diameter - Click and select the nominal bolt diameter from the bolt table selected
for Thread Series. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, enter the nominal
size and select User Root Area in Thread Series.
For TEMA and UNC bolts, the available bolt diameters are:

Home Tab
Bolt Size Bolt Root Area

(inches)
(cm.^2) (in.^2)
0.500 1.27 0.126
0.625 1.5875 0.202
0.750 1.9050 0.302
0.875 2.22225 0.419
1.000 2.54000 0.551
1.125 2.85750 0.728
1.250 3.17500 0.929
1.375 3.49250 1.155
1.500 3.81000 1.405
1.625 4.12750 1.680
1.750 4.44500 1.980
1.875 4.76250 2.304
2.000 5.08000 2.652
2.250 5.71500 3.423
2.500 6.35000 4.292
2.750 6.98500 5.259
3.000 7.62000 6.324
3.250 8.25500 7.487
3.500 8.89000 8.749
3.750 9.52500 10.108
4.000 10.1600 11.566
This information is adapted from Jawad and Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of
Process Equipment, pg 425.
Corrosion Allowance - Enter the bolt corrosion allowance. The software uses this value to
corrode the radius of the root area and calculate a corroded root stress area based on the
nominal bolt size and bolt table. This area is then used in the remainder of the bolt load/stress
calculations.
The software calculates the required area of the bolt. If the bolt corrosion allowance is greater
than zero, the software adds the corrosion allowance and recalculates the diameter based on
the new required area:
Corroded Bolt Root Diameter = (4 * New Bolt Area/Pi)1/2 - 2 * Bolt Corrosion
Allowance
Number per Baseplate - Enter the number of bolts per baseplate. In most cases, this should be
an even number, but for angle legs, the value can be 1.The software assumes that the bolts are
located along Length, B. The required size of the bolt and the baseplate thickness are looked

Home Tab
up from a table in the Pressure Vessel Design Manual and Pressure Vessel Handbook. There
are no calculations for one bolt.
Number in Tension - Enter the number of bolts in tension under wind, earthquake, and
horizontal loads, defined as the number of bolts along one Length, B side (three bolts in the
examples above). If these load cases are not needed, no value is required.
Distance from Edge to Bolt - Enter the dimension z from the edge of the leg to the centerline
of the bolts, measures along the Width, D side.
Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows a material to be
selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To modify the material
properties of the selected element, click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box (on
page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element for this analysis. It does not
Root Area - When User Root Area is selected for Thread Series, enter the root cross-sectional
area of the bolt.
Nominal Compressive Strength - Enter the following for the concrete to which the base is
bolted:
 F'c - The nominal ultimate compressive stress of the concrete. This value is F'c in Jawad and
Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
 Fc - The allowable compressive stress of the concrete
 n - The steel-to-concrete modulus of elasticity ratio, Eplates/Ec.
Average Values of Properties of Concrete Mixes (adapted from Brownell and Young)
Water Content f'c fc n
(US Gallons per 94 lb 28-day Ultimate Allowable Compressive Modular Ratio
Sack of Cement) Compressive Strength = 0.45*f'c (Es/Ec)
Strength (psi) (psi)
7.5 2000 800 15
6.75 2500 1000 12
6 3000 1200 10
5 3750 1400 8
According to Jawad and Farr, Ec is equal to 57000 multiplied by the square root of f'c
psi.The modulus of elasticity of steel is assumed to be 30 x 106.
Liquid
Home tab: Details > Liquid
Adds liquid data to the element. Normally, Liquid is used on the bottom head of the vessel.
Each element is then filled with the appropriate amount of liquid. We recommend that you model
the entire vessel before adding liquid data.
Delete - Deletes all data for the liquid.
Full - Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of Height in
this Element, assuming that the element is completely filled with the defined liquid.
Fill Elements Now - Click to fill the vessel to the level specified by Height from Datum. If the
height is greater than the vessel height, the vessel is completely filled. The software assigns

Home Tab
detail ID values using the Liquid Density (see "Liquid" on page 120). To use this command
effectively, all elements in the vessel model should be created first.
Liquid Density - Enter the density or specific gravity of the liquid. Typical specific gravities and
densities are shown below. The densities should be converted if you use another units system.
Name Specific Gravity Density (lb/ft3)

Ethane 0.3564 22.23
Propane 0.5077 31.66
N-butane 0.5844 36.44
Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11
N-Pentane 0.6310 39.35
Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
N-hexane 0.6640 41.41
2-methypentane 0.6579 41.03
3-methylpentane 0.6689 41.71
2,2-dimethylbutane 0.6540 40.78
N-heptane 0.6882 42.92
2-methylheptane 0.6830 42.59
2,2-dimethylpentane 0.6782 42.29
1,1-dimethylcyclopentane 0.7592 47.34
N-octane 0.7068 44.08
Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79
Methylcyclopentane 0.7536 46.99
Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85
Methylcyclohexane 0.7740 48.27
Benzene 0.8844 55.15
Toluene 0.8718 54.37
Alcohol 0.7900 49.26
Ammonia 0.8900 55.50
Benzine 0.6900 43.03
Gasoline 0.7000 43.65

Home Tab
Kerosene 0.8000 49.89

Mineral Oil 0.9200 57.37
Petroleum Oil 0.8200 51.14
Water 1.0 62.4
Height in this Element - Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is
used only to calculate the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations, the weight center
of the liquid section is taken at half this height. The value is also used to calculate the operating
pressure at all points below the liquid.
Height from Datum - Enter the height or length of the liquid from the datum line to the operating
or design level. Normally, Liquid is used on the bottom head of the vessel. Each element is
then filled with the appropriate amount of liquid. It is best to model the entire vessel before
adding liquid data. If a value is entered that is greater than the height of the vessel, the software
completely fills the vessel.

Home Tab
Insulation
Home tab: Details > Insulation
Adds insulation to the element.
Delete - Deletes all insulation data.
Full - Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of Height/Length
of Insulation, assuming that the element is fully covered by the defined insulation.
All - Click to cover the entire vessel with insulation. The software assigns detail ID values using
the defined insulation values. To use this command effectively, all elements in the vessel model
should be created first.
Height/Length of Insulation - Enter the height or length of the insulation on the element. This
value is used only to calculate the weight of the insulation. For seismic calculations, the weight
center of the insulated section is taken at half this height. If you have insulation on a horizontal
vessel, the value is the length of the insulated section.
The only software distinction between insulation and lining is that insulation is on the OD
of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Use Insulation to add OD
fireproofing, and Lining to add ID fireproofing.
Thickness of Insulation - Enter the thickness of the insulation or fireproofing.
Density of Insulation - Enter the density of the insulation, such as the following typical
densities:
Material Type Density

(lbs/ft3)
Calcium Silicate 22.5
Foam Glass 16.0
Mineral Wool 14.0
Glass Fiber 11.0
Asbestos 30.0
Careytemp 18.0
Kaylo 10 22.0
Perlite / Celo-temp 1500 23.0
Polyurethane 4.0
Styrofoam 3.0
Type of Insulation - Enter a description for the type of insulation.

Home Tab
Lining
Home tab: Details > Lining
Adds lining to the element.
Delete - Deletes all lining data.
Full - Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of
Height/Length of Lining, assuming that the element is fully covered by the defined lining.
Height/Length of Lining - Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is
used only to calculate the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center
of the lined section will be taken at half this height. If you have a lining in a horizontal vessel, the
value is the length of the lined section.
The only software distinction between insulation and lining is that insulation is on the OD
of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Use Insulation to add OD
fireproofing, and Lining to add ID fireproofing.
Thickness of Lining - Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing.
Density of Lining - Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing, such as the following
typical lining densities:
Material Type Density

(lbs/ft3)
Alumina Brick 170.0
Fire Clay 130.0
High Alumina 130.0
Kaolin 135.0
Magnesite 180.0
Silica 110.0
Insulating Fire Brick 40.0
Concrete 140.0
Cement 100.0
Also see Density of Insulation (see "Insulation" on page 122).

Home Tab
Halfpipe Jacket
Home tab: Details > Halfpipe Jacket
Adds half-pipe jackets to the shell on the selected cylinder element, according to ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix EE.
Half pipe jackets are commonly made by rolling and forming flat bar in a specific radius and
helical curvature that matches that of the parent shell course. These jackets are used to heat or
cool the contents inside of the vessel. For vessels that are under cyclic service, it is advised that
the jacket be attached by both a fillet and full penetration groove weld.
PV Elite performs required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure (Mawp)
calculations for cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The analysis is based on the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix
EE. The analysis is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in Figure EE-4.
Additionally, only nominal pipe sizes from 2 to 4 can be used. Although there are no charts for
sizes 2.5 and 3.5, the software accepts these sizes and performs iterations between the given
charts. If the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size, or has a formed radius, the actual radius is
used in the calculations.
The software takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values and corrosion
allowances are entered, and the software adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
Delete - Deletes all jacket data.
Quick Results - Click to see a quick report of half pipe jacket analysis results.

Home Tab
Length Along Shell of Jacket Section - Enter the distance that the jacket extends along the
length of the shell section. This value cannot be greater than the specified length of the shell
course.
Pitch Spacing - Enter the distance between centers of adjacent half-pipes.

Shell Corrosion Allowance in Jacket - Enter the internal corrosion allowance of the half-pipe
jacket.
Start Angle - Enter the start angle.
Jacket Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature of the jacket.
Jacket Design Pressure - Enter the design pressure of the fluid inside the jacket.
Jacket Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most
Pipe - Click to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box and select values from the piping
database for Jacket Corrosion Allowance and Minimum Jacket Thickness.
Jacket Corrosion Allowance - Displays the corrosion allowance for the pipe that you selected
in Pipe. You can also manually enter a value.
Minimum Jacket Thickness - Displays the thickness for the pipe that you selected in Pipe. You
can also manually enter a value.
Inside Radius of Formed Jacket - Enter a value for a jacket formed from bar or plate. This
value is only used if Formed Radius Type is selected for Nominal Pipe Size.
Nominal Pipe Size - Select the nominal pipe size of the jacket. Select 2 inch, 3 inch, or 4 inch
to use sizes recognized by Appendix EE. Select 2.5 inch or 3.5 inch to interpolate from
Appendix EE graphs. Select Formed Radius Type for a non-standard jacket, and also enter a
value for Inside Radius of Formed Jacket.
Contents Specific Gravity - Enter the specific gravity of any fluid contained within the jacket.
Enter the density or specific gravity of the liquid. Typical specific gravities and densities are
shown below. The densities should be converted if you use another units system.
Name Specific Gravity Density (lb/ft3)

Ethane 0.3564 22.23
Propane 0.5077 31.66
N-butane 0.5844 36.44
Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11

Home Tab
N-Pentane 0.6310 39.35

Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
N-hexane 0.6640 41.41
2-methypentane 0.6579 41.03
3-methylpentane 0.6689 41.71
N-heptane 0.6882 42.92
1,1-dimethylcyclopentane 0.7592 47.34
N-octane 0.7068 44.08
Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79
Methylcyclopentane 0.7536 46.99
Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85
Methylcyclohexane 0.7740 48.27
Benzene 0.8844 55.15
Toluene 0.8718 54.37
Alcohol 0.7900 49.26
Ammonia 0.8900 55.50
Benzine 0.6900 43.03
Gasoline 0.7000 43.65
Kerosene 0.8000 49.89
Mineral Oil 0.9200 57.37
Petroleum Oil 0.8200 51.14
Water 1.0 62.4

Home Tab
Tubesheet
Home tab: Details > Tubesheet
Adds a heat exchange tubesheet to the element. To build and analyze shell and tube heat
exchangers with PV Elite, you must understand the modeling techniques involved:
 First, define and design the pressure envelope or exterior components of the exchanger
first, including all covers, flanges and cylinders. Verify that the design pressures and
temperatures are correctly specified.
 Tubesheets are frequently paired to cylinders or flanges. Click on the front end flange
element just to the left of the tubesheet for proper definition, then click Tubesheet
Analysis to define the assembly. Enter data on each tab of the Heat Exchanger Tubesheet
Input dialog box. The software dynamically adds or removes tabs depending on the type of
exchanger selected. For example, an exchanger with a floating head requires more input
and displays more tabs than a U-tube type exchanger.
 Tubesheets that are either completely integral or integral on the channel side are attached
to the channel cylinder. These tubesheets must have a value for Distance from "From"
Node to define the length of that cylinder because they start at the end of the channel
cylinder.
 Verify that the 3D graphic looks like the needed geometry. Use the transparency feature to
see inside of the exchanger. The software does not draw all tubes to improve performance.
Examples are located in the PV Elite installation folder.
Delete - Deletes all tubesheet data.
HTRI In - Select to open an .dbo HTRI output file.
See also
Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page
129)
Tubesheet Properties Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 133)
Tube Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 140)
Expansion Joint Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 151)
Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 155)
Floating TubeSheet Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 158)
Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) (on page 161)

Home Tab
Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab (Heat Exchanger

Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
General Exchanger Data
Tubesheet Analysis Method - Displays the standard to use for analysis:
 TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
 ASME UHX - ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Section UHX
 PD 5500 (British Code) - British Pressure Vessel Code, Section 3.9, Flat Heat Exchanger
Tubesheets
 EN-13445 ( for U-tube heat exchangers only)
Exchanger Type - Select the type of heat exchanger
 U-Tube has only one tubesheet. The tubes are bent in the form of a "U". The bundle can
removed for maintenance, but the inside of the tube is harder to clean because of the bend.
 Fixed has two tubesheets that are fixed at each end of the exchanger and are connected to
each other via straight tubes. Both the tubesheets are stationary, so differential thermal
expansion can develop between the shell and the tubes. An expansion joint is sometimes
required to absorb the thermal growth.
 Floating has one tubesheet that is fixed (stationary) and one that is free to move. Because
one tubesheet "floats", any differential thermal expansion between the shell and tubes is
absorbed. This category of exchangers is the most versatile and also the costliest. Tubes
can also be cleaned easily compared to U-tube exchangers.
Expansion Joint Type (if any) - Select the expansion joint type.
 No Joint - The exchanger type has no expansion joint type.
 Thin Bellows Type - The joint is comprised of a thin bellows that is very flexible and has
low stiffness. Analysis is performed according to ASME Appendix 26 for thin bellows
expansion joint type.
 Thick Joint Type (Flanged and Flued) - The joint is comprised of a number of shell
elements that are added together to form the expansion joint. A thick joint is stiffer than the

Home Tab
thin joint and its stiffness must be taken into account. Analysis is performed according to
Appendix 5 guidelines, TEMA or Kopp & Sayre Method.
Click Vacuum Pressures and Report Options for this Load Case to open the Report
Print Options dialog box, then select Print Intermediate Results for Expansion Joint
Calculations.
ASME or EN-13445
Floating Exchanger Type - Select the type of floating exchanger, as defined in part UHX of the
ASME code:
 Exchanger with an Immersed Floating Head
 Exchanger with an Externally Sealed Floating Head
 Exchanger with an Internally Sealed Floating Head

Home Tab
Tubesheet/Shell Junction Stress Reduction Option - Select the option used to reduce the
possible over stress at the junction of the tubesheet and the integral cylinder. If the U-tube
tubesheet is welded to the shell then the integral cylinder is the shell cylinder and if the
tubesheet is welded to the channel then it is the channel cylinder. The U-tube stress reduction
options are displayed below:
 Increase Tubesheet Thickness
 Increase Integral Cylinder Thickness - Increase for the shell, or channel, or both.
 Increase Cylinder and Tubesheet Thickness - Increase for both the tubesheet and the
integral cylinder.
 Perform Elastic-Plastic Calculation - Performing the elastic-plastic calculation at that
junction is recommended if all prerequisites are satisfied. For example, the equipment is not
operating in the temperature creep range where time-dependent properties affect material
allowables.
TEMA
TEMA Exchanger Notation - For a TEMA analysis, select a value for each of the three options.
The order of the options is:
1 - Front End
2 - Shell Type
3 - Rear End
The nomenclature for each option is according to the conventions in TEMA page 2, figure N-1.2:

Home Tab
Front End Shell Type Rear End
TEMA Exchanger Class - For a TEMA analysis, select one of the classes of exchangers, R, C,
or B. The class is determined by the severity of service and is discussed in the TEMA code,
paragraph RCB-1.1. The calculation method is the same for all classes, but each class has its
own design restrictions. Verify the correct class to use for your application.

Home Tab
Tubesheet Properties Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog Box)
Description - Enter an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
Element From Node - Displays the From Node for the selected element.
Dist. from "From" Node - Enter the distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer
tubesheet.
Tubesheet Type - Select the type of tubesheet to analyze, according to ASME classifications.
The available selections change depending on the Exchanger Type selected on the Tubesheet
Type and Design Code tab.
 Fixed tubesheet exchangers are subject to loads arising from differential thermal expansion
between the tubes and the shell. They have stationary tubesheets on both sides. Fixed
tubesheet exchangers are classified by ASME UHX:
Configurations Description
A Tubesheet integral with both shell and channel
Tubesheet integral with shell, gasketed with channel, with
B
tubesheet extended as a flange
C
tubesheet not extended as a flange
D Tubesheet gasketed with both shell and channel
 U-Tube exchangers are classified either as integral with the shell, channel, both, or
gasketed on both sides, according to ASME UHX
A Tubesheet integral with both shell and channel
B
C

Home Tab
D Tubesheet gasketed with both shell and channel

Tubesheet integral with channel, gasketed with shell, with
E
Tubesheet integral with channel, gasketed with shell, with
F
 Floating tubesheet exchangers have a stationary tubesheet and a floating tubesheet,
according to ASME UHX classifications:
A Tubesheet integral
B Tubesheet gasketed and extended as a flange
C Tubesheet gasketed and not extended as a flange
D Tubesheet internally sealed
Some ASME UHX Tubesheet configurations are shown below:

Home Tab
 Tubesheet is integral with the shell and is gasketed on the channel side and is not extending
as a flange
 Tubesheet is integral with the shell and is gasketed on the channel side and is extending as
a flange
 Tubesheet is gasketed on both the shell and the channel sides and is not extended as a
flange. In an alternative arrangement the tubesheet is extending as a flange.

Home Tab
 Tubesheet is integral with both the shell and the channel. This is a fixed tubesheet
exchanger, as a flanged and flued expansion joint is used to reduce the differential thermal
expansion, between the tubes and the shell.

Home Tab
The following tubesheet attachment types are used:
Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet.

Tubesheet Thickness - Enter the tubesheet thickness in an uncorroded condition. If it is a
re-rate, then the actual measured thickness is typically used.
Corr. Allow. Shell Side / Channel Side - Enter the corrosion allowance on the shell side (the
inner face of the tubesheet), and the corrosion allowance on the channel side (the outer face of
the tubesheet facing the channel side).
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any) - Enter the depth of a groove in the tubesheet, used to
locate the channel partition plate and its gasket. If there is no groove, such as in a single pass
exchanger, this value is 0.
Weld Leg at Back of Tubesheet (if any) - If the tubesheet is welded to shell and/or channel,
then enter the fillet weld length at the back of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet Assembly is Down/Left? - Select if a horizontal U-tube exchanger is modeled with
the tube bundle facing left and the tubesheet on the right or for a vertical U-tube exchanger.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? - Select if the tubesheet is extended as a flange, so that it is
subject to the bolt load from the mating flange.
Thickness of Extended Portion - When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, enter
the thickness of the portion of the tubesheet that is extended for bolting.

Home Tab
Tfr/T Ratio for U-Tubesheets (optional) - When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is

selected, enter the ratio of the required thickness of the tubesheet flanged extension to the
tubesheet, if reducing the required thickness of the flanged extension is required. The ratio
should be less than 1.0 and more than 0.2. The default value is 1.0. This value is used in TEMA
RCB 7.1342 for U-tube tubesheet exchangers. This entry is optional.
Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet? - When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected,
also select this option if the bolt load is transferred to the tubesheet,extended as the flange. Do
not select this option if the tubesheet is gasketed with both the shell and channel flanges.
Otherwise, the tubesheet can still be extended, but the bolt load is not transferred to the
tubesheet extension. Carefully consider all possible cases, such as the hydrotest. When this
option is not selected, the required thickness of tubesheet extension is not calculated.
UnTubed Lane Area - Enter the total area of all the untubed lanes on the tubesheet. If there is
no pass partition lane then the value is 0. This value is only needed for ASME code analysis. In
a single pass exchanger, this area is UL1 * Do:
The area is UL1 * Do
The maximum limiting value of is 4*Do*p.
Do - Equivalent diameter of outer limit circle
p - Tube pitch
UL1 - Distance between innermost tube hole
centers (width of pass partition lane)
Backing Ring
Backing Ring Thickness - Enter the actual thickness of the backing ring. This value is needed
when a tubesheet is clamped and gasketed on one side by a backing ring or device. For
doubly-split rings, this is the thickness of each piece:
Backing Ring ID / OD - Enter the inside and the outside diameters of the backing ring.

Home Tab
G Dimension for Backing Ring - Enter the effective diameter G, defined as the mid-point of the
contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet. When a tubesheet is clamped and
gasketed on one side by a backing ring or device, the effective diameter of the gasket between
the backing ring and the tubesheet is needed.
ASME Part UHX / EN-13445 Shell Band Data

Is There a Shell Band? - Select if there is a shell band. The shell might have thicker courses at
either end, called shell bands. Shell bands give added strength to the shell to tubesheet region:
Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet - Enter the thickness of the shell bands ts1.
Shell Band Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell band.
Shell Band Length Adjacent to Tubesheet, Front End L1 - Enter the front end length l1 for
the shell band.
Shell Band Length Adjacent to Tubesheet, Rear End L1' - Enter the rear end length l1' for
the shell band.
Also specify the shell band material on the Load Cases tab.
PD 5500
How are Tubesheets Clamped - Select the method of clamping for a fixed or a floating
tubesheet, as defined by PD 5500, Figure 3.9-6:

Home Tab
Stationary Tubesheet Floating Tubesheet

Simply Supported Simply Supported
Simply Supported Clamped
Clamped Simply Supported
Clamped Clamped
If either shell or channel is welded

to a U-tubesheet, then:
 The U-tubesheet is simply
supported if:
 The U-tubesheet is clamped if:
Tube Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)

Number of Holes / Pattern - Enter the total number of tube holes drilled in one of the
tubesheets. Also select the hole pattern: Square, or Triangular. The code expects the holes to
be fairly evenly spaced over the entire area of the tubesheet without large areas that are not
drilled.

Home Tab
For a square rotated pattern, select Square. For a triangular rotated pattern, select
Triangular.
Wall Thickness / Corrosion Allowance - Enter the wall thickness of the exchanger tubes, and
the corrosion allowance to which the tubes are subjected. Typical tube thicknesses are below:
Tube O.D.
B.W.G. Thickness Thickness
inches
gage inches mm
(mm)
22 0.028 0.711
1/4 24 0.022 0.559

(6.35) 26 0.018 0.457
27 0.016 0.406
18 0.049 1.245
3/8 20 0.035 0.889

(9.53) 22 0.028 0.711
24 0.022 0.559
16 0.065 1.651
1/2 18 0.049 1.245

(12.7) 20 0.035 0.889
22 0.028 0.711
12 0.109 2.769
13 0.095 2.413
14 0.083 2.108
15 0.072 1.829
5/8
16 0.065 1.651
(15.88)
17 0.058 1.473
18 0.049 1.245
19 0.042 1.067
20 0.035 0.889
10 0.134 3.404
11 0.120 3.048
12 0.109 2.769
3/4
13 0.095 2.413
(19.05)
14 0.083 2.108
15 0.072 1.829
16 0.065 1.651

Home Tab
Tube O.D. B.W.G. Thickness Thickness

17 0.058 1.473
18 0.049 1.245
20 0.035 0.889
10 0.134 3.404
11 0.120 3.048
12 0.109 2.769
13 0.095 2.413
7/8 14 0.083 2.108

(22.23) 15 0.072 1.829
16 0.065 1.651
17 0.058 1.473
18 0.049 1.245
20 0.035 0.889
8 0.165 4.191
10 0.134 3.404
11 0.120 3.048
12 0.109 2.769
1 13 0.095 2.413
(25.4) 14 0.083 2.108
15 0.072 1.829
16 0.065 1.651
18 0.049 1.245
20 0.035 0.889
7 0.180 4.572
8 0.165 4.191
10 0.134 3.404
11 0.120 3.048
1-1/4
12 0.109 2.769
(31.75)
13 0.095 2.413
14 0.083 2.108
16 0.065 1.651
18 0.049 1.245

Home Tab
Tube O.D. B.W.G. Thickness Thickness

20 0.035 0.889
10 0.134 3.404
1-1/2 12 0.109 2.769

(38.10) 14 0.083 2.108
16 0.065 1.651
11 0.120 3.048
2 12 0.109 2.769
(50.8)
13 0.095 2.413
14 0.083 2.108
10 0.134 3.404
2-1/2
12 0.109 2.769
(63.5)
14 0.083 2.108
10 0.134 3.404
3
12 0.109 2.769
(76.2)
14 0.083 2.108
10 0.134 3.404
2-1/2
12 0.109 2.769
(63.5)
14 0.083 2.108
10 0.134 3.404
3
(76.2) 12 0.109 2.769
14 0.083 2.108
Outside Diameter / Pitch - Enter the outside diameter and the pitch of the tubes. The tube pitch
is the distance between the centers of the adjacent tubes.
Length of Expanded Portion of Tube - Enter the length of tube that is expanded into the
tubesheet hole. This value may not exceed the full thickness of the tubesheet to avoid failure of
the tube at the inner tubesheet face and is usually 80% to 90% of the tubesheet thickness.

Home Tab
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center - Enter the distance from the center of the tubesheet
to the centerline of the tube furthest away.
Distance Between Innermost Tube Centers - Enter the maximum distance between the tube
innermost centers when a partition plate is installed, because the innermost lanes of tubes may
be further apart than the general tube pitch in the remainder of the tubesheet. This is the
maximum distance between the tube innermost centers. If there is no partition plate, this value is
0.
Straight Tube Length - Enter the straight length of the tubes, based on the selection for
Straight Tube Length Measured Between.

Home Tab
Straight Tube Length Measured Between - Select the method of tube length measurement.
Select Inner Faces or Outer Faces.
Perimeter of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the total linear length of the outermost tubes.
This value is only required if the software is calculating the punching shear stress. Otherwise,
the value is 0.
Area of Tube Layout (if needed) - Enter the area defined by the tube layout, including all the
tubes in the tube bundle.
Tube Layout Assistant - Opens the Tube Layout Assistant (on page 149) utility. This utility
helps you determine the number of tubes that will fit in a layout configuration for a heat
exchanger tubesheet.

Home Tab
Import Layout Results - Imports results saved in the Tube Layout Assistant, and fills in
values for basic tube data from the results.
Max. Dist. from Tubesheet to 1st Tube Support - Enter the maximum distance between two
tube supports. Supports, often called baffles, are along the heat exchanger, and are in addition
to the tube support provided by each of the tubesheets. The software uses the maximum
unsupported length to determine the buckling stress in the tubes. Carefully examine the design
of the exchanger, and enter the maximum possible unsupported length. For the example below,
a is the distance between a baffle and a tubesheet, while c, d, and e are the distances between
baffles.
Max. Dist. bet. 2 Tube Supports - Enter the maximum distance from the tubesheet to the first
tube support (baffle). This is the maximum of the a distances shown above.
End Condition k - Enter the tube end condition value k, as defined in the TEMA, ASME, and
PD 5500 codes. Each code uses different values, so verify that you use a value for the code
defined for your model.
'k' Value
Condition
TEMA / ASME PD 5500
Between two tubesheets 0.60 0.50

Between tubesheet and baffle 0.80 0.707
Between two baffles 1.00 1.00
Max Unsupported Len SL - Enter l x k as the effective buckling length of the tubes between
supports.
Tube Hole Diameter, dh - Enter the diameter of the holes drilled in the tubesheet. The tube
hole diameter should be slightly larger than the outside diameter of the tube. This provides a
clearance that is closed as the tube is expanded in the hole.

Home Tab
Number of Grooves in Hole - Enter the number of grooves machined into the tube hole.
Fillet Weld Leg Size (if any) - Enter the fillet weld size, if used when the tube is welded to the
tubesheet, as defined in ASME VIII Div 1, UW-20. The weld may be fillet-only, groove-only, or
both, as shown below.
Groove Weld Leg Size (if any) - Enter the groove weld size, if used when the tube is welded to
the tubesheet, as defined in ASME VIII Div 1, UW-20. The weld may be fillet-only, groove-only,
or both, as shown below.
Design Strength (not for fixed TS types) - Enter the design strength axial load Fd, according
to ASME Code paragraph UW-20. This value is used to determine the minimum acceptable
fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet. The design strength should not
be greater than the tube strength (Ft), defined as Πt(do - t)Sa.
 Because U-tube tubesheet exchangers do not experience differential thermal expansion

between the tubes and the shell, the axial load on the tubes can not be easily calculated.
You can specify your own value for the actual load (required design strength) for U-tube
exchangers. This value is optional for fixed and floating tubesheet exchangers.

Home Tab
 For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the

higher of the actual tube-to-tubesheet load and the entered design strength is used to size
the welds.
 For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the tube
strength (Ft) is used to size the welds.
Tube Weld Joint Type - Select the type of tube/tubesheet weld, as defined in ASME UW-20:
 Full Strength - The design strength is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial
tube strength.
 Partial Strength - Design strength is based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial load.
 Seal/No Weld - The weld is used to seal and has no strength value, so no calculations are
performed.
Tube Joint Type - Select the weld joint type, as defined by TEMA and ASME using ASME
Section VIII, Division 1 Table A-2, Efficiencies and Joint Types:
Joint
Type Description Fr.(test) Fr.(no test)
a Welded only, a >= 1.4t 1.00 .80
b Welded only, t <= a < 1.4 t .70 .55
b-1 Welded only, a < t .70 ...
c Brazed, examined 1.00 .80
d Brazed, not fully examined 0.50 .40
e Welded, a>=1.4t, expanded 1.00 .80
Welded, a<1.4t, expanded, enhanced with 2 or more
f .95 .75
grooves
g Welded, a<1.4t, expanded, enhanced with 1 groove .85 .65
h welded a 1.4t, expanded, not enhanced (no grooves) .70 .50
i Expanded, enhanced with 2 or more grooves .90 .70
j Expanded, enhanced with single groove .80 .65
k Expanded, not enhanced (no grooves) .60 .50
For PD 5500, select the weld joint type as defined by Table 3.9-3, Efficiencies and Joint Types:
Joint
Type Description Fr.(1)
a Welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. .80
b Welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. .55
c Expanded and welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. .80
d Expanded and welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. .55
e Expanded only .50
f Explosion expanded/welded .80
Allowable Joint Load Method - Select the joint allowable load method:

Home Tab
 ASME APP. A – Applicable for fixed and floating tubesheet heat exchangers, covering
many types of tube-tubesheet joints, such as welded, brazed and expanded. The British
code PD 5500 method for determining the tube-tubesheet joint allowable is similar to this
method.
 ASME UW-20 – Applicable for full strength and partial strength tube-tubesheet welds.
 None
Is Tube-Tubesheet Jt. Tested? - Select if the tube/tubesheet joint is tested and qualified for
ASME. Tested joints get an increase in their strength value.
ASME Tube Jt. Reliability Factor - Displays the reliability factor value after a value for Tube
Joint Type is selected.
Tube Expansion, Po - Enter the pressure (Po) exerted on the outside of the tube after it has
expanded. This value is only required for a Tube Joint Type of i, j, and k.
Differential Thermal Expansion, Pt - Enter the interface pressure (Pt) between the tube and
the tubesheet due to differential thermal growth. This value is only required for a Tube Joint
Type of i, j, and k.
The ASME code provides neither formulas to calculate Po and Pt pressures nor
indicate analytical or experimental methods to establish them. If you do not have good method
to establish values of interface pressures then enter 0. This tells the software to ignore the
effects of interface pressures on the joint allowable. If you enter 1 as an approximation for both
of these pressures, then the joint allowable doubles.
Is This a Welded Tube (Not Seamless)? - Select if the tubes are of welded construction.
Specific Gravity of the Operating Liquid in the Tubes - Enter the specific gravity of the fluid
in the tube channel side.
Tube Layout Assistant

The Tube Layout Assistant utility helps you determine the number of tubes that will fit in a
layout configuration for a heat exchanger tubesheet. The utility is available from:
 The Tube Data tab of the Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog box, opened from
Tubesheet Analysis in PV Elite.
 TSLayout.exe, found in the [Product Directory]\COADE\PVElite\ folder.

Home Tab
The distance from the center of the tubesheet to the outermost tube center and the total number
of tubes is calculated. As you change options on the Layout Pattern tab, the layout graphics
dynamically update in the right panel. For example:
 The outermost tube center distance is used in tubesheet stress analysis.

 Tie rods that are located in tube positions are not considered.
 Layout files are saved with the .tsd extension. You can import a layout file into PV Elite.
Layout Pattern Tab

Units - Select Imperial (in) or Metric (mm). You can switch units at any time.
Partitions
Partition Layout - Select the partition plate layout within the shell:
- Horizontal partitions only. With this layout, Number of Horizontal Partitions can have
values from 0 to 8.
For a tubesheet with no partitions, select this option and set Number of Horizontal
Partitions to 0.
- Horizontal partitions with an interior vertical partition. With this layout, Number of
Horizontal Partitions can have values from 2 to 8.
- Horizontal partitions with a full vertical partition. With this layout, Number of Horizontal
Partitions can have values from 2 to 8.
Number of Horizontal Partitions - Type or select the number of horizontal partitions.
Partition Thickness - Type the thickness of the partition plates.
Partition Clearance - Type the clearance distance between tubes and the partition plates.
Symmetrical (Mirror) Layout - Select for a symmetrical tube layout.

Home Tab
Tubes
Tube Pattern - Select the needed tube pattern. Select Square, Square Rotated, Triangular, or
Triangular Rotated.
Tube Boundary (OTL) - Enter the outer tube limit (OTL) diameter of the shell. Tubes cannot be
placed beyond the OTL.
Tube Outer Diameter - Enter the un-corroded outside diameter of each tube.
Tube Pitch - Enter the distance between tube centers.
Nozzle
Nozzle Clearance (Top, Bottom, Left, Right) - Enter the dimension that a nozzle projects
inside the surface of the exchanger shell. Note that all dimensions can be specified. This
allows for side and vertical entry nozzles.
Nozzle Clearance (Top) - Enter the distance that a nozzle projects vertically and from the top of
the surface of the exchanger shell.
Nozzle Clearance (Bottom) - Enter the distance that a nozzle projects vertically and from the
bottom of the surface of the exchanger shell.
Nozzle Clearance (Left) - Enter the distance that a nozzle projects horizontally and from the left
of the surface of the exchanger shell.
Nozzle Clearance (Right) - Enter the distance that a nozzle projects horizontally and from the
right of the surface of the exchanger shell.
Shell
Shell Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the shell.
Expansion Joint Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog Box)
Expansion joints are selected in Expansion Joint Type (if any) on the Tubesheet Type and
Design Code tab. Two types are available:

Home Tab
Thin Joint is comprised of a thin bellows that is very flexible and has a low stiffness. Below are
examples designed according to ASME Appendix 26:
Thick Joint or Flanged/Flued Expansion Joint is comprised of a number of shell elements that
are added together to form the joint. A thick joint is stiffer than the thin joint, and its stiffness
must be taken into account. Below are typical combinations of flexible shell elements for a thick
expansion joint, showing one-half of a convolution and using TEMA nomenclature:
Perform App. 26 Stress and Life Cycle Calculations for the Bellows? - Select if Thin
Bellows Type is selected for Expansion Joint Type (if any) on the Tubesheet Type and
Design Code tab. Then click >> to define the thin joint according to ASME Appendix 26
analysis. For more information, see Thin Joint Options (on page 154).
Number of Flexible Shell Elements - Enter the number of flexible shell elements for a thick
joint. One convolution has two flexible shell elements:

Home Tab
Dist. from "From" Node - Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to the
start of the expansion joint:
Design Option - Select Existing to enter the stiffness characteristics of the expansion joint.
Use this option if you do not want to analyze the expansion joint itself but are just specifying its
spring rate to be used in the tubesheet calculations. For example, you are purchasing the
expansion joint from the manufacturer, who has already analyzed the joint. Select Analyze to
calculate the stiffness characteristics (spring rate) and the stresses in the joint.
Set Defaults - Click to set the dimension starting points for the expansion joint design.
Enter values for the following options to define thick joint characteristics:
Expansion Joint ID
Expansion Joint OD
Wall thickness (te)
Corrosion Allowance
Knuckle Offset Dimension Inside (fa)
Knuckle Offset Dimension Outside (fb)
Knuckle Radius Inside (ra)
Knuckle Radius Outside (rb)
Shell Cylinder Length (Li)
Thick Expansion Joint Calculation Method - Select TEMA or Kopp and Sayre.
Desired Cycle Life - Enter the number of cycles needed for the life of the expansion joint.
User Input Spring Rate Corroded - Enter a value for thin joints and for thick joints when
Existing is selected for Design Option.
User Input Spring Rate Uncorroded - Enter a value for thin joints and thick joints when
Existing is selected for Design Option.
Enter values for the following options to define outer cylinder characteristics:

Home Tab
Is there an Outer Cylinder?

Outer Cylinder Material
Outer Cylinder Thickness (to)
Outer Cylinder Corrosion Allowance
Outer Cylinder Length (lo)
Outer Cylinder Design Temperature
Thin Joint Options

Thin expansion joints are analyzed according to ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26 of
the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Life cycle and stress analysis is performed.
Enter values for the dimensions corresponding to your joint shape:
Dimension Description Sketch

Cross sectional metal area
Af
of one reinforcing fastener
Inside diameter of bellows
Db
convolution
Mean diameter of bellows
Dm
convolution
Cross sectional Diameter

Dr
of the reinforcing ring
U-Shaped Unreinforced Bellows
Bellows collar length. For
the toroidal bellows, Lc is
Lc determined by dividing the
collar cross section area
with the collar thickness.
Effective length of one
Lf
reinforcing fastener
Lt End tangent length
Distance between toroidal
Lw
bellows attachment welds
q Convolution pitch U-Shaped Reinforced Bellows
Mean radius of toroidal

r
bellows convolution
t Bellow nominal thickness

Home Tab
of one ply Toroidal Bellows

tc Collar thickness
w Convolution Depth
delta Q - Enter the differential thermal expansion between the tubes and shell divided by the
number of convolutions. If this value is 0, it is calculated during the analysis. If you are
evaluating this joint by clicking Quick Results , you need to calculate delta Q and enter that
value. In this case, resetting the value to 0 before exiting the dialog box is recommended. A
non-zero positive value will be used by the software regardless of what was actually computed
for delta Q. This entry is optional.
Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)

Specifying load cases in addition to the design case enables PV Elite to perform calculations for
different combinations of pressures and temperatures, ensuring that all the possible conditions
are considered. Examples of additional cases are: shut-down, start-up, and upset. For each load
case, values can be entered as needed for:
 Shell - The shell between the tubesheets.
 Channel - The channel at the ends of the exchanger.
 Tubes - The exchanger tubes.
 Tubesheet - The tubesheet. For fixed and floating tubesheets, it is one of the pair.
 Shell Band - The thicker shell courses at either end of the main shell next to tubesheet.
Enter 0 for any options that are not needed.
Number of cases to process - Select the number of load cases to run. You can specify up to
eight different load cases.
Active Load Case - Click the up and down arrows to cycle through the load cases.
For each active load case, enter values as needed for the following:
Case Description - Enter a description.
Vacuum Pressures and Report Options for this Load Case - Click to open the Report Print
Options Dialog Box (on page 157).
Design Pressure - Enter the design pressures for the shell side and for the channel side.
Design Temperature - Enter the design temperatures for the shell, channel, tubes, and
tubesheet.
Specify Operating Temperatures (UHX) - For ASME UHX, select, and then enter the
operating temperatures for the shell, channel, tubes, and tubesheet. UHX-13.4(b) Elastic moduli,
yield strengths, and allowable stresses are taken at design temperatures. For cases involving
thermal loading (loading cases 4, 5, 6, and 7), you can use the operating temperatures instead
of the design temperatures (see UG-20).
Material - Enter the name of the material for tubes, tubesheet and, shell bands. This software
contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B,
and 3. Alternatively, use Database Lookup and Properties.
Mean Metal Temperature Along Length - Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell and
tubes.
Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim - Enter the actual temperature of metal at the outer rim
of the tubesheet, where the tubes are in the outer rows, for the shell, channel, and tubesheet.

Home Tab
Database Lookup and Properties - Click Tubes, Tubesheet, and Shell Band to select a
material for each directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). The selection
is then entered into Material. To modify the material properties, click to open the Material
Properties Dialog Box (on page 474). Doing so only changes the properties for this analysis. It
does not modify the database.
Exchanger subject to cyclic or dynamic reactions due to pressure or thermal variations?
(see UHX-13.8) - Select to calculate for the effect of radial thermal expansion adjacent to the
tubesheet, according to UHX 13.8 (fixed tubesheet heat exchangers) or UHX 14.6 (floating
tubesheet heat exchangers).
Modulus of Elasticity
User-Defined Values - Select to enter your own modulus of elasticity values, overriding the
material properties from the design code selected for analyzing the exchanger.
Modulus at Temperature - Enter the modulus of elasticity at the design temperature.
Modulus at Mean Metal Temp Along Length - Enter the modulus of elasticity at the actual
metal temperature.
Modulus at Mean Metal Temperature - Enter the modulus of elasticity for the actual metal
temperature at the channel.
Modulus at Ambient Temperature - Enter the modulus of elasticity at ambient temperature.
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (alpha values)

User-Defined Values - Select to enter your own coefficient of thermal expansion values,
overriding the material properties from the design code selected for analyzing the exchanger.
Alpha at Mean Metal Temp Along Length - Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell,
tubes, and shell band.
Alpha at Metal Temp at Tubesheet Rim - Enter the actual temperature of metal at the outer
rim of the tubesheet where the tubes are in the outer rows.
Differential Pressure Design? - Select to perform the analysis only for the difference between
the shell side pressure and the tube side pressure.
Differential Design Pressure - Enter the differential pressure when Differential Pressure
Design? is selected. If you do not enter a value, the software uses the effective pressures
dictated by the code. this entry is optional.
Is the Exchanger Operating in the Creep Range (skip EP, use 3S for Sps)? - Select if the
exchanger is operating in high-temperature creep range. This option only applies if the method
used to analyze the heat exchanger is ASME.
Expansion Joint Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database
with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows
a material to be selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To
modify the material properties of the selected element, click to open the Material Properties
Dialog Box (on page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element for this
analysis. It does not modify the database.

Home Tab
Report Print Options Dialog Box

Sets options for analysis result reports of each load case.
Select the following as needed:
 For ASME fixed/stat. tubesheets, print intermediate results in tabular form
 Print intermediate results for expansion joint calculations
 For TEMA and PD:5500 run multiple load cases - Runs the following load cases for fixed
tubesheets:
Load Load Case Description

Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Shell-side / Channel-side Vacuum Pressures - Enter positive values. For example, for full
atmospheric vacuum condition enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is entered, then 0 psi is
used.
Set detailed printout options for the currently selected load case - When you want to see
detailed equations and intermediate calculations in the results, select the corroded and
uncorroded load cases. For all other load cases, the software generates summarized, tabular
results.
For ASME tubesheets, the following load cases are run for fixed and floating tubesheet
exchangers:

Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
For ASME stationary tubesheet configuration "d" and ASME floating tubesheet configurations
"B", "C" and "D", the design is based only on load cases 1, 2 and 3.

Home Tab
The following load cases are performed for ASME U-tube tubesheet exchangers:

Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
For all ASME exchangers, if vacuum pressures are specified, then an additional load case is
run:

Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Additionally, if Differential Pressure Design? is selected on the Load Cases tab, then only
certain load cases are run.
 Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.

 Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
 Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion.
 Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.
Floating TubeSheet Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog Box)
Description - Enter the description for the floating tubesheet. The description appears on the
final report.
Floating Tubesheet Type - Select the type of floating tubesheet to analyze, according to ASME
UHX:
 (a) Floating tubesheet, integral
 (b) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, extended as flange
 (c) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, no extended, w/backing device

Home Tab
 (d) Floating tubesheet, internal sealed
Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet.

Tubesheet Thickness - Enter the tubesheet thickness in uncorroded condition. If it is a re-rate,
then the actual measured thickness is typically used.
Corr. Allow. Shell Side / Channel Side - Enter the corrosion allowance on the shell side (the
inner face of the tubesheet), and the corrosion allowance on the channel side (the outer face of
the tubesheet facing the channel side).
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any) - Enter the depth of a groove in the tubesheet, used to
locate the channel partition plate and its gasket. If there is no groove for example in a single
pass exchanger, this value is 0.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? - Select if the tubesheet is extended as a flange, so that it is

subject to the bolt load from the mating flange.

Home Tab
Thickness of Extended Portion - When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, enter

the thickness of the portion of the tubesheet that is extended for bolting.
Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet? - When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected,

also select this option if the bolt load is transferred to the tubesheet,extended as the flange. Do
not select if the tubesheet is gasketed with both the shell and channel flanges. Otherwise, the
tubesheet can still be extended, but the bolt load is not transferred to the tubesheet extension.
Carefully consider all possible cases, such the hydrotest. When this option is not selected, the
required thickness of tubesheet extension is not calculated.
Integral Channel Properties for ASME Floating Configuration A

These properties are needed for floating heat exchangers with the floating tubesheet welded to
head.
 Channel Thickness tc
 Channel Design Temperature
 Channel Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with
most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Matl... allows a
material to be selected directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433). To
modify the material properties of the selected element, click to open the Material
Properties Dialog Box (on page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element
for this analysis. It does not modify the database.
In ASME UHX nomenclature this is Configuration A:
Exchanger with an Immersed Floating Head:

Home Tab
Exchanger with an Externally Sealed Floating Head:
Exchanger with an Internally Sealed Floating Head:
Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet

Input Dialog Box)
Description - Enter the description for the spherical cover. The description appears on your
final report.
Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature is used to
interpolate the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Type of Floating Head (ASME App. 1-6) - Select the type of floating head or spherically dished
cover, corresponding to Figure 1-6 of ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1:

Home Tab
b - Solid thick head, spherically

dished.
c - Thin dished head,
continuous across flange face.
d - Spherical cap welded to
flange ID.
None
d is the most common
type of head used for heat
exchanger floating heads.
Click to open the Flange and Gasket Information dialog box. Enter flange, gasket,
and bolt data for the select floating head type.
Flange Thickness (tf) - Enter the through thickness of the flange. For type c spherical caps,
this includes the thickness of the head.
Inside Crown Radius (L) - Enter the inside crown radius, usually roughly equal to the flange ID.
This value may be any dimension greater than the inside radius of the flange.
Head Thickness (t) - Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate used to build the floating
head or spherical cap, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing floating head or
spherical cap.
Head Internal Corrosion Allowance - Enter the corrosion allowance on the concave side of the
head. The software adjusts the thickness and the diameter for the evaluation of allowable
pressure. The allowance is also added to the required thicknesses. Some common corrosion
allowances are:
 0.0625 - 1/16"
 0.1250 - 1/8"
 0.2500 - 1/4"
Head External Corrosion Allowance - The software adjusts the thickness and the diameter for
the evaluation of allowable pressure. The allowance is also added to the required thicknesses.
Slotted Flange? - Select if the flange has slotted bolt holes for quick opening. A slotted flange
has bolt holes extending radially to the outer edge of the flange. The software automatically
adjusts for this condition; you do not have to change the flange outside diameter.
Full Face Gasket Option - Select Program Selects, Full Face Gasket, or Not a Full Face. A
full face gasket extends from the ID to the OD of the flange, enclosing the bolt holes. These
gaskets are usually soft materials, such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the bolt stresses do
not go too high during gasket seating. The software adjusts the flange analysis and the design
formulas to account for the full face gasket.

Home Tab
Head Material Name - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with
Flange Material Name - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with
Floating Head Factors (Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab)

Compute "F" even if the pressure is 0 - Select to calculate the factor F in the floating head
even when the internal pressure is zero. F is a direct function of the internal pressure. If the
internal pressure is 0, then F is equal to 0. However, a conservative interpretation of the code
always calculates F regardless of the case being analyzed. Typically, the flange-bolt-up case is
in question because there is no internal pressure when bolting up the unit, so this option is not
selected. Select this option only for a conservative calculation.
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline (hr) - Enter the distance hr from the
flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and the flange. Enter the value in the
corroded condition. The value is positive if it is above the flange centroid, and negative if it is
below the flange centroid. This distance is used in the code calculation but not when Perform
Soehren's Calc is selected (where Q is used). See the illustration below.
Distance from Flange Top to Flange/Head Intersection - Enter the distance from the top of
the floating head flange to the intersection of the dished head and the flange in the uncorroded
condition, and then click Compute. The software considers the corrosion allowance, calculates
hr in the corroded condition, and places its value in Distance from Flange Centroid to Head
Centerline (hr). Other than for this purpose, this value is not used by the software.
Compute - If Distance from Flange Top to Flange/Head Intersection is known, you can enter
it (in the uncorroded condition) and click Compute. The software considers the corrosion

Home Tab
allowance, calculates hr in the corroded condition, and places its value in Distance from
Flange Centroid to Head Centerline (hr).
Perform Soehren's Calc - Select to perform Soehren's calculation, a more detailed analysis of
the interaction between the spherical cap and the flange. The stresses calculated are frequently
acceptable for heads or flanges that are slightly less thick than required by the normal code
rules. This analysis can only be done for type d floating heads. Par. 1-6(h) of the code allows
this type of analysis.
Dim Q - Enter the distance Q from the flange bolting face to the intersection of the attached
head inside diameter and the flange. Q is used in the Soehren's calculation, but not in the code
calculation (where hr is used). See the illustration above.
Backing Ring Data (Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab)

Is There a Backing Ring? - Select if a backing ring is used. A backing ring is a second flange
used to sandwich the tubesheet of a floating head heat exchanger.
Backing Ring Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with
Backing Ring Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the backing ring. This value is
usually slightly larger than the inside diameter of the flange.
Backing Ring Outside Diameter - Enter the outside diameter of the backing ring. This value is
usually slightly larger than the inside diameter of the flange.
Backing Ring Thickness - Enter the actual through thickness of the backing ring. For doubly
split rings (when 2 is selected for Number of Splits in Backing Ring), this is the thickness of
each piece.
Number of Splits in Backing Ring - Select the number of splits in the ring, if any, for
loose-type flanges. Select 0, 1, or 2. Split flanges are typically ring-type flanges. A split is used
when the flange must be completely removable from the vessel.
 Ring with a single split:
When the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the split is along the diameter, and
the design bending moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0.
 Ring with a double split:

Home Tab
A ring with two splits has two stacked rings, with each half split along the diameter. The
software analyzes each ring as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the
design bending moment. Backing Ring Thickness is the thickness of each piece. The
thickness of the total ring is twice this value. The pair of rings are assembled so that the
splits in one ring are at 90º from the splits in the other ring.
TEMA RCB-5.141 shows different styles of backing devices. Styles A and D have a split
ring, but the moment used to design them is not increased. When you have one of these styles,
enter zero as the number of splits to get the same effect in CodeCalc (available by clicking
Component Analysis ).
Generic Clip
Home tab: Details > Generic Clip
Adds a clip to the vessel. In the dialog, enter clip support information on cylinders as well as
elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads. Clips are used to carry load, such as from piping,
ladders, and platforms. These loads, along with pressures, cause local stress at the clip support
location. WRC 107/537 is used to calculate the local stresses and compare them to the
allowables.
Sustained, expansion, and occasional loads on the clip must be determined from a separate
analysis and entered. Clips supporting piping generally have loads in all categories, while
platform clips generally have only sustained and occasional loads.
From Node - Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Home Tab
Description of Clip - Enter an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique
Distance from "From" Node - Enter the distance from the From Node to the center of the clip.
vessel drawing and the centerline of the clip at the point where it is attached to the shell,
following the same conventions used for a nozzle. For more information, see Layout Angle.
Is the Clip Circular? - Select if the clip has a circular cross-section.
Clip Parameters
Circumferential Length (C11) - Enter the length that the clip extends around the circumference
of the cylinder element. For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method,
the clip must be square in cross-section.
Longitudinal Length (C22) - Enter the length that the clip extends along the length of the
cylinder element. For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the clip
must be square in cross-section.
Thickness - Enter the distance that the pad extends radially from the shell surface or reinforcing
pad. The thickness is not used to calculate stresses, but is used to calculate the weight and
draw the 3D image.
When Is the Clip Circular? is selected, the clip parameters are Clip Outside Diameter,
Clip Outside Projection, and Wall Thickness.
Pad Parameters
Reinforcing pad used? - Select if there is a pad under the clip.
Circumferential Length (C11p) - Enter the length that the pad extends around the
circumference of the cylinder element. For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using
this method, the pad must be square in cross-section.
Longitudinal Length (C22p) - Enter the length that the pad extends along the length of the
cylinder element. For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the pad
must be square in cross-section.
Thickness - Enter the distance that the pad extends radially from the shell surface. The
thickness is not used to calculate stresses, but is used to calculate the weight and draw the 3D
image.
When Is the Clip Circular? is selected, the pad parameters are Pad Diameter and
Thickness.
Fatigue Parameters
Use Kn and Kb - Select to use the Kn and Kb parameters, based on the fillet radius for the clip
or pad and used for fatigue analysis.
Clip Fillet Radius - Enter the clip fillet weld radius. See Appendix B in the WRC 107/537
bulletin for illustrations and more information.
Pad Fillet radius - Enter the pad fillet weld radius. See Appendix B in the WRC 107/537 bulletin
for illustrations and more information.
Local Attachment Loads at the Shell Surface

You can enter values in the following load sets:

Home Tab
 Sustained - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.

 Expansion - (EXP) Secondary, self-limiting thermal expansion loads.
 Occasional - (OCC) Irregularly occurring, short-term loads, such as wind loads, seismic
loads, and water hammer.
These local loads are used to analyze the stresses at the base of the clip in the shell. They are
not used by the software to produce a global bending moment over the entire vessel cross
section (Use Force and Moment to do this). The positive orientation of the loads is shown
below. These loads are generally calculated, given as defaults or calculated by a stress analysis
program such as CAESAR II.
The following force/moment convention is used for a square or circular clip on a cylindrical
element:
P - Radial Force
Vc - Circ. Shear
Force
Vl - Long. Shear
Force
Mc - Circ. Moment
Ml - Long. Moment
Mt - Torsional
Moment
The following force/moment convention is used for a square or circular clip on a spherical
vessel:

Home Tab
P - Radial Force
V2 - Shear Force, D to
C
V1 - Shear Force, B to
A
M1 - Moment, B axis
M2 - Moment, C axis
Previous - If you created more than one clip on the element, click to go back to the previous
clip.
Go To Next Clip - If you created more than one clip on the element, click to go to the next clip.
Add New Clip - Click to add a new clip to the element.
Delete - Deletes all data for the current clip.
Lifting Lug Data

Home tab: Details > Lifting Lug Data
Adds lugs to the selected element. You can create:

Home Tab
 Flat-type lugs on vertical vessels, generally place near the top head.
 Perpendicular, ear-type lugs for horizontal vessels.
The software calculates the reactions on each lug, the stresses in each lug, and the stress in the
welds.
Delete - Deletes all data for the lug.
vessel drawing and the centerline of the lug at the point where it is attached to the shell,
following the same conventions used for a nozzle. For more information, see Layout Angle on
the Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab) (on page 73).
Lug Contact Width (w) - For a flat lug, enter the width of the lug at the base. For a
perpendicular lug, enter the longer length of the lug along the surface.
Diameter of Hole in Lug (dh) - Enter the diameter of the hole cut or drilled into most lifting lugs.
Radius of Semi-circular Arc (r) - Enter the radius of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug
where the hole is located. This is typically circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular
lugs.

Home Tab
Height from Bottom to Center of Hole (h) - Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel
from the center of hole to the bottom of the lug.
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole (off) - Enter the distance from the center of the hole
to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular lugs this is to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat
this is 1/2 the thickness of the lug.
Lug Fillet Weld Size (tf) - Enter the fillet weld leg size. For stress analysis of the welds, the leg
dimension is converted into the throat dimension.
Length of Weld Along Side of Lifting Lug (wl) - Enter the length of the long welds on the side
of the lifting lug. The software multiplies this value by two when determining the weld area.
Length of Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug (wb) - Enter the length of the short weld. This is
usually the bottom weld.
Collar Thickness (tc) - If the lug has a collar, enter the thickness. The thickness is measured
from the outside surface of the lug to the edge of the collar.
Collar Diameter (dc) - Enter the diameter of the collar. This value is mainly used for
documentation.
Lug Thickness (t) - Enter thickness of the lifting lug plate.
Lug Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of
Sling Angle from Horizontal - Enter the sling angle in degrees:
Occasional Load Factor - Enter an occasional load factor, used in many construction codes to
increase the allowable stress for an event that is considered occasional in nature. Such
occasional loads are wind, seismic, and the lifting of a vessel. The occasional load factor is
multiplied by other terms in the allowable stress equation to get the overall allowable. If you do
not want to use this value, enter 1.

Home Tab
Impact Factor - Enter the impact factor to account for lifting a vessel when it may be pulled
quickly with sudden force. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high as
3.0 may be entered. The software multiplies the lifting loads by the impact factor. The theoretical
maximum value for this value is 2.0.
Number of Lugs in Group - Enter the number of lugs in this group:

 For a horizontal vessel, there is typically one lifting lug on each side of the vessel. The
number of lugs in a group is 1. If there are two lugs on each end (such as for a large
vessels), the value is 2.
 For a vertical vessel, there are typically two flat lugs located near the top of the vessel. The
number of lugs in a group is 2. A value of 1 for a vertical vessel should never be used.
Additional Normal Force (Fn) or Tangential Force on Lug - Enter an additional normal force
acting on the lifting lug. This force is typically acting when there is no spreader bar used in the
lifting procedure. For a horizontal vessel, enter the tangential force acting on the lug.
The normal or tangential force causes weak axis bending on the lug. Even a moderate force can
cause a high bending stress. This is to be avoided. If there is an additional force, enter the value
for each lug. The software applies the impact factor to this value.
-
Is there a pad? - Select if there is a pad under the lug.
Circumferential Width (wpb) - Enter the width of the pad along the circumference of the
vessel.

Home Tab
Longitudinal Length (wpl) - Enter the length of the pad along the long axis of the vessel.
Pad Thickness (thkp) - Enter the thickness of the pad plate.
Pad Fillet Weld Size (tfp) - Enter the weld leg length for the pad fillet weld.
Is the lug slotted? - Select if the lifting lug is slotted.
Slot Radius (rs) - Enter the slot radius.
Slot Weld Height (swh) - Enter the slot weld height along the axis of the vessel from the center
of slot hole to the bottom of the lug.
ASME Appendix 9 Jacket

Home tab: Details > ASME Appendix 9 Jacket
Adds ASME Appendix 9. Type 1 cylindrical jackets to the shell on the selected cylinder element,
according to ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 9.
This command is only available when Cylinder is selected as the Element Type, and
ASME Section VIII-Division 1 was selected as the design code for File > New (on page 62).
A Type 1 jacket is specified as either a jacket or a vapor belt. Vapor belts cover perforated areas
of some vessels but are more typically found on shell and tube heat exchangers. Jackets can
have separate design conditions from the parent cylindrical element. Vapor belts have the same
design conditions as the parent cylindrical element. The software calculates the required
thickness and MAWP for the jacket and closure bars. The MAWP of vapor belts can influence
nozzle design as well as the overall MAWP of the vessel. The software calculates the stiffened
length of the inner vessel to account for the closure bars.
Both jackets and vapor belts can have nozzles attached. If a nozzle has an internal projection
that cuts into the parent shell, the nozzle reinforcement calculations are for the parent shell. If
the nozzle does not have an internal projection, the calculation is for the jacket. According to
Appendix 9, nozzle calculations are not required for both the jacket and inner vessel.
The internal pressure in a vapor belt adds to the vacuum (external) pressure in the inner shell.
This extra pressure is reflected in the external pressure report generated during analysis.
 Appendix 9 jackets are joined by inter-connecting pipework, affecting static pressure head
considerations.
 Enter the specific gravity of the fluid in the jacket or vapor belt. The software uses this value
to calculate the weight of the fluid in the annular area.
Delete - Deletes all jacket data.
From Node - Displays the From Node for the selected element. The From Node is the
software-generated node number describing the starting location of the element. The value
cannot be modified.
Jacket Length L - Enter the length of the jacket along the cylinder element.
Dist. from 'From' Node to Jacket Bottom - Enter the distance from the From node to the
bottom of the jacket.
Jacket Description -Enter a description for the jacket.
Is this a Vapor / Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? - Select if the jacket is a vapor belt or
distribution belt.

Home Tab
Select Jacket Figure (Fig. 9-2) - Displays the Type 1 jacket configuration. Other jacket
configurations in ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 9, Fig 9-2 are not supported.
Jacket Longitudinal Efficiency - Enter the welded joint efficiency, as defined in ASME Section
VIII, Division 1, Table UW-12. For the weld on a Type 1 jacket (welded from both sides or with a
removable backing strip), use the following efficiencies:
 Full radiography: 1.00
 Spot x-ray: 0.85
 No radiography: 0.70
Jacket Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most
Design Temperature, Internal - Enter the design temperature for internal pressure. Available
when Is this a Vapor / Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? is not selected.
Design Temperature, External - Enter the design temperature for external pressure. Available
Jacket Pressure, Internal - Enter the design pressure for internal pressure analysis. Available
Jacket Pressure, External - Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. Available
Jacket Thickness - Enter the jacket thickness.
Jacket Corrosion Allowance - Enter the thickness of the corrosion allowance for the jacket.
Jacket Length for External Pressure - Enter the length of the jacket to use for external
pressure calculations.
Jacket Inside Diameter - Enter the inside diameter of the jacket.
Specific Gravity of Contents - Enter the specific gravity of any fluid contained within the jacket.
This value is usually 1.0.

Home Tab
Half Apex Angle - When Type (b-2), Type (c), or Type (k) is selected for Select Closure Type
(fig. 9-5), enter the half apex angle θmax (or theta max). For example:
For more information, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for
half apex angles on typical geometries.
For most internal pressure calculations, the half apex angle should not be greater than
30º, though the software calculates results for up to 60º. For external pressure calculations, the
angle must not be greater than 60º.
Select Closure Type (Fig. 9-5) - Select one of the following closure types, according to Fig. 9-5
of Appendix 9:
Type (a)9
Type (b-1)

Home Tab
Type (b-2)
Type (b-3)
Type (c)

Home Tab
Type (d-1)
Type (d-2)
Type (e-1)

Home Tab
Type (e-2)
Type (f-1)
Type (f-2)

Home Tab
Type (f-3)
Type (g-1)
Type (g-2)
Type (g-3)

Home Tab
Type (g-4)
Type (g-5)
Type (g-6)
Type (h, i-1(a))

Home Tab
Type (h, i-1(b))
Type (h, i-2)
Type (k)
Closure Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with most
Closure Thickness - Thickness of the plate used for the closure.
Total Corrosion Allowance - Enter the thickness of the corrosion allowance for the closure.

Home Tab
API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis

Home tab: Details > API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis
Adds API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis information on the selected element.
Previous - Select to view the previous flawed defined on the selected element.
Add New Flaw - Select to define another flaw on the selected element.
Delete - Select to delete the current flaw from the element.
From Node - Displays the From Node for the selected element.
Distance from 'From' Node - Enter the distance between the From Node and the flaw that you
are defining.
New Damage Description - Type a description for the damage.
Flaw Type - Select the flaw type.
 Part 4 (General Metal Loss) - Select this option when the general metal loss (uniform or
local, inside or outside) exceeds, or is predicted to exceed, the corrosion allowance before
the next scheduled inspection. Assessments are based on point thickness readings and
thickness profiles (see paragraph 4.3.3), whether the metal loss is uniform or local, and the
degree of conservatism acceptable for the assessment. You can use the methodology
shown in Figure 4.2 to determine the assessment procedure for the evaluation.
 Part 5 (Local Thinning Area) - Select this option when the metal loss on the surface of the
component is localized, and the length metal loss is about the same as the width.
 Part 5 (Groove like Flaw) - Select this option when the flaw is either:
 Groove – A local, elongated, thin-spot caused by directional erosion or corrosion. The
length of the metal loss is significantly greater than the width.
A sharp radius might be present at the base of a groove-like flaw.
 Gouge – A local, elongated, mechanical removal or relocation of material from the
component surface resulting is a reduction in wall thickness at the flaw. The length of
the gouge is much greater than the width. The material might have been cold worked in
the formation of the flaw. Gouges are typically caused by mechanical damage, for
example, denting and gouging of a section of pipe by mechanical equipment during the
excavation of a pipeline. Gouges are frequently associated with dents due to the nature
of mechanical damage. If a gouge is present, the assessment procedures of Part 12
shall be used.
 Part 6 (Pitting) - Select this option when one of the four types of pitting is present:
 widely scattered pitting over a significant region of the component,
 a local thin area (LTA) located in a region of widely scattered pitting,
 localized regions of pitting, and
 pitting confined within a region of an LTA.
A flowchart shown in Figure 6.2 provides details of the required assessment procedures.
Depending on the type of pitting damage, you must use for evaluation either assessment
methods in Part 6 or a combination of assessment methods in Part 5 and Part 6.
Assessment Level - Select the assessment level. See the description below that corresponds
to your selection for Flaw Type.

Home Tab
Part 4 (General Metal Loss)

Select Level 1 and Level 2 if these four points are true. Otherwise select Level 1 only or Level
2 only.
 The original design criteria was in accordance with a recognized code or standard (see Part
1, paragraphs 1.2.2 or 1.2.3).
 The metal loss region has relatively smooth contours without notches (that is, negligible
local stress concentrations).
 The component is not in cyclic service.
A component is not in cyclic service if the component is subjected to less than 150
cycles throughout its previous operating history and future planned operation, or the
component satisfies the cyclic service screening procedure in Annex B1 paragraph B1.5.2.
A cycle is defined as pressure or temperature variations including operational changes and
start-ups and shut-downs.
 The following limitations on component types and applied loads are satisfied:
 Level 1 Assessment – Type A Components subject to internal pressure or external
pressure (that is, supplemental loads are assumed to be negligible).
 Level 2 Assessment – Type A or B Components (see Part 4, paragraph 4.2.5) subject to
internal pressure, external pressure, supplemental loads (see Annex A, paragraph
A.2.7), or any combination thereof.
Part 5 (Local Metal Loss)

Select Level 1 and Level 2 if these five points are true. Otherwise select Level 1 only or Level
2 only.
 The original design criteria were in accordance with a recognized code or standard (see Part
 The material is considered to have sufficient material toughness. If there is uncertainty
regarding the material toughness, then a Part 3 assessment should be performed. If the
component is subject to embrittlement during operation due to temperature or the process
environment, a Level 3 assessment should be performed. Temperature or process
conditions that result in material embrittlement are discussed in Annex G.
 A flaw characterized as a groove in accordance with paragraph 5.2.1.b has a groove radius
that satisfies the requirements in paragraph 5.4.2.2.f.
Part 6 (Pitting)
Select Level 1 and Level 2 if these six points are true. Otherwise select Level 1 only or Level 2
only.

Home Tab
 The original design criteria were in accordance with a recognized code or standard (see Part
 The material is considered to have sufficient material toughness. If there is uncertainty
regarding the material toughness, then a Part 3 assessment should be performed. If the
component is subject to embrittlement during operation due to temperature and/or the
process environment, a Level 3 assessment should be performed. Temperature and/or
process conditions that result in material embrittlement are discussed in Annex G.
 Additional requirements for Level 1 Assessments are:
 The pitting damage is arrested.
 The pitting damage is located on only one surface (either inside or outside) of the
component.
 The pitting damage is composed of many pits; individual pits or isolated pares of pits
should be evaluated using the assessment procedures in Part 5.
 Additional requirements for Level 2 Assessments are:
 The pitting damage is characterized by localized regions of pitting, an LTA located in a
region of widely scattered pitting, or pitting that is confined within an LTA.
 The pitting damage is located on either one surface or both surfaces of the component
and the pitting damage is not overlapping (see Figure 6.15)
 The pitting damage is composed of many pits; individual pits or isolated pairs of pits
should be evaluated as LTAs using the assessment procedures in Part 5.
A Level 2 only assessment should be performed if:
 An appropriate pit comparison chart cannot be found (see paragraph 6.3.3.1).
 A more detailed assessment of widespread pitting (inclusion of the pit-couple orientation) is
required.
Future Corrosion Allowance (FCA) - Enter the future corrosion allowance (the projected future
metal loss). The future corrosion allowance should be based on past inspection information or
corrosion rate data relative to the component material in a similar environment. Corrosion rate
data can be obtained from API Publication 581 or other sources (see paragraph A.2.7 of Annex
A). The FCA is calculated by multiplying the anticipated corrosion rate by the future service
period considering inspection interval requirements of the applicable inspection code.
Note for Part 6 – Per paragraph 6.2.7, The future corrosion allowance (FCA) shall be based on
the projected future metal loss in the pitting region. The FCA is not applied to the depth or
diameter of the pits.

Home Tab
Remaining Strength Factor (RSFa) - Enter the allowable remaining strength factor (RSFa).
The recommended RSFa for all major design codes per the 2007 edition of API 579 is 0.90. See
Table 2.3.
Point Thickness Readings (Part 4 only) - Select this option to use point thickness readings in
the assessment. This option is only available when Flaw Type is set to Part 4 (General Metal
Loss).
If you select this option, you are confirming the assumption of uniform metal loss. Point
thickness readings may be used to characterize the metal loss in a component if there are no
significant differences in the thickness reading values obtained at inspection monitoring
locations.
A minimum of 15 thickness readings should be used unless the level of NDE used can confirm
that the metal loss is general. In some cases, additional readings might be required based on
the size of the component, the construction details used, and the nature of the environment
resulting in the metal loss. A sample data sheet to record thickness readings is shown in Table
4.2.
If the Coefficient of Variation (COV) of the thickness readings is greater than 10%, then
thickness profiles shall be considered for use in the assessment (see paragraph 4.3.3.3). The
COV is defined as the standard deviation divided by the average.
Critical Thickness Profile - Select this option to use thickness profiles to characterize the metal
loss in a component. You must use this option if there is a significant variation in the thickness
readings, which can indicate the metal loss might be localized. Thickness profiles should be
used to character the remaining thickness and size of the region of metal loss.
Pitting Data (Part 6 Only) - Select this option to consider pitting data. This option is only
available when Flaw Type is set to Part 6 (Pitting).
 Level 1 Assessment - The surface damage is measured in terms of pitted area and the
maximum pit depth are used to quantify the extent of pitting damage. You can use the
standard pit charts (see Figures 6.3 to 6.10) to compare the actual damage on the
component to the damage represented on the pit chart. The pit chart and an estimate of the
maximum pit depth are used to determine acceptability. A cross sectional UT thickness scan
can determine the pitting profile. Guidelines for determining the maximum pit depth are in
paragraph 6.3.4.1 of the code.
 Level 2 Assessment - The surface damage is measured using a pit-couple (two pits
separated by a solid ligament, see Figure 6.11). The metal loss of each pit in a pit-couple is
modeled as an equivalent cylinder. The diameter and depth of each pit, and the distance
between the pit centers are also required. The orientation of the pit-couple in the biaxial
stress field can also be included in the assessment (see Figure 6.11). The depth and
diameter of a pit should be carefully measured because of the variety of pit types that can
occur in service (see Figure 6.12). If the pit has an irregular shape, a diameter and depth
that encompasses the entire shape should be used in the assessment.
Edit Measurement Data - Activates the API 579 Point Thickness Readings dialog box. Use this
dialog to enter thickness readings.
Thickness Approach (Parts 4 and 5 only) - Select this option to calculate the remaining life of
a component based on a minimum required thickness for the intended service conditions,
thickness measurements from an inspection, and an estimate of the anticipated corrosion rate.
This method is acceptable for calculating the remaining life for Type A Components (see
paragraph 4.2.5). Because the thickness-based approach (this option) might produce
non-conservative results for the remaining life when applied to Type B or Type C Components
(see paragraph 4.2.5), you need to use the MAWP Approach for those components.
MAWP Approach - Select this option to calculate the remaining life of Type A, B, and C
components using a systematic method. You must select this option for Type B and C

Home Tab
components. This approach also ensures that the design pressure is not exceeded during
normal operation if the future corrosion rate is accurately established.
re-rate MAWP - Select this option to re-rate the maximum allowable working pressure. By
increasing or decreasing the process temperature, pressure, or both and if the degradation
mode is temperature or pressure sensitive, a process change might minimize the progression of
the damage. However, the component must be evaluated so that the design still meets the
changed conditions.
A reduction in the pressure or temperature might result in a reduction of the minimum
required wall thickness, thereby increasing the lifespan of the component.
Additional Level 5 Assessment? (CTPs only) - Select this option if the component does not
meet the Level 1 Assessment requirements and you want the metal loss region evaluated using
the Part 5 Assessment procedures for local metal loss using the same thickness profile. This
option is not applicable for point thickness readings.
Corrosion rate [Crate] - Enter the future corrosion rate determined from previous thickness
data, corrosion design curves, or experience in similar services.
Pit Depth Corrosion Rate [PPRpit-depth] - ???
Pit Diameter Corrosion Rate [PPRpit-dia] - ???
Overriding values - ???
Orientation w/respect to Long. Axis (beta) - Enter the angle to the groove-like flaw from the
longitudinal axis.
Length of Groove Like Flaw (gl) - Enter the length of the flaw.
Width of Groove-line Flaw (gw) - Enter the width of the flaw.
Radius at base of Groove-like flaw (gr) - Enter the radius at the base of the flaw.
Local Thinning Area Longitudinal Dimension (s) - ???
Local Thinning Area Circumferential Dimension (c) - ???
Distance to nearest Major Structural Discontinuity [Lmsd] - ???
Uniform Metal Loss [LOSS] - ???
Pit Chart - Select the pit chart to use.
 Grade 1
 Grade 2
 Grade 3
 Grade 4
 Grade 5
 Grade 6
 Grade 7
 Grade 8
Maximum Pit Depth (wmax) - Enter the pit depth.
Widespread Pitting - Select this option when the pitting is widespread across the element.
Localized Pitting - Select this option if the pitting is localized.
LTA in Region of Widespread Pitting - ???
Pitting Confined in Local Thin Area - ???

Home Tab
Input/Output Panel
The following commands are available on the Input/Output panel on the Home tab.
Input - Shows and hides the data input tabs located in the bottom-left of the
interface. For more information, see Input (on page 186).
Component Analysis - Activates CodeCalc. For more information, see
Component Analysis (on page 186).
Review Database - Opens the output database in Microsoft Access. For
more information, see Review Database (on page 186).
Input
Home tab: Input / Output > Input
Activates and hides the input tabs that appear on the bottom-left corner of the interface.
General Input - Enter data for a vessel element. For more information, see General Input Tab
(on page 235).
Report Headings - Enter page heading text and cover sheet text for reports. For more
information, see Report Headings (Heading Tab) (on page 297).
Design/Analysis Constraints - Enter data such as pressures and temperatures, hydrotest
data, and wall thicknesses. For more information, see Design Constraints Tab (on page 299).
Load Cases - Enter stress combination and nozzle pressure load cases. For more information,
see Load Cases (Load Cases Tab) (see "Load Cases Tab" on page 307).
Wind Loads - Select a wind design code and enter data required by that code. For more
information, see Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab) (on page 315).
Seismic Loads - Select a seismic design code and enter data required by that code. For more
information, see Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab) (on page 355).
Component Analysis
Home tab: Input / Output > Component Analysis
Opens CodeCalc and perform analyses separate from the PV Elite model. You can perform
analyses such as local loads on nozzles and tubesheet calculations. For more information, see
CodeCalc Help.
Review Database
Home tab: Input / Output > Review Database
Opens the database in Microsoft Access so you can review the contents. You need to create the
database first using Create Database in the Auxiliary panel. For more information, see
Create Database (on page 191).

Home Tab
Utilities Panel
Provides miscellaneous edit commands for functions such as insert, delete, update, and flip to
edit elements. The following commands are available on the Utilities panel on the Home tab.
Insert Element - Insert an element before or after the current element.

Delete Element - Delete the currently selected element.
Propagate Element Diameter - Propagate element diameter to connected
elements.
Share Information - Share information between elements.
Flip Element Orientation - Flips the orientation of the current element.
Use this command when you want to change the orientation of just a single
element.
Use Flip Model Orientation on the Tools tab to flip the entire model.
Select Material - Select a material from the materials database.
Zoom Mode - Zoom in and out of elements in 2D.
View Element - View 2D element plan or layout view.
Compute Ligament Efficiencies - Calculates ASME VIII-1 UG-53.x or
4.10.x ligament efficiencies for tube spacing. For more information, see
Compute Ligament Efficiencies (on page 218).

Home Tab
Flip Element Orientation

Home tab: Utility > Flip Element Orientation
Vessels are defined one element to the next (from bottom-to-top for vertical vessels and from
left-to-right for horizontal vessels). If the vessel begins with a skirt element, it is a vertical vessel.
Vertical vessels on legs and horizontal vessels start with a head element. If that first element is
improperly oriented for the vessel that you want to model, use this command to correct the
orientation.
After the second element is added, the vessel can no longer be flipped between horizontal and
vertical using this command. However, you can use this command later if heads, body flanges,
or cone elements need to be flipped. To flip the entire model after the second element has been
added, use Flip Model Orientation on the Tools tab.
Auxiliary Panel
The following commands are available from the Auxiliary panel on the Home tab.
Pipe properties - Use this dialog to select piping properties for the Shell,
Nozzle, or Leg from the currently selected piping database. Please note
that the Deduct Mill Tolerance from Thickness? has no effect on
nozzles or pipe legs. For more information, see Seamless Pipe Selection
Dialog Box (on page 189).
List dialog - Opens the Detail Listing dialog box. For more information,
see List Dialog (on page 189).
Write Foundation 3D file - Selecting this function creates a Foundation
3D file after the model is analyzed. For more information, see
www.dimsoln.com.
Export to DXF file - Exports the vessel geometry to a Release 12 Data
Exchange File (CAD file). For more information, see Export to DXF File
(see "Setting Up the Required Parameters" on page 190).
Rigging Results - View rigging results.
Create Database - Create database of input files. For more information,
see Create Database (on page 191).
Element Properties - Display list of element weights, volumes, and
surface areas.
Set Configuration Parameters - Set configuration parameters. For more
information, see Configuration (on page 196).
Create/Review Units - Create or review unit files. For more information,
see Create/Review Units.
Calculator - Opens the Windows calculator.
Switch Datum Input - Enable/Disable nozzle data entry from the datum
line.

Home Tab
Seamless Pipe Selection Dialog Box

Pipe Schedule - Select the pipe schedule from the drop-down menu.
Nominal Pipe Diameter - This value automatically gets populated once the pipe schedule is
selected. This value can then be modified if needed.
Deduct Mill Tolerance from Thickness? - Check this box if you want to deduct the mill
tolerance from the thickness.
List Dialog
Home tab: Auxiliary > List Dialog
Opens the Detail Listing dialog box, where you add details for platforms, nozzles, weights,
packing, forces/moments, trays, and pressure rings.
The location of the detail can be specified from the datum position. Select the type of detail to
edit by clicking its tab. Enter the needed data for each row. Press + to add a row.
The software automatically assigns the value for From Node.
Description is required. If you do not enter one, the software ignores the row and
the data is lost.
All other data must be entered as required.
Rows of data can be duplicated from one row to the next. Click on the listing number of the item
to copy to highlight the row. Copy the row and paste it to a blank row. Change any data that
might be different for that detail.
Adjust detail elevations by - Enter a value to shift the position of all details by the specified
elevation distance. A negative value will move details down or left. A positive value moves the
details up or right. This option is useful when all of the details such as rings, nozzles, and trays
need to be adjusted by a specified amount. This may happen if an element is inserted into the
model after it has been completed and the detail elevations need to be kept constant.

Home Tab
If the adjustment moves a detail (such as a tray) into an element (such as a body
flange), the software does not allow this, and the detail is lost and cannot be recovered.
But only for "From" nodes > or = - Enter the From Node number where you would like the
change in position to start. All details on this element and the following elements are affected. A
value of zero affects all elements.
Setting Up the Required Parameters

Home tab: Auxiliary > Export to DXF File
Instructs PV Elite to generate DXF files during an analysis run. Optionally, you can use File >
Import/Export > Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File to set this option. If the scale factor
is not set, the DXF Options dialog appears prompting for the scale factor and any other
necessary options. These options should be entered after the vessel has been completely
modeled because the scaling factor is based on the overall height and length of the vessel. It is
best to check the scaling factor at the conclusion of the data input and before the model is
analyzed.
Create a Default Border - Select to put a border around the drawing. The border style differs
based on the border size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are located in the
PV Elite\System folder. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so forth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation section for
more information.
Create a Nozzle Schedule - Select to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule contains
information pertaining to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number and the necessity
of reinforcing.
Create a Bill of Material - Select to generate a Bill of Material for the major components of the
vessel, such as shells, heads, and conical sections.
OD Lines Shown Only - Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the major
shell sections. If you do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.
Show Dimensions - Select if you want tail dimensions for the major shell courses. The element
diameters and thicknesses are shown in the BOM.
Drawing Size - Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.
Scale Factor - Enter the scale factor. We recommend letting the program select this value by
clicking Compute and Insert Scale Factor. We then recommend rounding up to the nearest
typical scale factor.
User Border Creation

In order to do the following, you must use Windows Explorer, AutoCad, and Notepad.
1. Start AutoCAD and open your border. The border should be ANSI standard dimensions 8½
by 11 and so fourth scaled for the non-printable area of the paper.
2. After the border drawing is open, save it as a release 12 DXF file.
3. After the file has been saved it will be necessary to edit it with a text editor such as Notepad.
Because the main drawing will have a DXF header, it will be necessary to delete the one in
the border drawing. The DXF header ends on about line 960 with the word Entities. Delete
through this line.
4. Next delete the last four lines in the file. This is the end of file marker.
5. Save the file with a txt extension.
6. Next rename the file in the PV Elite\System folder that you will be replacing. We suggest
putting a new extension on it.

Home Tab
7. Save/Copy your border in the PV Elite\System folder and then rename it replacing our
default border. You should now have new ANSI_?.txt file in the PV Elite\System
subdirectory.
Review our border drawing text files before you start. Note that the border drawings must not
contain any block attributes. These are not supported in our current implementation.
Create Database
Home tab: Auxiliary > Create Database
Creates a Microsoft Access database that contains all the input values.
Use Review Database in the Input / Output panel to review the database. For more
information, see Review Database (on page 186).
Analyze Panel
The following commands are available on the Analyze panel on the Home tab.
Analyze - Analyze the vessel and produce reports and forms. For more
information, see Analyze (on page 191).
Error Check - Error check the vessel input. For more information, see Error
Check Only (on page 192).
Review - Review the analysis data output for the vessel from the last
analysis. For more information, see Review Reports (on page 192).
Review the DXF File - Opens the .dxf file of the model in any software
installed on your computer system that is capable of viewing .dxf-formatted
files. For more information, see Review the DXF File (see "DXF File
Generated by PV Elite During Runtime" on page 192).
Analyze
Home tab: Analyze > Analyze
Keyboard: F12
Analyzes the current model and creates the output files. Click reports in the Report List to see
results of the analysis. For more information about the reports, see Review Reports (on page
192) and Output Processor (on page 431).
For more information about how PV Elite performs an analysis, see PV Elite Analysis (on page
423).
Although not required, we recommend that you run Error Check Only (on page 192) before
you run an analysis.

Home Tab
Error Check Only

Home tab: Analyze > Error Check Only
Runs only error checking on the model without running the analysis. Select Warnings and
Errors in the Report List to see results of the error check.
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor creates an error message if you try to specify a nozzle 20 feet from the
bottom of a 10-foot shell element. However, not all data can be confirmed on input so a general
error processor is run prior to the analysis. This error processor can be run in a stand-alone from
the Analyze panel, Error Check Only (on page 192) .
In addition to the notes that are presented on the screen during error checking, these error
messages appear in the output report and are accessible through the output review processor.
As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst must use common sense to
insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D graphics as it reveals
obvious errors.
Review Reports
Home tab: Analyze > Review
Displays the results of your analysis and output that results to a Microsoft Word file or an ASME
Form using Microsoft Excel. For more information about reports, see Output Processor (on page
431).
DXF File Generated by PV Elite During Runtime

Home tab: Analyze > Review the DXF File
Opens the DXF file using drawing software installed on your computer that supports DXF files. If
this command is available, the DXF file for this job was created during the last run. Clicking this
command submits the file to Windows, which in turn launches your drawing software. If the input
is altered, the analysis must be run in order to generate a new DXF file.
Use Export to DXF File (see "Setting Up the Required Parameters" on page 190) to define
the DXF settings to use.

Home Tab
Units/Code Panel
The following commands are available on the Units/Code panel on the Home tab.
Units - Selecting a units file converts all the properties in the model to that set of units. This can
also be changed by Tools > Select Units (on page 203).
Design Code - Determines which design code is used for analysis.

Home Tab

SECTION 7
Tools Tab
The following utility commands are available on the Tools tab:
Set Configuration Parameters - Set configuration options for this
analysis. For more information, see Configuration (on page 196).
Select Units - Select a new units file. For more information, see Select
Units (on page 203).
Create\Review Units - Review the current units file, or create a new
units file. For more information, see Create / Review Units (on page
203).
Units Conversion - Opens the PV Elite Units Conversion Utility that
you can use to values from one unit of measure to another.
Edit/Add Materials - Edit a materials database. For more information,
see Edit/Add Materials (on page 205).
Calculator (on page 218) - Open the Windows Calculator.
Re-Number Nodes - Resequences the From Node and To Node
numbers of the elements in the vessel.
Flip Model Orientation - Flips the orientation of the entire model.
Use Flip Element Orientation on the Home tab to flip just a single
element.
Enter U-1 Form Information - Create ASME U-1 form. For more
information, see Enter U-1 Form Information (on page 218).
Compute Ligament Efficiencies - Calculate ligament efficiencies for
tube spacing. For more information, see Compute Ligament Efficiencies
(on page 218).
Display Driver - Select your display driver. If you have having display
issues, try the other option.

Tools Tab
Configuration
Tools tab: Set Configuration Parameters
Home tab: Auxiliary > Set Configuration Parameters
Sets job-specific parameters in the Configuration dialog box. Many parameters affect the
analysis results. Always review the configuration at the start of a new job.
Topics
Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog) .......... 196
DXF Options Tab (Configuration Dialog) ....................................... 202
Set Default Values Tab (Configuration Tab).................................. 202
Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Print Water Volume in Gallons - Select to print out the element volume in gallons, instead of
the default Volume cubic diameter unit. This command is independent of the selected units
system.
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size - Select to round thicknesses to the nearest 1/16
of an inch (if you are in English units) or the nearest 1mm (if you are in SI or MM units). The
software increases the thickness of an element if you so specify in Design/Analysis
Constraints (see "Design Constraints Tab" on page 299) and the element thickness is
inadequate.
Print Equations and Substitutions - Select to print formulas and substitutions for internal and
external pressure calculations in analysis reports.
Increase Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement - Select to bypass reinforcement of a
single opening of a flat end connection, according to Section VIII Division 1, paragraph
UG-39(d)(2). This effectively increases the required thickness of the blind flange cover. This
option can only be used if there is only one nozzle located in the blind flange.
Print Flange Calcs for External Pressure - Select to always print external pressure
calculations on flanges in addition to the default internal pressure calculations. When this option
is not selected, the software does not print external pressure calculations unless the required
thickness generated by the external pressure exceeds the thickness generated by the internal
pressure.
Do not use the bolt correction factor for flange design - Select to avoid using the TEMA bolt
space correction factor in the design of heat exchanger flanges and tubesheets, like
Taylor-Forge. The use of the correction factor is very standard in industry and is used in other
pressure vessel design codes, such as PD-5500. When the actual bolt spacing exceeds the
allowable bolt spacing, the correction factor is multiplied by the moment to design a thicker
flange. In these cases, do not select this option.
ASME Section VIII does not specifically address this subject. For a pure flange design according
to Appendix 2, there is no bolt spacing correction factor. In this case, select this option.
Use ASME Code Case 2260/2261 - Select to use modified equations to calculate the required
thickness of elliptical/torispherical heads, as defined in ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Code
Case 2260, May 20, 1998, Alternate Design Rules for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Formed
Heads. A thinner head is typically designed with these rules.
Use Eigen Solver - Select to use an Eigen solver for natural frequency calculations.
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than one method. When this
option is not selected, the traditional method is to use the analysis technique of Freese or

Tools Tab
Rayleigh-Ritz. For a skirt-supported free standing vessel, this method provides acceptable
results. When the support configuration is not a skirt/base type, such as legs, lugs or
intermediate skirt, this method may not provide accurate results. By default, this option is
selected and the Eigen solver is used.
The natural frequency Eigen solver uses numerical methods to solve the general equation of
motion. Namely, the software solves the following matrix problem:
[[K] - w2[M]]{a} = {0}
which for the general case is a set of n homogeneous (right-hand side equal to zero) algebraic
system of linear equations with n unknown displacements ai and an unknown parameter w2.
This is known as an Eigen problem. This iterative solution, for which not all ai = 0, requires that
the determinant of the matrix factor of {a} be equal to zero, in this case:
abs([[K] - w2[M]) = 0
After building stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrices of the model with appropriate boundary
conditions (such as, anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, and at support lugs), the software can
extract modes that are meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem, particularly the
modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic-frequency Eigen solution method, the
software can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit neatly into the
cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration method. The natural frequency of the
vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic codes.
If the selected earthquake code uses response spectrum, the software automatically
uses the Eigen Solver, even if this option is not selected.
Use Pre-99 Addenda (Division 1 only) - Select if you are re-rating an older vessel to the
pre-99 ASME addenda, and would like to use the older material allowables. As of January 2000,
the 1999 addenda of ASME Division 1, Section 2, Part D is mandatory. The revision includes
changes to the material properties of many materials, such as increases of allowable stresses in
some ranges. By default, this option is not selected and the higher allowable stress database is
used.
Select this option before any vessel modeling occurs. For an existing file, you must
access the material database for each existing element to update material properties. Other
design codes are not affected.
Use 2004 A-06 Addenda for Division 2 - Select if the model is ASME Section VIII< Division 2,
to use the older code rules in the analysis.
Select prior to entering any vessel data.
For ASME VIII, Shell Head Joints are Tapered - Select if the shell to head junction is tapered
as shown in the figure (ASME VIII-1 Figure UW-13.1).
For ASME VIII-1, Use Table G instead of exact equation for "A" - PV Elite can determine the
strain factor ‘A’ used in ASME VIII-1 for external pressure calculations by either:
 Formula

Tools Tab
 Table G in Section II Part D

Both selections yield a nearly identical result in most cases. However, PV Elite runs faster when
using the formula option. The default is to use the data from Table G.
No MDMT Calculations - Select to use the MDMT check in the analysis.
No MAWP Calculations - Select to use the MAWP check in the analysis.
Use Bolt Load Instead of Bolt Area Times Bolt Stress - Select to use the calculated value of
the bolt load instead of the bolt area times its allowable stress in the design of annular
baserings. This leads to a less conservative basering/bolting/chair cap thickness calculation.
Use Flange Bolt Stress Ratio for ASME VIII-1 Hydro - Select to allow specific control of the
use of the bolt stress ratio for calculated custom (Appendix 2) flanges. The software considers
the stress ratio in bolts of flanges that are designed according to Appendix 2 for hydrotests
UG-99 and UG-100. ASME Interpretation VIII-1-83-260 allows this. Flanges that are not
calculated (ANSI flanges) are not allowed this exemption.
Syntax Highlighting in Output Reports - Select to highlight failures and problem areas in data
reports.
No Extended ASCII Characters in Output - Select to replace extended ASCII characters with
multiple characters of the same value in equations. For example, ½ is replaced with 1/2. Some
non-English versions of Windows do not display these characters correctly.
Metric Output is in Consistent Units - Select to allow the software to change units so that they
are displayed consistently. For example, units of stress may be displayed in MPa and pressure
in Bar. For coherent output these units should be the same.
Use Code Case 2286
Select to use Code Case 2286-1, a set of alternative rules for determining allowable external
pressure and compressive stresses for cylinders, cones, spheres, and formed heads. This code
case is applicable for ASME Section VIII Divisions 1 and 2. In the current ASME code rules,
there are no provisions for computation of allowables when external pressure acts with bending
and other compressive loads simultaneously.
These rules were first published in the late 1990's and reaffirmed on January 1, 2004. Review
the code case before selecting this option. The following sections are covered in PV Elite:
2.2 Stress Reduction Factors
3.1 External Pressure
3.2 Uniform Axial Compression
3.2.1 Local Buckling
3.2.2 Column Buckling
3.3 Axial Compression due to Bending Moment
3.4 Shear (Allowable in Plane Shear Stress)
4.1.1 Allowable Circumferential Compression Stresses for Cones
4.1.3 Cone-Cylinder Junction Rings
4.2.1 Allowable Longitudinal and Bending Stresses for Cones
4.2.2 Unstiffened Cone-Cylinder Junctions
4.2.3 Cone-Cylinder Junction Rings
4.3.1 Allowable in Plane Shear Stress for Cones
5.1.1 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression and Hoop Compression
5.1.2 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression and Hoop Compression (Column Buckling)
5.2 Allowables for Axial Compression due to Bending Moment and Hoop Compression
5.3 Allowables for Hoop Compression and Shear

Tools Tab
5.4 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression, Axial Compression due to Bending Moment,
Shear in the presence of Hoop Compression
5.4.1 Local Buckling (Section 5.4)
5.4.2 Column Buckling (Section 5.4)
5.5 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression, Axial Compression due to Bending Moment,
Shear in the absence of Hoop Compression
5.5.1 Local Buckling (Section 5.5)
5.5.2 Column Buckling (Section 5.5)
6.0 Sizing of Rings
6.1 Sizing of Small Rings
6.4 Local Stiffener Geometry Requirements
8.1.1 Spherical Shell with Equal Biaxial Stresses
Does the use of 2286 guarantee thinner required thicknesses and lower stresses due to
combined loading?
No, it does not. The results are a function of the geometry. However, the results for allowable
external pressure are generally higher than those computed using the typical UG-28 external
pressure methods.
What happens during the analysis when this option is selected?
The software follows several steps in determining values that are needed during the 2286
calculations. One of these steps is to determine the lengths, such as LB1 and LB2. These are
the distances between major lines of support, such as heads, body flanges and conical sections.
The software does not distinguish large rings that act as bulkheads, according to paragraph
6.1(b). For cones, Line of Support Options in Vessel Data must be set to Both Ends a Line
of Support. The ASME Steel Stack option in Design/Analysis Constraints (see "Design
Constraints Tab" on page 299) is not compatible with this option and is also ignored if both are
checked.
The first calculations that appear for 2286 are in the External Pressure Calculations report,
with the calculation of the allowable pressure at the given thickness. After completing this step,
the software iterates to determine the required thickness for the given external pressure. If the
element is a cylinder, the maximum length between stiffeners is calculated. These results are
displayed in the summary at the end of the External Pressure Calculations report. Because
Factor A and Factor B are not applicable, they are set to "No Calc".
After completing the external pressure calculations, the software calculates individual stresses
for each stress category and summarizes them in the Stress Due to Combined Loads report.
The allowable stresses are calculated for the combined loads (including external pressure).
Unity checks according to 5.4 and 5.5 are made. The software also compares direct axial, shear
and bending stresses to their respective allowables. If any of these are higher than the
combined unity check, the maximum value is reported as the Unity Check.
A supplemental table in the Stress Due to Combined Loads report displays the results of λc, L
and the calculated allowable stresses for each element for each load case. In some cases, the
allowables may not be calculated, especially when there is no external pressure or when the
load is only tensile. Some elements, such as welded flat heads and flanges, are not applicable
and do not have any results. If this is the case, the printed stress value may read "No Calc" or
may be blank.
If there any conical transitions in the model, the software calculates the necessity of junction
rings and their requirements according to section 4.2.3. Cone-to-cylinder junction rings must
satisfy inertia requirements from equations (4-1) and (4-5). The net area of the junction must be
greater than or equal to the result of equation (4-4). The maximum distance from the
cone-cylinder junction is defined in paragraph 4.2.3. The distance is defined as, "The nearest

Tools Tab
surface of the stiffening ring shall be located with a distance of Tr or 1 in., whichever is greater
from the cone junction." Tr is the contact or stem width of the ring. Because the software handles
arbitrary sections, the check value is one inch (25.4 mm). If the ring is farther than one inch from
the junction, it is ignored.
For ASME VIII-1, Compute "K" in corroded condition - The ‘K’ value is the stress
concentration factor used in determining the required thickness of Elliptical Heads. If the
elliptical head has an internal corrosion allowance, the computed value of K decreases resulting
in a lower required thickness. If that is what you want, select this option.
Use ASME Code Case 2695 (Div 1 allowables using Div 2 Part 4.5) - ASME Code Case 2695
allows the use of ASME VIII-2 formulas in a Division 1 design. In addition, the allowable stress
values from Division 1 must also be used. Using the Code Case generally results in a more
economical design, especially in the area of head thickness and nozzle reinforcement. As when
using any Code Case, all of the restrictions must be understood so read the Code Case before
using this option.
Nozzle Analysis Directives

No Corrosion on Inside Welds - Select if inside nozzle welds do not corrode or you do not
wish to remove the corrosion allowance when computing the area. By default, the software
always corrodes the inner fillet weld when calculating the area available in the inside weld. The
default method is the most conservative because the area under the weld is corroded in
accordance with figure UG-37 of the ASME Code. This option is not valid when using PD:5500.
Use AD-540.2 sketch b and not sketch d for normal limit (pre 2007) - Select to use sketch
(b) for the calculation of the vertical nozzle thickness limit, according to ASME Section VIII,
Division 2, paragraph AD-540.2. Sketch (b) shows an integral connection with a smooth radius.
Sketch (d) shows a similar geometry with an alternative pad plate and fillet. By default, the
software uses sketch (d) to calculate the vertical thickness limit.
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness - Select to calculate the minimum nozzle wall to
account for external loading. In many cases pressure vessels are designed and built long before
the piping system is attached to them. This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. When
this option is selected, then the minimum nozzle thickness trn is maximum of :
trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) <= Nps 18
trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) > Nps 18
Using this requirement in addition to UG-45 provides some additional metal to work with to
satisfy thermal bending stresses in the nozzle. You can also specify the minimum wall thickness
of the nozzle trn in Nozzle. If you do so, that vale overrides this calculation
These formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.
Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles - Select to calculate the nozzle reinforcement
areas and MAWPs of small nozzles when the requirements of code paragraph UG-36 are met.
UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement calculations when small
nozzles are involved. Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not
require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions :
 3.5 inch finished opening in a shell or head 0.375 inches required thickness or less
 2.375 inch finished opening in a shell or head greater than 0.375 inches required thickness
If your geometry meets this criteria and this option is not selected, then the nozzle reinforcement
areas and MAWPs are not calculated. If you require a single nozzle to be checked, place the
text #SN in the nozzle description to force the software to calculate the areas for the selected
small nozzle.
Compute Chord Length in Hillside Direction - Select to use the chord length to calculate the
included angle for hillside nozzle calculations. By default, the software uses the actual length of
removed material.

Tools Tab
Compute Areas per PD 5500 3.5.4.9 - Select to perform the pressure times area calculations
according to PD 5000:2003, 3.5.4.9. The standard calculations according to design section 3
are always Calculated.
Nozzle opening MWAP is not restricted by the Shell (ASME) - When using ASME VIII-1
UG-37 for nozzle reinforcement, the MAWP of the opening is iteratively computed based on
several items including UG-45, UG-37 areas, and other considerations. The MAWP of the
opening is the minimum of the overall UG-37 calculation and the MAWP of the parent
component to which the nozzle is attached. In some cases, you might want to know the MAWP
of the junction without regard to the parent’s MAWP. If that is the case, select this option.
ASME MDMT Directives

Use the MAWP to Compute the MDMT - Select to use the MAWP for the vessel when
determining the required thickness to use in the temperature reduction calculation according to
UCS 66.1 (Div. 1), or Section 3.11.2.5 (Div. 2 2007 Edition or later). The MAWP also includes
MAWPs determined during nozzle calculations. If this option is not selected, the design pressure
on the element is used to determine the MDMT reduction for that element.
 If the pressure specified on each element is the MAWP, do not select this option. Otherwise,
the temperature reduction is conservatively low.
 For PD 5500, EN-13445, and Division 2 pre-2007, this option is ignored.
Do Not Use Nozzle MDMT Interpretation VIII-1-01-37 - Select to control the MDMT calculation
of the nozzle to shell junction, according to Section VIII, Division 1 (1998 Edition, 2000
Addenda), Figure UCS-66.l, Interpretation VIII-1-01-37, March 9, 2001. The interpreatation
states that if a nozzle neck with a nominal noncorroded thickness that is heavier than that of the
shell is attached to the shell with a corner joint, then the shell becomes the governing thickness
as defined in UCS-66(a)(1)(b). When evaluating the nozzle joint per UCS-66(b) of Section VIII,
Division 1, the tr and tn thicknesses are those of the shell.
Allowable Tower Deflection - Enter a value for the allowable vertical tower deflection, if the
default of 6 inches per 100 feet does not meet your design specification.
Wind Shape Factor - Enter a value for the wind shape factor, if your design specification
requires a specific value that does not correspond to the software-calculated value. For
cylindrical structures, the value is typically 0.7.
Ope. Nat. Freq. (Hz) Optional - Enter a value for the operating natural frequency. This is
typically a value that you calculate separately when you want to use a method different than the
Rayleigh method used by the software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most
vessel designs, and you do not need to enter a value.
Empty Nat. Freq. (Hz) Optional - Enter a value for the empty natural frequency. This is typically
a value that you calculate separately when you want to use a method different than the Rayleigh
method used by the software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most vessel
designs, and you do not need to enter a value.
Test Nat. Freq. (Hz) Optional - Enter a value for the test natural frequency. This is typically a
value that you calculate separately when you want to use a method different than the Rayleigh
method used by the software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most vessel
designs, and you do not need to enter a value.
ASME VIII-1 Matl Database Year - Select the database the software uses for tables of
allowable stress versus temperature. This entry is only valid for Section VIII Division 1 and is not
available if Use Pre-99 Addenda (Division 1 only) is selected.
Select this option before entering other data.

Tools Tab
Metric Constant Selection - ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 contains a number of
constants used for comparison in certain calculations. These values are presented in both
Imperial and Metric units. An example would be the minimum thickness per UG-16(b) of 1/16"
(1.5mm) or 3/32" (2.5mm). Note that the values in mm have been rounded. PV Elite can work
with either depending on the selection made in this pull down.
 Imperial – Use the Imperial constants
 Metric – Use the Metric constants
 Determine at runtime – Have PV Elite determine which value to use depending on the set
of currently selected units. For new files, the default is the Determine at Runtime.
Output Language - Select the language to use for the Input Echo report. Make this selection
before you analyze the model.
DXF Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Create a Default Border - Select to put a border around the drawing. The border style differs
based on the border size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are located in the
PV Elite\System folder. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so forth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation section for
more information.
Create a Nozzle Schedule - Select to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule contains
information pertaining to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number and the necessity
of reinforcing.
Create a Bill of Material - Select to generate a Bill of Material for the major components of the
vessel, such as shells, heads, and conical sections.
OD Lines Shown Only - Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the major
shell sections. If you do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.
Show Dimensions - Select if you want tail dimensions for the major shell courses. The element
diameters and thicknesses are shown in the BOM.
Drawing Size - Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.
Scale Factor - Enter the scale factor. We recommend letting the program select this value by
clicking Compute and Insert Scale Factor. We then recommend rounding up to the nearest
typical scale factor.
Set Default Values Tab (Configuration Tab)

Sets the initial values for commonly used properties. PV Elite defaults fields using the values
that you define here. You can edit the default value during creation.

Tools Tab
Select Units
Tools tab: Select Units
Selects a new units file and changes the units system of the current job. For example, if your
current job is in English units and you would like to change the units to millimeters, then use this
option. After selecting a new units file, the current input values are converted into that set of
units. To get a set of reports in the new units, run Analyze (on page 191) again.
Delivered units files have the .fil extension and are in the C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVELITE\2013\System folder. Many unit systems are delivered,
such as English, MM, SI, Inches, and Newtons. Unicode systems are delivered for use in China,
Japan, Taiwan, and Korea, where multibyte character sets are used.
Create / Review Units

Tools tab: Create\Review Units
The Create/Review Units File utility allows you to create a new custom units file or edit an
existing units file for use with PV Elite or CodeCalc. The utility is available on the Tools tab >
Create/Review Units . You can also double-click MakeUnit.exe in the product delivery
folder.
Delivered units files have the .fil extension and are in the C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVELITE\2013\System folder. Many unit systems are delivered,
such as English, MM, SI, Inches, and Newtons. Unicode systems are delivered for use in China,
Japan, Taiwan, and Korea, where multibyte character sets are used. You can save new units
files to the system folder or to another folder.
 Use Tools tab > Configuration to specify the units file to use at startup.
 Use Tools tab > Select Units to select a new units file. The data in your job file is
immediately converted to the new units.
Units File Dialog Box (on page 205)

 Create a new units file (on page 204)
 Edit an existing units file (on page 204)

Tools Tab
Create a new units file

1. On the Tools tab, click Create/Review Units .
The units file dialog box displays. Constant has a default value of 1 for each type of unit.
2. Do one of the following for each type of unit:
 Select defined values for Constant or User Unit.
 Type values for or Constant and User Unit.
3. Click Save and Exit .

The Save As dialog box displays.
4. Select a folder path and type a file name.
5. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box and the Units File dialog box close.
Edit an existing units file

1. On the Tools tab > click Create/Review Units .
The units file dialog box displays.
2. Click Open .
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select an existing .fil units file and click Open.
4. Change unit types as needed by doing one of the following:
 Select defined values for Constant or User Unit.
 Type values for or Constant and User Unit.
5. Click Save and Exit .

The Save As dialog box displays.
6. Select a folder path and type a file name. You can also use the same file name to replace
the open file with the new unit values.
7. Click Save.
The Save As and Units File dialog boxes close.

Tools Tab
Units File Dialog Box

Specifies units and constants for a units file.
Name - Displays the type of unit, such as Length, Area, or Pressure.
System Unit - Displays the default system unit used as a multiplier for conversions, such as
feet, sq-inches, and psig.
Constant - Select a defined conversion constant used as a multiplier for conversions, or type
your own value.
User Unit - Select a defined unit for the conversion, or type your own unit.
 If you select a defined Constant, the software changes User Unit to the correct unit. If you
select a defined User Unit, the software changes Constant to the correct value.
 If you type your own value for Constant and User Unit, you must manually ensure that the
combination provides the needed conversion.
Open - Open an existing units file for editing.
Save - Saves the units file.
Save and Exit - Saves the units file and closes the dialog box.
Help - Opens the help.
Tools tab: Edit/Add Materials

 Edit Material
 Edit PD:5500 Material Database
 Edit EN-13445 User Material Database
The Material Database Editor (on page 205) utility opens. You can edit existing material and
create new material in the selected material database. The new material does not affect the
current job. To change an element or detail to the new material, open the Material Database
Dialog Box (on page 433) for each element or detail.
Material Database Editor

The Material Database Editor utility allows you to add custom materials to a delivered ASME,
PD:5500, or EN-13445 material database for use with PV Elite or CodeCalc. For a YouTube
demonstration, visit: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GEtIRO4PwCw. While the video is
centered around PV Elite, it works much the same way in CodeCalc.
The utility is available from:
 Tools > Edit/Add Materials

 MatEdit.exe, found in the [Product Folder]\COADE\PVElite\ folder

Tools Tab
When you use this utility, material database files with the .bin extension are created in the
[Product Folder]\COADE\PVElite\System Backup folder. These files contain only the custom
materials you have added. The custom materials can then be merged into the main material
databases.
 The delivered databases contain allowed material for the current codes. You typically only
add custom material if you are required to use an outdated material, or need to add material
from a different code.
 Have the appropriate code available when adding new material. You will enter code-based
material properties such as Chart Data, Material Band, and S Factor. The properties needed
vary with the database that you are editing.
Material Properties (on page 207)

 Create a new custom material (on page 206)
 Create a custom material based on an existing material (on page 207)
Create a new custom material

1. Click Tools > Edit/Add Materials and select the ASME, PD:5500, or EN-13445 material
database.
2. Click Add .
A new row named New Material appears in the grid of the Material Database view in the
right pane.
3. In the Material Properties view in the left pane, type values for the new material.
As you type values, check the Stress vs. Temperature graph in the right pane.
Stress must not increase as temperature decreases.
4. Repeat these steps for each new material that you want to add.
5. Click Save to save the new material to a user database file.
6. Click Merge to add the user database to the material database of the software.
After merging, the custom material now appears at the bottom of the material database
list for any command using the material database in PV Elite or CodeCalc.

Tools Tab
Create a custom material based on an existing material

1. Click Tools > Edit/Add Materials and select the ASME, PD:5500, or EN-13445 material
database.
2. Click Edit .
The contents of the software database appear in the grid of the Material Database view in
the right pane.
3. Select a material for the Material Database grid.
4. Click Select and click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

The copied material appears in a new row in the grid of the Material Database view.
5. In the Material Properties view in the left pane, type new values as needed.
 You must change Material Name so that the name is unique in the user database and
in the material database after merging.
 As you type values, check the Stress vs. Temperature graph in the right pane. Stress
must not increase as temperature decreases.
6. Click Save to save the new material to a user database file.
7. Click Merge to add the user database to the material database of the software.
After merging, the custom material now appears at the bottom of the material database
list for any command using the material database in PV Elite or CodeCalc.
Material Properties
The following code-based values are typically used as material properties.
Material Name - Type an allowed external pressure chart name. The software uses the chart
name to calculate the B value for all external pressure and buckling calculations. If you type a
valid value for Material Name, the software will look into its database and determine the
external pressure chart name for this material and enter it into this cell. The program will also
determine this chart name when you select a material name from the material selection window.
The following are the allowed external pressure chart names:
Carbon Steel
CS-1 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy<30000
CS-2 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy>30000
CS-3 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy<38000
CS-4 SA-537
CS-5 SA-508, SA-533, SA-541
CS-6 SA-562 or SA-620
Heat-Treated Steel

Tools Tab
HT-1 SA-517 and SA-592 A, E, and F

HT-2 SA-508 Cl. 4a, SA-543,B,C
Stainless Steel (High Alloy)

HA-1 Type 304
HA-2 Type 316, 321, 347, 309, 310, 430B
HA-3 Type 304L
HA-4 Type 316L, 317L
HA-5 Alloy S31500
Non-Ferrous Material
NFA-1 AL3003, O and H112
NFA-2 AL3003, H20
NFA-4 AL3004, H34
NFA-6 C62000 (Aluminum Bronze)
NFA-7 AL1060, O
NFA-10 AL5456, O
NFA-12 AL6061, T6, T651, T6510 and T6511
NFA-13 AL6061, T4, T451, T4510 and T4511
NFC-1 Annealed Copper
NFC-2 Copper Silicon A and C
NFC-3 Annealed 90-10 Copper Nickel
NFC-4 Annealed 70-30 Copper Nickel
NFC-5 Welded Copper Iron Alloy Tube
NFC-6 SB-75 and SB-111 Copper Tube
NFN-1 Low Carbon Nickel
NFN-2 Ni
NFN-3 Ni Cu Alloy

Tools Tab
NFN-4 Annealed Ni Cr Fe
NFN-5 Ni Mo Alloy B
NFN-6 Ni Mo Cr Fe
NFN-7 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu
NFN-8 Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800
NFN-9 Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800H
NFN-10 Ni Moly Chrome Alloy N10276
NFN-11 Ni Cr Fe Mo Cu Alloys G and G-2
NFN-12 Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, and
so on.
NFN-13 Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330
NFN-20 Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4
NFN-15 Ni Mo Alloy X
NFN-16 Ni Mo Alloy B2
NFN-17 Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625)
NFN-18 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G3)
NFN-19 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G3, >3/4)
NFN-20 Work Hardened Nickel
NFT-1 Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1
NFT-2 Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2
NFT-3 Titanium, Grade 1
NFZ-1 Zirconium, Alloy 702
NFZ-2 Zirconium, Alloy 705
Elastic Modulus Reference #

The elastic modulus reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of data
set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TM-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many materials
have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the
ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens,
you will need to enter in an appropriate value.
Reference Table Description/UNS Number

Number
1 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C<= 0.3%
2 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C> 0.3%
3 TM-1 Material Group A

Tools Tab

Number
4 TM-1 Material Group B
5 TM-1 Material Group C
6 TM-1 Material Group D
7 TM-1 Material Group E
8 TM-1 Material Group F
9 TM-1 Material Group G
10 TM-1 S13800
11 TM-1 S15500
12 TM-1 S45000
13 TM-1 S17400
14 TM-1 S17700
15 TM-1 S66286
16 TM-2 A03560
17 TM-2 A95083
18 TM-2 A95086
19 TM-2 A95456
20 TM-2 A24430
21 TM-2 A91060
22 TM-2 A91100
23 TM-2 A93003
24 TM-2 A93004
25 TM-2 A96061
26 TM-2 A96063
27 TM-2 A92014
28 TM-2 A92024
29 TM-2 A95052
30 TM-2 A95154
31 TM-2 A95254
32 TM-2 A95454
33 TM-2 A95652
34 TM-3 C93700

Tools Tab

Number
35 TM-3 C83600
36 TM-3 C92200
37 TM-3 C92200
38 TM-3 C28000
39 TM-3 C28000
40 TM-3 C65500
41 TM-3 C66100
42 TM-3 C95200
43 TM-3 C95400
44 TM-3 C44300
45 TM-3 C44400
46 TM-3 C44500
47 TM-3 C64200
48 TM-3 C68700
49 TM-3 C10200
50 TM-3 C10400
51 TM-3 C10500
52 TM-3 C10700
53 TM-3 C11000
54 TM-3 C12000
55 TM-3 C12200
56 TM-3 C12300
57 TM-3 C12500
58 TM-3 C14200
59 TM-3 C23000
60 TM-3 C61000
61 TM-3 C61400
62 TM-3 C65100
63 TM-3 C70400
64 TM-3 C19400
65 TM-3 C60800

Tools Tab

Number
66 TM-3 C63000
67 TM-3 C70600
68 TM-3 C97600
69 TM-3 C71000
70 TM-3 C71500
71 TM-4 N02200
72 TM-4 N02201
73 TM-4 N04400
74 TM-4 N04405
75 TM-4 N06002
76 TM-4 N06007
77 TM-4 N06022
78 TM-4 N06030
79 TM-4 N06045
80 TM-4 N06059
81 TM-4 N06230
82 TM-4 N06455
83 TM-4 N06600
84 TM-4 N06617
85 TM-4 N06625
86 TM-4 N06690
87 TM-4 N07718
88 TM-4 N07750
89 TM-4 N08020
90 TM-4 N08031
91 TM-4 N08330
92 TM-4 N08800
93 TM-4 N08801
94 TM-4 N08810
95 TM-4 N08825
96 TM-4 N10001

Tools Tab

Number
97 TM-4 N10003
98 TM-4 N10242
99 TM-4 N10276
100 TM-4 N10629
101 TM-4 N10665
102 TM-4 N10675
103 TM-4 N12160
104 TM-4 R20033
105 TM-5 R50250
106 TM-5 R50400
107 TM-5 R50550
108 TM-5 R52400
109 TM-5 R56320
110 TM-5 R52250
111 TM-5 R53400
112 TM-5 R52402
113 TM-5 R52252
114 TM-5 R52404
115 TM-5 R52254
116 TM-5 R60702
117 TM-5 R60705
118 TM-1 12Cr-13Cr Group F
119 TM-1 20+Cr Material Group G
220 TEMA Ni-Mo Alloy B
221 TEMA Tantalum
222 TEMA Tantalum with 2.5% Tungsten
223 TEMA 7 MO (S32900)
224 TEMA 7 MO PLUS (S32950)
225 TEMA 17-19 CR Stn Steel
226 TEMA AL-6XN Stn Steel (NO8367)
227 TEMA AL-29-4-2

Tools Tab

Number
228 TEMA SEA-CURE
229 TEMA 2205 (S31803)
230 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Reference #

Number
1 TE-1 Carbon & Low Alloy Steels, Group 1
2 TE-1 Low Alloy Steels, Group 2
3 TE-1 5Cr-1Mo and 29Cr-7Ni-2Mo-N
Steels
4 TE-1 9Cr-1Mo
5 TE-1 5Ni-¼4Mo
6 TE-1 8Ni and 9Ni
7 TE-1 12Cr,13Cr and 13Cr-4Ni Steels
8 TE-1 15Cr and 17Cr Steels
9 TE-1 27Cr Steels
10 TE-1 Austenitic Group 3 Steels
11 TE-1 Austenitic Group 4 Steels
12 TE-1 Ductile Cast Iron
13 TE-1 17Cr-4Ni-4Cu, Condition 1075
15 TE-2 Aluminum Alloys
16 TE-3 Copper Alloys C1XXXX Series
17 TE-3 Bronze Alloys
18 TE-3 Brass Alloys
19 TE-3 70Cu-30Ni
20 TE-3 90Cu-10Ni
21 TE-4 N02200 and N02201
22 TE-4 N04400 and N04405
23 TE-4 N06002

Tools Tab

Number
24 TE-4 N06007
25 TE-4 N06022
26 TE-4 N06030
27 TE-4 N06045
28 TE-4 N06059
29 TE-4 N06230
30 TE-4 N06455
31 TE-4 N06600
32 TE-4 N06625
33 TE-4 N06690
34 TE-4 N07718
35 TE-4 N07750
36 TE-4 N08031
37 TE-4 N08330
38 TE-4 N08800,N08801,N08810,N08811
39 TE-4 N08825
40 TE-4 N10001
41 TE-4 N10003
42 TE-4 N10242
43 TE-4 N10276
44 TE-4 N10629
45 TE-4 N10665
46 TE-4 N10675
47 TE-4 N12160
48 TE-4 R20033
49 TE-5 Titanium Gr 1,2,3,7,11,12,16 and 17
50 TE-5 Titanium Grade 9
51 TEMA 5Cr-1/2Mo
52 TEMA 7Cr-1/2Mo & 9Cr-1Mo
53 TEMA Ni-Mo (Alloy B)
54 TEMA Nickel (Alloy 200)

Tools Tab

Number
55 TEMA Copper-Silicon
56 TEMA Admiralty
57 TEMA Zirconium
58 TEMA Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb (Alloy 20Cb)
59 TEMA Tantalum
61 TEMA 17-19 CR (TP 439)
62 TEMA AL-6XN
63 TEMA 2205 (S31803)
64 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)
65 TEMA 7 MO (S32900)
67 TEMA AL 29-4-2
68 TEMA SEA-CURE
69 TEMA 80-20 Cu-Ni (C71000)
Minimum Thickness (in.) - Type the minimum allowable thickness for the material. If the
material has no minimum thickness, type -1.
Maximum Thickness (in.) - Type the maximum allowable thickness for the material. If the
material has no maximum thickness, type -1.
Creep Temperature (F) - Type the temperature at which the material is governed by time
dependent properties.
MDMT Exemption Temperature (F) - When the material uses an impact tested product
specification, type the impact temperature. Otherwise, type 1.
Product Form
Type an integer that designates the product form of the material.
Form Product Form

Value
1 Plate
2 Forgings
3 Seamless pipe
4 Welded pipe
5 Welded tube
6 Seamless tube

Tools Tab
7 Bolting
8 Castings
9 Fittings
10 Seamless/welded pipe
11 Seamless/welded tube
12 reserved
13 Seamless pipe and tube
14 Pipe
15 Bar
16 Sheet
17 Tube
18 Forged pipe
19 Seamless/welded fitting
20 Drawn seamless tube
21 Condenser & heat exchanger tubes
22 Seamless extruded tube
23 Rod
24 Seamless and welded fittings
25 Welded fittings
26 Seamless fittings
27 Finned tube
28 Seamless U-bend tube
29 Welded condenser tube
Impact Reduction Temperature (F) - When the material is eligible for a -5ºF temperature
reduction according to UCS-66(g), type -5. Otherwise, type 0.
Material Band
The material band is used to determine the modulus of elasticity and coefficient of thermal
expansion for that type of material.
Material Basic Material Type/composition

Band
M0 Carbon steel
M1 Carbon manganese steel
M2 Carbon molybdenum steel

Tools Tab
M4 Low alloy MG Cr Mo V steel

M5 3.5Ni
M6 9Ni
M7 1-1.5Cr .5Mo
M8 .5Cr .5Mo .25V
M9 2.25Cr 1Mo
M10 5Cr .5Mo
M11 9Cr1Mo
M12 12Cr1Mo1V
Calculator
Tools tab: Calculator
Opens the Windows-supplied calculator utility. Use Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V to copy and paste values
between the calculator and PV Elite.
Enter U-1 Form Information

Tools tab: Enter U-1 Form Information
Opens the Additional Vessel Information dialog box into which you enter additional
information to produce an ASME U-1 form for the vessel. After analysis, an intermediate results
file (.pvu) is created. This file is read by a Microsoft Excel macro when Create ASME Form
is clicked in Review Reports, and the worksheet fields are populated with the calculated results.
For more information, see Review Reports (on page 192).
Compute Ligament Efficiencies

Tools tab: Compute Ligament Efficiencies
Opens the ASME VIII-1 UG-53 Ligament Efficiency Scratch Pad dialog box which is used to
calculate ASME VIII-1 UG-53.x or 4.10.x ligament efficiencies for tube spacing.
Ligament Efficiency Calculation per Figure - Select one of the following:
 UG-53.1 or 4.10.1
 UG-53.2 or 4.10.2
 UG-53.3 or 4.10.3
 UG-53.4 or 4.10.4
and Figure - When UG-53.4 or 4.10.4 is selected for Ligament Efficiency Calculation per
Figure, select one of the following as the secondary figure:
 UG-53.5 or 4.10.5
 UG-53.6 or 4.10.6

Tools Tab
Diameter of Tube Holes (d), Longitudinal Pitch of Tube Holes (p), Unit Length of Ligament
(p1), Diagonal Pitch of tube Holes (p' or p*), Number of Tube Holes in Length p1 (n), and
Angle of Diagonal with Longitudinal line (theta) - Based on the selected ligament efficiency
figure, enter values for each dimension.
After all values are entered, the efficiencies are calculated and displayed as a percentage at the
bottom of the dialog box. If there is an error, it is also displayed.
All figures are shown below.
UG-53.1 or 4.10.1
FIG-53.1 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Equal in Every Row

Tools Tab
UG-53.2 or 4.10.2
FIG-53.2 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Unequal in Every Second Row
UG-53.3 or 4.10.3
FIG-53.3 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Varying in Every Second and Third
Row

Tools Tab
UG-53.4 or 4.10.4
FIG-53.4 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch with Tube Holes on Diagonal Lines
UG-53.5
FIG-53.5 Diagram for Determining the Efficiency of Longitudinal and Diagonal Ligaments
Between Openings in Cylindrical Shells

Tools Tab
UG-53.6
FIG-53.6 Diagram for Determining Equivalent Longitudinal Efficiency of Diagonal
Ligaments Between Openings in Cylindrical Shells

SECTION 8
View Tab
The following commands are available on the View tab.
Toggle Status Bar - Click to display or hide the status bar at the bottom of the software window.
The status bar displays information about the selected vessel element.
Rigging Results - Displays the calculated rigging results.

Reset Pane Layout - Restores the software views to the default settings.

View Tab

SECTION 9
3D Tab
The 3D tab contains commands that control the display of elements in the 3D View. The 3D
View shows the actual vessel geometry in three dimensions. In addition to showing the outer
surfaces, the model can also be viewed in wire frame and hidden line mode. Different shading
modes such as flat shaded, Gourard and Phong are supported. Other operations, such as
panning, zooming and model rotation are also supported.
Right-click anywhere on the 3D view to display the context menu. These same commands are
also on the 3D tab. The toolbar for performing some basic operations appears on the right side
view. For more information, see 3D Graphics Toolbar (on page 226).
When in 3D viewing mode, the dialog box for a detail can be activated by double-clicking a
detail. It might be necessary to first select Select by Single Click .
Visibility - Select and clear the different options to display and hide that
element in the 3D graphics view. For example, you might want to hide
the skirt to get a better view of a nozzle at the bottom of a vessel. The
elements are not deleted from the model, just hidden.
Wireframe - Shows lines and curves to show the object's borders and all
its edges.
Flat Shaded - Shows the objects with shaded surfaces and smooth
edges.
Gouraud Shaded - Shows the objects with shaded surfaces and
smooth edges.
Hidden Line - Shows the objects using lines and curves to show the
object's borders.
View Orthographic - Displays all objects the same relative size
regardless of the distance from the observer.
View Perspective - Specifies that the view should display the vessel
using perspective rendering. Perspective rendering is characterized by:
Objects being drawn smaller as their distance from the observer
increases.
The size of object dimensions along the line of sight are smaller relative
to the dimensions across the line of sight.
Delete Cutting Plane Grid - Removes a cutting plane from the view that
you placed using the Insert Cutting Plane command on the 3D
Graphics Toolbar.
Fonts and Colors - Activates the Plot Properties dialog with which you
can customize the colors of elements in the display.
Fixed View - Turn on the fix the view.

3D Tab
Shadow - Turns the vessel shadow on and off.
Show Materials - Assigns a unique color for each material used in the
vessel, and displays those colors in the view and legend grid.
Show Wall Thickness - Assigns a unique color for each wall thickness
value defined in the vessel, and displays those colors in the view and
legend grid.
Show Temperature - Assigns a unique color for each temperature value
defined in the vessel, and displays those colors in the view and legend
grid.
Show Pressure - Assigns a unique color for each pressure value
defined in the vessel, and displays those colors in the view and legend
grid.
3D Graphics Toolbar
The 3D graphics toolbar controls how your model displays in the 3D View. By default, this
toolbar displays vertically on the right side of the graphics window. You can toggle the 3D
graphics toolbar off and on using the quick access toolbar customization command (black
drop-arrow) in the top left-corner of the main window.
Pre-defined Views - Changes the current view to front, back, top, bottom,
left, right view or a standard isometric view.
Zoom Extents - Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window.
Zoom Window - Use the mouse to draw a window around the portion of
the model that you want to zoom in on. This is a rubber band zoom.
Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Orbit - Rotates the model in any direction using the mouse. Click the right
mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the model.
Turntable Orbit - Rotates the model about the Y-axis.
Pan - Translates the model in the direction the mouse is dragged.
Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it down while moving the mouse
will also pan the model.
Zoom Camera - Zooms in or out. Click this button, then press the left
mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to zoom
in or out. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Select by Window - Selects details that are inside a fence that you define.
Select By Click - Allows the selection of a detail for further manipulation.
Translate Detail - Translates the selected detail in the view.

3D Tab
Insert Cutting Plane - Inserts a cutting plane when you click this button
and then click anywhere in the window. You can then rotate the cutting
plane after it has been initiated. The rotating plane exposes the various
layers of the vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned
off after the view is set. To restore the model, right- click in the 3D window
and choose Delete Cutting Plane.
Transparency - The main exterior shells of the model are transparent.
Show Nozzle List - Displays list of nozzles in a list box. The list allows a
nozzle to be located in the model for editing.
Options - Element and detail colors are supported using the Options
selection. After being set, the software recalls them in subsequent
sessions. This option is also available when you right-click on the model
window and select Properties. The Options dialog box displays as shown
below. If any of the colors are changed, click Apply to update the new
color selections.

3D Tab

SECTION 10
Diagnostics Tab
The following commands are available on the Diagnostics tab.
Crc Check - Performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the delivered software dlls and
checks that executable files are correctly copied to the hard drive of your computer. Use this
command if your software is behaving erratically.
Program Scanner - Checks the software build version of each executable file. See the
Intergraph web site www.coade.com/fpvelite.htm for the latest build information.

Diagnostics Tab

SECTION 11
Esl Tab
The following commands are available on the Esl (External Software Lock) tab.
Show Data - Displays the encrypted data on your external software lock (ESL) key that allows
you to check the status of the device. The data can also be saved to a log file. This information
is useful for updating the software and for remaining current with your Intergraph license.
Phone Update (on page 231) or Generate Access Codes -Creates access codes needed to
update the ESL when a new version of the software has been released.
Enter Re-Authorization Codes (on page 231) - Allows ESL update codes to be entered.
Check HASP Driver Status - - See Admin Control Center
Install the HASP Device Driver - See Admin Control Center.
Admin Control Center - Displays all information related to the HASP Driver. The HASP Keys
tab shows all available keys, whether local or on the network. The Access Log tab displays all
instances of a license being used on the network keyin on the host computer.
Phone Update
In general, each time a new version of PV Elite is released, data on the ESL must be updated to
allow the new release to run properly. If the ESL is not updated, an error displays and software
commands may not be active.
After installing the new version, use this option to generate four access codes. Phone, email, or
fax the codes to Intergraph support. Updated codes are then provided that you enter using
Enter Re-Authorization Codes (on page 231) command.
 The access codes constantly change.

 The time and date on the computer must be correct.
Enter Re-Authorization Codes

Enter one or more sets of update codes, usually to allow access to the latest software version.
These codes can also change the client name, or change the last usage date.
Each set of codes received should be entered on a single line. Click OK to activate the new
codes.

Esl Tab

SECTION 12
Help Tab
The following commands are available on the Help tab.
Tip of the Day - Displays a tip about the software.
Help Topics - Opens the PV Elite help.
View Documentation - Opens the printable PV Elite User's Guide, QA Manual, and QA
certificate.
Quick Start - Opens the printable PV Elite Quick Start.
Foundation 3D Help - Opens the help menu for all Foundation 3D related help topics.
Check for Updates - Checks your version of the software against the most current version. You
must be connected to the Internet for this option.
E-mail Support - Creates an email with your system and software information. You can type
your support question and send to Intergraph Support ppmcrm@intergraph.com
(mailto:ppmcrm@intergraph.com?subject=ICAS Support Request). However, eCustomer is the
best method to reach Integraph support. eCustomer provides a comprehensive knowledge base
of information and allows Intergraph to track all customer queries, including bug reports, user
issues, and user-generated ideas for improvement of the software.
On-Line Registration - Registers this application. You must be connected to the Internet for
this option. Intergraph does not give email addresses to thir party solicitors. This information is
solely used to inform customers regarding updates and release of the software.
On-line Help - Starts an interactive help session with Intergraph Support. You must be
connected to the Internet for this option.
What's New - Displays new features for this version of the software.
About - Displays information about your software version. The version number displays in this
format: xx.xx.xx.xxxx.
To exit this screen, press <Esc>. The version number is very helpful when calling Intergraph
Support.

Help Tab

SECTION 13
General Input Tab

Select a vessel element in the graphics view to make it current, and then edit data for that
element on the General Input tab.
1. Select the Home tab.
2. In the Input/Output panel, select Input > General Input .
The General Input tab appears at the bottom-left of the PV Elite window.

General Input Tab
3. Use the element navigation arrows to navigate quickly between elements in

the vessel.
In This Section
Element Data (General Input Tab) ................................................ 236
Additional Element Data (General Input Tab)................................ 246
References..................................................................................... 296
Element Data (General Input Tab)

All elements share a common set of parameters described below. A few of the parameters might
be disabled depending on the active element.
Element Description - Enter a description for the element. The description can be up to 48
characters in length and can consist of both letters and numbers. The description is used in
output reports. This entry is optional.
When descriptions are available, the software prints descriptions instead of node numbers.
Descriptions are also seen in 3D graphics when you click Flip to 3D View on the Auxiliary
toolbar.
This value is not a function of the selected vessel code (such as, PD:5500, EN or ASME).

General Input Tab
From Node - Displays the software-generated node number describing the starting location of
the element. The From Node value for this element is also used to define starting locations for
details such as nozzles, insulation, and packing that are associated with this element.
The software defines a vertical vessel from bottom to top. If the vertical vessel is on skirt, the
first element is the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element is a head and the legs or lugs are
defined as details on the appropriate head or shell elements.
The software defines a horizontal vessel from left to right. The first element in a horizontal
vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details on the appropriate shell
elements.
To Node - Displays the software-generated node number that describes the ending location of
the element. The To Node value is incremented by 10 above the From Node value. To Node is
From Node of the following element. For example, if the value of To Node for a head is 50, then
the value of From Node for the shell is 50.
Element Type - Displays the type of the element. You can change the type by selecting one of
the following from the list.
 Cylinder - A cylindrical shell
 Elliptical - An elliptical head
 Torispherical - A Torispherical (F&D) head
 Spherical - A spherical head
 Conical - A conical head or shell segment
 Welded Flat - CA welded flat head
 Body Flange - A body flange or blind flange
 Skirt - A skirt with an optional basering
If the element type is changed, all detail data, such as nozzles, are lost.
Diameter Basis - Select the type of diameter to use for the element. Select ID for the inside
diameter. Select OD for the outside diameter. ID and OD are available for ASME Division 1.
Only OD is available for ASME VIII-1.
The ASME code provides different equations for required thickness based on whether the
geometry is specified on ID or OD. By using the ID basis, the software computes a thinner
required thickness, Tr, for the nozzle, such as in high-pressure, thick-wall geometries.
Inside Diameter - Enter a value for the inside diameter of the element, when ID is selected for
Diameter Basis:
 Cylinders - Enter the diameter of the cylinder.
 Elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads - Enter the diameter of the straight flange.
 Skirts - Enter the diameter at the top of the skirt.

General Input Tab
 Welded flat heads - Enter the large diameter of the flat head. The value is not a function of
the selected code (such as, PD:5500, EN or ASME).
This option is not available when either Body Flange or Conical is selected for Element
Type.
Outside Diameter - Enter a value for the outside diameter of the element, when OD is selected
for Diameter Basis:
 Cylinders - Enter the diameter of the cylinder.
 Elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads - Enter the diameter of the straight flange.
 Skirts - Enter the diameter at the top of the skirt.
 Welded flat heads - Enter the large diameter of the flat head. The value is not a function of
the selected code (such as, PD:5500, EN or ASME).
This option is not available when Body Flange or Conical are selected for Element
Type.
"From" End Diameter - Enter a value for the inside or outside diameter at the From Node end
of the cone, as needed by the selection for Diameter Basis. This option is only available when
Conical is selected for Element Type.
Flange ID - Enter a value for the inside of a flange element. This option is only available when
Body Flange is selected for Element Type
 Body flanges - Enter the inside diameter of the body flange.
 Blind flanges - Enter the inside diameter of the flange to which it is bolted. The inside
diameter of a blind flange is zero, but the software uses this value to sketch the graphics.
Cylinder Length - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node. For a cylindrical shell,
enter the length of the shell from seam to seam. This option is only available when Cylinder is
selected for Element Type.
Straight Flange Length - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node. For an
elliptical, torispherical, or spherical head, enter the length of the straight flange. The software
automatically includes the volume of the head and the depth of the head in calculations. This
option is only available when Elliptical, Torispherical, or Spherical are selected for Element
Type.
Overall Flange Length - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node.
For an integral weld neck type body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including
the weld neck, if any. If the flange is a slip-on, lap joint or similar, the distance is the length of the
flange that protrudes past the shell to which it is attached. This value cannot be zero.
For a bolted blind flange, enter the thickness of the head/flange.

General Input Tab
This option is only available when Body Flange is selected for Element Type.
Flat Head Thickness - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node. For a welded flat
head, enter the thickness of the head/flange.
This option is only available when Welded Flat is selected for Element Type.
Cone Length - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node.
For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including toriconical sections,
if any) from seam to seam.
For a conical bottom head that is skirt-supported, enter the distance from the top of the skirt to
the top of the conical head. You must also enter Cone Length in the Additional Element Data
section. That is the length used in volume calculations and external pressure calculations.
This option is only available when Conical is selected for Element Type.
Skirt Length - Enter the distance between From Node and To Node. For a skirt support, enter
the distance from the bottom of the base ring to the head tangent line. Because the software
does not add the basering thickness to the element length, including the basering thickness in
the skirt length provides the correct element elevations. This option is only available when Skirt
is selected for Element Type.
Finished Thickness - Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is Nominal Thickness
minus mill tolerance and thinning due to forming as described below. Finished thickness is a
required input for each vessel element but you can allow PV Elite to increase the element
thickness so that each element passes the requirements for internal pressure, external
pressure, the combined loads of pressure, dead and live loads. Remember that the status bar
lists internal pressure information about the current element including the required thickness.
For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal thickness
of the plate to account for thinning of the head due to forming.
For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you must subtract the maximum possible mill
undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness. Use the pipe selection button to select
standard pipe and insert the thickness into this field.
For welded flat heads this is simply the thickness of the plate from which the head is made.
For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and any
thinning. For cylindrical skirts made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible
mill undertolerance from the nominal pipe wall thickness.
For a body flange, this is the thickness of the flange. The ASME, EN and PD:5500 codes depict
the thickness at the edge of the flange.
Do not include corrosion allowance. It is automatically subtracted from this thickness by
the software when values are included for Internal Corrosion Allowance and External
Corrosion Allowance.
Nominal Thickness - Enter the nominal (design) thickness of the element. For most
calculations, the software uses Finished Thickness to determine MAWP and other results.
However, when calculating element weight, it is theoretically more accurate to use the nominal
thickness before the element it is formed. This entry is optional. If left blank, the software uses
Finished Thickness to determine weight.

General Input Tab
Normally, this value would only be applicable to formed heads, but the software allows this entry
on all elements for greatest flexibility. When using Nominal Thickness to compute a result, the
software always takes the greatest of the finished and nominal thicknesses. If the software
designs the thickness, you are responsible for adjusting the value of nominal thickness before
final calculations are made.
 In May 2008, a change was made regarding the calculation of the inside diameter of a
cylinder whose Diameter Basis is OD. In this case, the cylinder ID (usually pipe) is
calculated as the nominal OD - 2(Nominal wall thickness). This change affects only nozzle
reinforcement calculations. If the diameter basis for the shell is specified as ID, there is no
change.
 Use of Nominal Thickness applies to the selected vessel code (such as, PD:5500, EN or
ASME).
Internal Corrosion Allowance - Enter the internal corrosion allowance for this element. Each
dimension of the element (diameters and thicknesses) is modified by the corrosion allowance.
Some elements in jacketed vessels may have both an internal and External Corrosion
Allowance.
Use of Internal Corrosion Allowance applies to the selected vessel code (such as,
PD:5500, EN-13445 or ASME).
External Corrosion Allowance - Enter the external corrosion allowance for this element. Most
vessels do not have an external corrosion allowance specification, but some, such as jacketed
vessels, need the consideration of an external corrosion allowance.
If an external corrosion allowance is specified, the software changes the dimension as needed.
For example, the OD of a cylinder would be reduced by two times the external corrosion
allowance for the external pressure calculation. For flanges, the large and small end hub
dimensions are corroded in addition to the flange thickness. The external corrosion allowance is
added to the final required thickness of the element.
Use of External Corrosion Allowance applies to the selected vessel code (such as,
PD:5500, EN-13445 or ASME).
Wind Diameter Multiplier - Enter the wind load diameter multiplier. The value is multiplied by
the element outside diameter in order to determine the overall diameter to be used in wind load
calculations. The element outside diameter includes insulation.
When using a number greater than one, carefully account for the tributary area of external
attachments such as nozzles, piping, or ladders. The typical multiplier used to determine wind
load diameter is 1.2. Thus if the actual element OD is 50 inches, the overall wind load diameter
for this element would be 50 * 1.2 = 60 inches.
The value of the wind load multiplier can be as low as 0. If a value of zero is used, then there will
be no wind load on the element. This feature is useful when sections of vessels are not exposed
to the wind.
 If the element contains a platform, use Platform Input . The software automatically
accounts for the load on the platform due to the wind pressure at the elevation of the
platform. Wind Diameter Multiplier does not need to account for the platform.
 Use of Wind Diameter Multiplier applies to the selected vessel code (such as, PD:5500,
EN-13445 or ASME)

General Input Tab
Material Name - Enter the name of the material for this element. The software contains a
database with most of materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, 5A and 5B. In
addition, material for PD 5500 and En-13445 are included.
 Alternatively, you can click Select Material on the Utilities toolbar to select a material
directly from the Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433).
To modify the material properties of the selected element, click to open the Material
Properties Dialog Box (on page 474). Doing so only changes the properties of this element for
this analysis. It does not modify the database.
Longitudinal Seam Efficiency - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for a shell section with
welded longitudinal seams. This is the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or
any seam in a spherical shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may
require a stress reduction which may be entered as a joint efficiency. Refer to Section VIII, Div.
1, Table UW-12 (below) for help in determining this value. If you know the paragraph reference
from UW-12, click to open the Degree of Radiographic Examination and PWHT dialog
box and select the radiography and heat treatment for the joint. The longitudinal and
circumferential joint efficiencies are then automatically selected by the software.
The joint efficiency in this (and all other) ASME code formulas is a measure of the inspection
quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography have a joint
efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld
seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7. Seamless components usually
have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described previously, the code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if
circumferential seams receive no radiography (E = 0.7), then longitudinal seams have a
maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. In practice, circumferential seams,
which are usually less highly stressed, may be spot radiographed (E = 0.85), while longitudinal
seams are fully radiographed. This results in the same metal thickness at some savings in
inspection costs.
For PD5500 and Section VIII Div. II (pre-2007) this value is not used by the software except for
skirt-to-shell welds. If Division II, 2007 edition or later is used, the joint efficiency will be 1 or 0.85
depending on the joint category, type of weld, and the extent of NDE. See section 4.3 and table
7.2 in Division 2 for more information.
Circumferential Seam Efficiency - Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for a shell section
with welded circumferential seams. This is the efficiency of the circumferential seam in a
cylindrical shell or any seam in a spherical shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically
seamless but may require a stress reduction which may be entered as a joint efficiency. Refer to
Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 (below) for help in determining this value. If you know the
paragraph reference from UW-12, click to open the Degree of Radiographic Examination
and PWHT dialog box and select the radiography and heat treatment for the joint. The
longitudinal and circumferential joint efficiencies are then automatically selected by the software.
The joint efficiency in this (and all other) ASME code formulas is a measure of the inspection
quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography have a joint
efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld
seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7. Seamless components usually
have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the code requires that no two seams in the same
vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if
circumferential seams receive no radiography (E = 0.7), then longitudinal seams have a
maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. In practice, circumferential seams,

General Input Tab
which are usually less highly stressed, may be spot radiographed (E = 0.85), while longitudinal
seams are fully radiographed. This results in the same metal thickness at some savings in
inspection costs.
For PD5500 and Section VIII Div. II (pre-2007) this value is not used by the software except for
skirt-to-shell welds. If Division II, 2007 edition or later is used, the joint efficiency will be 1 or 0.85
depending on the joint category, type of weld, and the extent of NDE. See section 4.3 and table
7.2 in Division 2 for more information.
Table I: MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE JOINT EFFICIENCIES FOR ARC AND GAS WELDED
JOINTS from Table UW-12
Degree of Radiographic Examination
Type (a) (a) (c)

Joint Description Limitations Weld Joint
No. Full2 Spot3 None
Category
(1) Butt joints as attained by double None A, B, C, D 1.00 0.85 0.70

welding or by other means which
will obtain the same quality of
deposited weld metal on the inside
and outside weld surfaces to
agree with the requirements of
UW-35. Welds using metal
backing strips which remain in
place are excluded.
(2) Single welded butt joint with (a) None except A, B, C, D 0.90 0.80 0.65
backing strip other than those in (b) below
included under (1) A, B, C 0.90 0.80 0.65
(b)
Circumferential
butt joints with
one plate offset;
see UW-13(b)(4)
and Fig.
UW-13.1, sketch
(k)
(3) Single welded butt joint without Circumferential A, B, C NA NA 0.60

use of backing strip. butt joints only,
not over 5/16" in.
(16 mm) thick
and not over 24
in. (610 mm)
outside diameter
(4) Double full fillet lap joint (a) Longitudinal A NA NA 0.55

joints not over
3/8 in. (10 mm) B & C6
thick
(b)
Circumferential
joints not over
5/8 in. (16 mm)
thick

General Input Tab
Type (a) (a) (c)

Category
(5) Single full fillet lap joints with plug (a) B NA NA 0.50
welds conforming to Circumferential
4
UW-17 joints for
attachment of
heads not over
24 in. (610 mm)
outside diameter
to shells not over
1.2 in. (13 mm)
thick
(b)
Circumferential
joints for the
attachment to
shells of jackets
not over 5/8 in.
(16 mm) in
nominal
thickness where
the distance
from the center
of the plug weld
to the edge of
the plate is not
less than 1 1/2
times the
diameter of the
hole for the plug
(6) Single full fillet lap joints without (a) For the A, B NA NA 0.45
plug welds attachment of
heads convex to A, B
pressure to
shells not over
5/8 in. (16 mm)
required
thickness, only
with use of fillet
weld in inside of
the shell; or
(b) for
attachment of
heads having
pressure on
either side, to
shells not over
24 in. (610 mm)
inside diameter
and not over 1/4
in. (6 mm)
required
thickness with
fillet weld on
outside of head
flange only
(7) Corner joints, full penetration, As limited by Fig. C7, D7 NA NA NA

partial penetration, and/or fillet UW-13.2 and Fig
welded UW-16.1

General Input Tab
Type (a) (a) (c)

Category
(8) Angle joints Design per B, C, D NA NA NA

U-2(g) for
Category B and
C joints
Table Notes:
1 - The single factor shown for each combination of joint category and degree of radiographic
examination replaces both the stress reduction factor and the joint efficiency factor
considerations previously used in this Division
2 - See UW-12(a) and UW-51
3 - See UW-12(b) and UW-52
4 - Joints attaching hemispherical heads to shells are excluded
5 - E = 1.0 for butt joints in compression
6 - For Type No. 4 Category C joint, limitations not applicable for bolted flange connections.
7 - There is no joint efficiency E in the design formulas of this Division for Category C and D
joints. When needed, a value of E not greater than 1.00 may be used.
Element is Post Weld Heat Treated - Select on the Degree of Radiographic Examination
and PWHT dialog box if the element receives post-weld heat treatment. The code makes post
weld heat treatment mandatory under certain conditions, such as lethal contents [UW-2] and
thick materials [UCS-56]. In the case of carbon and low alloy steels (P1 to P10 materials)
operating at low temperatures, the code gives credit if post-weld heat treatment is performed
where it is not mandatory. Clause UCS-68 of the code discusses this in detail.
If the thickness ratio in Figure UCS-66.1 does not exceed 0.35, the code gives a temperature
reduction credit of 30º F (16.66º C). The software determines the MDMT as follows:
1. Determine the minimum design metal temperature (MDMT) from figure UCS-66 using, the
appropriate curve for the chosen material.
2. Determine the further reduction in temperature from figure UCS-66.1 where the calculated
thickness is less than the actual part thickness.
3. If the ratio as determined by figure UCS-66.1 is less than 0.35, then the MDMT may then be
reduced by a further 30º F (16.66º C).
For more information, see UW-2, UW-40. UCS-56, UCS-66 and UCS-68 of the code.
Impact Testing (UG-84 and UCS-66) - Under certain circumstances, the code makes
impact testing of materials and weld metal mandatory. This is the case when the design
temperature is lower than that determined using the code rules. The code provides rules in
UCS-66 for determining the minimum design metal temperature (MDMT) of any part of the
vessel. Where vessels are required to operate at a lower temperature than that calculated using
the UCS-66 rules, then the materials must be impact tested according to UG-84. If the required
energy levels are achieved for the impact test, then the vessel may be operated at the lower
temperature.

General Input Tab
To include impact testing in your design, go to the Materials Name dialog box and check the
box under "Has this material been impact tested?"
Internal Pressure - Enter the design internal pressure for the element. This pressure need not
include any pressure due to liquid head, which is calculated automatically by the software when
liquid is defined on this element.
Temperature for Internal Pressure - Enter the design temperature for internal pressure. This
value is used as the metal design temperature for the element, especially in determining
allowable stress values.
When you edit material properties by selecting a new material name, the program uses this
temperature to determine the operating allowable stress value for the material. An exception is
stiffening rings. The allowable stress for stiffeners uses Temperature for External Pressure.
For PD:5500 and EN-13445, this value must never be less than Temperature for
External Pressure. The internal design temperature is the value that the software uses to
determine the allowable stress for the element.
External Pressure - Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This must be a
positive value, such as 15 psig (0.103 MPa). If you enter a zero, the software determine the
External MAWP, not the required thickness due to external pressure. For a skirt, zero is the only
valid value, because there cannot be external pressure on a skirt.
External pressure definitions are the same for PD:5500, ASME and EN-13445. For example:
 0 - No External Pressure
 15 psig (0.1034 MPa) - Full Vacuum
 0.3 psig - Partial Vacuum
If the element is an internal head, the external pressure equals the internal pressure on
the previous element. If a different value is entered, the software will run, but with a warning
message.
Temperature for External Pressure - Enter the design temperature for external pressure. This
value is used as the metal design temperature for external pressure calculations. The software
uses the external design temperature and External Pressure Chart Name on the Material
Properties Dialog Box (on page 474) to determine the allowable external pressure from the
material tables.
When the software uses the materials tables to determine the allowable axial compression for a
vessel, it uses the maximum of Temperature for Internal Pressure and Temperature for
External Pressure. Axial compression may act in combination with either internal or external
pressure unless Vary Compressive Allowable for Internal/External Cases is selected on the
Load Cases tab.
 For Divisions 1 and 2, this value must not exceed the maximum allowed by the external
pressure charts in ASME Section II Part D.
 For PD 5500 and EN-13445, this value is not used to look up values for the allowable stress
of the element. The internal temperature is used. If the vessel is a core or vacuum vessel
and there is no internal pressure, Temperature for Internal Pressure should be set to the
same value as Temperature for External Pressure.

General Input Tab
Additional Element Data (General Input Tab)

Some element types require additional parameters.
Topics
Elliptical (Additional Element Data) ............................................... 246
Torispherical (Additional Element Data) ........................................ 247
Spherical (Additional Element Data) .............................................. 247
Conical (Additional Element Data) ................................................. 248
Welded Flat (Additional Element Data) ......................................... 250
Body Flange (Additional Element Data) ........................................ 252
Skirt (Additional Element Data) ..................................................... 274
Elliptical (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for elliptical head elements.
Head Factor - Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the
major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is
2.0.
Inside Head Depth - Enter the inside depth of the elliptical head. This value is for a new head
and does not include corrosion allowance. The software calculates the outer depth h, and use
this term to calculate the required thickness of the ellipse. This option is only available for the
PD:5500 code and when Elliptical is selected for Element Type.
Sump Head - Select if the head is attached to the end of a nozzle. You must also select a
Parent Nozzle. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The
best strategy is to completely define all other elements and details and then create the sump
head element last. This option is only available when Elliptical, Torispherical, or Spherical are
Parent Nozzle - Select the type of nozzle for the sump head. Select Inlet, Outlet, Shell Inlet, or
Shell Outlet. This option is only available when Sump Head is selected.

General Input Tab
Torispherical (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for torispherical head elements.
Inside Crown Radius - Enter the crown radius L of the torispherical head. For a standard
ASME flanged and dished head, this is equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME
Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). For PD:5500, this value is equal to
the outside diameter measured to the tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure
3.5.2.1.
Inside Knuckle Radius - Enter the knuckle radius r for the toroidal portion of the torispherical
head. For a standard ASME flanged and dished head, this is equal to six percent of the crown
radius. Allowable values range from six percent of the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown
radius (hemispherical head). See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure
1-4(b).
Spherical (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for spherical head elements.

General Input Tab
Conical (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for conical head or shell elements.
'To' End Inside Diameter or 'To' End Outside Diameter - Enter a value for the inside or
outside diameter of the cone at the To Node end, as needed by the selection for Diameter
Basis. For a conical head, either the From Node or the To Node has a diameter equal to zero
or two times the small end knuckle radius. This is not the diameter at the point where a knuckle
or flare intersects the conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the
cylindrical section.
Cone Length - Enter the seam-to-seam or design length of the cone along the axis of the
vessel. The software calculates the effective length of the cone for internal and external
pressure calculations.
For cones without a knuckle or flared section, you must enter the design length of the cone. For
cases where there is a knuckle or a flare, you must enter the seam-to seam-length. You can
optionally enter in the Half Apex Angle.
Half Apex Angle - Enter a value if both Cone Length (in the Element Data section) and Cone
Length (in the Additional Element Data section) are specified and you want to override the
angle calculated by the software. If 0 is entered or no value is entered, the software uses the
calculated value. This entry is optional.
Refer to the ASME code, Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-33, figure UG-33.1 for a sketch
of the half apex angle for some typical geometries. For internal pressure calculations, the half
apex angle should not be greater than 30º, though the software will give results for up to 60º.
For external pressure calculations, the angle should not be greater than 60º.
For cones without a knuckle, the software calculates discontinuity stresses according to the
analysis technique by H. Bednar. For cones whose half apex angles are not within those limits
prescribed by the code, this may help you decide if the geometry is acceptable. If the cone and
attached cylinders do not have a common centerline, it may be necessary to calculate the
greater of the angles and manually enter the value. For cones with a flare or knuckle, PV Elite
calculates the half apex angle with the given seam-to-seam cone length. The overall cone length
must include the knuckle dimensions.
Line of Support Options - Select a value to determine how the cone is taken as a line of
support for external pressure calculations, according to ASME code Section VIII Division 1,
Figure UG-28.1. Select one of the following:
 Not a Line of Support - The external pressure length for the surrounding sections includes
the length of the cone.
 Both Ends a Line of Support - The external design length L does not include the cone
length.
 Small End a Line of Support - The cone length up to small end is included.

General Input Tab
 Large End a Line of Support - The cone length up to large end is included.
Based on the selection, it may not be necessary to perform moment of inertia calculations
according to Appendix 1-8 (End is not a line of support).The code also does not force you to
choose one option over the other; in some cases you may find that rings are not required at all.
Optimize the design by experimenting with the options.
Has Flare or Knuckle? - Select if the cone is toriconical and has a flare at the small end or a
knuckle at the large end. The Toricone Dialog Box (on page 249) opens. See ASME code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an illustration of a toriconical
section. This option is only available when Conical is selected for Element Type.
Is Concentric? - Select if the conical sections are concentric. Clear if the conical sections are
eccentric.Concentric sections are used in vertical geometries and eccentric conical sections are
used in kettle type reboilers.
Shell Section - Select if the cone is a typical transition between two cylinders. Clear if this is a
bottom or top conical head. This option applies to skirt-supported geometry.
Toricone Dialog Box

Defines knuckle data on a cone element. This dialog box opens when Has Flare or Knuckle? is
selected.
Inside Knuckle Radius (rL) - Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-31(h) requires this radius to be no less than six
percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three times the knuckle thickness.
For ASME Section VIII Division 2 vessels, also choose the type of curvature of the large end
knuckle: Hemispherical, (2:1) Elliptical, or Torispherical.
Knuckle Thickness - Enter the minimum thickness after forming the toroidal knuckle at the
large end.
Crown Radius - When Torispherical is selected as the large end knuckle curvature, enter the
radius of the torisphere crown. For standard geometry, click and the software calculates the
value. ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-31(h) requires this radius to be no less than
six percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three times the knuckle thickness.
Small end Knuckle Radius (rS) - Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the smallend.
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-31(h) requires this radius to be no less than six
percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three times the knuckle thickness.
Small End Knuckle Thickness - Enter the minimum thickness after forming the toroidal
knuckle at the small end.

General Input Tab
Welded Flat (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for welded flat head elements.
Welded Flat Head Attachment Sketch - Select the flat head attachment sketch, according to
ASME code Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Select from the following:
 (a) - Welded cover
 (b-1) - Head welded to vessel with generous radius
 (b-2) - Head welded to vessel with small radius
 (c) - Lap welded or brazed construction
 (d) - Integral flat circular heads
 (e), (f), (g) - Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
 (h) - Plate welded to end of shell
 (i) - Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
 (m), (n), (o) - Plate held in place by screwed ring
 (q) - Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
 (r), (s) - Plate held in place by beveled edge
The sketch is for welded covers, not bolted blind covers.
Attachment Factor - Enter the welded flat head attachment factor for the sketch selected in
Welded Flat Head Attachment Sketch, according to ASME code Section VIII, Division 1,
Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are below:
 (b-1) - 0.17 (Head welded to vessel with generous radius)
 (b-2) - 0.20 (Head welded to vessel with small radius)
 (c) - 0.20 (Lap welded or brazed construction)
 (d) - 0.13 (Integral flat circular heads)
 (e), (f), (g) - 0.20 (Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m))
 (h) - 0.33 (Plate welded to end of shell)
 (i) - 0.20 (Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m))
 (j), (k) - 0.30 (Bolted flat heads (include bending moment))
 (m), (n), (o) - 0.30 (Plate held in place by screwed ring))
 (p) - 0.25 (Bolted flat head with full face gasket)

General Input Tab
 (q) - 0.75 (Plate screwed into small diameter vessel)

Consult Paragraph UG-34 before using these values.
 For sketches involving m, the attachment factor (C) must be calculated and checked per the
Code. The software does not calculate m.
 For PD 5500, the attachment factor (C) is calculated according to 3.5.5.3 for welded flat
ends. The attachment factor for welded flat heads is taken from figure 3.5-36 and is a
function of the (cylinder actual thickness)/(cylinder required thickness) ratio and the
pressure/allowable stress ratio. Enter the value from the figure 3.5-36 graph.
Non-Circular Small Diameter - Enter a value for the smaller dimension of a non-circular flat
head. The large diameter is entered in Inside Diameter in the Element Data section. The
software then calculates values such as required thickness using the formulas in the ASME
code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34. Enter a value of 0 if the flat head is circular.
App. 14 Large Central Opening - Select if there is a single, large, centrally-located opening
that creates a (hole diameter)/(head diameter) ratio greater than 0.5. This opens the Integral
Flat Head with a Large Centrally Located Opening Dialog Box (on page 251). This option
cannot be used with Evaluate Uniform Patterned Holes? and is only available when Welded
Flat is selected for Element Type.
Evaluate Uniform Patterned Holes? - Select if there is a uniform series of holes in the flat
head cover. The software then calculates the required thickness due to the ligament created by
the hole pattern, according to ASME code Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-39. When
selected, expand Evaluate Uniform Patterned Holes? and enter values for Opening
Diameter, Ligament Distance to Edge (U3), Opening Diameter (d2), Ligament Distance to
Edge (U5), and Pitch Distance (p).
This option cannot be used when App. 14 Large Central Opening is selected. Nozzles are also
not compatible and are not analyzed.
Integral Flat Head with a Large Centrally Located Opening

Dialog Box
Defines values for calculating stresses and determining the required thickness of a welded flat
cover with a large centrally located opening.
Opening Diameter Bn - Enter the diameter of the opening Bn centrally located in the welded flat
head, as required by Appendix 14. The diameter should also be greater than 1/2 of the welded
flat head outside diameter. If your opening does not meet this criteria, do not use this analysis.

General Input Tab
Large End Hub Thk (g1s) - Enter the hub thickness for the large end. The shell side
dimensions must be entered in for the calculation to occur. Without proper values of G1s, G0s
and hs, the software does not calculate the required thickness of the head. Like the nozzle, the
hub can be straight, and G1s equals G0s. The hub length is entered as stated for nozzles.
Small End Hub Thk (g0s) - Enter the hub thickness for the small end. The shell side
dimensions must be entered in for the calculation to occur. Without proper values of G1s, G0s
and hs, the software does not calculate the required thickness of the head. Like the nozzle, the
hub can be straight, and G1s equals G0s. The hub length is entered as stated for nozzles.
Hub Length (hs) - Enter the hub length. The shell side dimensions must be entered in for the
calculation to occur. Without proper values of G1s, G0s and hs, the software does not calculate
the required thickness of the head. Like the nozzle, the hub can be straight, and G1s equals G0s.
The hub length is entered as stated for nozzles.
Large End Hub Thk (g1n) - Enter the hub thickness for the large end. The nozzle side may or
may not have a nozzle welded to the flat head. If there is no nozzle, the dimensions G1n, G0n and
the hub length hn are zero. If there is a nozzle, you must enter the hub dimensions as shown.
For a straight neck, the hub dimensions are the same. If the hub dimensions are the same, the
hub length is arbitrary, but cannot be zero. In this case one inch (25mm) is recommended.
Small End Hub Thk (g0n) - Enter the hub thickness for the small end. The nozzle side may or
may not have a nozzle welded to the flat head. If there is no nozzle, the dimensions G1n, G0n and
the hub length hn are zero. If there is a nozzle, you must enter the hub dimensions as shown.
For a straight neck, the hub dimensions are the same. If the hub dimensions are the same, the
hub length is arbitrary, but cannot be zero. In this case one inch (25mm) is recommended.
Hub Length (hn) - Enter the hub length. The nozzle side may or may not have a nozzle welded
to the flat head. If there is no nozzle, the dimensions G1n, G0n and the hub length hn are zero. If
there is a nozzle, you must enter the hub dimensions as shown. For a straight neck, the hub
dimensions are the same. If the hub dimensions are the same, the hub length is arbitrary, but
cannot be zero. In this case one inch (25mm) is recommended.
Body Flange (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for flange elements.
Perform Flange Calculation - Select to specify flange parameters and calculate the flange
design, such as required thickness, MAWP, and MAPnc, according to the applicable design
code. The Flange Dialog Box (on page 258) opens. This option is only available when Body
Flange is selected for Element Type.
Flange Weight - Enter the weight of the ANSI/ASME large diameter flange.

General Input Tab
This option is only available when Body Flange is selected for Element Type and Perform
Flange Calculation is not selected.
Approximate Weight (lbs.) of API 605 Flanges, Class Series B (According to Taylor Forge
Cat. #571)
Nominal 75 150 300 400 600 900
Size (in.)
26 80 120 400 360 550 1050
28 85 140 450 450 650 1520

30 90 150 550 530 810 1820
32 105 170 685 635 950 2065
34 110 210 750 690 1205 2450
36 145 240 840 855 1340 2520
38 160 290 915 935 1470 3385
40 170 310 990 1090 1630 3620
42 185 345 1135 1190 2030 3960
44 230 370 1235 1375 2160 4300
46 245 435 1470 1525 2410 4640
48 270 480 1575 1790 2855 4980
50 290 520 1710 1950 3330
52 310 550 1840 2125 3560
54 340 620 1980 2565 3920
56 400 650 2595 2710 4280
58 430 780 2770 3230 4640
60 475 850 2870 3820 5000
Approximate Weight (lbs.) of MSS SP-44 Flanges, Class Series A (According to Taylor
Forge Cat. #571)
Nominal
150 300 400 600 900
Size (in.)
26 300 605 650 940 1525
28 345 745 785 1060 1810
30 400 870 905 1210 2120
32 505 1005 1065 1375 2545
34 540 1145 1200 1540 2970

General Input Tab
Nominal
150 300 400 600 900
Size (in.)
36 640 1275 1340 1705 3395
38 720 695 935 1470 3385
40 775 840 1090 1630 3620
42 890 950 1190 2030 3960
44 990 1055 1375 2160 4300
46 1060 1235 1525 2410 4640
48 1185 1380 1790 2855 4980
50 1270 1530 1950 3330
52 1410 1660 2125 3560
54 1585 2050 2565 3920
56 1760 2155 2710 4280
58 1915 2270 3230 4640
60 2045 2470 3820 5000
ANSI/DIN Class - Select the flange class from the pull down list. The software then finds the
allowable pressure on the flange for both the operating and cold conditions of the selected class.
ANSI/DIN Grade - Select the nozzle flange material grade. In the ANSI code, grades are
assigned into groups.
There are advisories on the use of certain material grades. Review the cautionary
notes in the ANSI B16.5 code.
The following flange grades are available:
Group Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates

A 105
C-Si A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
A 350 Gr.LF2
A 350 Gr. LF 6
C-Mn-Si-V
1.1 Cl.1
3½Ni A 537 Cl. 1
A 350 Gr. LF3
C-Mn-Si A 216 Gr. WCC
A 352 Gr. LCC

General Input Tab

A 350 Gr. LF 6
C-Mn-Si-V
Cl.2
2½Ni A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. B
1.2 3½Ni A 352 Gr. LC3 A 203 Gr. E
C-Si A 352 Gr. LCB A 515 Gr. 65

A 352 Gr. LC1
1.3
2½Ni A 203 Gr. A
3½Ni A 203 Gr. D
C-Si A 515 Gr. 60

1.4 A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl.
1
C-½Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 204 Gr. A

1.5 A 204 Gr. B
½C-½Mo A 182 Gr. F2

1.7
1¼Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC6

1.9 A 182 Gr. F22 A 387 Gr. 11
1¼Cr-½Mo-Si
Cl.2 Cl.2
1.11 Cr-½Mo A 204 Gr. C
1.13 5Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F5a A 217 Gr. C5
1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12
1Cr-½Mo
1.17
5Cr-½Mo
18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304 A 351 Gr. CF3 A 240 Gr. 304
2.1 A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8 A 240 Gr. 304H
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 240 Gr. 316
A 182 Gr. F316H A 351 Gr. CF8M A 240 Gr. 316H

2.2 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 182 Gr. F317 A 351 Gr. CG8M A 240 Gr. 317
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo

General Input Tab
18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L A 240 Gr. 304L

2.3
18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 182 Gr. F321 A 240 Gr. 321

2.4 A 182 Gr. F321H A 240 Gr. 321H
18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F347 A 240 Gr. 347
A 182 Gr. F347H A 240 Gr. 347H

2.5 A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr. 348H
2.6 23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309H

A 240 Gr. 310H
25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 240 Gr.
A 351 Gr. S31254
20Cr-18Ni-6Mo A 182 Gr. F44
2.7 CK3MCuN A 240 Gr.
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N A 182 Gr. F51
S31803
25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N A 182 Gr. F53
A 240 Gr.
S32750
A 351 Gr. CE8MN

24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V
A 351 Gr. CD4MCu
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu
2.8 A 351 Gr.
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb
CD3MWCuN A 240 Gr.
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W A 182 Gr. F55
S32760
23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309S

2.9
25Cr-20Ni A 240 Gr.310S
25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8

2.10
A 351 Gr. CH20
2.11 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 351 Gr. CF8C

2.12 25Cr-20Ni A 351 Gr. CK20
B 463 Gr.
3.1 35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb B 462 Gr. N08020
N08020
B 162 Gr.
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200
N02200
B 162 Gr.
3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201
N02201

General Input Tab

B 127 Gr.
67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400
3.4 N04400
67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405
B 168 Gr.
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600
N06600
B 409 Gr.
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800
N08800
B 333 Gr.
N10665
65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 333 Gr.
B 462 Gr. N10665
64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-Mn N10675
B 462 Gr. N10675
-W B 575 Gr.
3.7 B 564 Gr. N10276
54Ni-16Mo-15Cr N10276
B 564 Gr. N06625
60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb B 443 Gr.
B 335 Gr. N10001 N06625
62Ni-28Mo-5Fe
B 333 Gr.
N10001
B 434 Gr.
N10003
70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe B 573 Gr. N10003 B 575 Gr.
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. 06455 N06455
3.8 42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu B 564 Gr. N08825 B 424 Gr. 08825
55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo B 462 Gr. N06022 B 575 Gr.
55Ni-23Cr-16Mo01.6Cu B 462 Gr.N06200 N06022
B 575 Gr.
N06200
B 435 Gr.
3.9 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe B 572 Gr. N06002
N06002
B 599 Gr.
3.10 25Ni-46Fe-21Cr-5Mo B 672 Gr. N08700
N08700
B 625 Gr.
44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo B 649 Gr. N08904 N08904
3.11
26Ni-43Fe-22Cr-5Mo B 621 Gr. N08320 B 620 Gr.
N08320
B 582 Gr.
47Ni-22Cr-20Fe-7Mo
B 581 Gr. N06985 N06985
3.12 46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu-
B 462 Gr. N08367 A 351 Gr. CN3MN B 688 Gr.
N
N08367
B 582 Gr.
47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo B 581 Gr. N06975 N06975
3.13
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C B 462 Gr. N08031 B 625 Gr.
N08031

General Input Tab

B 582 Gr.
47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo B 581 Gr. N06007 N06007
3.14
40Ni-29Cr-15Fe-5Mo B 462 Gr. N06030 B 582 Gr.
N06030
B 409 Gr.
3.15 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08810
N08810
B 536 Gr.
3.16 35Ni-19Cr-1¼Si B 511 Gr. N08330
N08330
3.17 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo A 351 Gr. CN7M
Flange Type - Select the ANSI flange typle. Select Weld Neck, Slip On, or Blind. This option is
only available when Body Flange is selected for Element Type.
Nominal Size Lookup - Select a nominal flange diameter. The flange diameter, length, and
thickness are automatically updated. This value is not saved. This option is only available when
Body Flange is selected for Element Type.
Flange Dialog Box

Defines values for calculating actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges according to
the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, VIII-2; PD 5500; and EN-13445.
Select a Flange Type - Select the type of flange:
 1 - Integral Weld Neck Flange
 2 - Integral Slip on Flange
 3 - Integral Ring Flange
 4 - Loose Slip on Flange
 5 - Loose Ring Flange
 6 - Lap Joint Flange
 7 - Bolted Blind Flange or TEMA channel Cover
 8 - Reverse Geometry Weld Neck Flange
 9 - Loose Reverse Flange
If the type 7 blind flange is selected, the modulus of elasticity at design temperature is
needed. By default the software uses the external pressure charts to retrieve this information.
Alternately, you can use the elasticity data supplied in the TEMA standard by typing in the
TEMA identifier in Flange ID. The TEMA identifier is a number that ranges between 16 and 50,
and depends on the composition of the flange material. Listings of the TEMA numbers can be
found in Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
(on page 129).
Description - Enter an alphanumeric description for the item.
Flange ID - Enter the inside diameter of the flange. For integral-type flanges, this value is also
the inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as B in the ASME code. Internal Corrosion
Allowance is used to adjust this value (two times the corrosion allowance is added to the
uncorroded value of Flange ID).
For blind flanges the value is 0.0.

General Input Tab
For reverse flanges this is the B` dimension as shown in appendix 2 of the ASME Code.
Flange OD - Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as A in the ASME
code. If the flange is being corroded from the outside, be sure this is a corroded dimension.
Face ID - Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the
Face ID and Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Face OD - Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of Face
OD and the Gasket OD to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in
design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the
gasket.
Gasket ID - Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the
Flange ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Gasket OD - Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of Flange
OD and Gasket OD to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in
design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the
gasket.
Thickness Large - Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as
G1 in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance is subtracted from this value. It is permissible for
the hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end.

General Input Tab
For flange geometry without hubs, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Thickness Small - Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as
Go in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance is subtracted from this value.
For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For loose
slip on flanges without hubs, this is typically the thickness of the attached shell or the hub
dimensions can all be zero. For loose ring flanges with a hub, this is the thickness of the hub.
For optional loose ring flanges with hubs analyzed as integral, this is the thickness of the
attached shell. See ASME general note 2 of Figure 2-4 for more information.
If you are using PD 5500 or EN-13445, please check the code for correct input values.
Hub Length - Enter the hub length. This value is referred to as H in the ASME code.
For flange geometry without hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an
optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld,
and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld.
When you analyze a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, you should
enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However,
when you design a loose flange as a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This insures that the software designs
the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the nuts.

General Input Tab
Bolt Circle Diameter - Enter the diameter of the bolt circle of the flange.
Thread Series - Select the thread series bolt table. Select TEMA, TEMA Metric, UNC, BS
3643, or SABS 1700 1996. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, select User
Root Area and enter the nominal size in Nominal Bolt Diameter.
Nominal Bolt Diameter - Click and select the nominal bolt diameter from the bolt table
selected for Type of Threads. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, enter
the nominal size and select User Root Area in Type of Threads.

(inches)
(cm.^2) (in.^2)
0.500 1.27 0.126
0.625 1.5875 0.202
0.750 1.9050 0.302
0.875 2.22225 0.419
1.000 2.54000 0.551
1.125 2.85750 0.728
1.250 3.17500 0.929
1.375 3.49250 1.155
1.500 3.81000 1.405
1.625 4.12750 1.680
1.750 4.44500 1.980
1.875 4.76250 2.304
2.000 5.08000 2.652
2.250 5.71500 3.423

General Input Tab

(i h )
2.500 6.35000 4.292
2.750 6.98500 5.259
3.000 7.62000 6.324
3.250 8.25500 7.487
3.500 8.89000 8.749
3.750 9.52500 10.108
4.000 10.1600 11.566
Number of Bolts - Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
Root Area - For nonstandard bolts, enter the root cross-sectional area of the bolt.
Gasket Factor m | y - Enter values for the gasket material and contact facing. Enter the factor
ratio (m) and minimum stress (y). Alternatively, click to open the Select a Gasket dialog
box, and select a standard gasket material.
ASME Table 2-5.1 - Gasket List
Gasket Min. Facing

Gasket Material
Factor m Stress y Column
Self-energizing types ( O rings, metallic elastomer, and
0.00 0.00 II
other types considered as self-sealing )
Elastomers WO/ fabric or high %of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0.0 II
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.0 II
Asbestos with Suitable Binder
1/8" thick 2.00 1600.0 II
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.0 II
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.0 II
Elastomers W/cotton fabric insert 1.25 400.0 II
Elastomers W/Asbestos fabric insert:
3 ply 2.25 2200.0 II
2 ply 2.50 2900.0 II
1 ply 2.75 3700.0 II
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.0 II
Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

General Input Tab
Gasket Min. Facing

Gasket Material
Carbon 2.50 10000.0 II
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.0 II
Corrugated Metal, Asbestos Ins. or corrugated metal, jacketed asbestos:
soft aluminum 2.50 2900.0 II
soft copper or brass 2.75 3700.0 II
iron or soft steel 3.00 4500.0 II
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.25 5500.0 II
SS/nickel base alloys 3.50 6500.0 II
Corrugated Metal:
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled:
Monel 3.50 8000.0 II
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.0 II
Grooved Metal:
Solid flat metal:
soft aluminum 4.00 8800.0 I
soft copper or brass 4.75 13000.0 I
iron or soft steel 5.50 18000.0 I

General Input Tab
Gasket Min. Facing

Gasket Material
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.0 I
SS/nickel base alloys 6.50 26000.0 I
Ring Joint:
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.0 I
SS refers to stainless steel
Sketch - Select the facing sketch number according to the following and using Table 2-5.2 of
the ASME code (see Gasket Factor m | y):
Facing Description
Sketch
1a Flat finish faces
1b serrated finish faces
1c Raised nubbin-flat finish
1d Raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 1/64 inch nubbin
3 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 Large serration, one side
5 Large serration, both sides
6 Metallic O-ring type gasket
Column - Select the facing column according to ASME Table 2-5.1 - Gasket List.

General Input Tab
Gasket Thickness - Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches
1c and 1d (PV Elite equivalents 3 and 4). For more information, see Sketch.
Nubbin or RTJ Width - Enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches
1c, 1d, 2 and 6 (PV Elite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). For sketch 9, this is not a nubbin width, but
the contact width of the metallic ring. For more information, see Sketch.
Operating, Wm1 - Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for the operating case.
Seating, Wm2 - Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for the seating condition.
Design, W - Enter the design bolt load for the mating flange.
Axial Force - Enter the magnitude of the external axial force acting on the flange. Because the
axial load rotates the flange and causes stress in the hub, this value should always be positive.
Bending Moment - Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment acting on the flange.
This is typically the square root of the sum of the squares of moments that contribute to bending
(thus. the torsional moment would not be considered). The axial force and resolved moment
increase the design pressure on the flange. This is because only pressure and bolt loads cause
loads on flange. The ASME code does not consider the effect of bending and external forces on
flanges.
Length - Enter the length of the partition gasket. This is the cumulative length of all heat
exchanger pass partition gaskets associated with this flange.
If the flange does have a partition gasket, enter 0 for Length and Width.
Width - Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using Width, Sketch, Column, and
Gasket Factor m | y, the software calculates the effective seating width and the gasket loads
contributed by the partition gasket.
If the flange does have a partition gasket, enter 0 for Length and Width.
Sketch - Select the facing sketch number according to the following and using Table 2-5.2 of
the ASME code (see Gasket Factor m | y):
Facing Description
Sketch
1a Flat finish faces
1b serrated finish faces

General Input Tab
1c Raised nubbin-flat finish

1d Raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 1/64 inch nubbin
3 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 Large serration, one side
5 Large serration, both sides
6 Metallic O-ring type gasket
Column - Select the facing column according the table below:
ASME Table 2-5.1 - Gasket List
Gasket Min. Facing

Gasket Material
Self-energizing types ( O rings, metallic elastomer, and
0.00 0.00 II
other types considered as self-sealing )
Elastomers WO/ fabric or high %of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0.0 II
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.0 II
Asbestos with Suitable Binder
1/8" thick 2.00 1600.0 II
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.0 II
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.0 II
Elastomers W/cotton fabric insert 1.25 400.0 II
Elastomers W/Asbestos fabric insert:
3 ply 2.25 2200.0 II
2 ply 2.50 2900.0 II
1 ply 2.75 3700.0 II
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.0 II
Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:
Carbon 2.50 10000.0 II
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.0 II
Corrugated Metal, Asbestos Ins. or corrugated metal, jacketed asbestos:

General Input Tab
Gasket Min. Facing

Gasket Material
Corrugated Metal:
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled:
Monel 3.50 8000.0 II
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.0 II
Grooved Metal:
Solid flat metal:
soft aluminum 4.00 8800.0 I
soft copper or brass 4.75 13000.0 I
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.0 I
Ring Joint:
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.0 I

General Input Tab
SS refers to stainless steel

Gasket Factor m | y - Enter values for the gasket material and contact facing. Enter the factor
ratio (m) and minimum stress (y). Alternatively, click to open the Select a Gasket dialog
box, and select a standard gasket material. See ASME Table 2-5.1 - Gasket List, above.
Base Required Thickness on Rigidity (ASME VIII-1)? - Select to calculate the flange rigidity
index for both the mating flange Operating, Wm1 and Seating, Wm2 (as it would normally). If
either rigidity index is greater than 1.0, the software iteratively adjusts the flange required
thickness until neither index is greater than 1.0. Using this method may prove useful for
designing flanges with the new higher allowable stresses (ASME 99 addenda and later),
because, as of November 1999, the code has not explicitly addressed the situation of using
higher allowables for flange design.
In some cases, stress considerations govern over rigidity, and the thickness is not
influenced by rigidity.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations? - Select to use the corrosion
allowance (as is usual) when calculating the final stresses on the flange.
Clear to calculate stresses without subtracting corrosion from the flange thickness, typically
producing a thinner flange that is not as highly stressed. The MAWP of the flange is also usually
slightly higher. Because this is not directly addressed by any code, agreement is usually
between the customer and the manufacturer.
Rigidity Calc. for Seating Case Uses Corroded Thickness? - Select to incorporate the
corroded thickness into the rigidity calculation, especially for cases of old pipe already corroded.
Are the Hub and Attached Shell Materials the Same? - Select to indicate that the flange
material is same as the attached shell material. The larger of the shell allowable and the flange
allowable stress are used to calculate the required small-end hub thickness for the attached
integral flange. Clear to consider only the flange allowable.
For some materials with relatively low yield strength (such as stainless steels), the ASME code
has established higher stress values. These higher stress values (indicated by the presence of
the note G5) can lead to higher deformation. As a result, these material allowables are not used
for applications where flange deformation can cause failure or leakage.
When the flange allowables are lower as compared to the attached shell (for the same material),
the small-end hub thickness is checked as a cylinder. The allowable stresses of the attached
shell should then be used. Otherwise, the required hub thickness may be greater than that of the
attached cylinder. If you want the higher shell allowables to be used, select Are the Hub and
Attached Shell Materials the Same?.
Calculate Cover Deflection (multi-pass unit)? - Select if the flange is a TEMA channel cover
(bolted blind flange). A separate thickness, deflection, and MAWP are calculated for channel
covers.
Allowable Cover Deflection - For TEMA channel covers, enter the maximum allowed
deflection at the center of the cover, as defined in TEMA paragraph RCB-9.21. For TEMA
covers with nominal diameters less than or equal to 24 inches, the allowed deflection should be
set to .03 inches. For larger sizes, the deflection should be limited to .125% of the nominal
diameter (nominal diameter / 800). If this field is left blank the appropriate allowable deflection
will be used. Alternatively, click to open the Compute Allowable Channel Cover
Deflection dialog box, and enter a value for Nominal Diameter of Attached Shell. The
software then calculates the allowable cover deflection.
Number of Splits in Ring - Enter the number of splits in the ring, if any, for loose-type flanges.
This value must be 0, 1, or 2. Typical split flanges are ring-type flanges. A split is used when the
flange must be completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a
single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two

General Input Tab
separate split rings, each ring is designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75
times the design moment. The pair of rings is assembled so that the splits in one ring are 90º
from the splits in the other.
Weld Leg Back of Ring - Enter the length of the weld leg at the back of the ring. This value is
added to the inside diameter during the design of ring type flanges to determine the minimum
bolt circle.
Attached Shell Thickness - Enter the thickness of the shell attached to the flange.
Lap Joint Contact Point ID - Enter the inner diameter of the flange/joint contact surface.
Lap Joint Contact Point OD - Enter the outer diameter of the flange/joint contact surface.
Diameter (Long Span) - Enter the head characteristic diameter, used to calculate the
non-circular flange correction factor Z for ASME blind flanges. This factor is defined in
paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code. This dimension is perpendicular to the short span
dimension.
For circular blind flanges, the short span and long span dimensions are the same.
Diameter (Short Span) - Enter the head characteristic short diameter, used to calculate the
non-circular flange correction factor Z for ASME blind flanges. This factor is defined in
paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code. This dimension is perpendicular to the long span
dimension. It is very important to enter this dimension correctly because it is used in the
tangential flange stress computation.
For circular blind flanges, the short span and long span dimensions are the same.
Perimeter Along Bolt Circle Centerline - Enter the perimeter L of the bolted head measured
along the centerline of the bolts. This value is needed for both noncircular and circular geometry.
For a circular head, enter the value of (π * bolt circle diameter). For non-circular heads this value
will have to be manually calculated and entered.
Is this a Standard Flange (No calculation performed)? - Select to define the flange by using
ANSI/DIN standards.
Class - Select the ANSI/DIN flange class, which is based on the pressure rating.
Grade - Select the flange material grade (group). Please note that there are certain advisories
on the use of certain material grades. Please review those cautionary notes in the ANSI B16.5
code. ASME B16.5-2003 and ASME B16.5-1996 flange grades are available:

Group
1.1
C-Si A 105 A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2 A 516 Gr. 70
A 537 Cl. 1
3½ Ni A 350 Gr. LF3
1.2 C-Mn-Si A 316 Gr. WCC

A 352 Gr. LCC
2½Ni A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. B
3½Ni A 352 Gr. LC3 A 203 Gr. E

General Input Tab

Group
1.3 C-Si A 352 Gr. LCB A 515 Gr. 65
2 ½Ni A 203 Gr. A
3 ½Ni A 203 Gr. D
A 352 Gr. LC1
1.4 C-Si A 515 Gr. 60

C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 516 Gr. 60
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 204 Gr. A

A 204 Gr. B
1.7 ½C-½Mo A 182 Gr. F2

1.9 1¼Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC6

1¼Cr-½Mo-Si A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2
1.11 Cr-½Mo A 204 Gr. C
1.13 5Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. C5

A 182 Gr. F5a
1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12
1.17 1Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2
5Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F5
A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8 A 240 Gr. 304H
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316 A 351 Gr. CF3M
2.2 A 240 Gr. 316
A 182 Gr. F316H A 351 Gr. CF8M
A 240 Gr. 316H
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 182 Gr. F317
A 240 Gr. 317
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M
2.3 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L A 240 Gr. 304L
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 182 Gr. F321 A 240 Gr. 321
A 182 Gr. F321H A 240 Gr. 321H
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F347 A 240 Gr. 347

A 182 Gr. F347H A 240 Gr. 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr. 348H
2.6 23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309H
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 240 Gr. 310H
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V A 351 Gr. CE8MN
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W A 240 Gr. S32760
2.9 23Cr-12Ni A 240 Gr. 309S

25Cr-20Ni A 240 Gr. 310S

General Input Tab

Group
2.10 25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8
A 351 Gr. CH20
2.11 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 351 Gr. CF8C
2.12 25Cr-20Ni A 351 Gr. CK20

3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02200

3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201 B 162 Gr. N02201
3.4 67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr. N04400

67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600 B 168 Gr. N06600
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800 B 409 Gr. N08800
65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 462 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10665

3.7
64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-Mn-W B 462 Gr. N10675 B 333 Gr. N10675
3.8 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 B 575 Gr. N10276
62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 B 333 Gr. N10001
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 B 575 Gr. N06455
55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo B 462 Gr. N06022 B 575 Gr. N06022
55Ni-23Cr-16Mo-1.6Cu B 462 Gr. N06200 B 575 Gr. N06200
3.9 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe B 572 Gr. N06002 B 435 Gr. N06002

3.11 44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo B 649 Gr. N08904 B 625 Gr. N08904

46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu-N B 462 Gr. N08367 A 351 Gr. CN3MN B 688 Gr. N08367

Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C B 462 Gr. N08031 B 625 Gr. N08031

3.15 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08810 B 409 Gr. N08810

3.16 35Ni-19Cr-1¼Si B 511 Gr. N08330 B 536 Gr. N08330
3.17 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo A 351 Gr. CN7M

Group
1.1 C-Si A 105 A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2 A 216 Gr. WCC A 516 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si-V A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 537 Cl. 1
1.2 C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 A 352 Gr. LCC A 203 Gr. B
C-Mn-Si-V A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. E
21/2Ni A 350 Gr. LF3 A 352 Gr. LC3
31/2Ni

General Input Tab

Group
1.3 C-Si A 352 Gr. LCB A 515 Gr. 65
21/2Ni A 203 Gr. A
31/2Ni A 203 Gr. D
1.4 C-Si A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 515 Gr. 60
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 217 Gr. WC1 A 204 Gr. A
A 352 Gr. LC1 A 204 Gr. B
A 204 Gr. C
1.7 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F2 A 217 Gr. WC4

1/2Cr-1/2Mo A 217 Gr. WC5
Ni-1/2Cr-1/2Mo
3/4Ni-3/4Cr-1Mo
1.9 1Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 217 Gr. WC6 A 387 Gr. 11 Cl.2
11/4Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2
11/4Cr-1/2Mo-Si
1.10 21/4Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 217 Gr. WC9 A 387 Gr. 22 Cl.2
1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F5 A 217 Gr. C5
A 182 Gr. F5a
1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12

A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8 A 240 Gr. 304H
2.2 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316 A 351 Gr. CF3M A 240 Gr. 316
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 182 Gr. F316H A 351 Gr. CF8M A 240 Gr. 316H
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M A 240 Gr. 317
2.3 18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L A 240 Gr. 304L
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 182 Gr. F321 A 240 Gr. 321
A 182 Gr. F321H A 240 Gr. 321H
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 182 Gr. F347 A 351 Gr. CF8C A 240 Gr. 347
A 182 Gr. F347H A 240 Gr. 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr. 348H
2.6 25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8 A 240 Gr. 309S
A 351 Gr. CH20 A 240 Gr. 309H
23Cr-12Ni
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 351 Gr. CK20 A 240 Gr. 310S
A 240 Gr. 310H
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N A 182 Gr. F51 A 351 Gr. CE8MN A 240 Gr. S31803
25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N A 182 Gr. F53 A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 240 Gr. S32750
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V A 182 Gr. F55 A 351 Gr. CD3MWCuN A 240 Gr. S32760
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200 B 162 Gr. N02200

3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201 B 162 Gr. N02201

General Input Tab

Group
3.4 67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr. N04400
67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600 B 168 Gr. N06600
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800 B 409 Gr. N08800

3.7 65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 335 Gr. N10665 B 333 Gr. N10665
3.8 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 B 575 Gr. N10276

62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 B 333 Gr. N10001
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 B 575 Gr. N06455
Nom - Select the nominal value for the flange inside diameter.
ANSI Series - Select the ANSI flange series. Select ANSI Series A for general-use flanges.
Select ANSI Series B for compact flanges.
Get Flange Dimensions Now! - Click to look up flange dimensions from ANSI/DIN tables
based on the selections for Is this a Standard Flange (No calculation performed)?, Class,
Grade, Nom, and ANSI Series. The flange thickness table value is shown in Flange
Thickness.
Click Quick Results to see a report of the flange dimensions.
Flange Thickness - This option is used in the following ways:
 Displays standard flange thickness after Get Flange Dimensions Now is clicked.
 Displays designed flange thickness after Design is clicked.
 Enter a manual flange thickness.
Use Full Bolt Load in Calc (Sa*Ab)? - Select to allow the full bolt load to be used on just the
area of the bolt itself, instead of Am+ Ab, which is the area of the bolt (Ab) plus the required bolt
area (Am). You use this option for allowable stress calculations.
Just Like - Select the node of an adjacent element to use the properties of that element. After
selecting, click Copy Now.
Copy Now - Click to copy the properties of an adjacent element selected in Just Like. The
Select Items to Copy dialog box opens. You then select the properties to copy.
Design - Click to design the flange based on all properties selected in the Flange dialog box.
Quick results - Click to see a report of flange results.
Delete - Click to delete all data entered in the Flange dialog box, restore default flange values,
and close the dialog box.
OK - Click to save all data entered in the Flange dialog box and close the dialog box.
Cancel - Click to close the Flange dialog box without saving the entered data.
Plot - Click to open the Flange Graphics dialog box. A cross-section view of the flange design
is shown.

General Input Tab
Skirt (Additional Element Data)

Defines additional data for a skirt support element with basering.
Skirt Diameter at Base - Enter the inside diameter at the bottom of the skirt. This value must be
larger than or equal to the inside diameter at the top of the skirt. This option is only available
when Skirt is selected for Element Type.
Perform Basering Analysis - If there is a basering on the skirt, select to specify basering
parameters and calculate the basering design. The Basering Dialog Box (on page 274) opens.
This option is only available when Skirt is selected for Element Type.
Evaluate Holes in Skirt - Select to specify skirt access opening parameters and analyze the
openings. Openings are analyzed when they are of reasonable size, are on tall towers, or are
under sizable wind/seismic loads. This option is only available when Skirt is selected for
Element Type.
This option opens the Skirt Access Openings Dialog Box (on page 294).
For more information, see, Skirt Opening Analysis Considerations.
Basering Dialog Box

This dialog box defines data for baserings on a skirt element. Basering analysis performs
thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets
found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calculations are performed using industry standard
calculation techniques. For more information, see Basering Analysis Considerations (on page
275).
The Brownell and Young Method - The Brownell and Young method of design calculates the
required thickness of the baseplate, the gussets, and the top plate or top ring. Brownell and
Young discuss this method in their book Process Equipment Design. Dennis R. Moss also
discusses it in the book Pressure Vessel Design Manual. This baseplate design method is

General Input Tab
based on the neutral axis shift method and generally results in a thinner basering design than
the method discussed in Basering Analysis Considerations (on page 275).
Basering Design Data Tab (Basering Dialog Box) (on page 280)
Tailing Lug Data Tab (Basering Design Data Tab) (on page 287)
Basering Analysis Considerations

Thickness of a Basering under Compression - The equation for the thickness of the basering
is the equation for a simple cantilever beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt,
and loaded with a uniform load caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined
weight of the vessel and bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the
vessel.
Thickness of a cantilever, t:
Where
fc = Bearing stress on the concrete
l = Cantilever length of basering
s = Allowable bending stress of basering (typically 1.5 times the code allowable)
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the stress from the vessel and
base-ring acting on the concrete. The simplified method calculates the compressive stress on
the concrete assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline.
Stress acting on the concrete, fc:
Where:
W = Weight of the vessel together with the basering
M = Maximum bending moment on vessel
A = Cross-sectional area of basering on foundation
c = Distance from the center of the basering to the outer edge of the basering
I = Moment of inertia of the basering on the foundation
However, when a steel skirt and basering are supported on a concrete foundation, the behavior
of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net bending
moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced by the force
downward on the concrete. Because these two materials have different elastic moduli, and
because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the strain in the base ring at
any specific location, the neutral axis of the combined bolt/concrete cross section will be in the
direction of the concrete. Several authors, including Jawad and Farr (Structural Analysis and
Design of Process Equipment, pg 428 - 433) and Megyesy (Pressure Vessel Handbook, pg 70 -
73), have analyzed this phenomenon. The software uses the formulation of Singh and Soler
(Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pg 957 - 959). This

General Input Tab
formulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no

tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case, the neutral axis is parallel to the Y-axis. The location of the neutral axis is identified
by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure (p) and the angle
alpha.
For narrow base plate rings, an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a thin
ring of mean diameter c. Assuming that the foundation is linearly elastic and the base plate is
relatively rigid, Brownell and Young have developed an approximate solution which can be cast
in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area of all foundation bolts
be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to replace the bolts with a thin shell of
thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle diameter c, such that:
Thickness, t:
Where:
A = Total cross-sectional area of all foundation bolts
P = Peak concrete pressure
l = Width of basering
c = Thin ring diameter
We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting around the ring, are replaced by a line
load, varying in intensity with the distance from the neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young's moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally varies
between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-adhesive
surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in the base plate), an
analysis, similar to that given above, yields the following results:
Where:
n = Ratio of elastic modulus of the bolt, Eb, to that of the concrete, Ec:
t3 = Width of the basering, similar to the cantilever length, l, in Jawad and Farr's thickness
equation previously mentioned
c = Bolt circle diameter

General Input Tab
r1 - r4 = Four constants based on the neutral axis angle and defined in Singh and Soler's
equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required seven non-linear equations to solve for seven unknowns,
namely p, c, α, and the ri (i = 1 - 4) parameters. The iterative solution starts with assumed
values of s and p, so and po, taken from an approximate analysis performed first. Then α is
determined using the above equation. Knowing α the dimensionless parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4
are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s, named po' and so'). The
next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the iteration stage are within specified
tolerances --ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value,
Where:
After the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate method.
Thickness of Basering under Tension - On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are
gussets, then there is a discrepancy on how to do the analysis. For example, while Megyesy
uses Table F (Pressure Vessel Handbook, pg 78) to calculate an equivalent bending moment,
Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but does not give a table (Pressure Vessel Design
Manual, pg 126-129), and Jawad & Farr use a 'yield-line' theory (Structural Analysis and Design
of Process Equipment, pg 435-436). Since the Jawad and Farr equation for thickness, t, is both
accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation 12.13:
Thickness, t:
Where:

General Input Tab
Bolt Load, Pt:
sy = Yield strength of the bolt

a = Distance between gussets
b = Width of base plate that is outside of skirt
l = Distance from skirt to bolt area
d = Diameter of bolt hole
Thickness of Top Ring under Tension - If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is
calculated using a simple beam formula. Taking the plate to be a beam supported between two
gussets with a point load in the middle equal to the maximum bolt load, we derive the following
equation:
Thickness, t:
Where:
Allowable stress, s:
Bending moment, M:
Where:
Cg = Center of gravity, depending on the geometry of the plate
Bolt Load, Pt:
Section Modulus, Z:

General Input Tab
Width of Section, Wt:
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension - If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for
both tension and compression. The tensile stress, T, is the force divided by the area, where the
force is taken to be the allowable bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is
the thickness of the gusset, tgusset, times one half the width of the gusset, Wgusset (because
gussets normally taper):
Where:
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression - In compression (as a column) we must

iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking the actual thickness as the starting point, we
perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The radius of gyration for the gusset is taken as 0.289 t
per Megyesy's Pressure Vessel Design Handbook, page 404. The actual compression is
calculated as described above, and then compared to the allowed compression per AISC. The
thickness is then modified and another calculation performed until the actual and allowed
compressions are within one half of one percent of one another.
Basering Design - When you request a basering design, the software performs the following
additional calculations to determine the design geometry:
 Selection of Number of Bolts
This selection is made on the basis of Megyesy's table in Pressure Vessel Handbook (Table
C, page 67). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to keep the anchor bolt
spacing at about 24 inches.
 Calculation of Load per Bolt
This calculation of load, Pb, per bolt:
Where:

General Input Tab
W = Weight of vessel
N = Number of bolts
R = Radius of bolt area
M = Bending moment
 Calculation of Required Area for Each Bolt
This is the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress:
 Selection of the Bolt Size

The software has a table of bolt areas and selects the smallest bolt with area greater than
the area calculated above.
 Selection of Preliminary Basering Geometry - The table of bolt areas also contains the
required clearances in order to successfully tighten the selected bolt (wrench clearances and
edge clearances). The software selects a preliminary basering geometry based on these
clearances. Values selected at this point are the bolt circle, base ring outside diameter, and
base ring inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Basering Geometry - Using the methods described previously for the
analysis section, the software determines the approximate compressive stress in the concrete
for the preliminary geometry.
Selection of Final Basering Geometry - If the compressive stress calculated above is
acceptable then the preliminary geometry becomes the final geometry. If not, then the bolt circle
and base ring diameters are scaled up to the point where the compressive stresses are
acceptable. These become the final base ring geometry values.
Analysis of Basering Thicknesses - The analysis then continues through the thickness
calculation described above, determining required thicknesses for the basering, top ring, and
gussets.
Basering Design Data Tab (Basering Dialog Box)

Basering Type - Select the type of basering design:
 - Simple basering (without gussets)
 - Basering with gusset plates
 - Basering with gussets and top plate
 - Basering with gussets and continuous top ring

Set Default Dimensions - Set default dimensions for all properties in the Basering dialog box
based on the selected Basering Type.

General Input Tab
Design Temperature - Enter the design temperature of basering. This value is used to
determine the allowable stress values. When you select a value for Basering Material, the
software uses this temperature to determine the operating allowable stress value for the
material.
Basering Design Option - Select a value to either analyze an existing basering or design a
new basering. Select Analyze, Design, Brn & Young Analyze, Brn & Young Design, or ADM
Analyze. When a design option is selected, the software may change Number of Bolts,
Nominal Bolt Diameter, Basering ID, and Basering OD.
Method for Thkness Calc - Select a method for basering thickness calculation:
 Simplified or Steel on Steel - Use for baserings located on a steel substructure.
 Neutral Axis Shifted - Use to design a thinner basering than the simplified method.
For a traditional basering on concrete, either method can be used.
E for Plates - If a basering with gussets is selected, enter the elastic modulus E, used to
determine the allowable stress for plates in compression according to AISC. This is a required
value. For most common steels, this value is 29 x 106 psi.
Sy for Plates - Enter the yield stress for the gusset plates at the design temperature of the
base. For tables of yield stress versus temperature, see the ASME Code, Section II, Part D.
Gusset Thickness - Enter the thickness of the gusset plates used for this basering. Any
allowances for corrosion should be considered.
Dist. Between Gussets - Enter the distance between the gussets. This dimension is used by
the software to calculate the bending moment in the top plate. After the bending moment and
bending stress are calculated, the software calculates the required thickness of the top plate.
Bottom Gusset Width - Enter the the average width of the bottom gusset plate.
Top Gusset Width - Enter the the average width of the top gusset plate.
Height of Gussets - Enter the gusset dimension from the basering to the top of the gusset
plate. The forces in the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
Top Plate Thickness - Enter the plate thickness for a basering with a top ring. If a value greater
than 0.0 is entered, the software calculates the required thickness of the top plate. If no value is
entered, the software does not perform top ring thickness calculations.
Top Plate Width - Enter the plate width for a basering with a top ring. This value is usually
equal to the distance between the gusset plates plus two times the gusset plate thickness plus
any additional width beyond the gussets.
Radial Width of Top Plate - Enter the radial width if the basering has a top plate. This value is:
(top ring OD - top ring ID) / 2. This value must be entered and must be positive.
Bolt Hole Dia in Plate - Enter the diameter of the bolt hole that is in the plate.
Basering Material - Enter the name of the material. The software contains a database with
Basering Thickness - Enter the actual thickness of basering, not including allowances for
corrosion or mill tolerance.
The software calculates the required basering thickness based on the selection in
Method for Thkness Calc. The value enter here is only used for comparison.
Basering ID - Enter the inside diameter of the basering. The value must be greater than 0 and
less than Bolt Circle Diameter and Basering OD. Enter a good approximation when Analyze

General Input Tab
or Design is selected for Basering Design Option. If you select Design for Basering Design
Option, the software may change this value.
Basering OD - Enter the inside diameter of the basering. The value must be greater than Bolt
Circle Diameter and Basering ID. Enter a good approximation when Analyze or Design is
selected for Basering Design Option. If you select Design for Basering Design Option, the
software may change this value.
Bolt Circle Diameter - Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This is the diameter passing
throught the center of each bolt on the basering. The value must be greater than Basering ID
and less than Basering OD. If you select Design for Basering Design Option, the software
may change this value.
Corrosion Allowance - If needed, enter an external corrosion allowance. This allowance is
added to Basering Thickness in the calculations.
Type of Threads - Select the thread series bolt table. Select TEMA (8-thread series), UNC
(coarse threads, adapted from Mark's), BS 3642, or SABS 1700 1996. If you have a bolt that is
outside of the bolt table ranges, select User Root Area and enter the nominal size in Nominal
Bolt Diameter. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.
Nominal Bolt Diameter - Click and select the nominal bolt diameter from the bolt table
selected for Type of Threads. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, enter
the nominal size and select User Root Area in Type of Threads.

(inches)
(cm.^2) (in.^2)
0.500 1.27 0.126
0.625 1.5875 0.202
0.750 1.9050 0.302
0.875 2.22225 0.419
1.000 2.54000 0.551
1.125 2.85750 0.728
1.250 3.17500 0.929
1.375 3.49250 1.155
1.500 3.81000 1.405
1.625 4.12750 1.680
1.750 4.44500 1.980
1.875 4.76250 2.304
2.000 5.08000 2.652
2.250 5.71500 3.423
2.500 6.35000 4.292
2.750 6.98500 5.259
3.000 7.62000 6.324

General Input Tab

(i h )
3.250 8.25500 7.487
3.500 8.89000 8.749
3.750 9.52500 10.108
4.000 10.1600 11.566
Number of Bolts - Enter the number of bolts required by the basering design. The number of
bolts can be between 4 and 120. If you select Design for Basering Design Option, the
software may change this value.
Bolts sizing is based on the maximum load per bolt in the operating case. The
computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3, pg 422.
Bolt C.A. (1/2 total) - Enter the bolt corrosion allowance. The software uses this value to
corrode the radius of the root area and calculate a corroded root stress area based on the
nominal bolt size and bolt table. This area is then used in the remainder of the bolt load/stress
calculations.
The software calculates the required area of the bolt. If the bolt corrosion allowance is greater
than zero, the software adds the corrosion allowance and recalculates the diameter based on
the new required area:
Corroded Bolt Root Diameter = (4 * New Bolt Area/Pi)1/2 - 2 * Bolt Corrosion
Allowance
Bolt Root Area - Enter the root area of a single bolt if the basering design requires special
bolts.
This option is mutually exclusive from the selection for Basering Design Option. If Bolt
Root Area is available, the numbers from table 2 (UNC) are used. This value is used without
modification by the software, so you should consider any corrosion allowance.
Bolt Shear Allowable - The allowable shear stress acting on the bolt, incorporating the bolt
corrosion allowance.
Concrete Strength F'c/Fc <and> Modular Ratio Eplates/Ec - Enter the following for the concrete
to which the base is bolted:
 F'c - The nominal ultimate compressive stress of the concrete. This value is F'c in Jawad and
Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
 Fc - The allowable compressive stress of the concrete
 n - The steel-to-concrete modulus of elasticity ratio, Eplates/Ec.

General Input Tab
Average Values of Properties of Concrete Mixes (adapted from Brownell and Young)
Water Content f'c fc n
(US Gallons per 94 lb 28-day Ultimate Allowable Compressive Modular Ratio
Sack of Cement) Compressive Strength = 0.45*f'c (Es/Ec)
Strength (psi) (psi)
7.5 2000 800 15
6.75 2500 1000 12
6 3000 1200 10
5 3750 1400 8
According to Jawad and Farr, Ec is equal to 57000 multiplied by the square root of f'c
psi.The modulus of elasticity of steel is assumed to be 30 x 106.
Lug Start Angle - Reassign the reference angle for positioning the lugs.
Use EIL Spec? - Select to use the EIL standard for basering design. This standard gives
guidelines for selecting the number of bolts based on skirt diameter, as shown below:
Skirt Diameter (mm) Number of Bolts

900 4
1200 8
1500 8
1800 12
2100 16
2400 16
2700 20
3000 24
3300 24
3600 28
4000 32
This option only applies if Design is selected for Basering Design Option.
Bolt Diameter - Enter a value when Use EIL Spec? is selected. This value provides additional
tabular results for the standard thickness of basering components, such as the basering itself,
gussets, top plate, and gusset height.
% Applied to Bolt Area * Bolt Stress - Enter a value for the percentage of force to apply to the
bolt area times the bolt allowable stress in the calculation of the concrete stress. The default
value of 100 percent generates the largest possible force. If the load cannot achieve this value,
enter a smaller percentage.
Use AISI Design Method? - Select to perform calculations according to AISI Volume 2. The
AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) publishes Steel Plate Engineering Data volumes
containing numerous useful calculations for steel structures including welding and thickness
calculations for anchor bolt chairs.
Use 2/3rds Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per AISC F3-1? - Select to use AISC
design manual 9th edition, Eqn. F3-1. The AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)

General Input Tab
allows the use of 2/3rds the yield stress as the allowable for determination of the required
thickness of the basering parts. A normal bending allowable is 1.5 times the allowable stress for
the material at design temperature.
 This option and Use 75% Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per AISC F2-1?
cannot be selected at the same time.
 This section of AISC is used because ASME does not provide explicit design rules for
baserings.
Use 75% Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per AISC F2-1? - Select to use AISC
design manual 9th edition, Eqn. F2-1. The AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
allows the use of 75 percent of the yield stress as the allowable for determination of the required
thickness of these parts. A normal bending allowable is 1.5 times the allowable stress for the
material at design temperature.
 This option and Use 2/3rds Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per AISC F3-1?
cannot be selected at the same time.
baserings.
Use 1/3 Increase per ASIC A5.2? - Select to use AISC design manual 9th edition, Section
A5.2. The AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) allows a 1/3 increase in the allowable
stress for parts that are subject to short-term sustained loads such as those due to wind or
seismic.
 This option is used in addition to the selection of Use 2/3rds Yield for Basering/Top Plate
Allowables per AISC F3-1? or Use 75% Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per
AISC F2-1?.
baserings.
Use Allowable Weld Stress per AISC Table J2.5? - Select to use AISC design manual 9th
edition, Table J2.5. The weld allowable stress is then 0.3 times the minimum of the basering
ultimate tensile strength and 58000 psi. If this option is cleared, the allowable weld stress is 0.4
times the minimum of the skirt and basering yield stress at ambient temperature.
 This option is used in addition to the selection of Use 2/3rds Yield for Basering/Top Plate
Allowables per AISC F3-1? or Use 75% Yield for Basering/Top Plate Allowables per
AISC F2-1?.
baserings.
Use the skirt stress to determine the concrete stress for the simplified method? - Select
this option to use the maximum skirt stress and the following formula to calculate the concrete
stress:

General Input Tab
During the analysis of the skirt, the software calculates combination stresses due to different
load types as outlined in the Stresses due to combined loads report. This option is only
necessary when Simplified is selected for Method for Thkness Calc.
 When Use the skirt stress to determine the concrete stress for the simplified method?
is selected, % Applied to Bolt Area * Bolt Stress is inactive because this option is nearly
identical to a percentage of 0.
 If Neutral Axis Shifted is selected for Method for Thkness Calc, then this option is not
needed because the concrete stress is calculated in iterations. The concrete stress is
presented for information.
Determine the Basering design bolt load accounting for Load Case Factors? - Select to
calculate the bolt load based on moments and load case factors, depending on the local scalars
used. The bolt load is calculated by the highest moment due to the bending stress from the
different combination of loads.
Be sure to select this option if you have also selected Use and Allow editing of
Local Scalars in the Load Cases on the Load Cases tab.
Plot - Click to open the Basering Graphics dialog box. A cross-section view of the basering
design is shown.

General Input Tab
Tailing Lug Data Tab (Basering Design Data Tab)

Tailing lug analysis is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type design, as
shown below. The design is based on a lift position where no bending occurs on the tailing lug.
The location of the center of the pinhole is radial at the edge of the outer most of the top ring or
the basering, whichever is larger. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the same material as
the gusset or basering. The main considerations for the design are section modulus, shear and
bearing stress at the pin hole, and weld strength.
For the software to generate the lifting load on the lug, the rigging data must be entered.
To enter the rigging data, click Installation | Misc. Options on the Load Cases tab of the main
window.
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis? - Select to enter data for the tailing lug analysis.
Type of Tailing Lug - Select Single Lug or Dual Lug, as shown above.
Centerline Offset - Enter the offset dimension from centerline OS. This entry is only valid for
Dual Lug.
Lug Thickness - Enter the thickness of the tailing lug.
Pin Hole Diameter - Enter the pinhole diameter. The center of the pinhole is placed radially
inline with the larger of the outermost edge of the top ring or the base ring OD.

General Input Tab
Weld Size Thickness - Enter the leg size of the weld connecting the lug to the basering and the
skirt.
Lug Height - Enter the tailing lug height measured from the top of basering. If you have a top
ring, this would usually be the distance to the top ring.
Dist. from Skirt to Hole - Enter the distance from the OD of the skirt to the pin hole.
Analysis Results
The tail lug design consists of a three-part analysis: the base ring assembly (base ring, skirt and
top ring), the strength of the weld, and the tail lug itself. The analysis assumes no bending in the
tail lug. In the absent of the top ring, only the base ring and decay length (e) are considered for
the section modulus calculation.
The following allowable stresses are used to check the design strength.
 Shear at the pin hole: 0.4 Sy
 Bearing stress: 0.75 Sy
 Weld stress: 0.49 Sallow
Skirt Opening Analysis Considerations

Pitch and Ligament - Pitch is the center-to-center distance between adjacent holes. Ligament
is the edge-to-edge distance between holes.

General Input Tab
If the ligament is too small there is a possibility of collapse and buckling of the skirt. EN 13445,
the code chosen as the basis for the analysis, is silent on this issue. This is because EN 13445
only gives consideration to one hole not the multiple holes that may be analyzed by PV Elite.
The output processor includes a Skirt Opening Stress Calcs report. That report contains the
full analysis results for all the openings that were included in the Skirt Access Openings dialog
box:

General Input Tab
The results give a recommended minimum ligament distance, but you must
evaluate whether this meets project requirements. See the following example:
Vessels with Multiple Skirt Elements - Complications arise when:

 A skirt is made from two pieces. That is, two skirts support the vessel.
 The two skirts have different thicknesses.
 The two skirts have different materials.
 The two skirts have different taper (conical) angles.

General Input Tab
 An access opening or hole spans the skirt pieces. The opening cannot be considered as a
single opening.

General Input Tab
To properly analyze these situations, each skirt is created as a separate element:
1. In the bottom skirt, enter the hole geometry. The height of the center of the hole is located at
or near to the top of the skirt and the top half of the hole is outside of the top node of the
skirt. The software adjusts the analysis for this, but warns you that the opening is beyond
the skirt.
2. In the top skirt, enter the hole geometry. In this case the height of the center of the hole is at
or near zero at the bottom of the skirt. Again, the software adjusts the analysis for this, but
warns you that the opening is beyond the skirt.

General Input Tab
Sentry Box Openings - The software allows entry of oblong holes. With an oblong hole, sentry
box geometry is possible:
The bottom of the oblong opening breaks the bottom of the skirt. The software adjusts the
analysis for this, but warns you that the opening is beyond the skirt.
Basic Skirt Thickness - The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression
loads is determined using the same formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete,
except using the thickness of the skirt rather than the width of the basering:
Where:
W = Weight of the vessel during operation or testing
M = Maximum bending moment on the vessel
A = Cross-sectional area of the skirt
c = Distance from the center of the basering to the skirt (radius of the skirt)
I = Moment of inertia of the skirt cross section
In tension, this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required
thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the allowable
stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where the geometry
factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials factor is found in the
Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calculations, this is an
iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated, the allowable stress
is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allowable stress approaches the
actual stress.
Stress in Skirt Due to Gussets or Top Ring - If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring
included in the base plate geometry, there is an additional load in the skirt. Jawad and Farr
(Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, pg 434) have analyzed this load and
determined that the stress in the skirt, s, due to the bolt load on the base plate is calculated as
follows:
Where:

General Input Tab
F = Bolt load
b = Width of the gusset at its base
t = Thickness of the skirt
h = Height of the gusset
Jawad and Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight and
bending moment and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They thus
categorize this stress as secondary bending. The software performs the calculation of this
stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the required
thickness of the skirt at the top of the basering.
Skirt Access Openings Dialog Box

Defines data for access openings on a skirt element.
From Node - Displays the software-generated node number describing the starting location of
the element. The From Node value for this element is also used to define starting locations for
details such as nozzles, insulation, and packing that are associated with this element.
The software defines a vertical vessel from bottom to top. If the vertical vessel is on skirt, the
first element is the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element is a head and the legs or lugs are
defined as details on the appropriate head or shell elements.
The software defines a horizontal vessel from left to right. The first element in a horizontal
vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details on the appropriate shell
elements.
Number of Skirt Openings - Select the number of holes in the skirt. You can define up to ten
holes.

General Input Tab
Width - Enter the width of the opening.
Height - Enter the distance from the base of the skirt to the centerline of the opening.
Center Spacing - Enter the distance between centerlines on a rounded oblong opening.
Frame Thk - Enter the thickness of the opening reinforcement frame.
Frame Width - Enter the depth of the opening reinforcement frame.
Layout Angle - Enter the location of the opening around the skirt, when looking at a plan view
of the skirt.

General Input Tab
References
1. Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII. [S.I.]: ASME Publications, 2010. Print. Div. 1
2. Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII. [S.I.]: ASME Publications, 2010. Print. Div. 2
3. Brownell, Lloyd Earl, and Edwin H. Young. Process Equipment Design: Vessel Design. New
York: Wiley, 1959.
Print.
4. Farr, James R., and Maan H. Jawad. Guidebook for the Design of ASME Section VIII
Pressure Vessels. New
York: ASME, 1998. Print.
5. Jawad, Mann H., and James R. Farr. Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment.
Second ed. New
York: Wiley, 1989. Print.
6. Megyesy, Eugene F.. Pressure Vessel Handbook. Eighth ed. Tulsa, OK: Pressure Vessel
Handbook Pub.,
1986. Print.
7. Moss, Dennis R. Pressure Vessel Design Manual: Illustrated Procedures for Solving Major
Pressure Vessel
Design Problems. Amsterdam: Gulf Professional Publ, 2004. Print.
8. Singh, Krishna P., and Alan I. Soler. Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers: and Pressure
Vessel
Components. Cherry Hill: Arcuturus, 1984. Print.

SECTION 14
Report Headings (Heading Tab)

Page heading text and cover sheet text for reports are entered on the Heading tab. You can
enter up to three lines of heading text, to appear at the top of each page, and the text to appear
on a separate cover sheet.
2. In the Input/Output panel, select Input > Heading .
The Heading tab appears at the bottom-left of the PV Elite window.
Heading Text - Enter up to three lines of text to appear at the top of each printed page of the
output report.
Title Page Text - Click to open the Title Page Text dialog box and enter text to appear on
the cover page of the output report.
Set Title - Click to insert a default title page in the Title Page Text dialog box. The default title
page is stored in the file Title.Hed, in the software subdirectory. You can edit the file.

Report Headings (Heading Tab)

SECTION 15
Design Constraints Tab

Enter data such as pressures and temperatures, hydrotest data, and wall thicknesses in the
Design Constraints tab. If no data is entered, the software uses the system defaults.
2. In the Input/Output panel, select Input > Design Constraints .
The Design Constraints tab appears at the bottom-left of the PV Elite window.
In This Section
Design Data (Design Constraints Tab) .......................................... 299
Design Modification (Design Constraints Tab) .............................. 305
Design Data (Design Constraints Tab)

Vessel analysis uses the following set of design parameters.
Design Internal Press - Enter the design internal pressure for the vessel. This value is used as
general design data and also with the UG-99b note 34 type hydrotest.
Design External Press - Enter the design external pressure for the vessel if the vessel is
required to be rated for vacuum conditions.
Design Internal Temp - Enter the design internal temperature for the vessel. This value is only
used by the input echo to help insure the correct design data was entered. It is not used by the
analysis portion of the software.
Design External Temp - Enter the design external temperature for the vessel if the vessel is
required to be rated for vacuum conditions.
Datum Line Options - Click to display the Datum Line Options dialog box. For more
information, see Datum Line Options Dialog Box (on page 305).

Enter the location of the datum line for the From Node of the first element. You can then use
List Dialog on the Auxiliary toolbar to enter the distance of nozzles and platforms from the
datum line.
Select the type of hydrotest. For Division 1, the software provides three different methods to
determine hydrotest pressure. For Division 2, the program provides two hydrotest methods.
 UG-99b - ASME UG-99 (b), Division 1. The hydrotest pressure is 1.3 times (1.5 for pre-99
addenda) the maximum allowable working pressure for the vessel multiplied by the lowest
ratio of the stress value S for the test temperature to the stress value S for the design
temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-carbon steel vessels where the
allowable stress changes with temperature, starting even at a somewhat low temperature.
 UG-99c - ASME UG-99(c), Division 1. The hydrotest pressure is determined by multiplying
the minimum MAP by 1.3 (1.5 for pre-99 addenda) and reducing this value by the hydrostatic
head on that part. The hydrostatic head is calculated based on the dimensions of the vessel
and by values for Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and Projection from
Bottom Oper. In addition, Hydrotest Position is used to determine the head pressure.
 UG-99b(34) - ASME UG-99(b), footnote 34, Division 1. The hydrotest pressure is 1.3 times
(1.5 for pre-99 addenda) the design pressure for the entire vessel, multiplied by the lowest
ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the stress value S for the design
temperature.

 UG-100 - ASME UG-100 pneumatic test. The test pressure is 1.1 times (1.25 for pre-99
addenda) the stated design pressure for the entire vessel, multiplied by the lowest ratio of
the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the stress value S for the design temperature.
The stress ratio mentioned above includes bolt allowable stresses for flanges that are
designed according to Appendix 2. This will usually result in a ratio of 1. See ASME
Interpretation VIII-1-83-260 for more information. Click Tools > Configuration to turn off
this option, resulting in a ratio greater than one in cases where the operating and ambient
stresses for the vessel parts are not the same.
 AT-300 - ASME AT-300, Division 2, based on vessel design pressure. The hydrotest
pressure is 1.25 times the design pressure to be marked on the vessel, multiplied by the
lowest ratio of the stress intensity value Sm for the test temperature to the stress intensity
value Sm for the design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-carbon
steel vessels where the allowable stress changes with temperature starting even at a
somewhat low temperature.
 AT-301 - ASME AT-301, Division 2, based on calculated pressure. A hydrostatic test based
on a calculated pressure may be used by agreement between the user and the
manufacturer. The hydrostatic test pressure at the top of the vessel is the minimum of the
test pressures calculated by multiplying the basis for calculated test pressure for each
element by 1.25 and reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element.
 No Hydro - No hydrotest pressure.
 User Entered Pressure
 1.43 * MAWP (PED)
Hydrotest Position - Select a hydrotest position. This input is required so that the total static
head can be determined and subtracted when UG-99c is selected for Hydrotest Type. This
value is used in conjunction with Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and Flange
Distance to Top to determine the total static head. Select from the following:
 Vertical - The vessel is tested in the upright or vertical position. This is not common.
 Horizontal - The vessel is tested in the horizontal position. This is common for most
vessels. The vessel is on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal position
(for a horizontal vessel).
Projection from Top - Enter the projected distance of the nozzle from the outer surface of the
vessel in its test position to the face of the highest flange. This distance is added to the height
(for vertical test positions) or to the maximum diameter of the vessel (for horizontal test
positions) to determine the static head when UG-99c is selected for Hydrotest Type.
Projection from Bottom - Enter the projected distance of the nozzle from the outer surface of
the vessel in its test position to the face of the lowest flange. This distance is added to the height
(for vertical test positions) or to the maximum vessel diameter (for horizontal test positions) to
determine the static head when UG-99c is selected for Hydrotest Type. This distance is
essential when a nozzle flange projecting from the bottom of the vessel is governing the
analysis.
Projection from Bottom Ope - Enter the projected distance of the nozzle from the outer
surface of the vessel to the face of the flange. This distance is used to calculate the MAWP of
an ANSI flange when it governs the MAWP. If the ANSI flange governs, then the static operating
liquid head is subtracted from the basic rating of the flange.
Min. Des Metal Temp - Enter the specified minimum design metal temperature for the vessel.
The software does not design any components based on this value. It is merely to help
document the calculations and to be used for reference. This value is listed in the Internal
Pressure Calculations report for comparison with the calculated UCS-66 minimum temperature.
No UG-20(f) Exemptions - Select this option if the vessel cannot take exemptions according to
UG-20(f), for ASME VIII-1.

Flange Distance to Top - Enter the distance from the centerline/face of flange to the top of the
vessel. This value is used when the flanges govern the MAP of the vessel. If the vessel is in the
vertical position and UG-99c is selected for Hydrotest Type, this value is used in conjunction
with Projection from Top to determine the total static head to subtract for the c type hydrostatic
test.
Construction Type - Select the type of construction to be included on the name plate. Select
Welded, Press. Welded (Pressure welded), Brazed, or Resist. Welded (Resistance welded).
Service Type - Select a type of special service in which the vessel is used. Select None, Lethal
(Lethal service), Unfired Steam (Unfired steam boiler), Direct Firing, Nonstationary,
Air/Water/Steam, Sour, Severe Sour, or Amine. This value is for information only; it is
reported in the input echo.
Degree of Radiography - Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography.
 RT 1 - The complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-11(a) and the
spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not been applied.
 RT 2 - The complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5) and
the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been applied.
 RT 3 - The complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(b).
 RT 4 - Only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or none of the other
requirements are applied.
 None
This value is for information only; it is reported in the input echo.
 PD-5500 Non-destructive Testing Category 1: 100% non-destructive testing (NDT) per

section is required according to 5.6.4.1. There are no restrictions for vessels built under this
category. The NDT is either (generally) radiography, or ultrasonic testing. The code must be
consulted in all matters pertaining to this category. This is the strictest category.
 PD-5500 Non-destructive Testing Category 2: Limited random spot NDT according to
section 5.6.4.2 is required. Generally about 10% of the welds must be examined by NDT
(radiography or ultrasonic). There are restrictions when employing this category. Only
certain groups of materials may be used (for example, groups 1, 2 and 4). The maximum
thickness of the main components must not exceed 40 mm or 30 mm depending on the
material group. It is essential that Table 3.4-1 be consulted when employing category 2. The
code must be consulted in all matters pertaining to this category.
 PD-5500 Non-destructive Testing Category 3: Only visual inspection of the weld is
required. However, steels are restricted to C and CMn types and materials in group 8. The
maximum thickness is restricted to 13 mm for C and CMn steels, and 25 mm for materials in
group 8. The design stress is much lower (see 3.4.2.2 for details). This category is restricted
to temperatures no lower than 0°C. The code must be consulted in all matters pertaining to
this category.
Miscellaneous Weight % - Enter a percentage value to include additional weight to account for
vessel attachments and internal items not otherwise included in the vessel. Typical values are
3.0 or 5.0. The software multiplies the total weight of the vessel by 1.0 plus this value converted
to a decimal (such as 1.03 or 1.05). Enter 0 if no additional weight is needed.
Design Code - Displays the material design code for the project. This value is selected when
you create a new project with File > New and can be changed by selecting a new value for
Design/Code on the Units/Code toolbar. Available codes are ASME SectionVIII-Divison 1,
ASME SectionVIII-Divison 2, British Standard PD:5500, or EN-13445.
User Defined MAWP - Enter a manually-defined value for maximum allowable working
pressure to override the software-generated value. The software-generated MAWP is based on

pressure ratings for the elements and ANSI flanges. If this value is zero, the software-generated
MAWP is used. This is the default behavior.
User Defined MAPnc - Enter a manually-defined value for MAPnc to override the
software-generated value. The software-generated MAPnc is based on pressure ratings for the
elements and ANSI flanges. If this value is zero, the software-generated MAPnc is used. This is
the default behavior.
User Defined Hydro. Press - Enter a manually-defined value for hydrostatic test pressure to
override the software-generated value. The value is then used to calculate the stresses on
elements subjected to this pressure. If this value is greater than 0, the software uses this
pressure plus the applicable hydrostatic head that is computed based on the hydrotest position.
If this value is zero, the software-generated hydrostatic test pressure is used. This is the default
behavior.
Additional Ope. Static Press - Enter the additional static pressure at the top of the vessel.
Use Higher Long. Stress - Select to use higher allowable stresses for longitudinal stress
calculations for wind and earthquake loadings. Loads are increased by an occasional load factor
of 1.2.
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-23(d) permits the allowable stress for the
combination of earthquake loading, or wind loading with other loadings to be increased by a
factor of 1.2.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 A08 does not explicitly allow for an increase in allowable stresses,
but this is subject to change.
Some wind and earthquake codes such as ASCE-7 98 and IBC 2000 and later have explicitly
defined load combinations embedded in the standard. This set of codes essentially uses the
same methodology to define earthquake loads. The load combinations either divide the
earthquake load by a factor of 1.4 or multiply by 0.7 to convert from Limit State to Allowable
Stress design. ASCE-7 2005, Chapter 13, paragraph 13.1.7 states that when a reference
document "ASME Section VIII Division 1 in this case" provides a basis for earthquake design
(UG-22), the reference document is used. This paragraph goes on to state that the loads shall
be multiplied by 0.7. Please note that the IBC codes point directly to ASCE for wind and seismic
load calculations.
 In PV Elite versions prior to 2009, the allowables used for longitudinal stress calculations did
not allow the 1.2 increase in tensile and compressive allowables for earthquake load cases,
even if this option was selected. This restriction was removed in the 2009 version.
 For PD 5500 and EN-13445 the occasional load factor is not applied.
Consider Vortex Shedding - Select to perform vortex shedding calculations on tall, slender
vertical vessels susceptible to wind-induced oscillations. This method is documented in the
National Building Code of Canada and in texts on wind engineering. The software calculates
fatigue stresses based on loads generated by wind vibration and the number of hours of safe
operation remaining under vibration conditions. The software calculates the likelihood of this
occurrence based on the research of Zorilla and Mahajan. If there is no possibility of wind
vibration and you have this option selected, the software warns you that unrealistically high
stresses will result and gives you the option to turn this calculation off.
Is This a Heat Exchanger? - If the Dimensional Solutions 3D file interface button is selected,
also select this option to write geometry and loading information for this vessel design to the
<jobname>.ini file created in the current working directory. See Dimensional Solutions
http://www.Dimsoln.com for more information about the Dimensional Solutions product line. This
entry is optional.
To completely define an exchanger it is necessary to enter in the required information
regarding the tubes, tubesheets and the floating head (if any). With the exchanger data, PV Elite

can then compute the weights and required thicknesses of the exchanger components. For
more information, see Tubesheet (on page 127).
Corroded Hydrotest - Select to use the corroded wall thickness when calculating stresses on
the elements during the hydrotest, when it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel after it has
corroded. If cleared, the software uses the uncorroded wall thickness
Longitudinal stresses due to hydrostatic test pressure are also calculated using the
corroded wall thickness when this option is selected.
Hyd. Allowable is 90% Yield - Select to use 90 percent of the ambient yield stress as the
hydrotest allowable stress. Clear to use the ASME Division 1 value, which is 1.3 times the
ambient allowable stress Sa for the material. When the vessel is tested, the largest
circumferential stress should not exceed this value. The software recalculates the hydrotest
allowable each time this option is selected or cleared.
ASME Steel Stack - Select to perform an ASME steel stack analysis, based on the ASME
recommended guidelines for Steel Stacks STS-2000 with addenda. This analysis is for circular
stacks that meet the design requirements in the steel stack guidelines. The results are shown in
the ASME STS Stack Calculations report. If Design Code is not set to Division 1 (ASME
VIII-1), the stack analysis is not performed.
Also select this option if you are analyzing a steel stack and want to check it against
ANSI/ASME STS-2000/STS-1a-2003. After the software completes the calculation, the program
generates the Stress Due to Combined Loads report with a listing of the stack calculations.
Compressive allowables in the report are calculated based on Section 4.4.
When selected, expand ASME Steel Stack and enter values for ASCE Wind Exposure, Factor
of Safety, Mean Hourly Wind Speed, Is the Stack Lined?, and Importance Factor.
Read and understand the ASME stack guidelines. This is not a code like ASME
Division 1 or 2, but a set of design guidelines for designers and engineers.
The following paragraphs from the stack guidelines are addressed:
 4.4 Allowable Stresses
 4.4.1 Longitudinal Compression, equations 4.7,4.8 and 4.9
 4.4.2 Longitudinal Compression and Bending
 4.4.3 Circumferential Stresses
 4.4.4 Combined Longitudinal and Circumferential Compressive Stresses
 4.4.5 Circumferential Compression in Stiffeners, equations 4.14, 4.15, 4.16
 4.4.7 Minimum Structural Plate Thickness
 5.2.2 Wind Responses, equations 5.3, 5.4 and (1),(2) and (3), (b) equations 5.5, 5.6 and 5.7
ASCE Wind Exposure - Select a value for wind exposure, taken from the ASCE #7 Wind
Design Code. It is permissible to use another wind code or pressure versus elevation. However,
in order to determine the Wind Responses, the Exposure Category (A,B,C or D) based on ASCE
must be entered:
Exposure Exposure Description

A Large City Centers
B Urban and Suburban Areas
C Open Terrain with scattered obstructions
Flat, unobstructed areas exposed to wind flowing over open
D
water for a distance of at least 1 mile.

The default value is C.

Factor of Safety - Enter a value for the factor of safety. Factors of safety from ASME STS,
Table 4.1 are shown below:
F.S. Load Combination

1.50 Dead + Live + Other + Thermal + Along or Cross Wind
1.50 Dead + Live + Other + Thermal + Seismic
1.33 Dead + Live + Other + Abnormal Thermal + Along Wind/4
1.33 Construction
The default value is 1.5.
Mean Hourly Wind Speed - Enter the mean hourly wind speed at the stack location.
Is the Stack Lined? - Select this option to indicate that the stack lined with at least a 2 inch
thick 100 pcf liner.
Importance Factor - Enter the ASCE-7/STS importance factor from Table I-2.
Datum Line Options Dialog Box

Specifies options for datum lines.
Datum is taken from bottom/left tangent or bottom of vessel – Select this option and type
any offset from that point if the datum is to be taken from the bottom of the vessel or the left
tangent.
For Vertical Vessels – Specifies where the datum line is to be positioned if the datum is not
taken from the bottom/left tangent or bottom of the vessel. The available options include:
 Top Shell Seam or Top of Vessel
 Bottom Shell Seam or Bottom of the Vessel
 Base of Skirt
Offset (+ or -) distance from seam – Modifies the position of the datum line vertically from the
seam based on the value in the For Vertical Vessels box.
For Horizontal Vessels – Specifies where the datum line is to be positioned if the datum is not
taken from the bottom/left tangent or bottom of the vessel. The available options include:
 Left Shell Seam or Left End of Vessel
 Right Shell Seam or Right End of Vessel
Offset (+ or -) distance from seam – Modifies the position of the datum line horizontally from
the seam based on the value in the For Horizontal Vessels box.
Design Modification (Design Constraints Tab)

Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure - Select Yes to automatically set the wall
thickness for internal pressure. If the required element thickness for internal pressure exceeds
the value of Finished Thickness defined for Element Data on the General Input tab, the
software increases Finished Thickness to meet or exceed the thickness required for internal
pressure. The software exceeds the required thickness only if you select Round Thickness to
Nearest Nominal Size on the Configuration (see "Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab
(Configuration Dialog)" on page 196) dialog box (Tools tab > Set Configuration
Parameters). The software automatically calculates this wall thickness as model data is

entered, so select this option before any part of the vessel is modeled. If the original value for
Finished Thickness is greater than the required thickness, then no change is made.
During data entry, the software does not check the required thickness for flanges. That
check is performed during analysis.
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure - Select Yes to automatically set the wall
thickness for external pressure. The Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Options
Dialog Box (on page 311) opens. If the required element thickness for external pressure
exceeds the value of Finished Thickness defined for Element Data on the General Input tab,
the software calculates the required thickness of each element (or group of elements) and
increases the value of Finished Thickness. The software notifies you when the thickness is
changed.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure is set to No when this value is Yes.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure - Select Yes to automatically set the wall
thickness for external pressure. The Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Options
Dialog Box (on page 311) opens. If the required element thickness for external pressure
exceeds the value of Finished Thickness defined for Element Data on the General Input tab,
the software calculates the required thickness of each element (or group of elements) and
increases the value of Finished Thickness. The software notifies you when the thickness is
changed.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure is set to No when this value is Yes.
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress - Select Yes to automatically increase the thickness for
axial stress in vertical vessels. The software calculates the axial stress and required thickness of
each element (or group of elements) for longitudinal loadings (such as wind, earthquake, and
weight of vertical vessels) and increases the value of Finished Thickness. The software
exceeds the required thickness only if you select Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size
on the Configuration (see "Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog)" on
page 196) dialog box.

SECTION 16
Load Cases Tab

Enter stress combination and nozzle pressure load cases. If no data is entered, the software
uses the system defaults.
2. In the Input/Output panel, select Input > Stress Combination Load Cases .
The Load Cases tab appears at the bottom-left of the PV Elite window.
Reset Cases - Click to reset Stress Combination Load Cases to the default set of cases
provided with the software.
Global Scalar for WI Loads - Enter a value for the wind scalar multiplier. After wind loads are
generated, they are multiplied by this value. A value that is greater than one increases the loads.
A value less than one decreases the loads. Enter zero if there are no wind loads. The > button
to the right sets the value back to the default value.
In many building codes, load cases for wind and seismic are discussed. When the code uses
allowable stress design, wind and seismic loads are usually scaled by a factor. For example, in
the IBC Code, earthquake loads are divided by a factor of 1.4. Other codes multiply by the
earthquake load by 0.7.
Global Scalar for EQ Loads - Enter a value for the seismic scalar multiplier. After seismic loads
are generated, they are multiplied by this value. A value that is greater than one increases the
loads. A value less than one decreases the loads. Enter zero if there are no seismic loads. The
> button to the right sets the value back to the default value.
In many building codes, load cases for wind and seismic are discussed. When the code uses
allowable stress design, wind and seismic loads are usually scaled by a factor. For example, in
the IBC Code, earthquake loads are divided by a factor of 1.4. Other codes multiply by the
earthquake load by 0.7.
Use and Allow editing of Local Scalars in the Load Cases - Select to use load case scalars
in place of global scalars. Also select this option if you selected Determine the Basering
design bolt load accounting for Load Case Factors? in the Basering Dialog Box (on page
274) on the General Input tab. If this option is not selected, then values of 1.0 are used for
scalar multipliers.
Set Load Cases to show WI and EQ Scalars - Click to show the scalar multipliers for Global
Scalar for WI Loads and Global Scalar for EQ Loads in the load combination equations.
These values change internally when the wind or seismic design code is changed. When
version 2005 or earlier files are used, this value is automatically calculated.
In This Section
Stress Combination Load Cases (Load Cases Tab) ..................... 308
Nozzle Design Options (Load Cases Tab) .................................... 313

Load Cases Tab
Stress Combination Load Cases (Load Cases Tab)

Enter the loads to combine for each load case. The software performs calculations for various
combinations of internal pressure, external pressure, hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic
load. You can define up to twenty combinations of these loadings for evaluation. Load cases are
defined by a string of abbreviations showing the loads to be added. For example, "IP+OW+WI"
is the sum of internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. The software provides the
following set of default load cases:
Load Load Combinations

Case
1 NP+EW+WI+FW+BW
2 NP+EW+EQ+FS+BS
3 NP+OW+WI+FW+BW
4 NP+OW+EQ+FS+BS
5 NP+HW+HI
6 NP+HW+HE
7 IP+OW+WI+FW+BW
8 IP+OW+EQ+FS+BS
9 EP+OW+WI+FW+BW
10 EP+OW+EQ+FS+BS
11 HP+HW+HI
12 HP+HW+HE
13 IP+WE+EW
14 IP+WF+CW
15 IP+VO+OW
16 IP+VE+EW
17 NP+VO+OW
18 FS+BS+IP+OW
19 FS+BS+EP+OW
20
The following abbreviations are used for loads:
NP No Pressure
IP Internal Pressure
EP External Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
EW Empty Weight

Load Cases Tab
OW Operating Weight
HW Hydrotest Weight
WI Wind Load
EQ Earthquake Load
HE Hydrotest Earthquake
HI Hydrotest Wind
BW Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Wind Case, Corroded
BS Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Seismic Case, Corroded
BN Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Wind Case, Uncorroded
BU Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Seismic Case, Uncorroded
CW Axial Weight Stress, New and Cold (no corrosion allowance, CA)
WE Wind Bending Moment, New and Cold (Empty) (no CA)
WF Wind Bending Moment, New and Cold (Filled) (no CA)
FS Axial Stress due to Applied Axial Forces in Seismic Cases
FW Axial Stress due to applied forces in Wind Cases
Live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for the operating and hydrotest conditions. In
both cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads are usually a
fraction of the operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are entered in the live
load definitions.
If Consider Vortex Shedding is selected on the Design Constraints Tab (on page 299), the
following loads may also be used:
VO Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Ope)
VE Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Emp)
VF Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Test, no
CA.)
PV Elite allows individual load case descriptors to have their own scale factors. These factors
scale the stresses produced by the corresponding load case component. For example 1.25EQ
would produce an earthquake stress 1.25 times higher than the design earthquake stress. An
example of a complete load case would be:
IP+OW+0.7143EQ+FS+BS
This facility allows designers to comply with a variety of loading scenarios. Another application
of this may be that fractions of wind and seismic loads can be added together in the same load
case. ASME states that doing this is not required; however, some design institutions mandate
this practice. Here is another example:
0.7EQ+0.25WI+OW
Notice that there is no need to put a star (*) in front of each descriptor. If this box is not checked
then values of 1.0 will be used for scalar multipliers. However, if there is a global scalar specified
for wind or seismic, that value will be used. Please note that this is for vertical vessels only.
During the stress calculations, the maximum stress is saved at the location of the support (skirt
base, lug,or leg). Knowing the section properties, the moment needed to create that stress can
be computed and used in the skirt, lug or leg calculation as required.

Load Cases Tab
Any load case component can have a specified scalar. It is not meaningful to have a value in
front of the NP component. It is important to specify NP for any case that does not have
pressure.
For vertical vessels, the maximum stress is saved at the location of the support (skirt base, lug,
and leg). Using the section properties, the moment needed to create that stress can be
calculated and used in the skirt, lug or leg calculation as required.
It is often stated that the required thickness of the skirt is needed. It is not valid to directly
calculate this value based on bending stress and axial stress because the section modulus is
needed and the element OD or ID is still unknown. While it is possible to make an assumption,
this will not generate an accurate mathematical result. A small change in the thickness can
change the allowable compressive stress (factor A and factor B) in a very non-linear fashion. For
more information, see British Code PD 5500, Annex B, paragraph B.1.5.
Vary Compressive Allowable for Internal/External Cases - Select to use the external design
temperature to calculate the stress factor "B" for load combination cases that involve external
pressure and dead weight. The software uses the design internal temperature to calculate the
allowable compressive stress from the External Pressure Chart. By default, the software uses
the maximum of the internal and external design temperatures to calculate the allowable
compressive stress for operating-type cases. This is also true for cases involving internal
pressure.
For example, a load case of "IP + OW + WI" uses the design temperature for internal pressure
to calculate the allowable compressive stress. The load case "EP + OW + WI" uses the external
design temperature to calculate the allowable compressive stress.
When using this option, a disruption in process may leave the column at design
internal temperature and a vacuum. If the design external temperature was much lower, this
could lead to non-conservative results.
Corrode Case Components WE, WF and CW - Select to use loads WE (Wind Bending
Moment Empty, no CA), WF (Wind Bending Moment Filled, no CA), and CW (Axial Weight
Stress, no CA) in the corroded condition.
Installation | Misc. Options - Click to open the Equipment Installation and
Miscellaneous Options Dialog Box (on page 311) and specify options as to where items such
as platforms, packing, and insulation are to be installed. These options are used to compute the
center of gravity of the vessel in both the shop and field positions. The options are also used to
compute weights such as operating weight and field test weight.
Fatigue Analysis - Click to open the Fatigue Pressure/Cycle and UTS-Yield Data Dialog
Box and set options used to perform fatigue analysis on nozzles. In the dialog box, you enter
values for Number of Fatigue Cases to Process, and then values for Low Pressure, High
Pressure, and # of Cycles for each case. You must also select Fatigue Calc? in the Nozzle
Input Analysis dialog box for each nozzle.

Load Cases Tab
Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Options Dialog

Box
Define data for stiffening rings, saddles, legs, and lugs.
Platform Wind Area Calculation Method - Select the method for determining the surface area
that a platform provides for wind load calculations. The selection is used to compute the wind
area for all platforms specified in this project. Information on the force coefficient is also
provided. Select one of the following:
 Height * Width * Force Coefficient [Cf]
 1/2 Floor Plate Area * Force Coefficient [Cf]
 1/3 Height * Width * Force Coefficient [Cf]
 1/3 Projected Area * Force Coefficient [Cf]
The software uses the area of the platforms to calculate forces applied to the vessel during wind
loading analysis. Unfortunately, there is no standard method for computing the amount of area
that a platform provides for wind load calculations.
If the selection is changed after one or more platforms are installed, click List Dialog
to open the Detail Listing Dialog Box and then click Platform Wind Area to update the areas.
List Dialog - Click to open the Detail Listing Dialog Box and add details for platforms,
nozzles, weights, packing, forces/moments, and pressure rings.
Adjust detail elevations by - Enter a value to shift the position of all details by the specified
elevation distance. A negative value will move details down or left. A positive value moves the
details up or right. This option is useful when all of the details such as rings, nozzles, and trays
need to be adjusted by a specified amount. This may happen if an element is inserted into the
model after it has been completed and the detail elevations need to be kept constant.
If the adjustment moves a detail (such as a tray) into an element (such as a body
flange), the software does not allow this, and the detail is lost and cannot be recovered.
But only for "From" nodes > or = - Enter the From Node number where you would like the
change in position to start. All details on this element and the following elements are affected. A
value of zero affects all elements.
External Pressure Ring Requirement Data

Structural Database - Select the structural database to use for external pressure ring stiffeners.
Select AISC, Korean/Japanese, German 1991, UK, Australian, South African, or India ISI.
Stiffener Type to Meet Inertia Requirements - Select the stiffener type to use for external
pressure rings on the vessel. For ASME VIII-1 and VIII-2, the software determines maximum
stiffener spacing and adds rings to the vessel. Select one of the following:
Equal Angle (flange in either direction)
Unequal Angle (flange in either direction, "hard way" shown)
Double Large Angle

Double Small Angle
(with long or short sides back-to-back)
Channel
I - Beam

Load Cases Tab
WT Section
MT Section
ST Section
Bar
The software designs a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00. The height of the ring is 10
times its thickness. The minimum starting ring width is 0.5 inches ( 12mm).
For angle sections, are they rolled the "Hard Way"? - Select if the stiffener selected in
Stiffener Type to Meet Inertia Requirements is rolled the "hard way" to have the strong axis of
the ring perpendicular to the vessel wall, with the flange away from the vessel wall.
Bar thickness to use when designing new rings - Enter a thickness when Bar is selected for
Stiffener Type to Meet Inertia Requirements. The software uses the thickness to calculate the
bar depth for the pressure ring. The software creates a ring with a 10 to 1 aspect ratio. In other
words, the width of the ring is ten times the thickness. If no value is entered, the software uses a
default thickness of 0.375 inches. (9.5 mm).
Select From Standard Bar Ring List - When Bar is selected for Stiffener Type to Meet
Inertia Requirements, select this option to calculate the minimum bar pressure ring size that
meets moment of inertia requirements of UG-29(a) (or Appendix 1-5 or 1-8 for a cone-cylinder
junction ring). The bar ring is selected from the list below:
Ring Ring Widths

Thickness (in.)
(in.)
1/4 1.5 1.75 2.00 2.50 ---
3/16 2.5 --- --- --- ---
3/8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
1/2 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
5/8 5.0 6.0 --- --- ---
3/4 5.0 5.5 6.0 8.0 ---
7/8 6.0 8.0 --- --- ---
1 6.0 8.0 10.0 11.0 ---
1 1/4 8.0 10.0 12.0 --- ---
1 1/2 8.0 10.0 12.0 --- ---

Load Cases Tab
2 12.0 18.0 --- --- ---

4 30.0 --- --- --- ---
Rigging Data
Impact Factor (<1 NoCalc) - Enter a rigging impact factor. Typical values range from 1.5 to 2.0,
but a maximum value of 3.0 is possible. The software performs a rigging analysis (combined
shear plus bending stress) to account for sudden loads when the vessel is lifted from the
ground. The impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the vessel, and accounts for
a skirt support and Lug Distances from Base. If the value is 0, no rigging analysis is
performed.
Lug Distances from Base - Enter the lifting lug elevation for the vessel. Enter an elevation
distance, one in each text box, to account for two lifting lugs. The order of the elevations in the
text boxes does not matter. These distances are measured from the bottom of the vertical
vessel or from the left end of the horizontal vessel. If both values are 0, no rigging analysis is
performed.
Saddle Calc Options

Calc per which method - Select a saddle calculation method: ASME Div 2 or PD-5500.
Use New Metal Weight for Saddle Calcs - Select to use the uncorroded new metal weight to
determine saddle loads for the operating condition. By default, the software uses the corroded
metal weight.
Number of intermediate supports to be used during the hydrotest - Enter a value from 0 to
20. When some larger vessels are hydrotested after construction, a number of intermediate
supports may be placed under the vessel to keep the saddle stresses below their allowables.
Installation Location - The location of installation of various components, the platform, packing
tray insulation or lining, can be specified here, whether in the shop or the field.
Combine Wind and Earthquake Loads - This option allows for wind and earthquake loads to
be combined for saddles, legs, and lugs.
Nozzle Design Options (Load Cases Tab)

Define additional load case parameters for nozzle design.
Nozzle/Clip Design Pressure Options - Select one of the following design pressure methods
for calculating the pressure at the nozzle:
 1. MAWP + Static Head to Element Bottom - Calculates the internal pressure on the
nozzle on the bottom of the element where the nozzle is located. This pressure is the
maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of the vessel plus the static liquid pressure
head to the bottom of that element. Thus, the design pressure can vary for nozzles located
on different elements. This option is appropriate if you are certain that your nozzle locations
will not vary during the design process. If you use this option and a nozzle is lowered in the
vessel and under additional pressure due to liquid head, you must rerun the analysis in order
to determine if the nozzle geometry is satisfactory.
 2. Design P + Static Head - Calculates the exact internal pressure at the nozzle location.
The pressure is the design internal pressure plus the additional static liquid pressure at the
nozzle location. This option is appropriate for re-rating vessels or for the design of new
vessels where there are no MAWP considerations. If the overall MAWP of the vessel is to be

Load Cases Tab
determined, it is strongly recommended that the model be rerun with the computed MAWP
to be sure that all components pass at this higher pressure, which will be stamped on the
nameplate. The pressure for all elements can be changed at Design Internal Press on the
Design Constraints Tab (on page 299).
 3. Overall MAWP + Static Head (governing element) - Calculates one design internal
pressure for all of the nozzles located on the vessel, based on the static liquid pressure to
the bottom of the element that is governing the MAWP. If the nozzle location on a vessel
changes due to a client request, there is no need to rerun nozzle calculations because the
pressure used in the calculations does not change. This method is ideal for designing new
vessels and is the most conservative option.
 4. MAWP + Static Head to Nozzle - Calculates the MAWP of the vessel and then adds the
static liquid pressure from the liquid surface to the nozzle location. For nozzles at different
elevations, the design pressure will vary.
If the resulting nozzle reinforcement MAWP does not need to govern the MAWP of the
vessel, options 1, 3 or 4 should be used. This is a common requirement for vessels that are
used in the chemical and petro-chemical industries.
Consider MAPnc - Select to require that nozzle reinforcement calculations are performed for
the MAP new and cold condition. The software checks to see if the nozzle is reinforced
adequately using the MAPnc generated during internal pressure calculations. When the
area-of-replacement calculations are made for this case, cold allowable stresses are used and
the corrosion allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for this case helps the vessel to comply
with UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your design requirements to see if
this case is required by your client.
Consider External Loads for Nozzle Tr - Select to calculate the nozzle area of replacement
requirements using the required thickness of the shell. This value, tr, is critical in the ASME
code. The software determines the maximum thickness based on the highest stress ratio and
uses that value if it governs over the required thickness based on internal or external pressure.
There are cases where pressure requirements do not govern the value of tr. This can occur
when a nozzle is located near the bottom of a tall vertical vessel. If there is a high wind load or
seismic load on the structure, bending stress can govern the required thickness of the shell
section. If this is the case, then the value of tr (per UG-22 Div. 1) should be based on the
controlling factor.
Optionally, if tr needs to be specified for a specific nozzle, the value can be entered
directly to User Tr on the Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box of Nozzle Input (see "Nozzle" on
page 70) .
Use Appendix 1-9 (Div. 1) - Select to use ASME Code Case 2168. On February 14, 1994
ASME approved case 2168, providing an alternative method for reinforcing radial nozzles in
cylindrical shells. The nozzle must be connected to the cylindrical shell by a full penetration
groove weld.
Design Pads to Reinforce Openings - Select when pad-defined geometries are inadequately
reinforced. The software calculates the diameter and thickness of the pad required to reinforce
the opening. If the software changes the pad data during analysis, it will prompt you to reload
the file so that you can view the new changes.
This option is restricted to ASME Section VIII analysis.
Nozzle Sort Options - Select a sort order of nozzles for the Nozzle Schedule report. Select By
Name Ascending, By Name Descending, By Diameter, Ascending, By Diameter,
Descending, or No Sorting.
ASME Large Nozzle Calc Options - Select the load cases to use for evaluation of large
openings. Select Use 1-7 or Use 1-10.

SECTION 17
Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab)

Click Input > Wind Loads to enter wind code data. The Wind Data tab appears on the left.
Select a wind design code and enter data required by that code. If no data is entered, the
software uses the system defaults.
Wind Design Code - Select the design code to use for wind calculations:
Code Description
Design Wind Code of Australia and New Zealand, 2002 edition
As/Nz 1170:2002
For more information, see As/Nz 1170:2002 Wind Data (on page 317).
American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
ASCE-93
For more information, see:
ASCE-95
ASCE-93 Wind Data (on page 322)
ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-
ASCE-95 and ASCE-98/02/05 Wind Data (see "ASCE-95,
03
ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC 2006 Wind Data" on page 323)
ASCE-2010
ASCE-2010 Wind Data (on page 325)
Britain's Wind Design Code, 1997 Edition (Replaces CP-3)
BS6399-97
For more information, see BS6399-97 Wind Data (on page 330).
Design Wind Code for Brazil
Brazil NBR 6123
For more information, see Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Data (on page 326).
Design Wind Code for China
China GB 50009
For more information, see China GB 50009 Wind Data (on page 332).
Design Wind Code for several European Countries with 2005 update
EN-2005
For more information, see EN-2005 Wind Data (on page 334).
Design Wind Code for several European countries, including France.
Euro Code
For more information, see Euro Code Wind Data (on page 334).
International Building Code
IBC 2006
For more information, see IBC-03 and IBC 2006 Wind Data
IBC 2009
(http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml )
Wind Design Code of India, 1987 edition Amd. 1 and 2 (2003)
IS-875
For more information, see IS-875 Wind Data (on page 338).
Japanese Wind Code
JPI-7R-35-2004
For more information, see JPI-7R-35-2004 Wind Data (on page 340).
Official Design Wind Code of Mexico, 1993 and 2008
Mexico
For more information, see Mexico 1993 Wind Data (on page 341).
National Building Code of Canada
NBC-95
For more information, see:
NBC-2005
NBC-95 and NBC-2005 Wind Data (on page 350)
NBC-2010
NBC-2010 Wind Data (on page 351)

Uniform Building Code

UBC
For more information, see UBC Wind Data (on page 353).
User Defined Enter your own wind pressure versus elevation in the Wind Profile Table.
No Wind Loads
Wind for Hydrotest - Enter the percentage of the wind load (not wind speed) that is applied
during the hydrotest. This is typically as low as 33 percent of the design wind load, because it
can be assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
Beta: Operating/Empty/Full - Beta: Operating - In the first text box, enter the value of the
structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping) operating-case beta for vortex
shedding. The default value is 0.01. This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor
G as outlined in the commentary section 6.6, page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8, pages
29-30 of the 98 standard. If your design code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping
coefficient according to that particular wind design code. If your design code does not call out for
a specific value of beta, then use the default value of 0.01.
Beta: Empty - Enter a value for the empty-case beta in the second text box. The software
calculates a gust response factor based on these values of beta and generates additional wind
loads on the vessels. If the code does not supply this value, then leave the text box empty.
Beta: Full - Enter a value for the filled-case beta in the third text box. The software calculates a
gust response factor based on these values of beta and generates additional wind loads on the
vessels. If the code does not supply this value, then leave the text box empty.
In This Section
As/Nz 1170:2002 Wind Data ......................................................... 317
ASCE-93 Wind Data ...................................................................... 322
ASCE-95, ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC 2006 Wind Data ...... 323
ASCE-2010 Wind Data .................................................................. 325
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Data .......................................................... 326
BS6399-97 Wind Data ................................................................... 330
China GB 50009 Wind Data .......................................................... 332
EN-2005 Wind Data ....................................................................... 334
Euro Code Wind Data .................................................................... 334
IBC-03 and IBC 2006 Wind Data ................................................... 337
IS-875 Wind Data .......................................................................... 338
JPI-7R-35-2004 Wind Data............................................................ 340
Mexico 1993 Wind Data................................................................. 341
NBC-95 and NBC-2005 Wind Data ............................................... 350
NBC-2010 Wind Data .................................................................... 351
UBC Wind Data ............................................................................. 353
User-Defined Wind Data ................................................................ 354

As/Nz 1170:2002 Wind Data

In common with other wind codes, the principles of the Australian/New Zealand code are
basically the same. A moving air mass causes forces to be exerted on anything that obstructs its
path. The starting point of any wind action analysis starts with the Bernoulli equation that
converts the kinetic energy of the wind into a static pressure. This pressure simply attempts to
move anything in its path. In the case of a vertical tower, the wind deflects the tower in the
direction of the flowing wind. Because of the friction, the wind (which is a fluid) passes around
the vessel, creating small eddie currents called vortices on either side of the vessel. The
spinning air loses some of it pressure as its angular kinetic energy increases. This is again an
effect predicted by the Bernoulli equation. This spinning eddie, or vortex, causes a lowering of
the pressure on one side of the vessel. As these vortices occur alternatively on the sides of the
vessel, the tower tends to sway from side to side perpendicular to the direction of the wind,
vibrating like an upside-down pendulum.
The wind pressure causes a static deflection in the direction of the wind stream, and the vortices
cause the vessel to vibrate at right angles to the wind stream (vector) as mentioned above.
Static deflection and dynamic vibration cause the vessel to experience longitudinal, or axial
bending stresses. Both the stresses and deflection must be limited to provide for good design.
As stated above, the wind kinetic energy is converted to pressure, but there are other factors
influencing the final wind pressure. Among these factors are (but not limited to) the following:
 The height, or altitude, of the tower or vessel in the wind stream.
 The elevation of the site on which the vessel is installed.
 The base elevation of the vessel if is supported on an elevated platform or structure.
 The effect of the surround geography, such as hills and escarpments.
 The effect of upstream buildings.
To perform a reasonable analysis, you must enter sufficiently accurate information for the
software to apply the correct factors and special calculations for specific cases.
Design Wind Speed - Enter the design wind speed Vr . This is the regional wind speed, as
described in section 3.2, table 3.1 of the code:
Region
Regional wind
Non-cyclonic Cyclonic
speed (m/s)
A (1 to 7) W B C D
V5 32 39 28 FC33 FD35
V10 34 41 33 FC39 FD43
V20 37 43 38 FC45 FD51
V25 37 43 39 FC47 FD53
V50 39 45 44 FC2 FD60
V100 41 47 48 FC56 FD66
V200 43 49 52 FC61 FD72
V500 45 51 57 FC66 FD80
V1000 46 53 60 FC70 FD58

V2000 48 54 63 FC73 FD90

-0.1 FC x
VR (see ) 67-41R 104-70R-0.045 106-92R-0.1 FD x (156-142R-0.1)
(122-104R-0.1)
Round the calculated value to the nearest 1 m/s.
If you are entering the wind speed in other units, remember to convert the above wind speeds
from m/s to your specific units:
Convert m/s to Multiply by

kph 3.600
mph 2.237
ft/s 3.281

Wind Region - Select the wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic
locations for Australia and New Zealand. The maps of these locations are found in Figure 3.1 of
the code:

Terrain Category - Select the terrain category, as defined in section 4.2.1 of the code:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain, with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at
serviceable wind speeds.
Category 2 - Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions
having heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high, such as areas
of suburban housing.
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions, such as large city centres and well-developed industrial complexes.

Select the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions shall not
be relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee) - Enter the lee effect multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand,
reference is made to the New Zealand site map shown in Wind Region. For all other sites, it
shall be taken as 1.0. No lee zones have been defined in Australia.
The full paragraph from the code reads as follows:
4.4.3: The lee (effect) multiplier (Mlee) shall be evaluated from New Zealand sites in the lee
zones as shown in Figure 3.1(b). For all other sites, the lee multiplier shall be 1.0. Within the lee
zones, the lee multiplier shall apply only to wind from the cardinal directions nominated in Figure
3.1(b). Each lee zone shall be 30 km in width, measured from the leeward crest of the initiating
range, downwind in the direction of the wind nominated. The lee zone comprises a 'shadow lee
zone', which extends 12 km from the upwind boundary of the lee zone (crest of the initiating
range), and an 'outer lee zone' over the remaining 18 km. The lee multiplier shall be 1.35 for
sites within the shadow lee zone (i.e., within 12 km of the crest of the range). Within the outer
lee zone, the lee multiplier shall be determined by linear interpolation with the horizontal
distance, from the shadow/outer zone boundary (where Mlee - 1.35), to the downwind lee zone
boundary (where Mlee = 1.0).
Hill Shape Factor (Mh) - Enter the hill shape factor Mh, taken from Table 4.4:
Upwind Slope Mh
(H/2Lu)
< 0.05 1.0
0.05 1.08
0.10 1.16
0.20 1.32
0.30 1.48
>= 0.45 1.71
Paragraph 4.4.2 gives precise details for the derivation of the hill shape factor.
Wind Direction Multiplier - Enter the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W and
NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. This value is recommended for
all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed - Select to convert the given wind speed to
a permissible stress basis. this lowers the wind loads on the vessel. AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp
1:2002, Section C3 discusses the division of the wind speed given in the standard by the square
root of 1.5.
Surface Roughness Height hr - Enter the surface roughness value hr in mm. This value is
used to calculate the ratio hr/d which is then used to calculate the drag force coefficient (Cd) for
rounded cylindrical shapes, according to Table E3. For pressure vessels, typical values range
from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for heavily rusted surfaces. Light rust has a
value of 2.5 mm, while galvanized steel has a value of 0.15 mm.
Site Elevation (E) - Enter the height of the site above mean sea level E.

Base Elevation from Site (Eb) - Enter the height of the base of the vessel above the site level
Eb. This is relevant in cases where the vessel is supported on a structure or an elevated
foundation base.
Avg Spacing of Shielding Bldgs - Enter the average spacing of the buildings that shield the
vessel. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3 of the code:
Avg Breadth of Shielding Bldgs - Enter the average breadth of the buildings that shield the
vessel. For more information, see Avg Spacing of Shielding Bldgs.
Avg Height of Shielded Bldgs (hs) - Enter the average height of the buildings that shield the
vessel. For more information, see Avg Spacing of Shielding Bldgs.
# of Upwind Bldgs @ 45 degrees - Enter the number of upwind buildings within a 45° arc. The
upwind buildings are the ones shielding the vessel. For more information, see Avg Spacing of
Shielding Bldgs.
ASCE-93 Wind Data

Design Wind Speed - Enter the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards that you are following. The
reason for this is that the wind design pressure, and thus force, increases as the square of the
speed.
Base Elevation - Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value is used to calculate
the height of each point in the vessel above grade. For example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation or on top of another vessel, it is exposed to higher wind pressures than if it
were mounted at grade.
Exposure Constant - Select an ASCE-7 exposure factor:
 Exposure A - Large city centers.
 Exposure B - Urban and suburban areas.
 Exposure C - Open terrain.

Most petrochemical sites use this value.

 Exposure D - Flat unobstructed coastal areas.
 Not Used
Importance Factor - Enter a value for the importance factor. ASCE-7 generally requires a value
between 0.95 and 1.11. The software uses this value directly without modification. Values are
taken from table 5 of the ASCE standard:
Importance Factor
Category 100 mi from At Oceanline Classification

Hurricane
Oceanline
I 1.00 1.05 Buildings and structures not listed below.
Most petrochemical structures use this
category.
II 1.07 1.11 Buildings and structures where more than 300
people congregate in one area.
III 1.07 1.11 Buildings designed as essential facilities,
hospitals, and so on.
IV 0.95 1.00 Buildings and structures that represent a low
hazard in the event of a failure.
Roughness Factor - Enter the roughness factor (from ASCE-7, Table 12):
 1 - Round, moderately smooth
 2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
 3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
 Most petrochemical sites use a value of 1 (moderately smooth). Some designers use a
value of 3 (very rough) to account for items such as platforms, piping, and ladders, instead
of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind
diameter.
 If your specification calls out for a defined value of the wind shape factor, click Tools tab >
Set Configuration Parameters to enter it in directly on the Job Specific Setup Parameters
(see "Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog)" on page 196) tab.

ASCE-95, ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC 2006 Wind

Data
Basic Wind Speed [V] - Enter the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
speed.
Terrain Surface Roughness - Select an ASCE-7 exposure factor:
 Not Used
Importance Factor [I] - Enter a value for the importance factor. ASCE-7 generally requires a
value between 0.77 and 1.15. The software uses this value directly without modification. Values
are taken from table 6-2 of the ASCE 95 standard or table 6-1 from the ASCE 98 standard:
Category Factor Classification

I 0.87 Buildings and other structures that represent a low
hazard to human life in the event of failure.
category.
II 1.00 Buildings and structures except those listed in
categories I, III and IV.
III 1.15 Buildings and structures that represent a substantial
IV 1.15 Buildings designed as essential facilities, such as
hospitals.
In the 98 standard, the importance factor can be 0.77 for category I when wind speeds
are greater than 100 miles per hour.
Type of Surface - Enter the roughness factor (from ASCE-7, Table 12):
 Smooth
 Rough (D'/D = 0.02)

 Very Rough (D'/D = 0.08)
 Most petrochemical sites use smooth. Some designers use very rough to account for items
such as platforms, piping, and ladders, instead of either entering them explicitly as a
tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
 If your specification calls out for a defined value of the wind shape factor, go to the Tools
tab, click Set Configuration Parameters to enter it in directly on the Job Specific Setup
Parameters tab.
Hill Height [H] - Enter the height of a hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See
ASCE 7-95/98, Fig. 6-2 for details.
Distance to Site [x] - Enter the distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest of the hill to the
building site. See ASCE 7-95/98 Fig. 6-2 for details.
Crest Distance [Lh] - Enter the distance upwind of the crest of the hill to where the difference in
ground elevation is half the height of the hill or escarpment. See ASCE 7-95/98, Fig. 6-2 for
more details.
Type of Hill - Select the type of hill. Select None, 2-D Ridge, 2-D Escarpment, or 3-D Axisym
Hill. See ASCE 7-95/98, Fig. 6-2 for details.
ASCE-2010 Wind Data

speed.
 Not Used

category.


hospitals.
 Smooth
 Rough (D'/D = 0.02)
Parameters tab.
more details.
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Data

NBR 6123 provides two types of wind analysis: static and dynamic.
Static wind analysis is performed when the fundamental period of vibration is less than one
second. The goal of the analysis is to determine the wind pressure at each elevation of interest
(z). The basic equation is:
q(z) = Vk2/1.63
Where:
 Vk = Vo*S1*S2*S3
 Vo, S1 and S3 are constants
 S2 changes as a function of the height
 Wind velocities are specified in m/s and pressures are specified in N/mm2
After the pressure is calculated, the force on the element is the pressure times the element area
times the shape factor:
Surface Shape Factor

Condition for Height / Diameter of:

0.5 1.0 2.0 5.0 10 20 ∞

Rough 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2
Smooth 0.5 0.6 0.6
Dynamic wind analysis is performed when the fundamental period of vibration is greater than 1
second. You must first calculate the project wind velocity Vp:
Vp = 0.69 * Vo * S1 * S3
Next, calculate d/H and Vp * T1/1800. Using these two terms and knowing the height of the
vessel, the value of Xi can be determined from figures 14-18 in NBR 6123.
b and p, functions of Roughness Category, can now be determined:
Ground Category
Value
I II III IV V
p 0.095 0.150 0.185 0.230 0.310
b 1.23 1.00 0.86 0.71 0.50
Finally, calculate the wind pressure:
q(z) = 0.613 * b2 * Vp2{(z/10)2p + [(H/10)p * (z/H)1.7 * (4.4/(2.7 + p) *
Xi]}
After the pressure at the needed elevation is known, the force is determined as stated above.
If you have a shape factor value that you want to enter yourself, go to the Tools tab, click
Set Configuration Parameters, and then enter the value on Job Specific Setup Parameters
tab in the Wind Shape Factor box.
Basic Wind Velocity (Vo) - Enter the wind velocity Vo from a three second gust, exceeded only
once in 50 years.The velocity is measured at 10 meters over smooth open ground and depends
on the plant location. As a general rule, the wind can blow in any horizontal direction. This
velocity is taken from Figure 1 and item 8 showing the iso-velocities over Brazil.

The following are found in Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code
NBR 6123:
Refinery Name Wind Velocity

(in m/s)
LUBNOR 30.0
RECAP 40.0
REDUC 35.0
REFAP 45.0
REGAP 30.0
REPAR 40.0
REPLAN 45.0
REMAN 30.0

REVAP 40.0
RPBC 50.0
RLAM 30.0
Topographic Factor (S1) - Enter the topographic factor S1. This factor accounts for the
variations and profile of the land. For plain, or slightly uneven ground, use a value of 1. The
larger this value is, the greater the final calculated wind pressure will be. If the vessel is on a hill
top, this value should be calculated according to section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2) - Select the roughness category S2:
Category Description
I Applies to plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)
II Applies to plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
Applies to plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low
III
buildings)
IV Applies to ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas
Applies to ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed
V
industrial areas)
The lower the category, the higher the wind load. For example, Category I produces a
higher wind load than Category II.
Dimension Class - Select the Dimension class. This parameter accounts for the greatest
horizontal or vertical dimension of the vessel.
Class Description
A The greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters
The greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50
B
meters
C The greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters
Statistical Factor (S3) - Enter the statistical factor S3.This factor accounts for security and the
expected life of the equipment. For industrial plants, use 1.0.
Base Elevation - Enter the distance the base of the equipment is from grade.
Vessel Surface Condition - Select the vessel surface condition, Smooth or Rough. Rough
results in an increased value of the shape factor and generates a higher wind load on the vessel
because there is more drag. The shape factor is based on the height to diameter ratio of the
vessel:
Shape Factor
Surface for Height / Diameter of:
Condition
0.5 1.0 2.0 5.0 10 20 ∞
Rough 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2
Smooth 0.5 0.6 0.6

BS6399-97 Wind Data

BS 6399-97 - The British Wind Code - Loadings for buildings - Part 2: Code of practice for wind
loads. The year of issuance of this code is 1997, replacing CP3.
Design Wind Speed - Enter the design value of the wind speed Vb. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds are
shown in Figure 6 of BS 6399 and vary from 20 to 31 meters per second (44.7 to 69.3 miles per
hour). The wind speeds are only relevant to the United Kingdom.
Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because
the wind design pressure, and thus force, increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation (Delta s) - Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the
code). This value plus Base Elevation is used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel
above mean sea level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft)
above seal level, it is exposed to a higher wind pressure P than if installed on the beach (at
mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height Ho - Enter the average height Ho of buildings upwind of the vessel ,
when Town is selected for Vessel Location. The buildings tend to shield the vessel from the
wind. Conservatively, this value can be zero, so that the vessel takes the full force of the wind.
Ho is used to modify the effective vessel wind height He for any vessel element. See paragraph
1.7.3.3 of BS6399.
The corrected final wind pressure Ve acting on any element of the vessel is determined
by Vessel Location, Distance to Coastline, and the effective height He (modified by Upwind
Building Height Ho). Factors in table 4 of BS6399 modify the wind velocity. This table derives
Sb, which is calculated internally by the software.
Upwind Building Spacing X - Enter the average spacing X of buildings upwind of the vessel ,
when Town is selected for Vessel Location. The buildings tend to shield the vessel from the
wind. If the buildings are closer together, they provide greater protection from the wind. See
paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS6399.
Base Elevation - Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value plus the value of Site
Elevation (delta s) is used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above mean sea
level.
Vessel Location - Select the type of location where the vessel is installed, Town, or Country.
Distance to Coast Line - Enter the distance the vessel is located from the coast.
Size Effect Factor Ca - Enter the size effect factor Ca. This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to
a maximum value of 1.0. The size effect factor is a function of the diagonal dimension a, the
effective height He,Vessel Location, and Distance to Coastline. This value is taken from figure
4 of BS-6399-2.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Select the building-type factor Kb , taken from Table 1 of BS6399. The
default value is 2. Select 8, 4, 2, 1, or 0.5 based on the following vessel height limitations:

Kb Building Type Maximum Total Height of Vessel

8 Welded steel unclad frames. 23 m (75.4 ft)
Bolted steel and reinforced concrete
4 75m (246 ft)
unclad frames.
Portal sheds and similar light
2 240m (787 ft)
structures with few internal walls.
Framed buildings with structural
walls around lifts and stairs only
1 300m (984 ft)
(such as, office buildings of open
plan or with partitioning).
Framed buildings with structural
walls around lifts and stairs with
additional masonry subdivision walls
0.5 300m (984 ft)
(such as apartment buildings),
building of masonry construction
and timber-framed housing.
Towers over 75 meters in height are not likely, and require other design considerations in
addition to wind loading.
Annual Probability Factor Q - Enter the probability factor Q, used to calculate the final
probability factor Sp associated with the likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over specified
periods. The default value is 0.02, set by the code as a standard value for a mean recurrence of
50 years. See Annex D of BS6399 for more information.
Q Explanation
NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual maximum
0.632
value. (Sp = 0.749)
NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for the
0.227 ultimate limit is ?f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is ?f = 1.0, giving Sp = Sqrt(1 /
1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval
0.02
of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)
NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval
0.0083
of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for loads,
corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1,754 years. Back-calculated
0.00574
assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f = 1.4 and all risk is
ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean
0.001
recurrence interval of 10,000 (ten thousand) years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor Ss - Enter a factor Ss for exposure to the weather. The default value is 1.0.
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for
continuous periods of more than six months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss." A value of
less than 1.0 should only be used after solid research.
Directional Factor Sd - Enter a factor Sd for directionality of the tower. The default value is 1.0
because a tower is typically symmetrical about its central axis. A value of less than 1.0 should

only be used under exceptional circumstances. For other values, see Table 3. The values in that
table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Vessel Surface Type - Select the surface type of the vessel, Rough or Smooth.
China GB 50009 Wind Data

The Chinese Wind Code analysis in the software is taken from Chinese specification GB 50009
- 2001, 2002. The wind loading calculation guidelines begin on page 24 of the code.
The basic formulation for determining the wind pressure at an arbitrary elevation is based on
equation 7.1.1-1. This equation is for Main Wind Force Resisting Systems. This is the printed
equation: wk = ßzμsμzwo. From the tables in the code, values of μs, μz and the other values are
determined.
This formula includes the shape coefficient. The generated wind pressure is not dependent on
the type of structure. However, when the final force is calculated, it is necessary to include the
shape factor, such as for a cylinder taken from page 39 for a tower or chimney.
Ref. Wind Pressure (wo) - Enter the reference wind pressure Wo , from table D.4 of the
Chinese Wind Design Code. The value should be no less than 0.3 kN/m2.
Terrain Roughness Category - Enter the terrain roughness category:
Value Description
A Flat, unobstructed open terrain (most conservative)
B Village, hill and less populated and less congested sites
C Populated sites with low buildings and shorter structures
Densely populated areas with many tall structures that provide shielding (least
D
conservative)
The category is used to find elevation μz, from Table 7.2.1:
Height Terrain Roughness Category

(m) A B C D
5 1.17 1.00 0.74 0.62
10 1.38 1.00 0.74 0.62
15 1.52 1.14 0.74 0.62
20 1.63 1.25 0.84 0.62
30 1.80 1.42 1.00 0.62
40 1.92 1.56 1.13 0.73
50 2.03 1.67 1.25 0.84
60 2.12 1.77 1.35 0.93
70 2.20 1.86 1.45 1.02
80 2.27 1.95 1.54 1.11
90 2.34 2.02 1.62 1.19

100 2.40 2.09 1.70 1.27

150 2.64 2.38 2.03 1.61
200 2.83 2.61 2.30 1.92
250 2.99 2.80 2.54 2.19
300 3.12 2.97 2.75 2.45
350 3.12 3.12 2.94 2.68
400 3.12 3.12 3.12 2.91
>= 450 3.12 3.12 3.12 3.12
Vessel Surface Condition - Select the vessel surface condition, taken from page 39 of the
Chinese Wind Code. Select Smooth, Rough, or Very Rough. You can override this option in
Tools > Configuration.
Is the Vessel Building Supported? - Select to use the factors for βgz from Table 7.5.1:
Height Terrain Roughness

(m) A B C D
5 1.69 1.88 2.30 3.21
10 1.63 1.78 2.10 2.76
15 1.60 1.72 1.99 2.54
20 1.58 1.69 1.92 2.39
30 1.54 1.64 1.83 2.21
40 1.52 1.60 1.77 2.09
50 1.51 1.58 1.73 2.01
60 1.49 1.56 1.69 1.94
70 1.48 1.54 1.66 1.89
80 1.47 1.53 1.64 1.85
90 1.47 1.52 1.62 1.81
100 1.46 1.51 1.60 1.78
150 1.43 1.47 1.54 1.67
200 1.42 1.44 1.50 1.60
250 1.40 1.42 1.46 1.55
300 1.39 1.41 1.44 1.51

The value of βgz decreases with elevation so that the wind pressure decreases as the elevation
increases. The software uses equation 7.1.1-2 in the code to determine the wind pressure at the
needed elevation.
EN-2005 Wind Data

Ref. Wind Velocity Vb,0 - Enter the basic wind velocity Vb,0 of the area where the equipment is
situated. Vb,0 is used along with C Dir and C Season to compute Vb.
Terrain Category - Select the terrain category:
Terrain Description
Category
0 Sea or coastal area exposed to the open sea.
Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
I
obstacles.
Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees, buildings)
II
with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights.
Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings, or with isolated obstacles with
III separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages, suburban terrain,
permanent forest).
Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their
IV
average height exceeds 15 m.
The lower the category, the higher the wind load. Category 0 produces the highest wind
loads, while Category 5 produces the lowest.
C Dir - Enter the directional factor, Cdir. Values are found in the National Annex. The
recommended value is 1.0.
C Season - Enter the season factor, Cseason. Values are found in the National Annex. The
recommended value is 1.0.
CsCd - Enter te structural factor CsCd, used to determine the force on the vessel. This value is
defined in the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) wind load specification, Annex D. This value normally
ranges between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the value of the structural factor, the higher the
element load.
Force Coefficient Cf - Enter the force coefficient Cf. This value accounts for the fact that the
vessel is circular in cross section and is used to modify the area of the vessel that the wind is
blowing against. This value is quite often specified in the design specifications or can be
calculated based on the methodology given in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value
for Cf is between 0.7 and 0.8.
Base Height - Enter in the distance from the bottom of the vessel to base (ground) elevation, in
cases where vessels are not fixed to the ground, but are attached to other structures.

Euro Code Wind Data

Ref. Wind Velocity Vref,0 - Enter the reference wind velocity Vref, taken from section 7.2 of the
code. Annex A provides the values:
Country Suggested Wind Velocities ( SI Metric Unit System)

Austria Special consideration must be given depending on the district
Belgium 26.2 m/s
Denmark 27.0 m/s
Finland 23.0 m/s
France 24.0 m/s to 34.0 m/s depending on the district (Departements et Cantons).
Germany 24.3 m/s to 31.5 m/s depending on the particular Zone.
Greece 30.0 m/s to 36.0 m/s depending whether coastal or country.
Iceland The wind speed must be calculated - See Annex A.8
Ireland 27.0 m/s to 30 m/s depending on the region and exposure to the Atlantic Ocean.
Italy 25.0 m/s to 31 m/s depending on the region.
Luxembourg 26.0 m/s
Netherlands 22.5 m/s to 30.0 m/s depending on return period and area.
Norway 25.0 m/s to 65 m/s. Please refer to Figure A7 in the code.
Terrain Category - Select the terrain category, taken from Section 8.3 of the code:
Terrain kT Z0 Zmin ε
Category [m] [m]
I - Flat, Rough open sea, lakes with at least 5 km fetch
Unobstructe upwind and smooth flat country without 0.17 0.01 2 [0.13]
d obstacles
II - Farmland Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional
0.19 0.05 4 [0.26]
Areas small farm structures, houses or trees
III -
Suburban or industrial areas and permanent
Suburban/ 0.22 0.3 8 [0.37]
forests
Industrial
Urban areas in which at least 15% of the
IV - Urban
surface is covered with buildings 0.24 1 16 [0.43]
Areas
and their average height exceeds 15 m
C Dir - Enter the direction factor CDir. The direction factor is a function of the country where the
vessel is installed installed. From Annex A:
Country CDir
Austria 1.0
Denmark 1.0

Finland 1.0
France 1.0
Germany 1.0
Greece 1.0
Iceland Not Specified
Ireland 1.0
Italy Not Specified
C Tem - Enter the temperature factor Ctmp, which affects the air density. From Annex A:
Country Ctmp
Austria Not Specified
Denmark 1.0
Finland 1.0
France 1.0
Please refer to Table shown in A.6. Values range from .30 to
Germany
0.65
Greece 1.0
Ireland 1.0
Italy Not Specified
C Alt - Enter the altitude factor CAlt. From Annex A:
Country CAlt
Austria Not Specified
Denmark 1.0
Finland 1.0
France 1.0
Calculated from the formula in section A.6. 1,0 seems to be a safe
Germany
value.
Greece 1.0
Ireland 1.0
Italy Not Specified
G Peak - Enter the peak factor. In section 8.5 the value is given as 3.5.
Force Coefficient Cf - Enter the force coefficient Cf,0. For cylindrical surfaces the force
coefficient is 0.70. This assumes the Reynolds number of 2.105 < Re < 1,2.106. For more
information, see Table 10.7.1 in the code. No other values are suggested, so please refer to the

code for any relevant information. Section 10.8.1 goes further into the subject where the
Reynolds number can be computed. Figure 10.8.2 can also be consulted, but you will need to
calculate the Reynolds number.
Base Height - Enter the base height. This is the height of the base of the vessel above the site
(or ground).
Cd (used if > 0.94) - Enter the direction factor Cdir. A value of 0 is recommended in the absence
of any other information. The software calculates this value, but if a value greater than 0.94 is
entered, that value will be used. For more information, see Annex A of the code.
IBC-03 and IBC 2006 Wind Data

speed.
 Not Used

category.
hospitals.

 Smooth
 Rough (D'/D = 0.02)
Parameters tab.
more details.
IS-875 Wind Data

Basic Wind Speed - Enter a value for basic wind speed. Basic wind speed is based on peak
gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about three seconds and corresponds to
mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This varies according to geographical
location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards that you are
following. This is because the wind design pressure, and thus force, increases as the square of
the speed. This entry is optional, and overrides the basic wind speed determined from the zone
entered for Wind Zone Number.
Wind Zone Number - Enter a value for the wind zone. India is divided into six wind zones. The
software provides the basic wind speed based on the zone. Basic wind speed is applicable to a
10 meter height above mean ground level for different zones India as determined from Figure 1
in IS-875.
Zone Basic Wind Speed

1 33 m/sec
73.82 miles/hour
2 39 m/sec
87.25 miles/hour
3 44 m/sec
98.43 miles/hour

4 47 m/sec
105.15 miles/hour
5 50 m/sec
111.86 miles/hour
6 55 m/sec
123.04 miles/hour
Optionally, you can enter a value for Basic Wind Speed. This value overrides Wind
Zone Number.
Risk Factor - Enter a value for the risk coefficient K1. The value varies based on the zone
selected for Wind Zone Number, and assumes 100 years as the mean probable design life of a
tower.
Wind Zone Risk Factor (K1)

1 1.05
2 1.06
3 1.07
4 1.07
5 1.08
6 1.08
Terrain Category - Select the category for the terrain in which the vessel is located:
 Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions. The average height of any
object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes open seacoasts
and flat treeless plains.
 Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped, sparsely built-up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purposes.
 Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely-spaced obstructions with buildings and
structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns and industrial areas
that are fully or partially developed.
 Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large-height,closely-spaced obstructions. This includes
large city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
Equipment Class - Select the equipment/component classification:
 Class A - Equipment and/or components having a maximum dimension (horizontal or
vertical dimension) of less than 20 m.
 Class B - Equipment and/or components having a maximum dimension (horizontal or
vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
 Class C - Equipment and/or components having a maximum dimension (horizontal or
vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
Topography Factor - Enter a topography factor K3. This factor takes care of local topographic
features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, or ridges which can significantly affect wind speed in their
vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind near summits of hills or crests of cliffs and
decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs. Topography effect is significant if upwind
slope is greater than about three degrees. Below three degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as
1.0. For slopes above three degrees, the value of K3 ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.

Use the Gust Response Factor? - Select to calculate the gust response factor according to
IS-875, and use it in the appropriate equations. Select only if the design specifications and the
customer explicitly requires the gust response factor. This factor increases the wind load three
to six times and may lead to a very conservative wind design.
Use Cf from Table 23? - Select to calculate the drag coefficient Cf from Table 23 of IS-875.
JPI-7R-35-2004 Wind Data

Design Wind Speed - Enter the design value of the wind speed.
Exposure Constant - Select an exposure factor:
Exposure Category Zb (m) ZG (m) α

I Outside of the town planning area and flat, 5 250 0.10
unobstructed terrain
II Outside of the town planning area other 5 350 0.15
than Exposure Category I, except for
building height is 13 m or less.
Inside of the town planning area other than
Exposure Category IV,
III Other than Category I, II, and IV 5 450 0.20

IV Inside of the town planning area and the 10 550 0.27
center of city

Mexico 1993 Wind Data

Mexico 1993 En Español (on page 345)
Design Wind Speed - Enter the velocity of the wind, VR, the maximum mean velocity likely to
occur within a defined recurrence period in a determined zone or region of the country, as
defined by Paragraph 4.6.2 (Isotach Maps regional Velocity).
The isotach maps that are included in this clause, with the different periods of return, such
velocities, refer to homogeneous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per table I.1). The maps do not consider the
local terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such
velocity is associated with three-second wind gusts and takes into account the possibility that
there might be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of the site
of the uproot of the building and its destination.
In figures I.1 through I.4, the isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the periods of
recurrence for 200, 50 and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Para. 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which should be
considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C in Structure Class associate
themselves with the periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site is
located in the map with the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the
building belongs to, in order to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de
diseño, a table is shown with the main cities in the country and their corresponding regional
velocities for the different periods of return.
Site Elev Above Sea Level - Enter the site elevation above mean sea level hm.
Base Elevation (hb) - Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value is used to
calculate the height of each point in the vessel above grade. For example, if the vessel is
mounted on a pedestal foundation or on top of another vessel, it is exposed to higher wind
pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Structure Class - Select a value for the structure class, from Paragraph 4.6.1, Table I.2:
 A - Horizontal or vertical structures measuring less than 20 meters of length. Every remote
structural element is exposed directly to the wind action.
 B - Horizontal or vertical structures measuring between 20 and 50 meters of length
 C - Horizontal or vertical structures measuring more than 50 meters of length
Factors Affected by Structure Class

Paragraph 4.6.3.1 size factor FC, α, and δ. The size factor, FC, takes into consideration the time
in which the gust of wind works in an effective manner over a building of given dimensions.
Considering the classification of the structures size (table I.2), this factor can be determined
according to table I.3.
Structure Class FC
A 1.0
B 0.95
C 0.90

The coefficients α and δ perform with the Terrain Category. Table I.4 below assigns the values
for these coefficients. In Figure III.1 from Tomo de Ayudas de diseño, it is shown the factor's
variation Fα with the height, with the terrain category and the structure class.
α
Terrain
Structure Class δ
Category
A B C
1 0.099 0.101 0.105 245
2 0.128 0.131 0.138 315
3 0.156 0.160 0.171 390
4 0.170 0.177 0.193 455
δ - The average height from the level of the land of uprooted above, by which the variation of the
velocity of the wind is not important and can be supposed constant. This height is known as the
gradient height; δ and Z are given in meters.
α - The exponent that determines the variation form of the wind velocity with the height. This
value is unitless.
Terrain Category - Select the category for the terrain in which the vessel is located, from
Paragraph 4.6.1, Table I.1:
Cat Description Examples Limitations

1 Open terrain, Coastal flat stripes, swamp The minimum length for this
practically smooth and zones, aerial fields, pasture fields type of terrain in the
without obstructions. and crop lands with no hedges or direction of the wind must be
fences. Flat snow-covered of 2000 m or 10 times the
surfaces. height of the structure to be
designed.
2 Flat terrain or Crop lands or farms with few The obstructions have a
undulated, with few obstructions around such as height of 1.5 to 10 m, in a
obstructions. hedges of fences, trees and minimum length of 1500 m.
scattered buildings.
3 Terrain covered by Urban, suburban areas and The obstructions have a 3 to
many obstructions forests, or any other terrain with 5 m height. The minimum
narrowly spaced out. many obstructions widely length for this type of terrain
scattered. The sizes of the in the direction of the wind
buildings are like the houses and must be 500 m or 10 times
living spaces. the height of the structure.

4 Terrain with many big, Cities with downtown areas and At least 50% of the buildings
tall, and narrowly well developed industrial complex have a height of more than
spaced-out areas. 20 m. The obstructions
obstructions. measure up from 10 to 30 m
in height. The minimum
length for this type of land in
the direction of the wind
should be the biggest
between 400 m and 10 times
the height of the
construction.
Factors Affected by Terrain Category

The factors κ', η, and δ, are related to the terrain category, as defined in Paragraph 4.9.3.2,
Table I.29. κ' η are unitless, while δ is the height gradient in m.
Terrain Category
Factor 1 2 3 4
κ' 1.224 1.288 1.369 1.457
η -0.032 -0.054 -0.096 -0.151
δ 245 315 390 455
The factors α' and kr are also related to the terrain category, kr is a factor related to the
roughness of the land.
Terrain Category
Factor 1 2 3 4
kr 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.14
α' 0.13 0.18 0.245 0.31
Year of Analysis - Select the analysis year to use.
Topographic Factor (Ft) - Enter a value for the topography local factor Ft, from Paragraph
4.5.4, Table I.5. This factor takes into account the local topographic effect from the place in
which the structure will uproot. For example, for buildings found on hillsides, on top of hills, or on
mountains at important heights with respect to the general level of the surrounding terrain, it is
probable that wind accelerations will generate and the local velocity should be increased.
Experts in local wind velocities should justify and validate the results of any of these procedures.
Places Topography Ft
Promontories base and skirts of mountain ranges from the leeward
0.8
Protected side.
Closed valleys. 0.9
Flat terrain, Open field, absence of important topographical changes,
Normal 1.0
with smaller slopes than 5%.
Lands inclined with slopes between 5 and 10%, flat coastal and open
Exposed 1.1
valleys.

Top of promontories, hills or mountains, terrains with greater slopes

1.2
than 10%, glens closed and valleys that form a funnel or islands.
Damping Factor (Zeta) - Enter a value for the damping factor ζ. Enter 0.01 for steel framework
construction. Enter 0.02 for concrete framework construction.
Drag Coefficent (Ca) - Enter a value for the drag coefficient Ca, from Paragraph 4.8.2.12
(Chimneys and Towers), Table I.28:
Drag Coefficient Ca
Cross Section Type of Surface for H/b of:
1 7 25 ≥ 40
Smooth or little rough (d'/b ≈ 0.0) 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7
Circular (bVD ≥ 6 m /s)
2
Rough (d'/b ≈ 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.2
Very rough (d'/b ≈ 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2
2
Any 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.2
Hexagonal or octagonal Any 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4
Square Any 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2
(wind normal to a face)
Square Any 1.0 1.1 1.5 1.6
(wind on a corner)
 b - The diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of the
wall. To determine the product bVD, this diameter is located at two-thirds of the total height
from the level of the land, in m.
 d' - The dimension that extends from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m.
 VD - The velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s at two thirds of the total height
 For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b, lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number (St) - Enter a value for the Strouhal number St. Enter 0.2 for circular sections
or 0.14 for rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega) - Enter the barometric pressure Ω. This value is related to Site
Elev Above Sea Level, as described in Paragraph 4.6.5, Table I.7:
Height Barometric
(meters above Pressure
sea level) (mm Hg)
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530

3500 495
Interpolate for intermediate values.
Ambient Temperature (T) - Enter a value for the ambient temperature T.
Mexico 1993 En Español

See Mexico 1993 Wind Data (on page 341) for the English version of this text.
Párrafo 4.6.1
Tabla I.1 CATEGORIA DEL TERRENO SEGUN SU RUGOSIDAD
Cat. Descripción Ejemplos Limitaciones

Franjas costeras planas, zonas La longitud mínima de este tipo de
Terreno abierto,
de pantanos, campos aéreos, terreno en la dirección del viento
prácticamente
1 pastizales y tierras de cultivo debe ser de 2000 m o 10 veces la
plano y sin
sin setos o bardas alrededor. altura de la construcción por
obstrucciones
Superficies nevadas planas diseñar, la que sea mayor.
Campos de cultivo o granjas
Terreno plano u
con pocas obstrucciones tales Las obstrucciones tienen alturas de
ondulado con
2 como setos o bardas alrededor, 1.5 a 10 m, en una longitud mínima
pocas
árboles y construcciones de 1500 m
obstrucciones
dispersas
Áreas urbanas, suburbanas y
Las obstrucciones presentan
Terreno cubierto de bosques, o cualquier terreno
alturas de 3 a 5 m. La longitud
por numerosas con numerosas obstrucciones
mínima de este tipo de terreno en la
3 obstrucciones estrechamente espaciadas. El
dirección del viento debe ser de
estrechamente tamaño de las construcciones
500 m o 10 veces la altura de la
espaciadas corresponde al de las casas y
construcción, la que sea mayor
viviendas
Por lo menos el 50% de los
Terreno con edificios tiene una altura mayor que
numerosas 20 m. Las obstrucciones miden de
Centros de grandes ciudades y
obstrucciones 10 a 30 m de altura. La longitud
4 complejos industriales bien
largas, altas y mínima de este tipo de terreno en la
desarrollados.
estrechamente dirección del viento debe ser la
espaciadas mayor entre 400 m y 10 veces la
altura de la construcción.
Tabla I.2 CLASE DE ESTRUCTURA
Clase Descripcion
Todo elemento estructural aislado, expuesto directamente a la accion del viento;
A Construcciones horizontales o verticales cuya mayor dimension, sea menor que 20
metros.
Construcciones horizontales o verticales cuya mayor dimension, varie entre 20 y 50
B
metros.

Construcciones horizontales o verticales cuya mayor dimension, sea mayor que 50

C
metros.
Párrafo 4.6.2 MAPAS DE ISOTACAS. VELOCIDAD REGIONAL, VR

La velocidad regional del viento, VR, es la máxima velocidad media probable de presentarse con
un cierto periodo de recurrencia en una zona o región determinada del país.
En los mapas de isotacas que se incluyen en este inciso con diferentes periodos de retorno,
dicha velocidad se refiere a condiciones homogéneas que corresponden a una altura de 10
metros sobre la superficie del suelo en terreno plano (Categoría 2 según la tabla I.1); es decir,
no considera las características de rugosidad locales del terreno ni la topografía específica del
sitio. Asimismo, dicha velocidad se asocia con ráfagas de 3 segundos y toma en cuenta la
posibilidad de que se presenten vientos debidos a huracanes en las zonas costeras.
La velocidad regional, VR, se determina tomando en consideración tanto la localización
geográfica del sitio de desplante de la estructura como su destino.
En las figures I.1 a I.4 se muestran los mapas de isotacas regionales correspondientes a
periodos de recurrencia de 200, 50 y 10 anos, respectivamente.
La importancia de las estructuras (véase el inciso 4.3) dictamina los periodos de recurrencia
que deberán considerarse para el diseño por viento; de esta manera, los Grupos A, B y C se
asocian con los periodos de retorno de 200, 50 y 10 años, respectivamente. El sitio de
desplante se localizará en el mapa con el periodo de recurrencia que corresponde al grupo al
que pertenece la estructura a fin de obtener la velocidad regional. En el Tomo III de Ayudas de
diseño se presenta una tabla con las principales ciudades del país y sus correspondientes
velocidades regionales para diferentes periodos de retorno.
Párrafo 4.6.3 FACTOR DE EXPOSICION, Fα

El coeficiente Fα refleja la variación de la velocidad del viento con respecto a la altura Z.
Asimismo, considera el tamaño de la construcción o de los elementos de recubrimiento y las
características de exposición.
El factor de exposición se calcula con la siguiente expresión:
Fα = FC FRZ
en donde:
FC : es el factor que determina la influencia del tamaño de la construcción, adimensional, y
FRZ : el factor que establece la variación de la velocidad del viento con la altura Z en función
de la rugosidad del terreno de los alrededores, adimensional.
Los coeficientes FC y FRZ se definen en los incisos 4.6.3.1 y 4.6.3.2, respectivamente.
Párrafo 4.6.3.1 FACTOR DE TAMAÑO, FC α y δ

El factor de tamaño, FC, es el que toma en cuenta el tiempo en el que la ráfaga del viento actúa
de manera efectiva sobre una construcción de dimensiones dadas. Considerando la
clasificación de las estructuras según su tamaño (véase la tabla I.2), este factor puede
determinarse de acuerdo con la tabla I.3.
Tabla I.3 FACTOR DE TAMAÑO, FC
Clase de
FC
estructura
A 1.0

B 0.95
C 0.90
es la altura, media a partir del nivel del terreno de desplante, por encima de la cual la
δ :
variación de la velocidad del viento no es importante y se puede suponer constante; a
esta altura se le conoce como altura gradiente; δ y Z están dadas en metros, y
el exponente que determina la forma del la variación de la velocidad del viento con la
α :
altura y es adimensional.
Los coeficientes α y δ están en función de la rugosidad del terreno (tabla I.1). En la tabla I.4 se
consignan los valores que se aconsejan para estos coeficientes. En la figura III.1 del Tomo de
Ayudas de diseño se muestra la variación del factor Fα con la altura, con la categoría del
terreno y con la clase de estructura.
Tabla I.4 VALORES DE α y δ
α
Categoría de
Clase de estructura δ
terreno
A B C
1 0.099 0.101 0.105 245
2 0.128 0.131 0.138 315
3 0.156 0.160 0.171 390
4 0.170 0.177 0.193 455
Párrafo 4.5.4 FACTOR DE TOPOGRAFIA, FT

Este factor toma en cuenta el efecto topográfico local del sitio en donde se desplantara la
estructura. Así, por ejemplo, si la construcción se localiza en las laderas o cimas de colinas o
montañas de altura importante con respecto al nivel general del terreno de los alrededores, es
muy probable que se generen aceleraciones del flujo del viento y, por consiguiente, deberá
incrementarse la velocidad regional.
Tabla I.5 FACTOR DE TOPOGRAFIA LOCAL, FT
Sitios Topografía FT
Base de promontorios y faldas de serranías del lado de sotavento. 0.8
Protegidos
Valles cerrados. 0.9
Terreno prácticamente plano, campo abierto, ausencia de cambios
Normales topográficos importantes, 1.0
con pendientes menores que 5%.
Terrenos inclinados con pendientes entre 5 y 10%, valles abiertos y
1.1
litorales planos.
Expuestos
Cimas de promontorios, colinas o montañas, terrenos con pendientes 1.2
mayores que 10%,

cañadas cerradas y valles que formen un embudo o cañon, islas.

Expertos en la materia deberán justificar y validar ampliamente los resultados
de cualquiera de estos procedimientos.
Párrafo 4.6.5 VALORES DE LA ALTITUD, hm

Tabla I.7 RELACION ENTRE LOS VALORES DE LA ALTITUD, hm
Presión barométrica
Altitud (msnm)
(mm de Hg)
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 65
3000 530
3500 495
Nota: Puede interpolarse para valores intermedios de la altitud, hm
Párrafo 4.8.2.12 CHIMENEAS Y TORRES

Tabla I.28 COEFICIENTE DE ARRASTRE, Ca
Relación H/b
Sección transversal Tipo de superficie
1 7 25 ≥ 40
Lisa o poco rugosa (d'/b ≈ 0.0) 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7
2
Rugosa (d'/b ≈ 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.2
Muy rugosa (d'/b ≈ 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2
2
Cualquiera 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.2
Hexagonal u octagonal Cualquiera 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4
Cuadrada (viento normal
Cualquiera 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2
a una cara)
Cuadrada (viento sobre
Cualquiera 1.0 1.1 1.5 1.6
una esquina)
es el diámetro o la dimensión horizontal de la estructura, incluyendo la rugosidad de la

b :
pared; para determinar el producto bVD, este diámetro será el que se localiza a dos
tercios de la altura total, a partir del nivel del terreno, en m.
es la dimensión que sobresale de las rugosidades, tales como costillas o "spoilers", en
d' :
m.

es la velocidad del viento de diseño (inciso 4.6), convertida a m/s, y valuada para los
VD :
dos tercios de la altura total.
Para valores intermedios de H/b y d'/b se permite la interpolación lineal.
Párrafo 4.9.3.2 LAS VARIABLES κ' η δ:

Tabla I.29 FACTORES κ' η δ
Categoría 1 2 3 4
κ' 1.224 1.288 1.369 1.457
η -0.032 -0.054 -0.096 -0.151
δ 245 315 390 455
Las variables κ' η δ, adimensionales, dependen de la rugosidad del sitio de desplante, y δ es la
altura gradiente en m. Estas variables se definen en la tabla I.29.
kr : es un factor relacionado con la rugosidad del terreno:
es el coeficiente de amortiguamiento critico:
ζ : para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero = 0.01
para construcciones formadas por marcos de concreto = 0.02
VALORES DE α' kr
Categoría de
α' kr
terreno
1 0.13 0.06
2 0.18 0.08
3 0.245 0.10
4 0.31 0.14
VALORES DE ζ
Nota: ζ
Para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero 0.01
Para aquellas formadas por marcos de concreto 0.02
NUMERO DE STROUHAL
es el numero de Strouhal, adimensional; 0.2 para secciones circulares y 0.14 para las
St :
rectangulares.

NBC-95 and NBC-2005 Wind Data

Reference Wind Pressure - Enter the reference value of the wind pressure. This varies
according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards.
speed.
Importance Factor (Iw) - Enter a value for the NBC wind importance factor. The software uses
this value directly without modification. Values are taken from table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of
Division B of NBC 2005:
Category Importance Factor, Iw
ULS SLS
Low 0.8 0.75
Normal 1 0.75
High 1.15 0.75
Post Disaster 1.25 0.75
Exposure Constant - Select an NBC exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312:
 Not Used
 Exposure A - Open/Standard exposure.
Most petrochemical sites use exposure A.
 Exposure B - Rough areas similar to urban and suburban areas.
 Exposure C - Very Rough area similar to centers of large cities.
These exposure factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Roughness Factor - Enter the roughness factor:
 Moderately smooth
 Rough surface (D'/D = 0.02)
 Very rough surface (D'/D = 0.08)
 Most petrochemical sites use moderately smooth. Some designers use very rough surface
to account for items such as platforms, piping, and ladders, instead of either entering them
explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
tab, click Set Configuration Parameters, on the Job Specific Setup Parameters tab enter
that value in the Wind Shape Factor box.
Hill Height [Hh] - Enter the height of a hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See

Distance to site [x] - Enter the distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest of the hill to the
more details.
Beta: Operating - In the first text box, enter the value of the structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) operating-case beta for vortex shedding. The default value is
0.01. This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the
commentary section 6.6, page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8, pages 29-30 of the 98
standard. If your design code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient
according to that particular wind design code. If your design code does not call out for a specific
value of beta, then use the default value of 0.01.
NBC-2010 Wind Data

Reference Velocity Pressure - Enter the reference value of the wind pressure. This varies
according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards.
speed.
Importance Factor (Iw) - Enter a value for the NBC wind importance factor. The software uses
this value directly without modification. Values are taken from table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of
Division B of NBC 2005:
Category Importance Factor, Iw
ULS SLS
Low 0.8 0.75
Normal 1 0.75
High 1.15 0.75
Post Disaster 1.25 0.75
Exposure Constant - Select an NBC exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312:

 Not Used
 Exposure A - Open/Standard exposure.
Most petrochemical sites use exposure A.
 Exposure B - Rough areas similar to urban and suburban areas.
 Exposure C - Very Rough area similar to centers of large cities.
These exposure factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Roughness Factor - Enter the roughness factor:
 Moderately smooth
 Rough surface (D'/D = 0.02)
 Very rough surface (D'/D = 0.08)
 Most petrochemical sites use moderately smooth. Some designers use very rough surface
to account for items such as platforms, piping, and ladders, instead of either entering them
explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
tab, click Set Configuration Parameters, on the Job Specific Setup Parameters tab enter
that value in the Wind Shape Factor box.
Hill Height [Hh] - Enter the height of a hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See
more details.
Beta: Operating - In the first text box, enter the value of the structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) operating-case beta for vortex shedding. The default value is
0.01. This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the
commentary section 6.6, page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8, pages 29-30 of the 98
standard. If your design code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient
according to that particular wind design code. If your design code does not call out for a specific
value of beta, then use the default value of 0.01.

UBC Wind Data

speed.
Exposure Constant - Select an UBC exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312:
 Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest, or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height,
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
 Exposure C - Terrain that is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.
Most petrochemical sites use this value. It is used to set the gust factor coefficient
(Ce) found in Table 23-G.
 Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 miles per hour or
higher. Terrain is flat and unobstructed, facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in
width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the
shoreline one quarter mile or zero times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
 Not Used
Importance Factor - Enter a value for the UBC importance factor. The software uses this value
directly without modification. Values are taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:

I 1.15 Essential facilities
II 1.15 Hazardous facilities
III 1.0 Special occupancy structures
IV 1.0 Standard occupancy structures

User-Defined Wind Data

When User Defined is selected for Wind Design Code, enter values for wind pressure versus
elevation in the table. The software uses only the values from the table, forgoing all code
calculations.Enter "To" Height, the height above grade, in the left text boxes, and Pressure,
the wind pressure at that height, in the right text boxes. If you have more rows available than
you need to describe the wind profile, enter zeros in the remaining cells.
Multiply the wind pressure at each elevation by the shape factor you wish to use. If you
do not your wind loads will be higher (and more conservative) than needed.
The first "To" Height value cannot be zero. If it is zero the software will not calculate the wind
loads on the following elements. Values should follow the convention below

SECTION 18
Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab)

Click Input > Seismic Loads to enter wind code data. The Seismic Data tab appears on the
left. Select a seismic design code and enter data required by that code. If no data is entered, the
software uses the system defaults.
Seismic Design Code - Select the design code to use for seismic calculations:
Code Description
Australian Standard Part 4: Earthquake Loads, 1993 edition
As/Nz 1170.4
For more information, see AS/NZ 1170.4 Seismic Data (on page 357).
American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1).
ASCE-88
For more information, see ASCE-88 Seismic Data (on page 359).
ASCE-93
ASCE-95
ASCE-7-98
For more information, see ASCE 7-98 Seismic Data (on page 364).
ASCE 7-02/05
For more information, see ASCE 7-02/05 Seismic Data (on page 366).
ASCE-2010
NCh2369 - Chilean Code for Seismic Analysis of Vessels - 2003
Chile NCh2369
For more information, see Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data (on page 371).
China GB Chinese Seismic Code
50011 For more information, see China GB 50011 Seismic Data (on page 379).
Costa Rica Costa Rica Seismic Code 2002
2002 For more information, see Costa Rica 2002 Seismic Data (on page 379).
Enter an appropriate G loading. The software calculates the mass of the
element and multiplies by the G loading in the appropriate direction. For
G Loading vertical vessels, the maximum of the X and Z acceleration values are chosen
for the analysis. For horizontal vessels, all three values are used. For more
information, see G Loading Seismic Data (on page 382).
International Building Code 2000, 2003, 2006, and 2009 editions
IBC 2000
For more information, see IBC 2000 Seismic Data (on page 382).
IBC 2003
IBC 2006
IBC 2009
India's seismic code: Seismic Coefficient Method (SCM), 1984 edition and
IS-1893 SCM Response Spectrum Method (RSM), 1984 and 2002 editions.
IS-1893 RSM For more information, see IS-1893 RSM Seismic Data (on page 392).
For more information, see IS-1893 SCM Seismic Data (on page 394).
Mexican Seismic Code
Mexico Sismo
For more information, see Mexico Sismo Seismic Data (on page 395).

National Building Code of Canada, 1995, 2005, and 2010 editions

NBC-1995
For more information, see NBC 1995 Seismic Data (on page 397).
NBC-2005
NBC-2010
Venezuelan Code for Seismic Analysis of Vessels - 1999
PDVSA
For more information, see PDVSA Seismic Data (on page 401).
Response Spectrum Analysis allows the use of modal time history analysis.
The general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the ASCE
7-98 or IBC 2000 codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program,
such as the 1940 Earthquake El Centro and various spectra form the US
NRC guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is user defined, the table of
Res. Spectrum points that define the response spectra must be entered in the table. For tall
structures, this analysis gives much more accurate results than the typical
static equivalent method. Usually the calculated loads are lower in
magnitude than those computed using conventional building code
techniques. For more information, see Res. Spectrum Seismic Data (on
page 412).
Uniform Building Code, 1994 and 1997 editions
UBC 1994
For more information, see UBC 1994 Seismic Data (on page 416).
UBC 1997
For more information, see UBC 1997 Seismic Data (on page 417).
No Seismic
Loads
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest - Enter the percentage of the total seismic horizontal force that
is applied during hydrotest. Although you cannot predict an earthquake (as you can high winds)
some designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an
earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.

In This Section
AS/NZ 1170.4 Seismic Data .......................................................... 357
ASCE-88 Seismic Data.................................................................. 359
ASCE 7-98 Seismic Data............................................................... 364
ASCE 7-02/05 Seismic Data.......................................................... 366
ASCE-2010 Seismic Data.............................................................. 369
Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data ........................................................ 371
China GB 50011 Seismic Data ...................................................... 379
Costa Rica 2002 Seismic Data ...................................................... 379
G Loading Seismic Data ................................................................ 382
IBC 2000 Seismic Data.................................................................. 382
IBC 2003 Seismic Data.................................................................. 385
IBC 2006 Seismic Data.................................................................. 387
IBC 2009 Seismic Data.................................................................. 390
IS-1893 RSM Seismic Data ........................................................... 392
IS-1893 SCM Seismic Data ........................................................... 394
Mexico Sismo Seismic Data .......................................................... 395
NBC 1995 Seismic Data ................................................................ 397
NBC 2005 Seismic Data ................................................................ 399
NBC 2010 Seismic Data ................................................................ 401
PDVSA Seismic Data .................................................................... 401
Res. Spectrum Seismic Data ......................................................... 412
UBC 1994 Seismic Data ................................................................ 416
UBC 1997 Seismic Data ................................................................ 417
AS/NZ 1170.4 Seismic Data

Enter data for the Australian/New Zealand AS/NZ-1170.4 seismic code, 1993 or 2007.
Code Year - Select the revision year of the code: 1993 or 2007.
Importance Factor (I) - Enter the value of the importance factor I. The software uses this value
directly without modification. Values are taken from Table 16-K of the UBC 1997 standard:
Structure Description Importance

Type Factor
Structures include buildings not of
I 1.0
type II or type III.
Structures include buildings that
are designed to contain a large
II 1.0
number of people, or people of
restricted or impaired mobility.
are essential to post-earthquake
III 1.25
recovery or associated with
hazardous facilities.

Structural Response Factor (Rf) - Enter the he structural response factor Rf, taken from table
6.2.6(b) of the code. For vessels on legs, use 2.1. For towers, stacks and chimney type
structures, use 2.8.
Site Factor (S) - Enter the site factor S. taken from table 2.4(a) or 2.4(b). The factor is a function
of the type of soil on which the vessel sits. This value can range between 0.67 and 2.0. A value
of 2 is the most conservative and represents a vessel sitting on a foundation of loose sand or
clay, while 0.67 represents a vessel sitting on a rock bed.
Soil Profile Table 2.4(a) Site

General Structures factor
(S)
A profile of rock materials with rock strength Class L (low) or better. 0.67
A soil profile with either:
 Rock materials Class EL (extreme low) or VL (very low). 1.0
 Not more than 30m of medium dense to very dense coarse sands and gravels;
firm , stiff or hard clays; or controlled fill.
A soil profile with more than 30m of: medium dense to very dense coarse sands and
1.25
gravels; firm , stiff or hard clays; or controlled fill.
A soil profile with a total depth of 20m or more and containing 6 to 12m of: very soft to
1.5
soft clays; very loose or loose sands; silts; or uncontrolled fill.
A soil profile with more than 12m of: very soft to soft clays; very loose or loose sands;
2.0
silts; or uncontrolled fill characterized by shear wave velocities less than 150m/s.
Acceleration Coefficient (ax) - Enter the acceleration coefficient ax, taken from Table 2.3 or
Figures 2.3(b) to 2.3(g). This value ranges from 0.04 to 0.22. The higher the acceleration
coefficient, the higher the load on the vessel.
Design Category - Select the design category A, B, C, D, or E. The software uses this value to
determine if it is necessary to apply vertical accelerations. If the selected category is D or E,
vertical accelerations are applied. The vertical acceleration is taken to be 0.5 times
Acceleration Coefficient (ax) in the horizontal direction, according to paragraph 6.8.
Probability Factor (kp) - Enter a value for the probability factor kp.
Hazard Factor (Z) - Enter the hazard factor.
Structural Performance Factor (Sp) - Enter the structural performance factor.
Structural Ductility Factor (mu) - Enter the structural ductility factor.
Soil Type - Enter the soil type.

Component Elevation Ratio (hx/hn) - Enter a a value for the elevation ratio if the vessel is
supported by a building. The ratio, needed for proper analysis, is the height from the bottom of
the vessel hx to the building height hn. A value for Attachment Factor (ac) must also be
entered. The base shear is calculated according to equation 5.2.1. After the base shear Fp (V) is
calculated, it is applied according to the equations in section 6 of the code.
Attachment Amplification Factor (ac) - Enter the attachment amplification factor ac. This value
is typically 1.0 unless unusually flexible connections are provided (which is not for vessels).
Because the load is in linear proportion with ac, the higher the value is, the higher the load
becomes. You must also enter a value for Component Elevation Ratio (hx/hn).
ASCE-88 Seismic Data

Enter data for the ASCE 7-88 seismic code.
Importance Factor - Enter the value of the importance factor. The software uses this value
directly without modification. Values are taken from Table 22 of the ASCE 7-88 standard:
Importance
Category Classification
Factor
Buildings not listed below.
I Most petrochemical 1.0
structures use this category.
II High occupancy buildings. 1.25
III Essential facilities. 1.5
IV Low hazard buildings. not applicable

Soil Type - Select a soil type:

 Soil 1 - Soil Profile S1. Rock or stiff soil conditions (S Factor = 1.0).
 Soil 2 - Soil Profile S2. Deep cohesionless deposits or stiff clay conditions (S Factor = 1.2).
 Soil 3 - Soil Profile S3. Soft to medium-stiff clays and sands (S Factor = 1.5).
The soil type indicates a soil profile coefficient S, found Table 24 of the code. Soil profiles are
defined in Section 9.4.2 of the code. When soil properties are not known, select Soil 1 or Soil 2,
based on the value producing the larger value of CS (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the code).
Horizontal Force Factor - Enter the seismic force factor according to ANSI A58.1, Table 24:
Typical Description
Value
1.33 Buildings with bearing walls
Buildings with frame
1.00
systems
2.50 Elevated tanks
2.00 Other structures
The value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks supported by
structural steel or legs.
Seismic Zone - Select the seismic zone, according to ASCE 7-93, Figure 14:
Zone Description
0 Gulf and other coastal areas
1 Inland areas
2 Rockies, other mountain areas
3 Central Rockies, other mountains
4 California fault areas
Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates the
greatest chance of an earthquake.

The ASCE 7 earthquake standards released in 1993 are significantly more involved than
the previous standards, more strictly limited to buildings, and thus not as easily applied to
vessels. The software does not implement the dynamic analysis according to this standard.
However, it does address the computation of the element mass multiplier as outlined on page 62
of the standard. In effect, the factors Av, Cc, P, and ac are first multiplied together and then by
the weight of the element to obtain the lateral force on the element. The software then calculates
the moments on the tower based on these results. You should have a good understanding of
this code before using it.
Seismic Coefficient Av - Enter the seismic coefficient Av, representing the effective peak
velocity-related acceleration according to the ASCE 7-93 standard, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures. This value is obtained from the map on pages 36 and 37 of this

standard. According to section 9.1.4.1 of the ASCE Code, this value generally ranges from .05
(low incidence of earthquake) to .4 (high incidence of earthquake).
Seismic Coefficient Cc - Enter the seismic coefficient Cc for mechanical and electrical
components from table 9.8-2, page 63 of the ASCE 7-93 Code. For tanks, vessels and heat
exchangers this value is normally taken as 2.
Performance Factor - Enter the performance criteria factor P, from table 9.8-2, page 63 of the
ASCE 7-93 code. This factor depends on the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group., defined in
Section 9.1.4.2:

P Definition
1.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III: Essential facilities required
for post-earthquake recovery
1.0 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II: Buildings that have a
substantial public hazard due to occupancy or use
0.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I: All other buildings
Amplification Factor - Enter the amplification factor ac, according to ASCE 7-93, Table 9.8-3:
Attachment Amplification
Component Supporting Mechanism
Factor (ac)
Fixed or direct connection seismic-activated restraining device 1.0
Resilient support system where:
Tc/T < 0.6 or Tc/T > 1.4 1.0
Tc/T D 0.6 or Tc/T W 1.4 2.0
T is the fundamental period of the building in seconds. Tc is the fundamental period of
the component in seconds.

Importance Factor - Enter the importance factor, as given in paragraph 9.3.1.5 of ASCE 95.
The value is 1.5 for the following situations:
 Life-safety component required to function after an earthquake (such as, fire protection
sprinkler system).
 Component contains material that would be significantly hazardous if released.
 Component poses a significant life safety hazard if separated from primary structure.
 Component can block a means of egress or exit way if damaged (such as, exit stairs).
Otherwise the value is 1.0. The value may also be specified by the customer, but should always
be greater than or equal to 1.0.
Force Factor R - Enter the seismic force factor according to ANSI A58.1, Table 24:
Typical Description
Value
1.33 Buildings with bearing walls
Buildings with frame
1.00
systems
2.50 Elevated tanks
2.00 Other structures
The value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks supported by
structural steel or legs.

Seismic Coefficient Ca - Enter the value of seismic coefficient Ca (for shaking intensity)
according to table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile
type and the value of Aa.
Soil
Profile Seismic Coefficient Ca for:
Type
Aa<0.05g Aa=0.05g Aa=0.10g Aa=0.20g Aa=0.30g Aa=0.40g Aa>=0.5g
b
A Aa 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.40

B Aa 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
C Aa 0.06 0.12 0.24 0.33 0.40 0.50
D Aa 0.08 0.16 0.28 0.36 0.44 0.50
E Aa 0.13 0.25 0.34 0.36 0.36 a
a - Site specific geotechnical information and dynamic site response analyses shall
be performed.
b - Site specific studies required per Section 9.2.2.4.3 may result in higher values of
Av than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.2.6.
For intermediate values, the higher value of straight-line interpolation shall be used to
determine the value of Ca.
Seismic Coefficient Cv - Enter the value of seismic coefficient Cv (for shaking intensity)
according to table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile
type and the value of Aa.
Soil
Profile Seismic Coefficient Cv for:
Type
Aa<0.05g Aa=0.05g Aa=0.10g Aa=0.20g Aa=0.30g Aa=0.40g Aa>=0.5g
b
A Av 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.40

B Av 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
C Av 0.09 0.17 0.32 0.45 0.56 0.65
D Av 0.12 0.24 0.40 0.54 0.64 0.75
E Av 0.18 0.35 0.64 0.84 0.96 a
a - Site specific geotechnical information and dynamic site response analyses shall
be performed.
b - Site specific studies required per Section 9.2.2.4.3 may result in higher values of
Av than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.2.6.
determine the value of Cv.

ASCE 7-98 Seismic Data

Importance Factor I - Enter the importance factor, as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The
value is usually between 1.0 and 1.5. The importance factor accounts for loss of life and
property.
Response Factor R - Enter the response modification factor R, from table 9.5.2.2 (ASCE) /
1617.6 (IBC). The value is usually 2.5 for inverted pendulum systems and cantilevered column
systems and 4.0 for elevated tanks. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels, and others
use a value of 3.0. The larger the value of R is, the more conservative the analysis becomes.
Acc. Based factor Fa - Enter a value for the acceleration factor Fa. This factor is from Table
9.4.1.2.4A (ASCE) or Table 1615.1.2(1) (IBC), and is a function of Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss
and Site Class:
Fa for Mapped Short-Period Maximum Considered

Earthquake Spectral Acceleration (Ss) of:
Site Class Ss <= 0.25 Ss = 0.5 Ss = 0.75 Ss = 1.0 Ss >= 1.252

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1
1. Site-specific geotechnical information and dynamic site response analysis shall be

performed.
2. Site specific studies required according to Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of Ss
than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.
3. The software also checks tables 1616.3(1) and 1616.3(2) to determine the seismic use
group. If Sd1 is greater than or equal to 0.2 and S1 is greater than or equal to 0.75 then the
additional check of equation 16-38 (IBC) is made. The same logic is used if Sds is greater
than or equal to 0.50.
Acc. Based factor Fv - Enter a value for the acceleration factor Fv. This factor is from Table
9.4.1.2.4B(ASCE) or Table 1615.1.2(2) (IBC), and is a function of Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl
and Site Class:
Fv
for Mapped 1-Second-Period Maximum Considered
Earthquake Spectral Acceleration (Sl) of:
Site Class Sl <= 0.1 Sl = 0.2 Sl = 0.3 Sl = 0.4 Sl >= 0.52

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3

D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1
1. Site-specific geotechnical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be

performed.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss - Enter the mapped short-period (0.2 second) maximum considered
earthquake spectral acceleration parameter Ss, taken from the ASCE 7-98 / IBC 2000/2003
publication. The tables are found on pages 100 - 117 (ASCE 98), page 351 (IBC 2000), or page
323 (IBC 2003).
Do not enter percentage value. Enter a multiplier of g. For example, if the value in the
table is 25%, enter 0.25.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl - Enter the mapped long period (1 second) maximum considered
earthquake spectral acceleration parameter Sl, taken from the ASCE 7-98 / IBC 2000/2003
323 (IBC 2003). Typical values are 0.0 through 1.5g.
Moment Reduction Factor tau - Enter a moment reduction factor, used to reduce the moment
at each level. A value greater than one will scale the moments up, while a value that is less than
one will lower the moments. A value of 1.0 is recommended. The value should not be less than
0.8.
For ASCE this value is no longer used and is therefore not applicable.
Site Class - Select the site class: A, B, C, D, E, or F. The software only uses these values to
check the minimum value of C according to equation 9.5.3.2.1-4 (ASCE), 1615.1.1 (IBC). This
additional check is only performed if E or F is selected.
Use ASCE-7 2005 Code? - Select to use ASCE-7 2005 as the code for analysis. This option is
only available when ASCE 7-02/05 is selected for Seismic Design Code.

Component Elevation ratio z/h - Enter a value for the elevation ratio if the vessel is attached to
another structure, such as a building The ratio, needed for proper analysis, is the height in the
structure where the vessel is attached hx to the average height of the roof hr. Generally, this
value is less than or equal to 1. For more information, see Section 1632.2, UBC 1997.
Component Amplification Factor ap - Enter a value for the component amplification factor ap.
This value varies from 1.0 to 2.5. For vessels a value of 2.5 is typical.
ASCE 7-02/05 Seismic Data

property.
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).

0.8.


Enter data for the ASCE-2010 seismic code.
Importance Factor Ie - Enter the occupancy importance factor according to Section 11.5.1,
based on Table 1.5-2.The importance factor accounts for loss of life and property. This value
typically ranges between 1.0 and 1.5.
Response Modification Factor R - Enter the seismic force factor from Table 12.2-1, 12.14-1,
15.4-1, or 15.4-2 as required. R is usually equal to 2.5 for inverted pendulum systems and
cantilevered column systems. For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg
supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
Acc. based Factor Fa - Enter the short-period coefficient (at 0.2 s-period) from Tables 11.4-1
and 11.4-2 as required. See Section 11.4.3 for further information.
Site SS<=0.25 SS=0.5 SS=0.75 SS=1.0 SS>=1.25b

Class
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]a
F See a a a a
Section
11.4.7
Acc based Factor Fv - Enter the long-period coefficient (at 1.0 s-period) from Tables 11.4-1 and
11.4-2 as required. See Section 11.4.3 for further information.
Site S1<=0.1 S1=0.2 S1=0.3 S1=0.4 S1>=0.5b

Class
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]a
F See
Section
11.4.7
determine the value of Ss or Sl.
a
Site specific geotechnical information and dynamic site response analyzes shall be performed.
b
Site specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 might result in higher values of Ss than
included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.

Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss - The values for Ss and S1 are taken from the ASCE 2010
publication. These factors are for short and long periods (0.2 and 1.0, respectively), shown on
Figs. 22-1, 22-3, 22-5, and 22-6 for Ss and Figs. 22-2, 22-4, 22-5, and 22-6 for S1.Where S1 is
less than or equal to 0.04 and Ss is less than or equal to 0.15, the structure is permitted to be
assigned to Seismic Design Category A and is only required to comply with Section 11.7. Do not
enter percentage value in these fields but instead a multiplier of g. So, if Ss is 25% enter 0.25 in
PV Elite.
Max Mapped Res. Acc. S1 - The values for Ss and S1 are taken from the ASCE 2010
publication. These factors are for short and long periods (0.2 and 1.0, respectively), shown on
Figs. 22-1, 22-3, 22-5, and 22-6 for Ss and Figs. 22-2, 22-4, 22-5, and 22-6 for S1.Where S1 is
less than or equal to 0.04 and Ss is less than or equal to 0.15, the structure is permitted to be
assigned to Seismic Design Category A and is only required to comply with Section 11.7. Do not
enter percentage value in these fields but instead a multiplier of g. So, if Ss is 25% enter 0.25 in
PV Elite.
Site Class - Select the site class.
Class Description
A Hard Rock
B Rock
C Very dense soil and soft rock
D Stiff soil
E Soft clay soil
F Soils requiring site response
analysis in accordance with Section
21.1
Component Elevation ratio z/h - If the vessel is attached to another structure such as a
building, the value of the elevation ratio needs to be entered in for proper analysis. This ratio is
the height in the structure where the vessel is attached to the average height of the roof with
respect to the base. So generally, this value would always be less than or equal to 1. See
Section 13.3.1.
Component Amplification Factor ap - This is a value that varies from 1.0 to 2.5. For vessels a
value of 2.5 is typical. See Section 13.3.1.
Consider Vertical Loads - Select to enable vertical load calculations [YEq].
Force Factor [afac] - Enter the force factor applied to the shear vertical load.
Minimum Acceleration Multiplier [Gy] - Enter the force factor applied to the total weight of the
vessel.
Sds - PV Elite checks tables 11.6-1 and 11.6-2 to determine the seismic use group. If Sd1 is
greater than or equal to 0.2 and S1 is greater than or equal to 0.75 then the additional check of
equation 16-38 (IBC) is made. The same logic is used if Sds is greater than or equal to 0.50.
Sd1 - PV Elite checks tables 11.6-1 and 11.6-2 to determine the seismic use group. If Sd1 is
greater than or equal to 0.2 and S1 is greater than or equal to 0.75 then the additional check of
equation 16-38 (IBC) will be made. The same logic is used if Sds is greater than or equal to
0.50.

Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data

Chile NCh2369 En Español (on page 373)
Enter data for the Chilean Code for Seismic Analysis of Vessels.
Eff. Max. Ground Acc. (Ao) - Enter the effective maximum ground acceleration Ao, as defined
in Table 5.2 Maximum Effective Acceleration, NCh2369 page 39:
Seismic Zone Ao
1 0.20 g
2 0.30 g
3 0.40 g
Soil Parameter (T') - Enter the soil parameter T', as defined in Table 5.4 Value of type of soil
dependent parameters, NCh2369 page 40:
Type of T' n
Soil (s)
I 0.20 1.00
II 0.35 1.33
III 0.62 1.80
IV 1.35 1.80
T' : Soil type dependent parameter
n : number of levels parameter dependent by the type of soil
Soil Parameter (n) - Enter the soil parameter T', as defined in Table 5.4 Value of type of soil
dependent parameters, NCh2369 page 40:
Type of T' n
Soil (s)
I 0.20 1.00
II 0.35 1.33
III 0.62 1.80
IV 1.35 1.80
T' : Soil type dependent parameter
n : number of levels parameter dependent by the type of soil
Damping Ratio (Xi) - Enter the damping ratio ξ, as defined in Table 5.5 Damping Ratios,
NCh2369 page 40:
Resistant System ξ
Welded steel shell; silos; hoppers; pressure vessels; process towers; piping, etc 0.02
Bolted or riveted steel shell; 0.03
Welded steel frames with or without bracings 0.02

Steel frames with field bolted connections, with or without bracings 0.03
Reinforced concrete and masonry structures 0.05
Precast reinforced concrete, purely gravitational structures 0.05
Precast reinforced concrete structures with wet connections, connected to the
non-structural 0.05
elements and incorporated into the structural model
Precast reinforced concrete structures with wet connections, non-connected to the
non- 0.03
structural elements
Precast reinforced concrete structures with dry connections, non-connected and
connected:
0.03
With bolted connections and connections by means of bars embedded in filling mortar
0.02
With welded connections
Other structures not included in above list nor similar to the foregoing ones 0.02
See notes at the bottom of Table 5.5 in NCh2369, page 40.
Response Mod. Factor (R) - Enter the response modification factor R, as defined in Table 5.6,
NCh2369 page 41:
Resistant System R
1. Structures designed for remain elastic 1
2. Other Structures not included nor similar to those in this list1. 2
7. Tanks, vessels, stacks, silos and hoppers
7.1 Stacks, silos and hoppers with continuous down-to-floor shells 3
Silos, hoppers and tanks supported on columns, with or without bracing
7.2 4
between columns.
7.3 Vertical axis steel tanks with continuous down-to-floor shell 4
Vertical axis reinforced concrete tanks with continuous down-to-floor
7.4 3
shell
Tanks and conduits of composite synthetic material (FRP, GFRP, HDPE
7.5 3
and similar materials)
7.6 Horizontal vessels supported on cradles with ductile anchorages 4
8. Towers, piping and equipment
8.1 Process towers 3
8.2 Cooling towers made of wood or plastic 4
8.3 Electric control cabinets resting on floor 3
8.4 Steel piping except their connections 5
9. Storage racks 4
1. Except that a study proves that an R value other than 2 can be used. Structures
whose resistant system is explicitly included in this table are not assimilable to

this classification.
For more information, see Table 5.5 in NCh2369, page 41.
Coefficient of Importance (I) - Enter the coefficient of importance I, as defined in Section 4.3.1
Classification, NCh2369 page 20:
Description Coefficient of
Category
Importance
Critical structures and equipment
based on if its vital, dangerous
C1 1.20
and essential (such as pressure
vessels, tanks, silos).
Normal structures and equipment,
which may be affected by normal
C2 easily repairable failures and do 1.00
not hazard other category C1
structures.
are essential to post-earthquake
C3 0.80
recovery or associated with
hazardous facilities.
Chile NCh2369 En Español

In English (see "Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data" on page 371)
Seccion 4.3.1 Clasificación (NCh2369 pagina 20)

La clasificación apropiada según su importancia es así:
Categoria C1: Estructuras críticas y los equipos utilizados se basaron si son vitales, peligrosos y
esenciales. (Recipientes de presión, tanques, silos, etc)
Categoria C2: Las estructuras normales y el equipo utilizado, que pueden ser afectados por los
fracasos normalmente y fácilmente reparables y que no arriesguen otras estructuras de
categoría C1.
Categoria C3: Estructuras menores o provisionales y el equipo utilizado, cuyo fracaso sísmico
no crea peligro a otra estructura de categoría C1 y C2.
Nota: Lea NCh2369 4.3.1 Categorias de Clasificacion para mas informacion
Seccion 4.3.2 Coeficiente de Importancia (NCh2369 pagina 20)

El coeficiente de importancia I para cada categoría tiene los valores siguientes:
C1I : 1.20
C2I : 1.00
C3I : 0.80
Seccion 5. Tablas (NCh2369 pagina 35)

Tabla 5.2 Máxima Aceleración Effectiva (NCh2369 pagina 39)
Ao : aceleración máxima efectiva de suelo

Zona Seismica Ao
1 0.20 g
2 0.30 g
Tabla 5.4 Parámetros Dependientes del valor de tipo de suelo (NCh2369 pagina 40)
Escoja parámetros dependientes del tipo de suelo en la Tabla 5.3 (NCh2369 pagina 39)
T' : parametro dependiente por el tipo de suelo
n : numero de niveles de parametro dependiente por el tipo de suelo
Tipo de T' n
Suelo (s)
I 0.20 1.00
II 0.35 1.33
III 0.62 1.80
IV 1.35 1.80
Tabla 5.5 Proporcion de Amortiguamiento (NCh2369 pagina 40)
Sistema Resistente ξ
Recipiente soldado de acero; silos; depósitos de alimentación; recipientes de presión;
0.02
torres de proceso; tubería, etc
Recipiente empernado o remachado de acero; 0.03
Recipientes soldados de acero con o sin refuerzos 0.02
Recipientes de acero con conexiones empernadas, con o sin refuerzos 0.03
Cemento reforzado y estructuras de albañilería 0.05
Cemento reforzado prefabricado, estructuras de gravitación puras. 0.05
Estructuras reforzadas de cemento con conexiones prefabricadas, conectadas a
elementos 0.05
no estructurales e integrados en el modelo estructural
Estructuras reforzadas de cemento con conexiones prefabricadas, no conectadas a
0.03
estructuras no elementales
Estructuras reforzadas de cemento con conexiones secas prefabricadas, no
conectadas y conectadas:
con conexiones empedernadas y conexiones por medio de barras empotradas en 0.03
mortero 0.02
con conexiones soldadas
Otras estructuras no incluidas en la lista previa o que asimile a las mencionadas 0.02
Nota: Lea Tabla 5.5 notas finales en NCh2369 pagina 40
Tabla 5.6 Valores máximos del factor de modificación de respuesta (NCh2369 pagina 41)
Sistema Resistente R
1. Estructuras diseñadas que se quedan elásticas 1

2. Otras estructuras no incluidas ni semejantes a ésas en esta lista1. 2

7. Tanques, recipientes, pilas, silos y depositos de alimentacion
Pilas, silos y depositos de alimentacion con continuos recipientes de bajo del
7.1 3
piso
Silos, depositos de alimentacion y tankques soportados en columnas, con o
7.2 4
sin refuerzo entre columnas.
7.3 Tanques de acero con eje vertical con continuo recipiente bajo del piso 4
7.4 Tanques de concreto con eje vertical con continuo recipiente bajo del piso 3
Tanques y conductos de materia sintética compuesta (FRP, GFRP, HDPE
7.5 3
y materiales similares)
7.6 Recipientes horizontales apoyados en cunas con anclajes dúctiles 4
8. Torres, tuberias y equipo
8.1 Torres de Proceso 3
8.2 Torres de refrigeración de madera o plástico 4
8.3 Gabinetes eléctricos de control que descansan en el piso 3
8.4 Tubería de acero menos sus conexiones 5
9. Sporte de almacenamiento 4
1. Amenos que un estudio demuestre que el valor de R valga otro que 2 pueden ser utilizados.
Estructuras cuyos sistemas resistentes sean incluidos explicitamente en esta tabla no son
asimilables a esta clasificacion.
Nota: Para mas informacion lea Tabla 5.5 en NCh2369 pagina 41
Tabla 5.7 Valores máximos del coeficiente sísmico (NCh2369 pagina 43)
Cmax
R
ξ = 0.02 ξ = 0.03 ξ = 0.05
1 0.79 0.68 0.55
2 0.60 0.49 0.42
3 0.40 0.34 0.28
4 0.32 0.27 0.22
5 0.26 0.23 0.18
Nota: Estos valores son validos para la zona sismica 3. Para aplicacion de zona 2 y 1, estos
valores seran multiplicados por 0.75 y 0.50, respectivamente.

Seccion 5. Figuras 5.1 (NCh2369 pagina 35)

Figura 5.1 a) Zonificacion Sismica de las Regiones I, II, y III (NCh2369 pagina 44)

Figura 5.1 b) Zonificacion Sismica de las Regiones IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X
y Region Metropolitana (NCh2369 pagina 45)

Figura 5.1 c) Zonificacion Sismica de las Regiones XI y XII (NCh2369 pagina 46)

China GB 50011 Seismic Data

Enter data for China's GB 50011-2001 seismic code.
Alpha1 from 5.1.4 - Enter a value for the seismic coefficient, α. This value is used to determine
FEk from equation 5.2.1-1. For multistory brick buildings, multistory structures with interior
frames, or framed single-story buildings,α = αmax, the maximum seismic coefficient, as given in
Table 5.1.4-1:
Intensity VI VII VIII IX

0.08 0.16
αmax 0.04 0.32
(0.12) (0.24)
DeltaN from 5.2.1 - Enter a value for the additional seismic coefficient, δn. This value is used in
conjunction FEk to compute ∆Fn.This is an optional entry for additional seismic action at the top
level of the building, as given in Table 5.2.1:
Tg (s) T1 > 1.4*Tg T1 <= 1.4*Tg

<= 0.35 0.08*T1 + 0.07
> 0.35~0.55 0.08*T1 + 0.01 0.0
> 0.55 0.08*T1 - 0.02
In addition to calculating lateral loads on elements, the software calcuates vertical loads
according to section 5.3.1.
Costa Rica 2002 Seismic Data

The Costa Rica 2002 seismic design code has these options.
Importance Factor [I] - Enter the importance factor in accordance with Table 4.1.
Group Description Factor

A Buildings and essential facilities such as hospitals, 1.5
police and fire stations, airport terminals, and
emergency generator facilities.
B Buildings and hazardous facilities such as buildings 1.5
containing toxic chemicals or explosives. Buildings
whose failure could put other A or B group buildings in
danger.
C Buildings for educational activities with more than 300 1.0
students. Buildings for adult education with more than
500 students. Health centers with 50 or more disabled
residents, but not included in Group A. All
constructions
with occupancy greater than 5000 people not included
in Groups A or B. Buildings and equipment in power
generation stations, and other public facilities not
included in Group A and required to maintain
continuous operation.

D All work room, office, retail or industry and other 1.0

non-residential building not specified in Groups A, B,
C and E.
E Agricultural construction and low occupancy buildings. 0.75
Sheds and storage buildings of that do not contain
toxic material or have low occupancy. Boundary walls
and retaining walls that do not represent high risk to
bystanders. Temporary facilities for construction.
Over resistance factor [SR] - Enter the over resistance factor as defined in Chapter 3,
paragraph 3 (d). When using static or dynamic analysis methods of Articles 7.4 and 7.5, the over
resistance is equal to 2.0 for frame-like structures and dual wall, and equal to 1.2 for cantilever
and other structure types. When using Article 7.7 alternative analysis methods, the over
resistance is 1.2 on the ultimate capacity calculated in the analysis for all structural systems.
Soil Type - Select the soil type that matches the local soil conditions:
 S1 - A rock-like material, characterized by a velocity shear wave exceeding 760 m/s or other
means proper classification. Hard soil conditions or dense, where the depth of soil is less
than 50 m.
 S2 - Medium-dense to dense or medium-stiff to stiff whose depth exceeds 50 m.
 S3 - More than 6 m consistency of soft clay to medium stiff cohesive soils or low or medium
density. It includes profiles of more than 12 m of soft clay.
 S4 - Soil characterized by a shear wave velocity less than 150 m/s over 12 m of soft clay.
When the properties of site are not known, use S3. Use S4 if the engineer responsible believes
it is needed.

Seismic Zone - Select the seismic zone you need, which are shown in Figure 2.1 in the code.
Global Ductility [mu] - The overall ductility μ assigned to each of the structural types in Article
4.2, is defined in Table 4.3 according to the structural system classifications section 4.3, and the
local ductility of components and joints according to paragraph 4.4.1.
 When the system contains structural elements and precast concrete components that are
part of seismic resistant systems, overall ductility is 1.5 unless the engineer responsible for
the design justifies a higher value by supporting experimental tests and analytical
calculations.
 Buildings with severe irregularities, according to paragraph 4.3.4, have overall ductility of
1.0, unless the engineer responsible for the design justifies a higher value. In any case the
overall ductility can be assigned greater than the corresponding structures moderate
irregularity.
 Structural systems consisting of walls, frames, and frames braced by mezzanines that
behave as rigid diaphragms, as subsection (e) of Chapter 3, cannot have a global ductility
greater than 1.5.
 For cantilever structures, use a global ductility of 1.0 on the foundation design.
 For steel structures and OCBF and OMF types as defined in the Chapter 10, you must use a
global ductility of 1.5.
Peak acceleration [aef] - Enter the design effective peak acceleration expressed as a fraction
of gravity. The value is based on the seismic zoning and soil type from Table 2.2.

Soil Type Zone II Zone III Zone IV

S1 0.20 0.30 0.40
S2 0.24 0.33 0.40
S3 0.28 0.36 0.44
S4 0.34 0.36 0.36
Spectral Dynamic Factor [FED] - Enter the degree-of-freedom change in acceleration a
system suffers with respect to the ground acceleration. The area is a function of seismic soil
type of the global ductility μ and the period assigned. This value is shown in Figure 5.1 through
Figure 5.12 in the code for each seismic zone and soil type.
G Loading Seismic Data

Enter data for seismic loads in G's
Importance Factor - Enter the importance factor. The value is usually between 1.0 and 1.5.
Loads generated form G loading are multiplied directly by this value.
Long. Acceleration (Gx), Lateral Acceleration (Gz), and Vertical Acceleration (Gy) - Enter in
the value of G in each direction for the vessel. Typical values of lateral G loads are from 0 to 0.4.
Vertical G loads can be positive or negative. Negative G loads increase the saddle loads and
vertical G loads decrease the saddle loads.
For vertical vessels, the horizontal component used is the maximum of the Gx and Gz values.
The calculated horizontal force is equal to the weight of the element times this maximum G
factor. This force times its distance to the support is calculated and summed with all other
forces. The Gy value is also considered. This value is usually 2/3 of the Gx or Gz value. Any of
these values can be zero.
For horizontal vessels, the lateral (Gz) and longitudinal (Gx) directions are considered
independently. The vertical load component (Gy) acting on the saddle supports is also
calculated.
IBC 2000 Seismic Data

property.
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).

0.8.


property.
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3

D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).
0.8.


property.
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).

0.8.


property.
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3

D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1
F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).
0.8.

IS-1893 RSM Seismic Data

Enter data for India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM.
IS1893 Code Edition - Select the edition of the code to use: 1984, 2002, or 2005 Simplified.
The Seismic Coefficient Method has been abandoned in the 2002 edition.
Importance Factor - Enter the importance factor I, according to Table 6, IS: 1893, 2002
Seismic Design Code. The following values are for guidance. You may chose an appropriate
factor based on economy, strategy and other considerations. You may choose values greater
than those listed here.
Importance
Structure
Factor
Important service and community buildings such as 1.5
hospitals, schools, monumental structures,
emergency buildings like telephone exchange,
television stations, radio stations, railway stations,
fire station buildings; large assembly halls like
cinemas, assembly halls, subway stations, power

stations.
All other buildings 1
The older version of the IS 1893 also listed the following additional categories:
Importance
Structure
Factor
Containment structures for atomic power reactors. 6
Dams of all types 3
Containers of inflammable or poisonous gases/liquids 2
Soil Factor - Enter the soil factor (Beta), according to Table 3, IS:1893 seismic design code.
Values of the soil factor generally range between 1.0 and 1.5.
Soil Type Soil Factor

Type I rock or hard soils 1
Type II medium soils 1
Type II medium soils - well foundations or isolated RCC footings without 1.2
tiebeams or unreinforced strip foundations
Type III soft soils Between 1.0
and 1.5
Well foundations or isolated RCC footings without tiebeams or unreinforced 1.5
strip foundations
Combined or isolated RCC footings with tiebeams 1.2
Piles not on raft foundations 1.2
Other type III soft soils 1.0
Zone Number - Enter the zone number. In the 1984 edition of the standard, India is divided into
five zones, from 1 to 5. In the 2002 edition, the number of zones is reduced to four. See the
Figure 1 in IS:1893 to obtain the zone number from the map.
Period of Vibration (Optional) - Enter the period of vibration. This is the first period of vibration
of the vessel in the normal operating case. This value is used in conjunction with damping to
determine Sa/g. The software calculates this value, but entering a value here overrides the
calculated value. This entry is optional.
Percent Damping - Enter the damping factor of the vessel as a percentage of critical damping.
The effect of internal friction, imperfect elasticity of material, slipping, and sliding, results in
reducing the amplitude of vibration. This value is used to determine the average acceleration
coefficient Sa/g.
In the 1984 edition of the IS:1893, Figure 2 shows various curves for damping and natural
period of vibration versus Sa/g. Values for damping on this graph range between 2 and 20
percent.
In the 2002 edition of the IS:1893, Figure 2 shows the Sa/g values for 5% damping. If your
damping percentage is different from 5% then Sa/g value from Figure 2 has to be multiplied by
damping factor. Table 3 provides the damping factor for damping percentage between 0 to 30
percent.

A value outside of the ranges indicated above should not be entered. If a value outside the
range is entered, the software simply uses that extreme value of damping. If the value does not
have a direct factor provided (such as 2, 5, 10, 20 percentage, etc.) then linear extrapolation will
be used to obtain the intermediate values.
Overriding "Fo" value if > 0 - Overrides the Fo value calculated by the software.This option
defaults to a value of 0.
Soil Type - Select a soil type: Rocky or Hard Soils, Medium Soils, or Soft Soils.
Force Factor R - Enter the seismic force factor.
Vessel is attached to a building and projects over the roof? - Select if this condition is true.
Optional Sa/g vs. Time Period Input - Click Review and Edit Spectrum Points to open the
Spectrum Data Points dialog box. Enter your values for Sa/g at each needed Time Period (T).
This table must be completely filled in.
After entering values into the dialog box, select Do not apply Damping Correction Factor. The
table values are then used in lieu of the internally stored data values of Sa/g for various amounts
of critical damping. The software does not use any other tables to determine Sa/g.
IS-1893 SCM Seismic Data

Enter data for India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 SCM.
Importance Factor - Enter the importance factor I, according to Table 6, IS: 1893, 2002
Seismic Design Code. The following values are for guidance. You may chose an appropriate
factor based on economy, strategy and other considerations. You may choose values greater
than those listed here.
Importance
Structure
Factor
Important service and community buildings such as 1.5
hospitals, schools, monumental structures,
emergency buildings like telephone exchange,
television stations, radio stations, railway stations,
fire station buildings; large assembly halls like
cinemas, assembly halls, subway stations, power
stations.
All other buildings 1
The older version of the IS 1893 also listed the following additional categories:
Importance
Structure
Factor
Containment structures for atomic power reactors. 6
Dams of all types 3
Containers of inflammable or poisonous gases/liquids 2
Soil Factor - Enter the soil factor (Beta), according to Table 3, IS:1893 seismic design code.
Values of the soil factor generally range between 1.0 and 1.5.
Soil Type Soil Factor

Type I rock or hard soils 1

Type II medium soils 1

Type II medium soils - well foundations or isolated RCC footings without 1.2
tiebeams or unreinforced strip foundations
Type III soft soils Between 1.0
and 1.5
Well foundations or isolated RCC footings without tiebeams or unreinforced 1.5
strip foundations
Combined or isolated RCC footings with tiebeams 1.2
Piles not on raft foundations 1.2
Other type III soft soils 1.0
Zone Number - Enter the zone number. In the 1984 edition of the standard, India is divided into
five zones, from 1 to 5. In the 2002 edition, the number of zones is reduced to four. See the
Figure 1 in IS:1893 to obtain the zone number from the map.
User Alpha H - Enter a value for Alpha H.
Mexico Sismo Seismic Data

Mexico Sismo En Español (on page 396)
Enter data for the Mexican seismic code.
Seismic Zone - Select the seismic zone: A, B, C, or D. See the region map on page 1.3.29 of
the Manual DE Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design Manual) for Mexico. Zone D is the zone of
highest seismic activity while zone A is the least active.
Structure Group - Select the structure group:
 A - High Safety - Structure requiring a high degree of safety during their design, such as
towers and tanks.
 B - Med. Safety - Structure requiring an intermediate degree of safety during their design.
 C - Low Safety - Structure requiring a low degree of safety during their design.
Soil Type - Select the type of soil:
 I - Hard soil. Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b0 =
700 m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2.
 II - Medium soil. Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity
of propagation which meets the condition βcTs + βsTc > βcTc.
 III - Soft soil. Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation
which meet the condition βcTs + βsTc < βcTc.
Behavior Factor Q - Enter the behavior factor Q. For chimneys and towers, use 3.0. For
smaller structures like tanks, use 2.0. For more information, see page 1.3.23 in the Manual
Sismo.
Effective Absorption Factor - Enter the absorption factor zeta e hat, used to compute the
increment factor Xi. This factor should always be less than or equal to 0.02.
Orthogonal Increase Factor - Enter the factor to scale up the earthquake loads in a linear
(scalar) fashion. This value is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater than or equal to
1.0. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS-type effect on the structure.

Mexico Sismo En Español

In English (see "Mexico Sismo Seismic Data" on page 395)
Zona Sismica
Se encuentran 4 opciones aqui. A, B, C y D. Estudie el Manual de Diseño por Sismo para
Mexico. En la pagina 1.3.29 del manual, se encuentra un mapa con las diferentes regiones
como se demuestra aqui. Se puede observar que la zona D es la zona que tiene la más alta
actividad sismica, mientras que la zona A es la menos activa. Seleccione la zona correcta de el
menu de opciones.
Grupo Estructural
Grupo A Grado Alto de Seguridad
Grupo B Grado Intermedio de Seguridad
Grupo C Grado Bajo de Seguridad
Torres y tanques son considerados Estructuras del Grupo A porque se requiere un grado alto
de seguridad durante su diseño. Estructuras Grupo B requieren un grado intermedio de
seguridad y aquellos que son parte del grupo C requieren un grado bajo de seguridad.
Tipo de Terreno
I Terreno Depositos del suelo formado exclusivamente por capas con velocidad de
Duro: propagación b0 = 700 m/s o el módulo de la rigidez >= 85000 t/m2.
II Terreno Depositos del suelo con el período fundamental de vibración y la velocidad
Medio: efectiva de propagación que demuestra la condición: βcTs + βsTc > βcTc.
III Terreno Depositos del suelo con el periodo fundamental de vibración efectiva de
Suave: propagación que demuestra la condición: βcTs + βsTc < βcTc.
Factor de Conducta Q
El factor de conducta Q se encuentra en el Manual pagina 1.3.20. Para chimeneas y torres,
este valor debe de ser 3.0. Para estructuras menores como tanques este valor puede ser 2.0.
Vea la pagina 1.3.23 en el Manual de Sismo para informacion adicional.
Factor efectivo de Absorción

Este valor es zeta e hat y es utilizado para calcular el factor de incremento Xi. El EAF siempre
debe de ser menor que o igual a 0.02.
Factor ortogonal de Aumento

El Codigo Sismico Mexicano considera un efecto SRSS sobre la estructura.
Fundamentalmente, este valor aumenta las cargas sismicas en una forma lineal (Escalar). Este
valor es traditionalmente 1.118 y siempre debe de ser > o igual a 1.0.
Notas de Analisis:
Al igual que con cada otro análisis de carga de terremoto, el objetivo es de calcular la fuerza
cortante en el centro de masa de cada elemento del recipiente. Una vez que las fuerzas

cortantes en cada elevación son encontradas, los momentos pueden ser acumulados a la base,
apoyo de pierna u oreja.
El análisis empieza calculando las distancias de los pesos y centroides de todos los elementos
del recipiente. Es muy importante modelar la estructura en secciones que son apropiadas de
tamaño. Para cilindros, este valor está acerca de 10 o 12 pies (3m). Esto asegura que el
programa tiene suficiente información para calcular el período natural de vibración con
suficiente certeza.
Con los datos de entrada dados y pesos calculados de terremoto y frecuencia natural, PV Elite
determina los valores de la tabla 3.1 del Código Sísmico Mexicano. Los valores son:
ao Coordenada Espectral para calcular a
c Coordenada Espectral para calcular a
Ta(s) Valor de Periodo para calcular a
Tb(s) Valor de Periodo para calcular a
r Exponente usado para calcular a
Para las estructuras del grupo A, los valores de las coordenadas espectrales (ao, c)
obtenidas de la tabla 3.1 son multiplicadas por 1.5.
Para este tipo de recipientes PV Elite utilizara el metodo de analisis statico como esta resumido
en el codigo de sismo Mexicano. Si su pila o columna mide más de 60 metros o 192 pies, usted
debe utilizar el método dinámico de análisis.
Después de que todos los varios factores son calculados, las fuerzas cortantes en cada nivel
son calculadas en cada nivel según la fórmula en la página 1.3.88 del Código de Sismo. Este es
el tipo tradicional de ecuaciones masivas de distribución de carga de suma de altura. Además
de las fuerzas cortantes en cada nivel, la fuerza primera también es calculada por la ecuación
1.3.89. Después de que las cargas son calculadas, son multiplicadas por el factor ortogonal de
aumento.
Con las fuerzas cortantes conocidas, los momentos son calculados de la cima a la base,
utilizando tipicas ecuaciones de tipo estática.
NBC 1995 Seismic Data

Enter data for the Canadian NBC seismic code.
directly without modification. Values are taken from NBC 4.1.9.1 (10):
Classification Importance
Factor
Post-disaster buildings. 1.5
Schools. 1.3
All other buildings.
Most petrochemical 1.0
structures use this category.
Soil Type - Select a soil type:
 Soil 1 - Category 1.From rock to stiff fine-grained soils up to 15 m deep.

 Soil 2 - Category 2. From compact coarse-grained soils to soft fine-grained soils (stiff
cohesionless clay) up to 15 m deep.
 Soil 3 - Category 3. Very loose and loose coarse-grained soils with depth up to 15 m.
 Soil 4 - Category 4:Very soft and soft fine-grained soils with depth greater than 15 m.
Force Modification Factor - Enter the force modification factor R, according to table 4.1.9.B
and paragraphs 4.1.9.1 (8) and 4.1.9.3 (3).
R Definition
1.0 Case 18 - Elevated tanks (such as equipment on
legs), including the special provisions of paragraph
4.1.9.3 (3)
1.5 Case 6 - Ductile structures (such as towers on skirts).
Acceleration Seismic Zone - Select the acceleration seismic zone, according to the city list,
Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC:
Zone Example City

0 Calgary, Alberta
1 Toronto, Ontario
2 Saint John, New Brunswick
3 Varennes, Quebec
4 Vancouver, British Columbia
5 Duncan, British Columbia
6 Port Hardy, British Columbia
Velocity Seismic Zone - Select the velocity seismic zone, according to the city list, Chapter 1 of
the supplement to NBC:
Zone Example City

0 Steinbach, Manitoba
1 Calgary, Alberta
2 Montreal, Quebec
3 Quebec City, Quebec
4 Dawson, Yukon
5 Victoria, British Columbia
6 Destruction Bay, Yukon
greatest chance of an earthquake.IS-1893 SCM


Enter data for the NBC seismic code.
Importance Factor (IE) - Enter the earthquake importance factor IE, a value that accounts for
loss of life and property. This value is referred to in Table 4.1.8.5 but is only shown for Ultimate
Load State design. The software uses allowable stress design. This value should normally be
greater than or equal to 1.0.
Site Class - Enter the site class, designating the type of underlying strata the vessel is resting
on. Site class A generates the least conservative result and site class E generates the most
conservative result for the design base shear. The following table is adapted from Table
4.1.8.4.A, NBC 2005.
Site Class Ground Profile Name

A Hard rock
B Rock
C Very dense soil and soft rock
D Stiff Soil
E Soft Soil
Overstrength Factor (Ro) - Enter a value for the overstrength factor Ro. A value of 1 is
conservative. A value greater than 1 leads to a less conservative, lower design base shear. Ro is
taken from NBC table 4.1.8.9. The NBC Code is for buildings and support for vessels is lacking.
You will not find a good value for Ro in the tables.
Ductility Factor (Rd) - Enter the ductility factor Rd, the ductility-related force modification factor
reflecting the capability of a structure to dissipate energy through inelastic behavior. A value of 1
is conservative. A value greater than 1 leads to a less conservative, lower design base shear. Rd
is taken from NBC table 4.1.8.9.
Accelerations from Appendix C Division B - Enter acceleration factors Sa for different
acceleration periods. The acceleration factors for various cities and regions in Canada are found
in Appendix C,Division B, Volume 2 of the NBC Code. These accelerations are used to
determine S(T) according to paragraph 6, section 4.1.8.4. The software calculates each
candidate and performs a final interpolation of the result based on the fundamental period of
vibration of the vessel.

Component Elevation Ratio (hx/hn) - Enter a value for the elevation ratio if the vessel is
supported by structure, such as a building. The ratio is the height in the structure where the
vessel is attached hx to height to the top of the building from grade hn. Generally, this value is
less than or equal to 1. If the value is zero, the vessel is not building-supported.
Component Amplification Factor (Rp) - Enter the element or component response

modification factor Rp, from table 4.1.8.17. For vessels, a value of 2.5 is typical. The larger the
value of Rp is, the more conservative the result becomes.
Element or Component Factor (Cp) - Enter the element or component factor Cp, from table
4.1.8.17. A value of 1.0 is typical and is the default value. The larger the value of Cp, the more
conservative the result.
Component Force Amp. Factor (Ar) - Enter the element or component force amplification
factor Ar, from table 4.1.8.17. A value of 2.5 is typical and is the default value. The larger the
value of Ar, the more conservative the result.


Enter data for the NBC seismic code.
Importance Factor (IE) - Enter the earthquake importance factor of the structure as described in
Table 4.1.8.5.
Importance Category Importance Factor, IE

Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Site Class - Select the site class as defined in Table 4.1.8.4.A (or Tables 4.1.8.4.B or 4.1.8.4.C if
they apply).
Overstrength Factor (Ro) - Enter the overstrength factor as defined in Table 4.1.8.9.
Ductility Factor (Rd) - Enter the ductility factor as defined in Table 4.1.8.9. Remember that
when a particular Rd value is required, you must use the corresponding Ro value from the table.
Accelerations from Appendix C Division B - Enter the accelerations that you want to use.
Component Elevation Ratio (hx/hn) - Enter the elevation ratio.
Component Amplification Factor (Rp) - Enter the component amplification factor as found in
Table 4.1.8.18.
Element or Component Factor (Cp) - Enter the seismic coefficient factor as found in Table
4.1.8.18.
Component Force Amp. Factor (Ar) - Enter the response amplification factor as found in Table
4.1.8.18.
PDVSA Seismic Data

PDVSA En Español (on page 406)
Enter data for the Venezuelan Code for Seismic Analysis of Vessels.

Characteristic Accel. (a*) - Enter the characteristic acceleration a*. The value is obtained from
Figure 6.1 seismic threat map:

Gamma - Enter the gamma factor γ. The value is obtained from Figure 6.2 seismic threat map:
Annual Probability - Enter the risk classification annual probability P1. Select the risk
classification based on the most critical consequences defined in Section 4.1 Reference Scale,
JA-221 page 9, Table 4.1 Risk Classification Scale:
Conditions
Degree P1
of Number of Economic Loss
Environmental (10-3)
Risk people impact
exposed Materials Lost profits
Limited to
A Few (< 10) Worthless Little or None ≤2
installation
Significant.
Important The installation Recovery
B Between 1 ≤1
(11 to 100) and any neighbor ≤ 3 years
and 50 US$
Great number The installation
Between 50 and Recovery
C of people and many ≤ 0.5
250 US$ 3 to 10 years
(100 to 500) neighbors
Natural
D > 500 people > 250 US$ Irreversible ≤ 0.1
catastrophe
For unknown or doubtful cases of risk, select the highest risk classification.
Damping Factor - Enter the damping factor ζ, as defined in Section 6 The Seismic Design
Movements, JA-222 page 4, Table 6.1:

Type of Structure Damping (%)

Welded steel 3
Bolted steel 5
Reinforced concrete 5
Metallic tanks See FJ-251
Ductility Factor - Enter the damping factor D, Select D for the type of structure that dissipates
energy in a way that does not compromise the stability of the vessel system, as defined in
Section 8 Ductility Factor, JA-222 page 4, Table 8.1:
Type of Structure D Comments

Vertical Vessel
The eventual failure of the skirt and connection bolts
(metallic skirt and
2 is ductile. It supplies sufficient deformation to the bolts
connection bolts in the
by means of exposed backups.
foundation)
A ductile failure in the connection bolts on the
Vertical Vessel
foundation.
(metallic skirt and
2 Must avoid premature fragile failure in the skirt. It
connection bolts in the
supplies sufficient deformation to the bolts by means of
foundation)
exposed backups.
Vertical Vessel
(metallic skirt and None-ductile failure in the system in the skirt
1
connection bolts in the or in the bolts.
foundation)
Horizontal Vessel The mechanical failure in the saddle must be ductile,
(on top of arcs of high 6 under the concept of strong column weak beam.No
hyperstatic moments) fragile failure between the vessel and the saddle.
Horizontal Vessel The mechanical failure in the saddle must be ductile,
(on top of arcs of high 4 under the concept of strong column weak beam. No
hyperstatic moments) fragile failure between the vessel and the saddle.
Horizontal Vessel
1.5 Ductile failure on the column.
(on top of single columns)
Horizontal Vessel
4 Ductile failure from the system.
(on top of a braced arc)
Horizontal Vessel 1.5 In the walls plane.

(on top of walls) 2 In the walls vertical plane.
Horizontal Vessel 1.5 In the non-bracing plane. Ductile failure on the column.
(single diagonal braced In the bracing plane. It first yields the system of bracing
columns) 3
in a ductile form.
Beta Factor - Enter the beta factor β, as defined in Section 6.3 Elastic Response Spectrum,
Table 6.1 Spectrum Form Values, JA-221 page 15, Table 6.1 Spectrum Form Values:

Spectral β To T*
Form (s) (s)
S1 2.4 0.10 0.4
0.20
S2 2.6 0.8
S3 2.8 0.30 1.2

S4 3.0 0.40 1.6
Ad - Spectrum acceleration divided by the gravity's acceleration
g - Gravity acceleration
Ao - Maximum acceleration coefficient of the terrain, Ao = a/g
To - Value of the period that defines part of the normalized elastic spectral, in seconds
T* - Maximum value of the period in the interval where the normalized elastic spectra have a
constant value, in seconds
β - One of the parameters that define the spectral form
T* Factor - Enter the T* factor, as defined in Section 6.3 Elastic Response Spectrum, Table 6.1
Spectrum Form Values, JA-221 page 15, Table 6.1 Spectrum Form Values:
Spectral β To T*
Form (s) (s)
S1 2.4 0.10 0.4
0.20
S2 2.6 0.8
S3 2.8 0.30 1.2

S4 3.0 0.40 1.6
Ad - Spectrum acceleration divided by the gravity's acceleration
g - Gravity acceleration
Ao - Maximum acceleration coefficient of the terrain, Ao = a/g
To - Value of the period that defines part of the normalized elastic spectral, in seconds
T* - Maximum value of the period in the interval where the normalized elastic spectra have a
constant value, in seconds
β - One of the parameters that define the spectral form
T+ Factor - Enter the T+ factor, the minimum value of the period in the interval where the design
spectral has a constant value, as defined in Section 7 Spectrum Design, JA-221 page 18, Table
7.1:
T+
(s)
D<5 0.1 (D-1)
D≥5 0.4
Should comply with To ≤ T+ ≤ T*
Phi Factor - Enter the phi factor φ, as defined in Section 5.1 Factor φ and Spectral Form
Selection, JA-221 page 11, Table 5.1 Factor φ and Spectral Form Selection:

Material Vsp H Spectral φ

(m/s) (m) form
Healthy rock / fractured > 700 Any S1 0.85
≤ 50 S1 0.90
Soft rock or moderate > 400
> 50 S2 0.95
< 30 S1 0.90
Very hard or very dense floors > 400 30 - 50 S2 0.95
> 50 S3 1.00
< 15 S1 0.90
15 - 50 S2 0.95
Hard or dense floors 250 - 400 2
50 - 70 S3 1.00
> 70 S4 1.00
≤ 50 S2 3
1.00
Firm floors / medium dense 170 - 250 2
> 50 S3 1.00
≤ 15 S2 3 1.00
Soft floors / loose < 170 2
> 15 S3 1.00
Soft strata interspersed < H1 S2 1.00

< 170
with other more rigid floors 1 > H1 S3 0.90
H - Depth to which the material has a velocity, Vs, greater than 500 m/s.
H1 - Depth from the surface up to the top of the soft strata (m): ≥ 0.25 H.
Vsp - Average velocity on the geotechnic profile (m/s).
φ - Correction factor for the horizontal acceleration coefficient.
1. The thickness of the strata should be greater than 0.1 H.

2. If Ao ≤ 0.15, use S4.
If Ao ≤ 0.15, use S3.
PDVSA En Español
In English (see "PDVSA Seismic Data" on page 401)
Seccion 4.1 Escala de Referencia (JA-221 pagina 9)

Seleccionar el Grado de Riesgo asociado con el renglon de consecuencias mas desfavorables
descritas en la Tabla 4.1
p1 : Probabilidad anual de excedencia
Tabla 4.1 Escala de Clasificacion de Riesgos

CONDICIONES
Grado P1
de Numero de Perdidas economicas (10-3)
Impacto
Riesgo personas Ambiental
expuestas Materiales Lucro Cesante
Limitado a la
A Pocas (< 10) Despreciable Poco o Nulo ≤2
instalacion
Significativo
Importante La instalacion y Recuperacion
B Entre 1 ≤1
(11 to 100) alguna vecina ≤ 3 años
y 50 MMUS$
Elevado
La instalacion
numero Entre 50 y Recuperacion
C y numerosas ≤ 0.5
de personas 250 MMUS$ 3 a 10 años
vecinas
(100 to 500)
> 500 De naturaleza
D > 250 MMUS$ Irreversible ≤ 0.1
personas catastrofica
Nota: Cuando se presenten dudas en la seleccion del Grado de Riesgo, se adoptara el grado
de mayor riesgo
Seccion 6 Movimientos Sismicos de Diseño (JA-222 pagina 4)

ζ : factor de amortiguamiento
Tabla 6.1 Factor de Amortiguamiento
Tipo de Estructura Amortiguamiento (%)

Acero soldado 3
Acero empernado 5
Concreto reforzado 5
Segun Especificacion
Tanques metalicos
FJ-251
Seccion 8 Factor de Ductilidad (JA-222 pagina 4)

El diseño debe garantizar que el mecanismo de disipacion de energia en el cual se fundamenta
D no comprometa la estabilidad del sistema
D : factor de ductilidad
Tabla 8.1 Factores de Ductilidad
Tipo de Esctructura D Comentarios

Recipiente Vertical La eventual falla de la falda, asi como de los pernos
(falda metalica y pernos de conexion, es ductil. Se suministra suficiente
2
de longitud de deformacion a los pernos mediante
conexion con la fundacion) soportes expuestos ("silla para pernos").
Recipiente Vertical Falla ductil en los pernos de conexion con la fundacion.
(falda metalica y pernos 2 Se debe evitar la falla fragil de la falda. Se suministra
de suficiente longitud de deformacion a los pernos

conexion con la fundacion) mediante soportes expuestos

Recipiente Vertical
(falda metalica y pernos Falla no ductil del sistema, en la falda y/o pernos.
1
de No se recomienda esta situacion
conexion con la fundacion)
Recipiente Horizontal El mecanismo de falla del portico debe de ser ductil,
(sobre porticos de bajo el concepto de columna fuerte viga debil.
6
momento No se produce falla fragil y/o prematura en la conexion
de alta hiperestacidad) entre el recipiente y el portico
Recipiente Horizontal El mecanismo de falla del portico debe de ser ductil,
(sobre porticos de bajo el concepto de columna fuerte viga debil.
4
momento No se produce falla fragil y/o prematura en la conexion
de baja hiperestacidad) entre el recipiente y el portico
Recipiente Horizontal
1.5 Falla ductil de la columna
(sobre monocolumnas)
Recipiente Horizontal
4 Falla ductil del sistema
(sobre portico arriostrado)
Recipiente Horizontal 1.5 En el plano de los muros

(sobre muros) 2 En el plano perpendicular a los muros
Recipiente Horizontal 1.5 En el plano no arriostrado. Falla ductil de la columna.
(monocolumnas
arriostradas En el plano arriostrado. Cede primero el sistema de
3
con diagonales) arriostramiento en forma ductil
Seccion 10 Seleccion del Metodo de Analisis (JA-222 pagina 8)

Tabla 10.1 Seleccion del Metodo de Analisis
Altura de la Grado de Riesgo

Estructura Ao
(m) A B C D
≤ 0.15 Se Se Dy Dy
≤ 10
> 0.15 Se Dy Dy Dy
> 10 Any Dy Dy Dy Dy
Es : Estatico Equivalente
Di: Analisis Dinamico
Nota : El Metodo Estatico Equivalente es el requerimiento minimo para los casos descritos; por
tanto, puede ser reemplazado por el Metodo de Analysis Dinamico
Seccion 5.1 Seleccion de la Forma Espectral y del Factor φ (JA-221 pagina 11)
H : Profundidad a la cual se consigue material con velocidad, Vs, mayor que 500 m/s
H1 : Profundidad desde la superficie hasta el tope del estrato blando (m): ≥ 0.25 H
Vsp :Velocidad promedio de las ondas de corte en el perfil geotecnico (m/s)
φ :Factor de correccion del coeficiente de aceleracion horizontal
Table 5.1 Forma Espectral Tipificada y Factor φ

Material Vsp H Forma φ

(m/s) (m) espectral
Cualquier
Roca sana / fracturada > 700 S1 0.85
a
Roca blanda o moderadamente ≤ 50 S1 0.90

> 400
meteorizada > 50 S2 0.95
< 30 S1 0.90
Suelos muy duros o muy densos > 400 30 - 50 S2 0.95
> 50 S3 1.00
< 15 S1 0.90
15 - 50 S2 0.95
Suelos duros o densos 250 - 400
50 - 70 S3 (b) 1.00
> 70 S4 1.00
≤ 50 S2 (c) 1.00
Suelos firmes / medio densos 170 - 250
> 50 S3 (b) 1.00
≤ 15 S2 (c) 1.00
Suelos blandos / sueltos < 170
> 15 S3 (b) 1.00
Estratos blandos intercalados < H1 S2 1.00

< 170
con otros suelos mas rigidos(a) > H1 S3 0.90
(a) El espesor de los estratos debe ser mayor que 0.1 H
(b) Si Ao ≤ 0.15, usese S4
(c) Si Ao ≤ 0.15, usese S3

Seccion 6.1 Mapas de Amenaza Sismica (JA-221 pagina 12)

a*, γ : Valores obtenidos de los Mapas de Amenaza Sismica dados en las Figuras 6.1 y 6.2
Nota: Fig. 6.1 Mapa Amenaza Sismica, valores de a*

Nota: Fig. 6.2 Mapa Amenaza Sismica, valores de γ
Seccion 6.3 Espectro de Respuesta Elastica (JA-221 pagina 15)

Ad : Aceleracion espectral dividida por la aceleracion de gravedad (g)
g : Aceleracion de gravedad
Ao : Coeficiente de aceleracion maxima del terreno, Ao = a/g
To : Valor maximo del periodo que define parte del espectro elastico normalizado, en segundos.
T* : Valor maximo del periodo en el intervalo donde los espectros elasticos normalizados tienen
un valor constante, en segundos
β : Uno de los parametros que definen la forma de los espectros.
Tabla 6.1 Valores que definen la Forma del Espectro
Forma β To T*
espectral (s) (s)
S1 2.4 0.10 0.4
0.20
S2 2.6 0.8
S3 2.8 0.30 1.2

S4 3.0 0.40 1.6
Seccion 7 Espectros de Diseño (JA-221 pagina 18)

T+ : Menor valor del periodo en el intervalo donde los espectros de diseño tienen un valor
constante, en segundos.

Tabla 7.1 Valores de T+ (segundos)
T+
(s)
D<5 0.1 (D-1)
D≥5 0.4
Se debe cumplir To ≤ T+ ≤ T*
Res. Spectrum Seismic Data

Select this method to perform a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loads based upon the
selected seismic response spectrum.
Initially, the vessel is modeled as a two-dimensional structure. An Eigen solution is then
performed, which determines system mode shapes and modal natural frequencies. All modes
with natural frequencies up through 100 Hz are calculated. The seismic response of each mode
is extracted from the response spectrum according to the natural frequency of each mode, and
then adjusted according to the mode participation factor. The system response is then
determined by combining all of the modal responses.
For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical static
equivalent method. The calculated loads are usually lower in magnitude than those calculated
using conventional building code techniques.
Response Spectrum Name - Select the name of the spectra or code to use for the dynamic
analysis:
 User Defined - When this option is selected, you must select values for Range Type,
Ordinate Type, and Include Missing Mass Components. You must also click Edit /
Review Spectrum Points and enter values in the table. The same spectrum is applied in
the horizontal and vertical directions.
 ELCENTRO - This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California
earthquake, North-South component, 5-10% damping, as described in Introduction to
Structural Dynamics by John Biggs. The same spectrum is applied in the horizontal and
vertical directions.
 ASCE - Seismic analysis is performed according to the modal analysis procedure of ASCE
Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is built according to the ASCE-7 Section 9.4.1.2.6,
while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2S.
 IBC - Seismic analysis is performed according to the modal analysis procedure of the
International Building Code 2000, which mirrors ASCE-7. The horizontal spectrum is built
according to IBC-2000 Section 1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat
acceleration of 0.2 (according to IBC-2000 Section 1617. 1).
 1.60D.5 - The horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) spectra are specified in the United States
Nuclear Regulatory Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical
damping. This spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled to the value entered for Zero
Period Acceleration.
 1.60D2 - The horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) spectra are specified in the United States
Nuclear Regulatory Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 2% of critical

Importance Factor - Enter the importance factor, as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The
property. For ASCE, this is I, the occupancy importance factor according to ASCE-7 Section
9.14. For IBC, this is Ie, the occupancy importance factor according to IBC 1616.2.
Shock Scale Factor X | Y dir - Enter values for the shock scale factor in the X and Y directions.
The factors are used as multipliers on the horizontal and vertical spectrum data points. The
value is usually 1, but can be higher or lower to scale the spectra up or down. For example,
many seismic specifications require that the vertical spectrum be 2/3 the magnitude of the
horizontal spectrum. This corresponds to an X value of 1.0 and a Y value of 0.6667.
In the analysis of vertical vessels, the component in the vertical direction is typically ignored.
You can enter a value of 0 in the Y direction field.
Zero Period Acceleration - Enter a value for the ground acceleration ZPA. This parameter
does double duty, depending upon the analysis type. When used with certain predefined
normalized response spectra, it is used as the acceleration factor (in g's) by which the spectrum
is scaled. For example, when a spectrum analysis uses a Response Spectrum Name
beginning with 1.60, such as, 1.60D.5 or 1.60D7, the software constructs an earthquake
spectrum according to the instructions given USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60. That guide
requires that the shape of the response spectrum be chosen from the curves shown in Figures
6-5 and 6-6, based upon the system damping value (such as the ".5" in the spectrum names
1.60H.5 ). The Reg Guide 1.60 curves are normalized to represent ZPA of one g; the true value
is actually site dependent. Therefore, entering a ZPA value here appropriately scales any
Regulatory Guide 1.60 curve to meet site requirements.
Combination Method - Enter the spectral summation method mode that most accurately
captures the statistical correlation of the responses:
 SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of the Squares. This method states that the total system
response is equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual modal
responses. (This is effectively the same as using the DSRSS method with all correlation
coefficients equal to 0.0, or the Group method, with none of the modes being closely
spaced.) This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are
completely independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution
throughout the duration of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if
there are any modes with very close frequencies, because those modes will probably
experience their maximum DLF at approximately the same time during the load profile.
 Group - This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method
attempts to eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods by assuming that
modes are completely correlated with any modes with similar (closely spaced) frequencies,
and are completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies.
Effectively, this method dictates that the responses of any modes which have frequencies

within 10% of each other first be added together absolutely, with the results of each of these
groups then combined with the remaining individual modal results using the SRSS method.
 Absolute - This method states that the total system response is equal to the sum of the
absolute values of the individual modal responses. (This is effectively the same as using the
DSRSS method with all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the Group method, with all
modes being closely spaced.) This method gives the most conservative result, since it
assumes that the all maximum modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the
course of the applied load. This is usually overly-conservative, because modes with different
natural frequencies will probably experience their maximum DLF at different times during the
load profile.
Acc. Based Factor Fa - Enter a value for the acceleration factor Fa. This factor is from Table
and Site Class:


A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 [0.9]1
F See note 1

performed.
Acc. Based Factor Fv - Enter a value for the acceleration factor Fv. This factor is from Table
and Site Class:
Fv

A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5

E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 [2.4]1

F See note 1

performed.
323 (IBC 2003).
Response Modification R - Enter the response modification factor R, from table 9.5.2.2
(ASCE) / 1617.6 (IBC). The value is usually 2.5 for inverted pendulum systems and cantilevered
column systems and 4.0 for elevated tanks. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels, and
others use a value of 3.0. The larger the value of R is, the more conservative the analysis
becomes.
Coefficient Cd - Enter a value for Cd, the deflection amplitude factor given. For ASCE-7 it is
determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6. This
parameter is used in conjunction with the importance factor and the deflection at level x to
calculate the modal deflection at each level. The values in the table range from 2 to 6.5. The
larger value leads to a more conservative result.
Range Type - Select the range type of the abscissa/ordinate axis of the spectrum: Frequency
or Period. Click Edit / Review Spectrum Points to enter data points in ascending order.
Ordinate Type - Select the Y-axis ordinate type of the spectrum curve:
 Displacement - Diameter
 Velocity - Diameter/second
 Acceleration - Diameter/second2 of G's
Include Missing Mass Components - Select to include a correction to the spectrum analysis
which represents the contribution of higher order modes not explicitly extracted for the
modal/dynamic response, thus providing greater accuracy without additional calculation time.
When this option is selected, the software automatically calculates the net (in-phase)
contribution of all non-extracted modes and combines it with the modal contributions, avoiding
the long calculation time associated with the extraction of the high order modes and the possible
excessive conservativism of the summation methods.

During spectrum (either seismic or force spectrum) or time history analyses, the response of a
system under a dynamic load is determined by superposition of modal results. One of the
advantages of this type of modal analysis is that usually only a limited number of modes are
excited and need to be included in the analysis. Only modes with natural frequencies up to
about 100 Hz are used. The drawback to this method is that although displacements may be
obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes (possibly far into the rigid
range) before acceptable accuracy is attained. Select Include Missing Mass Components to
avoid this drawback.
Edit / Review Spectrum Points - Click to open the Spectrum Data Points dialog box. Enter
your values for Acc. G's at each needed Period Secs. Enter data points in ascending order.
Interpolation is made linearly for intermediate range values. A zero value is invalid.
UBC 1994 Seismic Data

Enter data for the UBC 1994 seismic code.
directly without modification. Values are taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
Category Classification Importance

Factor
I Essential facilities 1.25
II Hazardous facilities 1.25
III Special occupancy structures 1.0
IV Standard occupancy structures 1.0
Soil Type - Select a soil type, defined in Table 23-J of the code:
 Soil 1 - Soil Profile S1. Rock or stiff soil conditions (S Factor = 1.0).
 Soil 2 - Soil Profile S2. Deep cohesionless deposits or stiff clay conditions (S Factor = 1.2).
 Soil 3 - Soil Profile S3. Soft to medium-stiff clays and sands (S Factor = 1.5).
 Soil 4 - Soil Profile S4. More than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 12.0).
When soil properties are not known, select Soil 3.
Horizontal Force Factor - Enter the seismic force factor for non-building structure Rw,
according to UBC Table 23-Q:
 3 - Tanks, vessels, or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs.
 4 - Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt
supported vertical vessels.
Seismic Zone - Select the seismic zone, according to UBC-97, Figure 16-2:
Seismic Zone
Seismic
Description Factor Z
Zone
(Table 16-I)
0 Gulf and prairies 0.00
1 Rockies and Appalachian areas 0.075
2a New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks 0.15
2b Valley area west of the Rockies and 0.20

the Pacific Northwest

3 Sierras 0.30
4 California fault areas 0.40
UBC 1997 Seismic Data

Enter data for the UBC 1997 seismic code.
directly without modification. Values are taken from Table 16-K of the UBC 1997 standard:
Category Classification Importance

Factor
1 Essential facilities 1.25
2 Hazardous facilities 1.25
3 Special occupancy structures 1.0
4 Standard occupancy structures 1.0
Seismic Coefficient Ca - Enter the value of seismic coefficient CA according to the project
specifications and seismic table 16-Q of UBC 1997. This value is a function of the seismic zone
Z and the soil profile type.
In zone 4, CA is also a function of near-source factor Na, table 16-S of UBC 1997. Na is
a function of the Seismic Source Type, table 16-U pf UBC 1997.
Table 16-Q
Soil Seismic Coefficient Ca

Profile for Seismic Zone Factor Z of:
Type
Z=0.075 Z=0.15 Z=0.2 Z=0.3 Z=0.4
Sa 0.06 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.32Na
Sb 0.08 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40Na
Sc 0.09 0.18 0.24 0.33 0.40Na
Sd 0.12 0.22 0.28 0.36 0.44Na
Se 0.19 0.30 0.34 0.36 0.36Na
Sf Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site
response shall be performed to determine seismic
coefficients for soil profile Type Sf.
Table 16-S
Seismic Near-Source Factor Na1

Source for Closest Distance to Known Seismic Source of: 2,3
Type
<= 2 km 5 km >=10 km

A 1.5 1.2 1.0

B 1.3 1.0 1.0
C 1.0 1.0 1.0
Table 16-U
Seismic Seismic Source Description Maximum Slip Rate, SR

Source Moment (mm/year)
Type4 Magnitude, M
Faults that are capable of producing large M>= 7 SR>=5
A Magnitude events and that have a high rate of
seismic activity
M>=7 SR < 5
B All Faults other than types A and C M<7 SR>2
M>=6.5 SR<2
Faults that are not capable of producing large M<6.5 SR<=2
C magnitude earthquakes and that have a
relatively low rate of seismic activity.
1. The near-source factor may be based on the linear interpolation of values for distances
other than those shown in the table.
2. The location and type of seismic sources to be used for design shall be established on
approved geotechnical data (such as the most recent mapping of active faults by the United
States Geological Survey or the California Division of Mines and Geology).
3. The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken as the minimum distance between the
site and the area described by the vertical projection of the source on the surface (that is,
surface projection from fault plane). The surface projection need not include portions of the
source at depths of 10 km or greater. The largest value of the near-source factor
considering all sources shall be used for design.
4. Subduction sources shall be evaluated on a site specific basis.
Seismic Coefficient Cv - Enter the value of seismic coefficient CV according to the project
specifications and seismic table 16-R of UBC 1997. This value is a function of the seismic zone
Z and the soil profile type.
In zone 4 CV is also a function of Near Source Factor Nv.
Table 16-R
Soil Seismic Coefficient Cv

Profile for Seismic Zone Factor Z of:
Type
Z=0.075 Z=0.15 Z=0.2 Z=0.3 Z=0.4
Sa 0.06 0.12 0.16 0.24 0.32Nv
Sb 0.08 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40Nv
Sc 0.13 0.25 0.24 0.45 0.56Nv
Sd 0.18 0.32 0.28 0.54 0.64Nv

Se 0.26 0.50 0.34 0.84 0.96Nv

Sf Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site
response shall be performed to determine seismic
coefficients for soil profile Type Sf.
Near Source Factor Nv - Enter the value of the near source factor Nv, table 16-Q of UBC 1997.
This factor is only used in UBC Seismic Zone 4. This value ranges from 1 to 2 and is a function
of the distance relative to the seismic source.
Nv is a function of the Seismic Source Type, table 16-U pf UBC 1997.
Table 16-T
Seismic Near-Source Factor Nv1

Source for Closest Distance to Known Seismic Source of: 2,3
Type
<= 2 km 5 km 10 km >=15 km
A 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.0
B 1.6 1.2 1.0 1.0
C 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Table 16-U
Seismic Seismic Source Description Maximum Slip Rate, SR

Source Moment (mm/year)
Type4 Magnitude, M
Faults that are capable of producing large M>= 7 SR>=5
A Magnitude events and that have a high rate of
seismic activity
M>=7 SR < 5
B All Faults other than types A and C M<7 SR>2
M>=6.5 SR<2
Faults that are not capable of producing large M<6.5 SR<=2
C magnitude earthquakes and that have a
relatively low rate of seismic activity.
1. The near-source factor may be based on the linear interpolation of values for distances
other than those shown in the table.
2. The location and type of seismic sources to be used for design shall be established on
approved geotechnical data (such as the most recent mapping of active faults by the United
States Geological Survey or the California Division of Mines and Geology).
3. The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken as the minimum distance between the
site and the area described by the vertical projection of the source on the surface (that is,
surface projection from fault plane). The surface projection need not include portions of the
source at depths of 10 km or greater. The largest value of the near-source factor
considering all sources shall be used for design.
4. Subduction sources shall be evaluated on a site specific basis.
Seismic Zone - Select the seismic zone, according to UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2:

Seismic Zone
Seismic
Description Factor Z
Zone
(Table 23-I)
0 Gulf and prairies 0.00
1 Rockies and Appalachian areas 0.075
2a New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks 0.15
Valley area west of the Rockies and
2b 0.20
the Pacific Northwest
3 Sierras 0.30
4 California fault areas 0.40
Force Factor R or Rp - Enter the seismic force factor R according to Table 16-P, UBC 1997. R
is defined as the numerical coefficient representative of the inherent overstrength and global
ductility of lateral force resisting systems.
 2.2 - Tanks on braced or unbraced legs.
 2.9 - Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt
supported vertical vessels.
Apply Allowables per 1612.3.2 - Select to use UBC 1997 provisions for earthquake loadings in
paragraph 1612.3.2. Paragraph 1612.3.1 does not allow any increase in allowables, but
1612.3.2, the second (alternate) paragraph does. When this option is selected, the software
applies an increase in allowable stresses of 1.33 to the skirt and a value of 1.2 to all other
elements. Apply Allowables per 1612.3.2 also overrides Use Higher Long. Stress on the
Design Constraints tab.

Component Elevation Ratio hx/hr - Enter a value for the elevation ratio if the vessel is
attached to another structure, such as a building The ratio, needed for proper analysis, is the
height in the structure where the vessel is attached hx to the average height of the roof hr.
Generally, this value is less than or equal to 1. For more information, see Section 1632.2, UBC
1997.


SECTION 19
PV Elite Analysis
PV Elite performs the analysis of heat exchangers according to the following codes:
 ASME Section VIII Division 1
 TEMA 1998
 PD 5500: 2006
 EN-13445 (U-tubes only at the time of this writing)
ASME Tubesheet (heat exchanger) analysis rules were formerly found in Appendix AA, but in
2003, were re-written and moved to the main body of the code, Part UHX. TEMA and PD 5500
methods of analysis have undergone little change sin recent years.
Formerly, tubesheets could only be analyzed using CodeCalc via Component Analysis Data
(see "Component Analysis" on page 186) . While this command is still available, analysis
directly in PV Elite has a number of advantages:
 Tubesheets are integrated into a model with cylindrical shells (main shell and channels),
heads, and nozzles.
 The total weight of the heat exchanger is calculated, including all of its component parts.
 Supports, such as saddles, are analyzed directly from the integrated model, ensuring that all
weights and applied loads are addressed.
 Tubesheet reports are part of the overall analysis.
 For ASME, the MAWP/MAPnc of the entire exchanger is calculated, including tubesheet,
tubes, expansion joint, and floating head. These allowable pressures are calculated for each
side shell and channel. The hydrotest for each side can also calculated.
 The tubesheet design code can be changed between TEMA and ASME with little
modification to the input data.
Calculating and Displaying Vessel Analysis Results

Each of these steps calculates and displays specific results of a vessel analysis. A brief
description of the key analysis steps is defined below:
Step 0: Error Checking

The input program will have already caught most of the errors that are easily made. However,
there are some errors that can only be discovered after the analysis begins. There are also
some warnings that may be helpful. This first routine check creates a report in the output. If any
of the input errors prevents the software from running, execution stops here. Check the output to
determine the exact error discovered by the program.
Step 1: Input Echo

PV Elite provides a complete listing of your input. This includes the geometry and materials for
each element (head, shell, cone, flange, skirt, etc.) and the information for any details attached
to that element.
Step 2: XY Coordinate Calculations

The program calculates the X and Y locations of the first end of every element.

PV Elite Analysis
Step 3: Internal Pressure Calculations

The geometry, material, and loading data from your model are used to calculate the required
thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each element (except skirts and
flanges). The calculations are done using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, or the
British Standard PD:5500 rules. The internal design pressure at any point is taken to be the
given design pressures for that element, plus the pressure due to liquid head, if any.
If you checked the Increase Thickness For Internal Pressure design flag and any element is
too thin for the given pressure, the program will automatically (or under interactive control)
increase the thickness of the element. There is a computation control (under Utilities on the
Main Menu) that allows you to increase the element thickness to exactly that required, or to
round the thickness up to the next nominal size.
If the program has increased the thickness, it will recalculate all the required thicknesses and
maximum allowable working pressures for the vessel, and create a new table showing these
results.
After the internal pressure calculation is complete, PV Elite prints the formulas and substitutions,
as well the minimum design metal temperatures for the elements.
Step 4: Hydrotest Calculations

The user specifies what kind of hydrotest (and/or the hydrotest pressure) on the global input
screens. The program uses this information to calculate the maximum allowed hydrotest
pressure and required thickness at the given pressure for each element.
Step 5: External Pressure Calculations

The user explicitly defines two of the three key variables for external pressure calculations:
diameter and thickness. The program calculates the third variable, length of section, for the
given geometry. Thus if the vessel has two heads and some number of cylindrical elements with
no stiffening rings, the program will calculate the design length for each cylinder using the full
length of the vessel plus 1/3 the depth of the heads. If there are stiffening rings, the program will
calculate an appropriately shorter value.
The program displays the formulas and substitutions for the external pressure calculations on
each element. Then the same results are displayed in tabular form.
If the element is not thick enough for the external pressure (and you checked the design boxes
in the input) the program will allow you to increase the thickness and/or add stiffening rings
(which are created automatically and added to your model). If the thickness is increased the
program has to go back to step 3. For rings it repeats this step with the new lengths.
British Standard PD:5500

When performing the PD:5500 external pressure calculations, the program first computes the
length of section for the given geometry. The length of section is either the distance between
stiffeners, or, if there are no stiffeners, it is the full length of the vessel plus 0.4 times the depth
of the heads.
Using the length of section computed, the program first tests to see whether the thickness of the
unsupported cylinder (or distance between supports) is satisfactory for the given pressure. A
value of Pmax is determined.
If there are stiffeners, then the program performs the calculations described in section 3.6.2.3.
The program first performs the computations described in Method A, and then performs the
more rigorous calculations described in Method B. For each of these methods (and each value
of n), a value of Pn and Fn are obtained.

PV Elite Analysis
Pn is the elastic instability pressure of the stiffened cylinder or cone. The value of Pn must not
be less than 1.8*Pext in the case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2.0*Pext in the case
of cold formed stiffeners.
Fn is the maximum stress in the stiffener flange divided by the yield stress of the stiffener. A
value for Fn is computed for both fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and cold formed stiffeners.
These values must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Step 6: Weight of Elements

Element weights are calculated in both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. Note that for
heads the distance given in the input program is taken as the length of the straight flange on the
head. This step also calculates the volume of the element.
Step 7: Weight of Details

Each detail has a separate weight calculation. Of note is the fact that partial volumes of liquid in
both the heads and the cylinders and in both the horizontal and vertical directions are correctly
calculated.
Step 8: ANSI Flange MAWP

If you entered nozzles, you specified the material and class of the attached flanges. PV Elite has
the full ANSI flange tables built in, and tells you the rating of the flanges at the operating
temperature.
Steps 9 and 10: Total Weight And Detail Moment

Several weight cases are calculated including: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The various
detail weights/loads are included in the following cases:
Detail Empty Operating Hydrotest

Saddle # # #
Platform # # #
Packing #
Liquid #
Insulation # # #
Lining # # #
Rings # # #
Nozzles # # #
Saddles # # #
Trays #
Legs # # #
Lugs # # #
Weights # # #
Forces/Moments #

PV Elite Analysis
This step also calculates the moment due to individual details, which may not be on the
centerline of the vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the
support. The vertical force and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated for
the 'one support' case (skirts, legs, lugs) and the vertical force at each support is calculated
when there is two saddle supports.
In addition to computing the above weights PV Elite also computes the fabricated weight,
shop test weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test weight. The
computed weights may or may not include removable or field installed items such as packing
and other details. You can specify where these details are to be installed (either shop or field) in
the Global Input. Switch to the global input screen and click the Installation Miscellaneous
Options button located at the top of the screen. By default the program assumes that all details
will be installed in the shop and calculate these various weights based on that assumption.
The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels on
saddle supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight force
at the ends or in the middle.
Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at the
support. If there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be negative.
The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually quite
small (except in the case of a large applied moment).
Step 11: Natural Frequency Calculation

PV Elite uses two classical solution methods to determine the first order natural frequencies of
vessels. For vertical vessels, the program uses the Freese method, which is commonly used in
industry. For horizontal vessels a similar method attributed to Rayleigh and Ritz is used. Each
method works by calculating the static deflection of the vessel (for vertical, the vessel as a
horizontal cantilever beam). The natural frequency is proportional to the square root of the
deflection. PV Elite uses the matrix solution methods (Eigen Solution) to determine the modes of
vibration. Horizontal vessels are assumed to be rigid and as such are assigned a frequency of
33 hertz, which is coincident of a ZPA for a rigid structure.
Step 12: Wind Load Calculation

PV Elite uses the rules of ASCE-7, NBC, UBC, and IS-875 to calculate wind loads. Each of
these codes uses a basic wind pressure, a function of the velocity squared, along with several
surface and site factors to determine the final wind pressure.
Step 13: Earthquake Load Calculation

The five codes used by the software - ASCE-7, UBC, NBC, IS-1893 RSM and IS-1893 SCM
each use a static equivalent load to model the earthquake load. Simple site data and loading
data are used to determine an expected static equivalent horizontal load on the vessel.
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel, but can
cause high overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the cumulative
shear and bending moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
Step 15: Wind Deflection

PV Elite calculates the deflection at every point in either horizontal or vertical vessels.

PV Elite Analysis
Step 16: Longitudinal Stress Constants

As the program prepares to do structural calculations on the vessel, it first calculates the cross
sectional area and section modulus of each element in both the corroded and uncorroded
condition.
Step 17: Longitudinal Allowable Stresses

There are four allowable stresses in the longitudinal direction for each element: (1) Longitudinal
tension based on the basic allowable stress, often multiplied times 1.2 (as specified on the
global input), (2) Hydrotest longitudinal tension - 1.5 times the allowable stress new & cold. (3)
Longitudinal compression - based on paragraph UG-23 of the Code, and the material's external
pressure chart. (4) Hydrotest allowable compression - the basic allowable compression new &
cold, multiplied by 1.5.
Step 18: Longitudinal Stresses Due to . . .

Each load (wind, earthquake, weight, pressure) generates a stress. These are calculated
individually and displayed by this routine. Note that bending stresses, though only displayed
once, are actually positive on one side of the vessel and negative on the other.
Step 19: Stress Due to Combined Loads

In this step the various load cases combinations defined by the user are evaluated. If there are
applied forces and moments in the model, then other identifiers such as BS, BN and so forth
may appear in the load case definition.
There can be as many as twenty cases, combining pressure loads, weight loads, and moments
in various ways. A fairly complete set of load cases is included as a default:
Load Case Definition

1 NP+EW+WI+FW No pressure + empty weight + wind
2 NP+EW+EQ+FS No pressure + empty weight + earthquake
3 NP+OW+WI+FW No pressure + operating weight + wind
4 NP+OW+EQ+FS No pressure + operating weight + earthquake
5 NP+HW+HI No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
6 NP+HW+HE No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro earthquake
7 IP+OW+WI+FW Internal pressure + operating weight + wind
8 IP+OW+EQ+FS Internal pressure + operating weight + earthquake
9 EP+OW+WI+FW External pressure + operating weight + wind
10 EP+OW+EQ+FS External pressure + operating weight + earthquake
11 HP+HW+HI Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
12 HP+HW+HE Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest wind + hydro earthquake
13 IP+WE+EW Internal pressure + wind empty + empty weight
14 IP+WF+CW Internal pressure + wind filled + empty weight no ca
15 IP+VO+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (OPE) + operating weight

PV Elite Analysis
Load Case Definition

16 IP+VE+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (EMP) + operating weight
17 IP+VF+CW Internal pressure+ vortex shedding (Filled) + empty weight no ca
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage)
defined by the user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global Data -
usually about 33% (thus setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating wind load).
Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake load is a percentage of the earthquake load; this percentage
is defined in the Seismic Data definition of Global Data.
Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will not be
printed. Also, if a vessel has no supports, then there will be no calculations that involve wind or
seismic loads.
Optional Steps
PV Elite includes the following analyses that are performed under specific circumstances:
1. Cone Evaluation - Cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large and
small ends, and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated.
2. Zick Stresses - Stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allowable
stresses using the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for each
saddle, since in PV Elite each saddle can have different loading. Note also that the stresses
are not evaluated at the mid span, since the program automatically does that for all the
various load case combinations.
3. AISC Leg Check: After the software has computed all of the weights, forces and moments,
it can then determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity check method. The
software typically looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind or seismic in the operating
condition and then applies the AISC method of checking the legs. The unity check must be
less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical designs fall in the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good
check both in terms of economy and safety.
4. Lug Support Check - Similar in manner to the Leg Check feature, the software gathers the
worst loads on the support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of acceptable
standards. In this case, gussets are checked by the AISC method and the lug plates are
checked by common industry standard methods. These methods are outlined in common
pressure design handbooks.
5. Baserings - With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the basering,
PV Elite will analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry.
6. Flanges - For main body flanges, the software computes the required thickness of the
flange, all relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen in the
output are based on the input thickness. The software additionally computes the required
thickness of the flange. Please note that the software does not include the forces and
moments to determine an equivalent design pressure. There are separate fields in the input
that can be entered if these effects are to be considered. In order to do this, two runs would
have to made. After run 1 was made, the forces and moments on the flange could be
entered as needed.
7. Nozzle Analysis - Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the software based on
the rules in the ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External
Pressure and MAPnc. The internal pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire vessel
or the exact pressure at the nozzle location. These options are located in the Global Input
section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles, hillside geometries are also

PV Elite Analysis
considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered by using the ANG=xx.x command in the
nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also computes MDMT, weld size and strength
calculations along with provisions for large nozzles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of the ASME
Code. Another description option is for small nozzles. If there is a small nozzle that must
have area calculations performed, enter the text "#SN" as part of the nozzle description. By
default PV Elite will not calculate small openings for Division 1 vessels per UG-36. If local
loads have been defined on the nozzle, the nozzle report will display the results from WRC
107 or PD 5500 Annex G, or WRC 297 whichever one was selected.
8. Fatigue Analysis - The fatigue analysis is activated when the number of pressure cycles is
specified on the Design/Analysis Constraints screen. Click the Perform Fatigue
Analysis button to display the dialog. Change the number of pressure cycles. This value
must be between 1 and 20. This cumulative damage analysis is in accordance with PD:5500
2000 Annex C. In order for this analysis to activate, at least one nozzle must be specified. In
the Nozzle dialog, there is a check box and a pull down selection menu describing the class
of the weld attachment per Annex C. After all of the data is specified, PV Elite produces the
Fatigue Analysis Report.
9. Tubesheet Analysis - When the vessel design Code is ASME VIII or PD 5500, tubesheets
are allowed to be defined. They can be attached to flange or cylinder parent elements. PV
Elite computes tubesheet required thickness, shell and tube stresses per the rules of TEMA,
ASME Part UHX or PD 5500.
10. Skirt Hole Opening Analysis - For vertical skirt supported vessels, PV Elite can compute
bending and axial stresses due to missing material in skirt openings typically for pipe
openings, vents and access openings.
11. ASME App. EE Analysis - If you have specified a helical half pipe jacket, this analysis will
be performed per ASME Appendix EE.
12. ASME App. 14 large Central Opening Analysis - For Welded Flat heads, the analysis of
large central opening can be performed per Appendix 14.
13. Clip Analysis - If support clips have been entered in, these items are analyzed using
industry standard methods.
14. Lifting Lugs - Like clips, the stresses in the shell and lugs are calculated at various angles
depending on the final orientation of the vessel.
15. Tubesheet Analysis - If the model contains tubesheet data, tubesheet analysis per the
chosen Code (TEMA, ASME etc) will be listed in the report output.
Nozzle Analysis
PV Elite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a pressure
vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and
optional reinforcing pad. The software also calculates the strength of failure paths for the
nozzles. This calculation is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph
UG-37 through UG-45. The calculation procedure is based on figure UG-37.1.
The software calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on inside
diameter for the following vessel components:
Component Paragraph Limitations
Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) None

2:1 Elliptical Head UG-32 (d) (1) None
Torispherical Head UG-32 (e) (1) None

PV Elite Analysis
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) None

PV Elite also analyzes a large nozzle in a welded flat head, which is found in this user
manual where the flat head is discussed.
The software evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the
perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
Nozzle (on page 70) takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the software adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition. Nozzle also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design
Metal Temperature (MDMT) calculations for nozzles.
As the nozzle data is entered, PV Elite automatically performs the ASME area of replacement or
PD:5500/EN-13445 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed every time the
cursor is moved in between input cells. If there is any error in the input that will not allow the
analysis to be performed, a status of failed appears at the bottom of the Nozzle Input/Analysis
dialog box. The calculation is initiated once the pipe size is specified. If you are changing data,
such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells, press F5 to force PV Elite to
re-calculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result will appear in red. A
nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically the area and minimum
nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program displays the text failed in brackets, even though the
area of replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this feature, we suggest that the entire
vessel be modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle pressure design options set. Also, for
vessels that have ANSI or DIN flanges note that the flange pressure rating will be shown at the
bottom of the nozzle dialog.
The figure below displays the nozzle geometry:

SECTION 20
Output Processor
Output from PV Elite analysis is stored in a binary data file that has the same name as the input
file but with a ".T80" extension. Use Review Reports (on page 192) to review every report
contained in the output from input echo through stress reports.
Each analysis module creates its own report in the output data file. Most of the reports take the
form of tables with the rows related to the elements and the columns holding the values such as
thickness, MAWP, and stress.
Output Processor Dialog Box

Create Word Document - Create Microsoft Word document of the selected report.
Create ASME Form - Creates an ASME U-1 or U-2 form for the vessel by creating a
Microsoft Excel workbook and running a macro that populates worksheet fields with the
calculated results from the .pvu analysis results file. This form is copied from the master
template form in the PV Elite\System folder.
After the form is opened in Microsoft Excel, the results data can be transferred into the form by
clicking Import Latest Results (an Excel macro) at the top of the worksheet.
Because this is an Excel macro, ensure that macros are allowed to load.
If the analysis is run repeatedly, click Import Latest Results again. This overlays the latest
results into the spreadsheet. If you have typed non-imported material (like the Inspector's
name), this data is not overwritten.
All information in the form must be correct and match the vessel. Please check the
data carefully before submitting the form to the National Board or appropriate authorities. Some
form information, such as the drawing number, position, and manufacturer is available by
clicking Tools > ASME Form Information and opening the Additional Vessel Information
dialog box. For more information, see Enter U-1 Form Information (on page 218).
Report Up - Select a report and click to move the report up the list.
Report Down - Select a report and click to move the report down the list.

 Customize report header (on page 432)
 Customize company name (on page 432)
 Customize the title page (on page 432)
 Setting default fonts (on page 432)
 Save reports to Microsoft Word (on page 432)

Output Processor
Customize report header

2. Click Input > Heading in the Input / Output panel.
3. Enter your header information in Line 1, Line 2, and Line 3 boxes.
4. Click Save .
The custom header is inserted the next time you review results.
Customize company name

1. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the PV Elite System folder. By default, this location is
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVElite\2013\system.
2. Using Notepad or another ASCII file editor, edit company.txt.
3. Put your company name in the first line of the file.
4. Save and exit the file.
The next time you run an analysis, your company name will appear in the report results
header.
Customize the title page

1. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the PV Elite System folder. By default, this location is
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVElite\2013\system.
2. Using Notepad or another ASCII file editor, edit TITLE.HED.
3. Edit the title page text as needed.
4. Save and exit the file.
The next time you run an analysis, your custom title page text will appear in the Title Page
report.
Setting default fonts

1. Click Review on the Home tab, Analyze panel.
2. At the bottom-left of Output Processor, select the Options tab.
Save reports to Microsoft Word

1. Click Review on the Home tab, Analyze panel.
2. Select the report or reports to output to Microsoft Word.
3. Click Word Document .

SECTION 21
Material Dialog Boxes

The Material Database and Material Properties dialog boxes are available in many commands
throughout the software.
Material Database Dialog Box (on page 433)
Material Properties Dialog Box (on page 474)
Material Database Dialog Box

Displays materials and material properties. Select the needed material. To modify material
properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.
Below are examples of standard ASME material names.
Plates and Bolting Stainless Steels
 SA-516 55  SA-240 304
 SA-516 60  SA-240 304L
 SA-516 65  SA-240 316
 SA-516 70  SA-240 316L
 SA-193 B7  SA-193 B8
 SA-182-F1 Aluminum
 SA-182 F1  SB-209
 SA-182 F11  SB-234
 SA-182 F12 Titanium
 SA-182 F22  SB-265 1
 SA-105  SB-265 26H
 SA-36 Nickel
 SA-106 B  SB-409
 SB-424
If you used old CodeCalc material names in previous CodeCalc versions, see the
CodeCalc appendix for comparisons with ASME code names.
Material Search String - Enter part of the material name to search against.
Find Next Match - Click to go to the next matching material name available.
UNS # Search String - Enter part of the UNS # to search against.
Select Material - Click to use the selected material.
Cancel - Exit the dialog box without selecting a material.Material Database Notes
These notes are valid for the 2010 edition of ASME Section II Part D. If using an older database,
these notes may not be correct or meaningful as they are periodically changed by ASME.
Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) - Customary
(a) The following abbreviations are used: Applic., Applicability; Cond.,
Condition; Desig., Designation; Smls., Seamless; and Wld., Welded.

(b) The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values
for intermediate temperatures.
(c) For Section VIII applications, stress values in restricted shear such as
dowel bolts or similar construction in which the shearing member is so
restricted that the section under consideration would fail without
reduction of area shall be 0.80 times the value in the above table.
(d) For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times
the values in the above Table.
(e) Stress values for –20 to 100F are applicable for colder temperatures
when toughness requirements of Section III or Section VIII are met.
(f) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from time
dependent properties (see notes T1 - T10 )
(h) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat
treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements. See
Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information.
G1 To these stress values a casting quality factor as specified in PG-25 of
Section I or UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1 shall be applied.
G2 These stress values include a joint efficiency factor of 0.60.
G4 For Section I applications, these stresses apply when used for boiler,
water wall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed within
a setting. A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 is included in values above
850F.
G5 Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these higher
stress values were established at temperatures where the short time
tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys where slightly
greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range
exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at
temperature. Use of these stresses may results in dimensional changes
due to permanent strain. These stress values are not recommended for
the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts
of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists
multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values
shown in table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in
lower values of permanent strain.
G6 Creep-fatigue, thermal ratcheting, and environmental effects are
increasingly signiificant failure modes at temperatures in excess of
1500F and shall be considered in the design.
G7 Deleted
G8 Deleted
G9 For Section III applications, the stress-rupture test is not required for
design temperatures 800F and below.
G10 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800F, the carbide
phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite.

G11 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875F, the carbide

phase of carbon–molybdenum steel may be converted to graphite.
G12 At temperatures above 1000F, these stress values apply only when the
carbon is 0.04% or higher on heat analysis.
G13 These stress values at 1050F and above shall be used only when the
grain size is ASTM No. 6 or coarser.
G14 These stress values shall be used when the grain size is not determined
or is determined to be finer than ASTM No. 6.
G15 For Section I applications, use is limited to stays as defined in PG-13
except as permitted by PG-11.
G16 For Section III Class 3 applications, these S values do not include a
casting quality factor. Statically and centrifugally cast products meeting
the requirements of NC-2570 shall receive a casting quality factor of
1.00.
G17 For Section III Class 3 applications, statically and centrifugally cast
products meeting the requirements of NC-2571(a) and (b), and cast pipe
fittings, pumps, and valves with inlet piping connections of 2 in. nominal
pipe size and less, shall receive a casting quality factor of 1.00. Other
casting quality factors shall be in accordance with the following:
a. for visual examination, 0.80;
b. for magnetic particle examination 0.85;
c. for liquid penetrant examination, 0.85;
d. for radiography, 1.00;
e. for ultrasonic examination, 1.00; and
f. for magnetic particle or liquid penetrant plus ultrasonic
examination or radiography, 1.00.
G18 See Table Y-1 for yield strength values as a function of thickness over
this range. Allowable stresses are independent of yield strength in this
thickness range.
G19 Although external pressure chart title is listed for SA-537, use Class 1
curves for this specification.
G20 Although external pressure chart title is listed for SA-537, use Class 2
curves for this specification.
G21 For external pressure chart listing, use Class 1 curve.
G22 For Section I applications, use of external pressure charts for material in
the form of barstock is permitted for stiffening rings only.
G23 For temperatures above the maximum temperature shown on the
external pressure chart for this material, Fig. CS-2 may be used for the
design using this material.
G24 A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum allowable
stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85
for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress.

G25 For Section III applications, for both Class 2 and Class 3, the completed
vessel after final heat treatment shall be examined by the ultrasonic
method in accordance with NB-2542 except that angle beam
examination in both the circumferential and the axial directions.
G26 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted.
G27 Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted.
G28 Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781, Alternate Tension Test
Coupons and Specimen Locations for Castings, is mandatory.
G29 For Section III applications, impact testing in accordance with the
requirements of NC-2300 is required for Class 2 components and in
accordance with ND-2300 for Class 3 components.
G30 For Section VIII applications, these stress values are based on expected
minimum values of 45,000 psi tensile strength and yield strength of
20,000 psi resulting from loss of strength due to thermal treatment
required for the glass coating operation. UG-85 does not apply.
G31 These stress values are established from a consideration of strength
only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints where
freedom from leakage over a long period of time without retightening is
required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the
flexibility of the flange and bolts and corresponding relaxation properties.
G32 This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement after service at
moderately elevated temperature; see Appendix 6. For P-No. 10H Gr. 1
materials, exposure to temperatures in the range of 1100F to 1700ºF for
relatively short periods of time may result in severe loss of ductility due
to sigma formation; see 6-340 and 6-360.
G33 These stresses are based on weld metal properties.
G34 For Section I, use is limited to PEB-5.3. See PG-5.5 for cautionary note.
H1 For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if
the material is solution treated by heating to the minimum temperature
specified in the material specification, but not lower than 1900F, and
quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
H2 For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used only if
the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of
2000F, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
H3 DELETED
H4 DELETED
H5 For Section III applications, if heat treatment is performed after forming
or fabrication, it shall be performed at 1500–1850F for a period of time
not to exceed 10 min at temperature, followed by rapid cooling. For
Section VIII applications involving consideration of heat treatment after
forming or welding, see table UHA-32 for P-No. 10K, group No.1
materials.
H6 Material shall be solution annealed at 2010F to 2140F, followed by a
rapid cooling in water or air.

S1 For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 850F and

above are permissible but, except for tubular products 3 in. O.D. or less
enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials at these
temperatures is not current practice.
S5 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the
nominal thickness of the material exceeds 3/4 in.
S6 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when the
nominal thickness of the material exceeds 1-1/4 in.
S7 The maximum thickness of unheat-treated forgings shall not exceed
3-3/4 in. The maximum thickness as-heat-treated may be 4 in.
S8 The maximum section thickness shall not exceed 3 in. for
double-normalized-and-tempered forgings, or 5 in. for
quenched-and-tempered forgings.
S9 Both NPS 8 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier.
S10 The maximum pipe size shall be NPS 4 (Dn 100) and the maximum
thickness in any pipe size shall be Schedule 80.
T1 Allowable stresses for temperatures of 700ºF and above are values
obtained from time-dependent properties.


W1 Not for welded construction.
W2 Not for welded construction in Section III.
W3 Welded.
W4 Nonwelded, or welded if the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced
section tension test is not less than 100 ksi.
W5 Welded, with the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced tension test
less than 100 ksi but not less than 95 ksi.
W6 This material may be welded by the resistance technique.
W7 In welded construction for temperatures above 850ºF, the weld metal
has a carbon content of greater than 0.05%.
W8 Welding and oxygen or other thermal cutting processes are not
permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35% by heat analysis.
W9 For Section I applications, for pressure retaining welds in 2-1/4Cr–1Mo
materials, other than circumferential butt welds less than or equal to
3-1/2 in. in outside diameter, when the design metal temperatures
exceed 850F, the weld metal shall have a carbon content greater than
0.05%.
W10 For Section III applications, material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20,
23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted for Class 2 and Class 3
construction when a weld efficiency factor of 1.00 is used in accordance
with Note W12.
W11 For Section VIII applications, Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW-404.12,
QW-406.3, QW-407.2, and QW-409.1 shall also apply to this material.
These variables shall be applied in accordance with the rules for welding
of Part UF.
W12 These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor. For
Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal,
ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or eddy current
examination, in accordance with NC-2550, shall provide a longitudinal
weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors shall be
in accordance with the following:
a. for single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80;
b. for single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85;
c. for double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90;
d. for single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00.

W13 For Section I applications, electric resistance and autogenous welded

tubing may be used with these stresses, provided the following
additional restrictions and requirements are met:
a. The tubing shall be used for boiler, waterwall, superheater, and
economizer tubes that are enclosed within the setting.
b. The maximum outside diameter shell be 3.5 in.
c. The weld seam of each tube shall be subjected to an angle
beam ultrasonic inspection per SA-450.
d. A complete volumetric inspection of the entire length of each
tube shall be performed in accordance with SA-450.
e. Material test reports shall be supplied.
W14 These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII Division 1
applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated tensile
strength values should be multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler
metal, check UW-12 of Section VIII Division 1.
W15 The Nondestructive Electric Test requirements of SA-53 Type E pipe are
required for all sizes. The pipe sahll be additionally marked "NDE" and
so noted on the material certification.
Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) - Metric

(a) The following abbreviations are used: Norm. rld., Normalized rolled;
Smls., Seamless; Sol. ann., Solution annealed; and Wld., Welded.
(b) The stress values in this Table may be interpolated to determine
values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate
temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as
the value at the higher temperature between which values are being
interpolated.
(c) For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in restricted shear,
such as dowel bolts or similar construction in which the shearing
member is so restricted that the section under consideration would
fail without reduction of area, shall be 0.80 times the values in
Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A (Ferrous Materials) -
Customary.
(d) For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in bearing shall be
1.60 times the values in Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1A
(Ferrous Materials) - Customary.
(e) Stress values for -30ºC to 40ºC are applicable for colder
temperatures when the toughness requirements of Section III, VIII, or
XII are met.
(f) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from
time-dependent properties (see Notes T1 through T10).

(g) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this
Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or
Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values
listed in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version
of the material specification or the SI units version of the material
specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 are
used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction.
(h) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat
G1 To these stress values a casting quality factor as specified in PG-25
of Section I; UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1; or TM-190 of Section
XII is applied.
G4 For Section I applications, these stresses apply when used for boiler,
water wall, superheater, and economizer tubes that are enclosed
within a setting. A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 is included in values
above 450ºC.
G5 Due to the relatively low yield strength of these materials, these
higher stress values were established at temperatures where the
short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys
where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in
this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield
strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may results in
dimensional changes due to permanent strain. These stress values
are not recommended for the flanges of gasketed joints or other
applications where slight amounts of distortion can cause leakage or
malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to
the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give allowable
stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain.
increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess of
825ºC and are considered in the design.
G9 For Section III applications, the use of these materials shall be limited
to materials for tanks covered in Subsections NC and ND, component
supports, and for nonpressure-retaining attachments (NC/ND-2190).
G10 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 425ºC, the carbide
phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite. See Appendix A,
A-240.
G11 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 475ºC, the carbide
phase of carbon–molybdenum steel may be converted to graphite.
See Appendix A, A-240.
G12 At temperatures above 550ºC, these stress values apply only when
the carbon is 0.04% or higher on heat analysis.

G13 These stress values at 575ºC and above shall be used only when the
grain size is ASTM No. 6 or coarser.
G14 These stress values shall be used when the grain size is not
determined or is determined to be finer than ASTM No. 6.
G15 For Section I applications, use is limited to stays as defined in PG-13
except as permitted by PG-11.
G16 For Section III Class 3 applications, these S values do not include a
casting quality factor. Statically and centrifugally cast products
meeting the requirements of NC-2570 shall receive a casting quality
factor of 1.00.
G17 For Section III Class 3 applications, statically and centrifugally cast
products meeting the requirements of NC-2571(a) and (b), and cast
pipe fittings, pumps, and valves with inlet piping connections of 2 in.
nominal pipe size and less, shall receive a casting quality factor of
1.00. Other casting quality factors shall be in accordance with the
following
 For visual examination, 0.80.
 For magnetic particle examination 0.85.
 For liquid penetrant examination, 0.85.
 For radiography, 1.00.
 For ultrasonic examination, 1.00.
 For magnetic particle or liquid penetrant plus ultrasonic
examination or radiography, 1.00.
G18 See Table Y-1 for yield strength values as a function of thickness
over this range. Allowable stresses are independent of yield strength
in this thickness range.
G22 For Section I applications, use of external pressure charts for material
in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings only.
G23 For temperatures above the maximum temperature shown on the
external pressure chart for this material, Fig. CS-2 may be used for
the design using this material.
G24 A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum
allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide tabulated
values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal tensile stress.
G25 For Section III applications, for both Class 2 and Class 3, the
completed vessel after final heat treatment is examined by the
ultrasonic method in accordance with NB-2542 except that angle
beam examination in both the circumferential and the axial directions
may be performed in lieu of the straight beam examination in the axial
direction. The tensile strength does not exceed 860 MPa.
G26 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted.
G28 Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781, Alternate Mechanical
Test Coupons and Specimen Locations for Castings, is mandatory.

G29 For Section III applications, impact testing in accordance with the
requirements of NC-2300 is required for Class 2 components and in
accordance with ND-2300 for Class 3 components.
G30 For Section VIII applications, these stress values are based on
expected minimum values of 310 MPa tensile strength and yield
strength of 140 MPa resulting from loss of strength due to thermal
treatment required for the glass coating operation. UG-85 does not
apply.
G31 These stress values are established from a consideration of strength
only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints
where freedom from leakage over a long period of time without
retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as
determined from the flexibility of the flange and bolts and
corresponding relaxation properties.
moderately elevated temperature. See Appendix A, A-340 and A-360.
G33 These stresses are based on weld metal properties.
G34 For Section I, use is limited to PEB-5.3. See PG-5.5 for cautionary
note.
H1 For temperatures above 550ºC, these stress values may be used
only if the material is solution treated by heating to the minimum
temperature specified in the material specification, but not lower than
1040ºC, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
only if the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum
temperature of 1095ºC, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by
other means.
H5 For Section III applications, if heat treatment is performed after
forming or fabrication, it shall be performed at 825ºC–1000ºC for a
period of time not to exceed 10 min at temperature, followed by rapid
cooling.
S1 For Section I applications, stress values at temperatures of 450ºC
and above are permissible but, except for tubular products 75 mm
O.D. or less enclosed within the boiler setting, use of these materials
at these temperatures is not current practice.


S5 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when
the nominal thickness of the material exceeds19 mm.
S6 Material that conforms to Class 10, 11, or 12 is not permitted when
the nominal thickness of the material exceeds 32 mm.
S7 The maximum thickness of unheat-treated forgings does exceed 95
mm. The maximum thickness as-heat-treated may be 100 mm.
S8 The maximum section thickness does exceed 75 mm for
double-normalized-and-tempered forgings, or 125 mm for
S10 The maximum pipe size is NPS 4 (DN 100) and the maximum
thickness in any pipe size is Schedule 80.
T1 Allowable stresses for temperatures of 370ºC and above are values
W2 Not for welded construction in Section III.
W3 Welded.
W4 Nonwelded, or welded if the tensile strength of the Section IX
reduced section tension test is not less than 690 MPa.

W5 Welded, with the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced tension

test less than 690 MPa but not less than 655 MPa.
W6 This material may be welded by the resistance technique.
W7 In welded construction for temperatures above 450ºC, the weld metal
W8 Welding and oxygen or other thermal cutting processes are not
permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35% by heat analysis.
W9 For Section I applications, for pressure retaining welds in 2¼Cr–1Mo
materials, other than circumferential butt welds less than or equal to
89 mm in outside diameter, when the design metal temperatures
exceed 450ºC, the weld metal has a carbon content greater than
0.05%.
W10 For Section III applications, material that conforms to Class 10, 13,
20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53 is not permitted for Class 2 and Class
3 construction when a weld efficiency factor of 1.00 is used in
accordance with Note W12.
W11 For Section VIII applications, Section IX, QW-250 Variables
QW-404.12, QW-406.3, QW-407.2, and QW-409.1 shall also apply to
this material. These variables shall be applied in accordance with the
rules for welding of Part UF.
W12 These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor.
For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal,
examination, in accordance with NC-2550, shall provide a longitudinal
weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors shall
be in accordance with the following:
 For single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80.
 For single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85.
 For double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90.
 For single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00.
W13 For Section I applications, electric resistance and autogenous welded
tubing may be used with these stresses, provided the following
additional restrictions and requirements are met:
 The tubing is used for boiler, waterwall, superheater, and
economizer tubes that are enclosed within the setting.
 The maximum outside diameter is 89 mm.
 The weld seam of each tube is subjected to an angle beam
ultrasonic inspection per SA-450.
 A complete volumetric inspection of the entire length of each tube
is performed in accordance with SA-450.
 Material test reports are supplied.

W14 These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII, Division
1 and Section XII applications using welds made without filler metal,
the tabulated tensile strength values should be multiplied by 0.85. For
welds made with filler metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII, Division
1, or TW-130.4 for Section XII, as applicable.
W15 The Nondestructive Electric Test requirements of SA-53 Type E pipe
are required for all sizes. The pipe shall be additionally marked "NDE"
and so noted on the material certification.
Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1B (Non-Ferrous Materials) - Customary

(a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; Applic.,
Applicability; Cond., Condition; cond., condenser; Desig.,
Designation; exch., exchanger; extr., extruded; fin., finished; fr.,
from; rel., relieved; rld., rolled; Smls., Seamless; Sol., Solution;
treat., treated; and Wld., Welded.
values for intermediate temperatures.
(c) For Section VIII applications, stress values in restricted shear,
such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which the
shearing is so restricted that the section under consideration
would fail without reduction of areas, shall be 0.80 times the
values in this table.
(d) For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing shall be
1.60 times the values in this Table.
(e) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from
time-dependent properties (see Notes T1-T18).
(f) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this
Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the
values listed in this Table shall be applicable to either the
customary U.S. version of the material specification or the SI
units version of the material specification.
(g) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history,
heat treatment, melting practice, and level of residual elements.
See Nonmandatory Appendix A for more information.
G1 For steam at 250 psi (406F), the values given for 400F may be
used.
G2 At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when
the carbon is 0.04% or higher.
G3 In the absence of evidence that the casting is of high quality
throughout, values not in excess of 80% of those given in the
Table shall be used. This is not intended to apply to valves and
fittings made to recognized standards.


increasingly significant failure modes at temperatures in excess
of 1500F and shall be considered in the design.
short time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these
alloys where slightly greater deformation is acceptable. The
stress values in this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed
90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use of these stresses
may results in dimensional changes due to permanent strain.
These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of
gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of
distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists
multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength
values shown in table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that
will result in lower values of permanent strain.
G6 Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 350F.
G7 Use 350F curve for all temperature values below 350F.
G8 The stresses for this material are based on 120 ksi minimum
tensile strength because of weld metal strength limitations.
G9 Use Fig. NFC-6 up to and including 300F. Use the 600F curve of
Fig. NFC-3 above 300F up to and including 400F. Maximum
temperature for external pressure not to exceed 400F.
G10 Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 450F.
G11 Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 700F.
G12 Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 800F.
G13 For Section VIII applications, use of external pressure charts for
material in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings
only.
G14 A factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum
allowable stress values in tension for this material. Divide
tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable longitudinal
tensile stress.
G15 To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Section III,
ND-3115 or UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1 shall be applied for
castings. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made
to recognized standards.
G16 Allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the
corresponding core material.
G17 Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to
certain media and high temperatures, particularly steam above
212F. The user should ensure that the alloy selected is
satisfactory for the service for which it is to be used.

G18 Because of the occasionally contingent danger from the failure of

pressure vessels by stress corrosion cracking, the following is
pertinent. These materials are suitable for engineering use under
a wide variety of ordinary corrosive conditions with no particular
hazard in respect to stress corrosion.
G19 Few alloys are completely immune to stress corrosion cracking in
all combinations of stress and corrosive environments and the
supplier of the material should be consulted. Reference may also
be made to the following sources: (1) Stress Corrosion Cracking
Control Measures B.F. Brown, U.S. National Bureau of Standards
(1977), available from NACE, Texas; (2) The Stress Corrosion of
Metals, H.L. Logan, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1966.
G20 For plate only.
G21 The maximum operating temperature is arbitrarily set at 500F
because harder temper adversely affects design stress in the
creep rupture temperature range.
G22 The minimum tensile strength of reduced tension specimens in
accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX shall not be less than
110,000 psi.
G23 This alloy is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room
temperature after exposure in the range of 1000F to 1400F.
G24 For stress relieved tempers (T351, T3510, T3511, T451, T4510,
T4511, T651, T6510, T6511), stress values for materials in the
basic temper shall be used.
G25 The tension test specimen from plate 0.500 in. and thicker is
machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy;
therefore, the allowable stress values for thickness less than
0.500 in. shall be used.
G26 The tension test specimen from plate 0.500 in. and thicker is
machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy;
therefore, the allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for
the core material of the same thickness.
G27 Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to
severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after
exposure in the range of 1000F to 1250F.
G28 For external pressure design, the maximum design temperature
is limited to 1000F.
G29 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900C are
(METRIC 9.7 MPa (927C), 7.6 MPs (954C), and 5.0 MPa (982C).
Database)
(METRIC 5.0 MPa (925C), 4.0 MPa (950C), 3.2 MPa (975C), and 2.6 MPa
Database) (1000C). The maximum use temperature is 982C; the value listed
at 1000C is provided for interpolation purposes only.

H1 For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used
only if the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of
1900F and has a carbon content of 0.04% or higher.
H2 For temperatures above 1000F, these stress values may be used
only if the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum
temperature of 1900F and quenching in water or rapidly cooling
by other means.
H3 For Section I applications, cold drawn pipe or tube shall be
annealed at 1900F minimum.
H4 The material shall be given a 1725F to 1825F stabilizing heat
treatment.
T1 Allowable stresses for temperatures of 250F and above are
values obtained from time-dependent properties.
values obtained from time dependent properties.


W1 No welding or brazing permitted.
W2 For Section VIII applications, UNF-56(d) shall apply for welded
constructions.
W3 For welded and brazed constructions, stress values for O
(annealed) temper material shall be used.
W4 The stress values given for this material are not applicable when
either welding or thermal cutting is employed.
W5 These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency
factor. For Section III applications, for materials welded without
filler metal, ultrasonic examination, radiographic examination, or
eddy current examination, in accordance with NC 2550, shall
provide a longitudinal weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long.
weld efficiency factors shall be in accordance with the following:
a. for single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80;
b. for single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85;
c. for double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90;
d. for single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00.
W6 Filler metal shall not be used in the manufacture of welded pipe
or tubing.
W7 Strength of reduced-section tensile specimen required to qualify
welding procedures. See QW-150, Section IX.
W8 After welding, heat treat at 1150-1200F, hold 1-1/2 hr at
temperature for the first inch of cross-section thickness and 1/2 hr
for each additional inch, and air cool. For castings used in pumps,
valves, and fittings 2 in. nominal pipe size and less, PWHT is not
required for socket welds and attachment welds when the
castings have been temper annealed at 1150 to 1200F prior to
welding.

W9 If welded or brazed, the allowable stress values for the annealed

condition shall be used and the minimum tensile strength of the
reduced tension specimen in accordance with QW-462.1 of
Section IX shall not be less than 30.0 ksi.
W10 When nonferrous materials conforming to specifications in
Section II, Part B are used in welded or brazed construction, the
maximum allowable working stresses shall not exceed the values
given herein for annealed material at the metal temperature
shown.
W11 These maximum allowable stress values are to be used in
welded or brazed constructions.
W12 These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII,
Division 1 applications using welds made without filler metal, the
tabulated tensile stress values shall be multiplied by 0.85. For
welds made with filler metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII,
Division 1.
W13 For service at 1200F or higher, the deposited weld metal shall be
of the same nominal chemistry as the base metal.
W14 No welding permitted.
W15 For Section VIII applications, no welding is permitted.
W16 Use NFA-12 when welded with 5356 or 5556 filler metal, all
thickness, or 4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness <= 3/8 in. Use
NFA-13 when welded with 4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness >
3/8 in.
Division 1 Material Notes for Table 1B (Non-Ferrous Materials) - Metric

(a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; cond.,
condenser; exch., exchanger; extr., extruded; fin., finished; fr., from;
rel., relieved; rld., rolled; Smls., Seamless; Sol., Solution; treat.,
treated; and Wld., Welded.
values for intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate
temperatures are rounded to the same number of decimal places as
the value at the higher temperature between which values are being
interpolated.
(c) For Section VIII and XII applications, stress values in restricted shear,
such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which the
shearing is so restricted that the section under consideration would
fail without reduction of areas, are 0.80 times the values in this Table.
(d) For Section VIII applications, stress values in bearing are 1.60 times
the values in this Table.
(e) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from
time-dependent properties (see Notes T1-T18).

(f) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this
Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values
specification. For example, the values listed for SB-407 Grade
N08800 are used when SB-407M Grade N08800 is used in
construction.
(g) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat
G1 For steam at 1700 kPa (208ºC), the values given for 200ºC may be
used.
G2 At temperatures over 550ºC, these stress values apply only when the
carbon is 0.04% or higher.
G3 In the absence of evidence that the casting is of high quality
throughout, values not in excess of 80% of those given in the Table
are used. This is not intended to apply to valves and fittings made to
recognized standards.
825ºC and are considered in the design.
this range exceed 66 2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield
malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to
stress values that will result in lower values of permanent strain.
G6 Maximum temperature for external pressure not to exceed 175ºC.
G7 Use 350ºF curve for all temperature values below 175ºC.
G8 The stresses for this material are based on 828 MPa minimum tensile
strength because of weld metal strength limitations.
G9 Use Fig. NFC-6 up to and including 150ºC. Use the 325ºC curve of
Fig. NFC-3 above 150ºC up to and including 200ºC. Maximum
temperature for external pressure not to exceed 200ºC.
G10 Maximum temperature for external pressure does not exceed 225ºC.
G11 Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 375ºC.
G12 Referenced external pressure chart is applicable up to 425ºC.

G13 For Section VIII and XII applications, use of external pressure charts
for material in the form of bar stock is permitted for stiffening rings
only.
G14 For Section VIII applications, a factor of 0.85 has been applied in
arriving at the maximum allowable stress values in tension for this
material. Divide tabulated values by 0.85 for maximum allowable
longitudinal tensile stress.
G15 To these stress values a quality factor as specified in ND-3115 of
Section III; UG-24 of Section VIII, Division 1; or TM-190 of Section XII
shall be applied for castings. This is not intended to apply to valves
and fittings made to recognized standards.
G16 Allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the
corresponding core material.
G17 Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain
media and high temperatures, particularly steam above 100ºC. The
user should ensure that the alloy selected is satisfactory for the
service for which it is to be used.
G18 Because of the occasionally contingent danger from the failure of
pressure vessels by stress corrosion cracking, the following is
pertinent. These materials are suitable for engineering use under a
wide variety of ordinary corrosive conditions with no particular hazard
in respect to stress corrosion.
G19 Few alloys are completely immune to stress corrosion cracking in all
combinations of stress and corrosive environments and the supplier
of the material should be consulted. Reference may also be made to
the following sources:
 Stress Corrosion Cracking Control Measures B.F. Brown, U.S.
National Bureau of Standards (1977), available from NACE,
Texas
 The Stress Corrosion of Metals, H.L. Logan, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1966.
G20 For plate only.
G21 The maximum operating temperature is arbitrarily set at 250ºC
because harder temper adversely affects design stress in the creep
rupture temperature range.
G22 The minimum tensile strength of reduced tension specimens in
accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX is not less than 760 MPa.
temperature after exposure in the range of 550ºC to 750ºC..
G24 For stress relieved tempers (T351, T3510, T3511, T451, T4510,
T4511, T651, T6510, T6511), stress values for materials in the basic
temper are used.
G25 The tension test specimen from plate 13 mm and thicker is machined
from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the
allowable stress values for thickness less than 13 mm are used.

G26 The tension test specimen from plate 13 mm and thicker is machined
from the core and does not include the cladding alloy; therefore, the
allowable stress values shown are 90% of those for the core material
of the same thickness.
G27 Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to severe
loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the
range of 550ºC to 675ºC.
G28 For external pressure design, the maximum design temperature is
limited to 550ºC.
G29 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900ºC are 9.7
MPa (927ºC), 7.6 MPa (954ºC), and 5.0 MPa (982ºC).
G30 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900ºC are 5.0
MPa (925ºC), 4.0 MPa (950ºC), 3.2 MPa (975ºC), and 2.6 MPa
(1000ºC). The maximum use temperature is 982ºC; the value listed at
1000ºC is provided for interpolation purposes only.
G31 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900°C are 7.8
MPa (925°C), 5.2 MPa (950°C), 3.5 MPa (975°C), and 2.4 MPa
(1000°C). The maximum use temperature is 982°C; the value listed at
1000°C is provided for interpolation purposes only.
G32 The maximum allowable stress values for greater than 900°C are 6.6
MPa (925°C), 4.4 MPa (950°C), 2.9 MPa (975°C), and 2.0 MPa
(1000°C). The maximum use temperature is 982°C; the value listed at
1000°C is provided for interpolation purposes only.
only if the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of 1040ºC
and has a carbon content of 0.04% or higher.
only if the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum
temperature of 1040ºC and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by
other means.
H3 For Section I applications, cold drawn pipe or tube is annealed at
1038ºC minimum.
H4 The material is given a 940ºC to 995ºC stabilizing heat treatment.

obtained from time dependent properties.


W1 No welding or brazing permitted.
W2 For Section VIII applications, UNF-56(d) applies for welded
constructions.
W3 For welded and brazed constructions, stress values for O (annealed)
temper material are used.
W4 The stress values given for this material are not applicable when
either welding or thermal cutting is employed.

W5 These S values do not include a longitudinal weld efficiency factor.

For Section III applications, for materials welded without filler metal,
examination, in accordance with NC 2550, shall provide a longitudinal
weld efficiency factor of 1.0. Other long. weld efficiency factors are in
accordance with the following:
 For single butt weld, with filler metal, 0.80.
 For single or double butt weld, without filler metal, 0.85.
 For double butt weld, with filler metal, 0.90.
 For single or double butt weld, with radiography, 1.00.
W6 Filler metal is not used in the manufacture of welded pipe or tubing.
W7 Strength of reduced-section tensile specimen required to qualify
welding procedures. See QW-150, Section IX.
W8 After welding, heat treat at 625ºC - 650ºC, hold 1½ hr at temperature
for the first 25 mm of cross-section thickness and ½ hr for each
additional 25 mm, and air cool. For castings used in pumps, valves,
and fittings DN 50 and less, PWHT is not required for socket welds
and attachment welds when the castings have been temper annealed
at 625ºC - 650ºC prior to welding.
W9 If welded or brazed, the allowable stress values for the annealed
condition are used and the minimum tensile strength of the reduced
tension specimen in accordance with QW-462.1 of Section IX is not
less than 205 MPa.
W10 When nonferrous materials conforming to specifications in Section II,
Part B are used in welded or brazed construction, the maximum
allowable working stresses do not exceed the values given herein for
annealed material at the metal temperature shown.
W11 These maximum allowable stress values are to be used in welded or
brazed constructions.
W12 These S values do not include a weld factor. For Section VIII, Division
1 applications using welds made without filler metal, the tabulated
tensile stress values are multiplied by 0.85. For welds made with filler
metal, consult UW-12 of Section VIII, Division 1.
W13 For service at 650ºC or higher, the deposited weld metal is of the
same nominal chemistry as the base metal.
W14 No welding permitted.
W15 For Section VIII applications, no welding is permitted.
W16 Use NFA-12 when welded with 5356 or 5556 filler metal, all
thicknesses, or 4043 or 5554 filler material, thickness <= 10 mm. Use
NFA-13 when welded with 4043 or 5554 filler material, thickness > 10
mm.
Division 1 Superseded Material Notes

Notes for the year 1943

(a) Allowable working stresses in single shear = 0.8 times the given values.
(b) Allowable working stresses in double shear = 1.6 times the given values.
(c) Allowable working stresses in bearing = 1.8 times the given values.
(d) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for
intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall
be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the
higher temperature between which values are being interpolated. The
rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained is
less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the
digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1
the digit in the last place retained.
(e) Values of stresses above 700 F are based upon steel in annealed
condition.
1 Limited to plates not over 3/4 in. in thickness and to temperatures not
above 750 F.
2 Maximum value for tensile strength permitted in design, 55,000 psi.
3 For present, limited to temperatures not above 750 F.
4 Only seamless steel pipe or tubing, or electric-fusion-welded pipe may be
used for temperatures above 750 F.
5 Limited to temperatures not above 450 F.

(a) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for
1 See Par. UG-6
2 Flange quality in this specification not permitted over 850 F.
3 These stress values are one-fourth the specified minimum tensile strength
multiplied by a quality factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D. and
SA-7.

4 For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels

containing not less than 0.19% residual silicon be used. Killed steels which
have been deoxidized with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels
may have creep and stress-rupture properties in the temperature range
above 850 F, which are somewhat less than those on which the values in
the above table are based.
5 Between temperatures of 650 F and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values
for Specification SA-201, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test
data become available.
6 Only (silicon) killed steel shall be used above 900 F.
7 To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be
applied.
8 These stress values apply to normalized and drawn material only.
9 These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only
and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where
required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the
relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation
properties.
10 Between temperatures of —20 to 400 F, stress values equal to the lower
of the following will be permitted: 20% of the specified tensile strength, or
25% of the specified yield strength.
11 Not permitted above 450 F; allowable stress value 7000 psi.
12 Between temperatures 0( 750 F to 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for
Specification SA-212, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test
13 The stress values to be used for temperatures below —20 F when steels
are made to conform with Specification SA-300 shall be those that are
given in the column for —20 to 650 F.
Notes for the year 1965: (TABLE UCS-23)

(a) Stress values in restricted shear such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar
construction in which the shearing member is so restricted that the section
under consideration would fail without reduction of area shall be 0.80 times
the given values.
(b) Stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the given values.
(c) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for

1 See Par. UCS-6(b).

2 Flange quality in this specification not permitted over 850 F.
3 These stress values are one-fourth the specified minimum tensile strength
multiplied by a quality factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D. SA-7
and SA-36.
4 For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels
containing not less than 0.10% residual silicon be used. Killed steels which
have been deoxidized with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels
may have creep and stress-rupture properties in the temperature range
above 850 F:, which are somewhat less than those on which the values in
the above table are based.
5 Between temperatures of 650 F and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values
for Specification SA-201, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test
6 Only (silicon) killed steel shall be used above 900 F.
7 To these stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be
applied.
and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where
required, lower stress values may be necessary JS determined from the
relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation
properties.
10 Between temperatures of —20 to 400 F, Stress values equal to the lower
of the following will be permitted: 20% of the specified tensile strength, or
25% of the specified yield strength.
11 Not permitted above 450 F; allowable stress value 7000 psi.
12 Between temperatures of 750 F to 1000 F. inclusive, the stress values for
Specification SA-212, Grade B, may be used until high temperature test
13 The stress values to be used for temperatures below —20 F when steels
are made to conform with Specification SA-300 shall be those that are
given in the column for —20 to 650 F.
15 For temperatures below 400 F, stress values equal to 20 per cent of the
specified minimum tensile strength will be permitted.
19 These allowable stress values apply also to structural shapes and bars.
20 Stress values apply to normalized, or normalized and tempered or oil
quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable specification.
21 Stress values apply to quenched and tempered material only, as per
applicable specification.

22 Welding not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35 per cent by
ladle analysis except for repairs or non-pressure attachments as outlined
in Part UF.
23 Welding or brazing not permitted on liquid quenched and tempered
material.
24 Maximum allowable stress values shall be as follows:
Grade Liquid Quenched and Other Than Liquid Quenched and
Tempered (-20 to 200F) Tempered (-20 to 200F)
I 15,000 15,000
II 18,750 18,750
III 22,500 22,500
IV 26,250 26,250
V(A,B&E) 30,000
V(C&D) 30,000
25 See Par. UCS-6 (c).
26 This material shall not be used in thicknesses above 0.58 in.
Notes for the year 1965:(TABLE UHA-23)

1 Due to the relatively low yield strength of this material, the higher stress
values at temperatures from 200 through 1050F" were established to
permit the use of this material where slip-hay greater deformation is
acceptable. The stress values within the above range exceed 621/2 per
cent, but do not exceed 90 percent of the yield strength at temperature.
These stress values are not recommended for the design of flanges or
piping.
2 These stress values at temperatures of 1050F and above should be used
only when assurance is provided that the steel has a predominant grain
size not finer than ASTM No. 6.
3 These stress values shall be considered basic values to be used when no
effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel.
4 These stress values are the basic values multiplied by a joint efficiency
factor of 0.85.
and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints where
required, lower values may be necessary as determined from the flexibility
of the flange and bolts and corresponding relaxation.
6 These stress values a quality factor as specified in Par. UG-24 shall be
applied.
7 These stress values permitted for material that has been carbide-solution
treated.

8 For temperatures below 100F, stress values equal to 20 percent of the

specified minimum tensile strength will be permitted.
9 This steel may be expected to develop embrittlement at room temperature
after service at temperatures above 800F: consequently, its use at higher
temperatures is not recommended unless due caution is observed.
10 At temperatures over 1000F, these stress values apply only when the
carbon is 0.04 percent or higher.
11 For temperatures above 800F, the stress values apply only when the
carbon content is 0.04 percent and above.
12 These stress values shall be applicable to forgings over 5 inches in
thickness.

(a) Stress values in restricted shear such as dowel bolts, rivets, or similar construction in which
the shearing member is so restricted that the section under consideration would fail without
reduction of area shall be 0.80 times the given values.
(b) Stress values in bearing shall be 1.60 times the given values.
(c) The values in this Table may be interpolated to determine values for intermediate
temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures shall be rounded to the same
number of decimal places as the value at the higher temperature between which values are
being interpolated. The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be
retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when the digit
next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last
place retained.
1 See UCS-6(b).
3 These stress values are one fourth the specified minimum tensile strength multiplied by a
qualify factor of 0.92, except for SA-283, Grade D, and SA-36.
4 For service temperatures above 850 F it is recommended that killed steels containing not
less than 0.10 percent residual silicon be used. Killed steels which have been deoxidized
with large amounts of aluminum and rimmed steels may have creep and stress rupture
properties in the temperature range above 850 F. which are somewhat less than those on
which the values in the above Table are based.
5 Between temperatures of 650 and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification
SA-201. Grade B. may be used until high temperature test data become available.
6 Only killed steel shall be used above 850 F.
7 To these stress values a quality factor as specified in UG-24 shall be applied for castings.
9 These stress values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be
satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage over a long
period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as
determined from the relative flexibility of the flange and bolts, and corresponding relaxation
properties.
11 Not permitted above 450F; allowable stress value 7000 psi.

12 Between temperatures of 750 and 1000 F, inclusive, the stress values for Specification
SA-515, Grade 70. May be used until high temperature test data become available.
13 The stress values to be used for temperatures below —20F when steels are made to
conform with supplement (5)SA-20 shall be those that are given in the column for —20 to
650 F.
15 For temperatures below 400 F, stress values equal to 20 percent of the specified minimum
tensile strength will be permitted.
19 These allowable stress values apply also to structural shapes and bars.
20 Stress values apply to normalized, or normalized and tempered or oil quenched and
tempered material only, as per applicable specification.
21 Stress values apply to quenched and tempered material only, as per applicable
specification.
22 Welding or brazing is not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35 percent by ladle
analysis except for limited types of welding as allowed in Part UF.
23 Welding or brazing not permitted on liquid quenched and tempered material.
24 Maximum allowable stress values shall be as follows:
Grade Normalized or Normalized and Liquid Quenched and Tempered
Tempered
-20 to 650 -20 to 100 200 300 400 500 600 650
I 15,000 15,000 15,000
II 18,750 18,750 18,750
III 22,500 22,500 22,500
IV 26,250 26,250 25,050 24,600 24,600 24,600 24,600 24,600
VA 30,000 28,850 28,850 28,850 28,850 28,850 28,850
VB 30,000 29,050 28,500 28,500 28,200 27,800 26,750
VE 30,000 29,800 28,700 28,700 28,700 28,700 27,500
VC&D 30,000 30,000
VIII 33,700 32,300 32,100 31,900 31,600 31,400 30,000
26 This material shall not be used in thicknesses above 0.58 in.
27 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800 F. the carbide phase of carbon steel
may be converted to graphite.
28 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875 F, the carbine phase of
carbon-molybdenum steel may be converted to graphite.
29 The material shall not be used in thickness above 0.375 in.
30 For temperatures above which stresses are given, the allowable stresses for the annealed
plate shall be used.
31 Where the fabricator performs the heat treatment the requirements of UHT-81 shall be met.

32 Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW404.12, QW406.3, QW407.2, and QW-409.1 of QW-422
shall also apply to this material. These variables shall be applied in accordance with the
rules for welding of Part UF of Division I.
Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2A (Ferrous Materials) - Customary

(a) The following abbreviations are used: Smls., Seamless; Temp.,
Temperature; and Wld., Welded.
(b) An alternative typeface is used for stress values based on successful
experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2 ).
(c) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this
Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values
specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 are
used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction.
intermediate temperatures. The values at intermediate temperatures
are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at
the higher temperature between which values are being interpolated.
(e) The properties of steels are influenced by the processing history, heat
E1 For values at 650ºF and above, the design stress intensity values are
based on successful experience in service.
E2 For values at 700ºF and above, the design stress intensity values are
G1 Material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or
53 is not permitted.
G3 Material that conforms to Class 11 or 12 is not permitted when the
nominal thickness of the material exceeds ¾ in.
nominal thickness of the material exceeds 1¼ in.
G5 A product analysis is required on this material.
G6 SA-723 is not used for minimum permissible temperature below 40°F.


this range exceed 66 2/3 % but do not exceed 90% of the yield
malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to
the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, give allowable stress
values that will result in lower values of permanent strain.
G8 This material has reduced toughness at room temperature after
exposure at high temperature. The degree of embrittlement depends
on composition, heat treatment, time and temperature. The lowest
temperature of concern is about 500ºF. See Appendix A, A-360.
G9 At temperatures over 1000ºF, these stress intensity values apply only
when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only
when stresses above 1000ºF are published.
G10 For temperatures above 1000°F, these stress intensity values may be
used only if the material has been heat treated by heating to a
minimum temperature of 1900°F and quenching in water or rapidly
cooling by other means. This note is applicable only when stresses
above 1000ºF are published.
G11 These stress intensity values at temperatures of 1050°F and above
should be used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a
predominant grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. This note is
applicable only when stresses above 1000°F are published.
G12 These stress intensity values are considered basic values to be used
when no effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel.
moderately elevated temperature. See Appendix A, A-340 and
A-360.
G14 All forgings have a maximum tensile strength not in excess of 35 ksi
above the specified minimum.
G15 Fabricated from SA-387 Grade 12 Class 1 plate.
H1 Annealed.
H2 Normalized and tempered.

H3 Pieces that are formed (after quenching and tempering) at a

temperature lower than 25ºF below the final tempering temperature
are heat-treated after forming when the extreme fiber strain from
forming exceeds 3%. Heat treatment shall be 1075ºF minimum, but
not higher than 25ºF below the final tempering temperature for a
minimum time of one hour per inch of thickness. Pieces formed at
temperatures within 25ºF higher than the original tempering
temperature are requenched and tempered, either before or after
welding into the vessel.
S1 The maximum thickness of forgings does not exceed 3¾ in. (4 in. as
heat treated).
S3 The minimum thickness of pressure-retaining parts is ¼ in..
S4 The minimum thickness of shells, heads, and other pressure-retaining
parts is ¼ in.. The maximum thickness is limited only by the ability to
develop the specified mechanical properties.
W2 In welded construction, for temperatures above 850°F, the weld metal
W3 The following, in addition to the variables in Section IX, QW-250, are
considered as essential variables requiring requalification of the
welding procedure.
 An increase in the maximum or a decrease in the minimum
specified preheat or interpass temperatures. The specified range
of preheat temperatures does not exceed 150ºF.
 A change in the thickness T of the welding procedure qualification
test plate as follows:
a. For welded joints that are quenched and tempered after
welding, any increase in thickness (the minimum thickness
qualified in all cases is ¼ in.).
b. For welded joints that are not quenced and tempered after
welding, any changes as follows: (a) For T less than 5/8 in.,
any decrease in thickness (the maximum thickness qualified
is 2T); (b) for T equal to 5/8 in. and over, any departure from
the range of 5/8 in. to 2T.
Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2A (Ferrous Materials) - Metric

experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2).
Table, and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part
B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed
in this Table are applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the

material specification or the SI units version of the material

specification. For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 shall
be used when SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction.
are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at the
higher temperature between which values are being interpolated.
E1 For values at 350°C and above, the design stress intensity values are
E2 For values at 375°C and above, the design stress intensity values are
G1 Material that conforms to Class 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50, or 53
is not permitted.
nominal thickness of the material exceeds 19 mm.
nominal thickness of the material exceeds 32 mm.
G5 A product analysis is required on this material.
G6 SA-723 is not used for minimum permissible temperature below +5°C.
stress values were established at temperatures where the short-time
exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at
temperature. Use of these stresses may result in dimensional changes
the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight
amounts of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists
multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown
in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower
levels of permanent strain.
G8 This material has reduced toughness at room temperature after
exposure at high temperature. The degree of embrittlement depends on
composition, heat treatment, time, and temperature. The lowest
temperature of concern is about 250°C. See Appendix A, A-360.
G9 At temperatures over 550°C, these stress intensity values apply only
when the carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only when
stresses above 550°C are published.
G10 For temperatures above 550°C, these stress intensity values may be
used only if the material has been heat treated by heating to a minimum
temperature of 1040°C and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by

other means. This note is applicable only when stresses above 550°C
are published.
G11 These stress intensity values at temperatures of 575°C and above
should be used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a
predominant grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. This note is
applicable only when stresses above 550°C are published.
G12 These stress intensity values are considered basic values to be used
when no effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel.
moderately elevated temperature; see Appendix A, A-340 and A-360.
G14 All forgings have a maximum tensile strength not in excess of 175 MPa
H1 Annealed.
H3 Pieces that are formed (after quenching and tempering) at a
temperature lower than 15°C below the final tempering temperature are
heat treated after forming when the extreme fiber strain from forming
exceeds 3%. Heat treatment shall be 580°C minimum, but not higher
than 15°C below the final tempering temperature for a minimum time of
1 h per 25 mm of thickness. Pieces formed at temperatures within 15°C
higher than the original tempering temperature are requenched and
tempered, either before or after welding into the vessel.
S1 The maximum thickness of forgings does not exceed 95 mm (100 mm
as heat treated).
S2 Both DN 200 and larger, and schedule 140 and heavier.
S3 The minimum thickness of pressure-retaining parts is 6 mm.
S4 The minimum thickness of shells, heads, and other pressure-retaining
parts is 6 mm. The maximum thickness is limited only by the ability to
develop the specified mechanical properties.
W2 In welded construction, for temperatures above 450°C, the weld metal
W3 The following, in addition to the variables in Section IX, QW-250, is
considered as essential variables requiring requalification of the welding
procedure:
 An increase in the maximum or a decrease in the minimum
specified preheat or interpass temperatures. The specified range of
preheat temperatures shall not exceed 85°C.
 A change in the thickness T of the welding procedure qualification
test plate as follows:
a. For welded joints that are quenched and tempered after

welding, any increase in thickness (the minimum thickness

qualified in all cases is 6 mm).
b. For welded joints that are not quenched and tempered after
welding, any change as follows: (a) for T less than 16 mm, any
decrease in thickness (the maximum thickness qualified is 2T)
(b) for T equal to 16 mm and over, any departure from the
range of 16 mm to 2T.
Division 2 Material Notes for Table 2B (Non-Ferrous Materials)

(a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; fin., finished;
rel., relieved; Smls., Seamless; and Wld., Welded.
experience in service (see Notes E1 and E2).
Part B is a dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values
specification. For example, the values listed for SB-407 Grade
N08800 are used when SB-407M Grade N08800 is used in
construction.
are rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at
E2 For values at 800ºF, the design stress intensity values are based on
successful experience in service.
short-time tensile properties govern to permit the use of these alloys
this range exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield
strength at temperature. Use of these stresses may result in
malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that, when applied to
stress values that will result in lower levels of permanent strain.
G2 Use of external pressure charts for material in the form of barstock is
permitted for stiffening rings only.
G3 SB-163 Supplementary Requirement S2 is met.

G4 Design stress intensity values for 100°F may be used at temperatures

down to –325°F without additional specification requirements.
G5 A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the
maximum allowable design stress intensity values for this material.
S1 Thickness <= 0.100 in.
W1 Welding except for seal welds is not permitted.
ASME Section VIII Division 2, Table 5A Notes for Ferrous Materials

(b) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from
(c) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table,
and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a
dual-unit specification (e.g., SA-516/SA-516M), the values listed in this
Table shall be applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the
material specification or the SI units version of the material specification.
For example, the values listed for SA-516 Grade 70 shall be used when
SA-516M Grade 485 is used in construction.
rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be retained
is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place retained; when
the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or greater, increase
by 1 the digit in the last place retained.
G1 For temperatures above 1000ºF, these stress values may be used only if
the material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of
2000ºF, and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
greater deformation is acceptable. The stress values in this range exceed
66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at temperature. Use
of these stresses may result in dimensional changes due to permanent
strain. These stress values are not recommended for the flanges of
gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts of distortion
can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists multiplying factors that,
when applied to the yield strength values shown in Table Y-1, will give
allowable stress values that will result in lower levels of permanent strain.

G3 At temperatures over 1000ºF, these stress values apply only when the
carbon is 0.04% or higher. This note is applicable only when stresses
above 1000ºF are published.
G4 For temperatures above 1000ºF, these stress values may be used only if
the material has been heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature
of 1900ºF and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. This
note is applicable only when stresses above 1000ºF are published.
G5 These stress values at temperatures of 1050ºF and above should be
used only when assurance is provided that the steel has a predominant
grain size not finer than ASTM No. 6. This note is applicable only when
stresses above 1000ºF are published.
G6 A quality factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the maximum
allowable stress values for this material.
G7 These stress values shall be considered basic values to be used when no
effort is made to control or check the grain size of the steel.
moderately elevated temperature; see Appendix A, A-340 and A-360.
G9 The tensile strength shall not be in excess of 20,000 psi above the
specified minimum.
G10 All forgings shall have a maximum tensile strength not in excess of 25 ksi
G11 SA-723 is exempt from the requirement in Section VIII, Division 2,
AF-730.3(b) that the average of the individual Brinell hardness numbers
shall not be more than 10% below or 25% above the number
corresponding to the tensile strength.
G12 See Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 26.
G13 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800ºF, the carbide
phase of carbon steel may be converted to graphite. See Appendix A,
A-240.
G14 Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875ºF, the carbide
phase of carbon-molybdenum steel may be converted to graphite. See
Appendix A, A-240.
G15 DELETED
G16 Redesignated as G1
H1 Annealed.
H3 Quenched and tempered.
H4 Liquid quenched and tempered.
H5 Normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered.

H6 For applications involving consideration of heat treatment after forming or

welding, see Section VIII, Division 2, Table AF-402.1 for P-No. 10K,
Group No. 1 materials.
H7 Normalized.
S1 The maximum thickness of forgings shall not exceed 3-3/4 in. (4 in. as
heat treated).
S2 The maximum section thickness shall not exceed 3 in. for
double-normalized-and-tempered forgings, or 5 in. for
W2 Welding is not permitted when carbon content exceeds 0.35% by ladle
analysis except for limited types of welding, as allowed in Section VIII,
Division 2, Part AF.
W3 Nonwelded, or welded if the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced
section tension test is not less than 100 ksi.
W4 Welded, with the tensile strength of the Section IX reduced section
tension test less than 100 ksi but not less than 95 ksi.
W5 In welded construction, for temperatures above 850ºF, the weld metal
shall have a carbon content of greater than 0.05%.

W6 Section IX, QW-250 Variables QW-404.12, QW-406.3, QW-407.2, and

QW-409.1 shall also apply to this material. These variables shall be
applied in accordance with the rules for welding of Section VIII, Division
2, Part AF.
W7 The following, in addition to the variables in Section IX, QW-250, shall be
considered as essential variables requiring requalification of the welding
procedure.
(a) An increase in the maximum or a decrease in the minimum specified
preheat or interpass temperatures. The specified range of preheat
temperatures shall not exceed 150ºF.
(b) A change in the thickness T of the welding procedure qualification test
plate as follows:
(1) For welded joints that are quenched and tempered after welding,
any increase in thickness (the minimum thickness qualified in all cases is
¼ in.).
(2) For welded joints that are not quenched and tempered after
welding, any change as follows:
(a) for T less than 5/8 in., any decrease in thickness (the maximum
thickness qualified is 2T);
(b) for T equal to 5/8 in. and over, any departure from the range of
5/8 in. to 2T.
ASME Section VIII Division 2, Table 5B Notes for Non-Ferrous Materials

(a) The following abbreviations are used: ann., annealed; Cond.,
Condenser; extr., extruded; fin., finished; rel., relieved; Smls., Seamless;
and Wld., Welded.
(b) An alternative typeface is used for stress values obtained from
(c) Where specifications, grades, classes, and types are listed in this Table,
and where the material specification in Section II, Part A or Part B is a
dual-unit specification (e.g., SB-407/SB-407M), the values listed in this
Table shall be applicable to either the customary U.S. version of the
material specification or the SI units version of the material specification.
For example, the values listed for SB-407 Grade N08800 shall be used
when SB-407M Grade N08800 is used in construction.
shall be rounded to the same number of decimal places as the value at
The rounding rule is: when the next digit beyond the last place to be
retained is less than 5, retain unchanged the digit in the last place
retained; when the digit next beyond the last place to be retained is 5 or
greater, increase by 1 the digit in the last place retained.

exceed 66-2/3% but do not exceed 90% of the yield strength at
temperature. Use of these stresses may result in dimensional changes
the flanges of gasketed joints or other applications where slight amounts
of distortion can cause leakage or malfunction. Table Y-2 lists
multiplying factors that, when applied to the yield strength values shown
in Table Y-1, will give allowable stress values that will result in lower
levels of permanent strain.
G2 Use of external pressure charts for material in the form of barstock is
permitted for stiffening rings only.
G3 Maximum allowable stress values for 100ºF may be used at
temperatures down to –325ºF without additional specification
requirements.
G4 Maximum allowable stress values for 100°F may be used at
temperatures down to –452ºF without additional specification
requirements.
G5 Maximum temperature for external pressure design not to exceed 350°F.
G6 These alloys are occasionally subject to the hazard of stress corrosion
cracking. Even though they are suitable for engineering use under a
wide variety of corrosive conditions, with no particular hazard with
respect to stress corrosion, the supplier of the material should be
consulted before applying them.
G7 A joint efficiency factor of 0.85 has been applied in arriving at the
maximum allowable stress values for this material.
G8 For stress relieved tempers (T451, T4510, T4511, T651, T6510, T6511),
stress values for materials in the basic temper shall be used.
G9 Copper-silicon alloys are not always suitable when exposed to certain
media and high temperature, particularly steam above 212°F. The user
should satisfy him/herself that the alloy selected is satisfactory for the
service for which it is to be used.
G10 At temperatures over 1000ºF, these stress values apply only when the
carbon is 0.04% or higher.
temperatures after exposure in the range of 1000ºF to 1400ºF.
G12 Alloy N06022 in the solution annealed condition is subject to severe loss
of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of
1000ºF to 1250ºF.
1500ºF and shall be considered in the design.

H1 For temperatures above 1000ºF, these stress values may be used only if
the material is annealed at a minimum temperature of 1900ºF and has a
carbon content of 0.04% or higher.
H2 For temperatures above 1000ºF, these stress values may be used only if
the material is heat treated by heating it to a minimum temperature of
1900ºF and quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
W1 Welding except for seal welds is not permitted.
W2 For welded construction, stress values for material at O temper shall be
used.
W3 The stress values given for this material are not applicable when either
welding or thermal cutting is employed.

W4 Use NFA-12 when welded with 5356 or 5556 filler metal, all thickness, or
4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness <= 3/8 in. Use NFA-13 when welded
with 4043 or 5554 filler metal, thickness > 3/8 in.
Material Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for the selected material. You can modify some properties. Doing so only
changes the properties locally. It does not modify the database.
Properties available in this dialog box vary depending on the command used.
Material Name - Displays the ASME code material specification for the selected item.
Listing # -
Yield Stress, Design - Enter the yield stress for the material at the operating temperature. You
can find these values in the ASME Code, Section 2 Part D; they are not stored in the material
database. If the yield stress at operating temperature is significantly different than the yield
stress at ambient temperature, and if some of the items in the model make use of yield stress,
such as vessel legs, then you should carefully check and enter this value.
When you select a material from the material database, the software looks up its operating yield
stress in the yield stress database and automatically fills in this value. If there are duplicate
entries in the yield stress database, then the software displays a message. You can then select
from among the duplicates.
Allowable Stress, Design - Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating
temperature. The operating temperature for most vessels is defined to be the same as the
design metal temperature for the internal pressure. You can find this value in the ASME Code,
Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
If you enter a valid material name in the Material Input field, the software searches its database
and determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and populates this
field.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material name from
the Material Selection window.
Allowable Stress, Ambient - Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient
temperature. The ambient temperature for most vessels will be 70° F or 100° F or 30° C). You
can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material name from
the Material Selection window.
Nominal Material Density - Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this
value to calculate component weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is
0.2830 lbs/in3.
Nominal Thickness for this P Number - Enter the thickness for the P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness above
which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is based on the P number
for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code.
If a seam is partially radiographed and the required thickness exceeds the P number
thickness, PV Elite automatically changes the joint efficiency to 1.0 as stated in the Code.
External Pressure Curve Name
UCS-66 Curve

 Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves

 Impact Tested - AM 218.1 impact test exemption curve
 Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
The following is from Section VIII Division 1, Figure UCS-66, ed. 2011a Addenda:
1. Material Curve A
a. All carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in Curves
B, C, and D below.
b. SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched and
tempered; SA-217 Grade WC6 if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched and
tempered.
2. Material Curve B
a. SA-216 Grade WCA if normalized and tempered or water-quenched and tempered
SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC for thicknesses not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm), if
produced to fine grain practice and water-quenched and tempered.
SA-217 Grade WC9 if normalized and tempered
SA 285 Grades A and B
SA 414 Grade A
SA-515 Grade 60
SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
SA-612 if not normalized
SA/EN Grade B if not normalized
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH as rolled
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430NR and PT460NR
b. Except for cast steels, all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized which are not listed in Curves C and D below;
c. All pipe, fittings, forgings, and tubing not listed for Curves C and D below;
d. Parts permitted under UG-11 shall be included in Curve B even when fabricated from
plate that otherwise would be assigned to a different curve.
3. Material Curve C
a. SA 182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
SA 302 Grades C and D
SA 336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 442 Grades 55 <= 1 in. if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA 516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
SA 533 Grades B and C SA 662 Grade A
b. All materials listed in 2(a) and 2(c) or Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized, normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and tempered as permitted in
the material specification, and not listed for Curve D below.
4. Material Curve D
SA 203
SA 508 Grade 1
SA 516 if normalized, or quenched and tempered

SA 524 Classes 1 and 2

SA 537 Classes 1, 2, and 3
SA 612 if normalized
SA 738 Grade A
SA 738 Grade A with Cb and V deliberately added in accordance with the provisions of the
material specification, not colder than -20ºF (-29ºC)
SA 738 Grade B not colder than -20ºF (-29ºC)
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430N and PT460N
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH if normalized
SA/EN 10028-3 Grade P275NH
Impact Test Exempted
If you are using an impact tested material when no MDMT calculations are required, select
Impact tested Material.
Is the Material Normalized? - Click to use the ASME normalized curve for the material. For
more information, see UCS-66 Curve.
 Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves
 Impact Tested - AM 218.1 impact test exemption curve
 Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
The following is from Section VIII Division 1, Figure UCS-66, ed. 2011a Addenda:
1. Material Curve A
a. All carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in Curves
B, C, and D below.
b. SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched and
tempered; SA-217 Grade WC6 if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched and
tempered.
2. Material Curve B
a. SA-216 Grade WCA if normalized and tempered or water-quenched and tempered
SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC for thicknesses not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm), if
produced to fine grain practice and water-quenched and tempered.
SA-217 Grade WC9 if normalized and tempered
SA 285 Grades A and B
SA 414 Grade A
SA-515 Grade 60
SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
SA-612 if not normalized
SA/EN Grade B if not normalized
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH as rolled
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430NR and PT460NR
b. Except for cast steels, all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized which are not listed in Curves C and D below;

c. All pipe, fittings, forgings, and tubing not listed for Curves C and D below;
d. Parts permitted under UG-11 shall be included in Curve B even when fabricated from
plate that otherwise would be assigned to a different curve.
3. Material Curve C
a. SA 182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
SA 302 Grades C and D
SA 336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 442 Grades 55 <= 1 in. if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA 516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
SA 533 Grades B and C SA 662 Grade A
b. All materials listed in 2(a) and 2(c) or Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized, normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and tempered as permitted in
the material specification, and not listed for Curve D below.
4. Material Curve D
SA 203
SA 508 Grade 1
SA 516 if normalized, or quenched and tempered
SA 524 Classes 1 and 2
SA 537 Classes 1, 2, and 3
SA 738 Grade A
SA 738 Grade A with Cb and V deliberately added in accordance with the provisions of the
material specification, not colder than -20ºF (-29ºC)
SA 738 Grade B not colder than -20ºF (-29ºC)
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430N and PT460N
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH if normalized
SA/EN 10028-3 Grade P275NH
Impact Test Exempted
If you are using an impact tested material when no MDMT calculations are required, select
Impact tested Material.
Elastic Modulus ID
The elastic modulus reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of data
set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TM-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many materials
have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the
ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens,
you will need to enter in an appropriate value.

Number
1 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C<= 0.3%
2 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C> 0.3%


Number
3 TM-1 Material Group A
4 TM-1 Material Group B
5 TM-1 Material Group C
6 TM-1 Material Group D
7 TM-1 Material Group E
8 TM-1 Material Group F
9 TM-1 Material Group G
10 TM-1 S13800
11 TM-1 S15500
12 TM-1 S45000
13 TM-1 S17400
14 TM-1 S17700
15 TM-1 S66286
16 TM-2 A03560
17 TM-2 A95083
18 TM-2 A95086
19 TM-2 A95456
20 TM-2 A24430
21 TM-2 A91060
22 TM-2 A91100
23 TM-2 A93003
24 TM-2 A93004
25 TM-2 A96061
26 TM-2 A96063
27 TM-2 A92014
28 TM-2 A92024
29 TM-2 A95052
30 TM-2 A95154
31 TM-2 A95254
32 TM-2 A95454
33 TM-2 A95652


Number
34 TM-3 C93700
35 TM-3 C83600
36 TM-3 C92200
37 TM-3 C92200
38 TM-3 C28000
39 TM-3 C28000
40 TM-3 C65500
41 TM-3 C66100
42 TM-3 C95200
43 TM-3 C95400
44 TM-3 C44300
45 TM-3 C44400
46 TM-3 C44500
47 TM-3 C64200
48 TM-3 C68700
49 TM-3 C10200
50 TM-3 C10400
51 TM-3 C10500
52 TM-3 C10700
53 TM-3 C11000
54 TM-3 C12000
55 TM-3 C12200
56 TM-3 C12300
57 TM-3 C12500
58 TM-3 C14200
59 TM-3 C23000
60 TM-3 C61000
61 TM-3 C61400
62 TM-3 C65100
63 TM-3 C70400
64 TM-3 C19400


Number
65 TM-3 C60800
66 TM-3 C63000
67 TM-3 C70600
68 TM-3 C97600
69 TM-3 C71000
70 TM-3 C71500
71 TM-4 N02200
72 TM-4 N02201
73 TM-4 N04400
74 TM-4 N04405
75 TM-4 N06002
76 TM-4 N06007
77 TM-4 N06022
78 TM-4 N06030
79 TM-4 N06045
80 TM-4 N06059
81 TM-4 N06230
82 TM-4 N06455
83 TM-4 N06600
84 TM-4 N06617
85 TM-4 N06625
86 TM-4 N06690
87 TM-4 N07718
88 TM-4 N07750
89 TM-4 N08020
90 TM-4 N08031
91 TM-4 N08330
92 TM-4 N08800
93 TM-4 N08801
94 TM-4 N08810
95 TM-4 N08825


Number
96 TM-4 N10001
97 TM-4 N10003
98 TM-4 N10242
99 TM-4 N10276
100 TM-4 N10629
101 TM-4 N10665
102 TM-4 N10675
103 TM-4 N12160
104 TM-4 R20033
105 TM-5 R50250
106 TM-5 R50400
107 TM-5 R50550
108 TM-5 R52400
109 TM-5 R56320
110 TM-5 R52250
111 TM-5 R53400
112 TM-5 R52402
113 TM-5 R52252
114 TM-5 R52404
115 TM-5 R52254
116 TM-5 R60702
117 TM-5 R60705
118 TM-1 12Cr-13Cr Group F
119 TM-1 20+Cr Material Group G
220 TEMA Ni-Mo Alloy B
221 TEMA Tantalum
223 TEMA 7 MO (S32900)
225 TEMA 17-19 CR Stn Steel
226 TEMA AL-6XN Stn Steel (NO8367)


Number
227 TEMA AL-29-4-2
228 TEMA SEA-CURE
229 TEMA 2205 (S31803)
230 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ID

The thermal expansion reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of
data set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TE-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many
materials have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is
supplied in the ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If
this happens, you will need to enter in an appropriate value. Thermal expansion coefficients are
important especially if you are analyzing a heat exchanger.

Number
1 TE-1 Carbon & Low Alloy Steels, Group 1
2 TE-1 Low Alloy Steels, Group 2
3 TE-1 5Cr-1Mo and 29Cr-7Ni-2Mo-N Steels
4 TE-1 9Cr-1Mo
5 TE-1 5Ni-1/4 4Mo
6 TE-1 8Ni and 9Ni
7 TE-1 12Cr, 12cR-1Al, 13Cr, 13Cr-4Ni Steels
8 TE-1 15Cr and 17Cr Steels
9 TE-1 27Cr Steels
10 TE-1 Austentic Group 3 Steels
11 TE-1 Austentic Group 4 Steels
12 TE-1 Ductile Cast Iron
13 TE-1 17Cr-4Ni-4Cu. Condition 1075
15 TE-2 Aluminum Alloys
16 TE-3 Copper Alloys C1XXXX Series
17 TE-3 Bronze Alloys
18 TE-3 Brass Alloys
19 TE-3 70Cu-30Ni

20 TE-3 90Cu-10Ni
21 TE-4 N02200 and N02201
22 TE-4 N04400 and N04405
23 TE-4 N06002
24 TE-4 N06007
25 TE-4 N06022
26 TE-4 N06030
27 TE-4 N06045
28 TE-4 N06059, N06686
29 TE-4 N06230
30 TE-4 N06455
31 TE-4 N06600
32 TE-4 N06625
33 TE-4 N06690
34 TE-4 N07718
35 TE-4 N07750
36 TE-4 N08031
37 TE-4 N08330
38 TE-4 N08800, N08801, N08810, N08811
39 TE-4 N08825
40 TE-4 N10001
41 TE-4 N10003
42 TE-4 N10242
43 TE-4 N10276
44 TE-4 N10629
45 TE-4 N10665
46 TE-4 N10675
47 TE-4 N12160
48 TE-4 R20033
49 TE-5 Titanium Gr 1, 2, 2H, 3, 7, 7H, 11, 12, 16,
16H, 17, 26, 26H, 27
50 TE-5 Titanium Gr 9, 28
51 TEMA 5Cr-1/2Mo
52 TEMA 7Cr-1/2Mo & 9Cr-1Mo

53 TEMA Ni-Mo (Alloy B)

54 TEMA Nickel (Alloy 200)
55 TEMA Copper-Silicon
56 TEMA Admirality
57 TEMA Zirconium
58 TEMA Cr-Ni-F3-Mo-Cu-Cb (Alloy 20Cb)
59 TEMA Tantalum
60 TEMA Tantulum with 2.5% Tungsten
61 TEMA 17-19 CR (TP 439)
62 TEMA AL-6XN
63 TEMA 2205 (S31803)
65 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)
67 TEMA AL 29-4-2
68 TEMA SEA-CURE
69 TEMA 880-20 Cu-Ni (C71000)
Yield Stress - Opens the Yield Stress Record dialog box, which displays yield stress details of
the selected material.

APPENDIX A
Vessel Example Problems

The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation
directory/Examples directory.

Vessel Example Problems

APPENDIX B
Keyboard and Mouse Commands
Keyboard
The following software actions are defined for the keyboard:
Begin line <Home>
Begin list <Home>

Delete character <Del.>
Delete prev. char <Backspace>
Delete window <Alt+F4>

End line <End>
End list <End>
Exit <Shift+F3>
Help <F1>
Hot key <Alt+char(with '_')>
Insert toggle <Ins>
Left word <Ctrl+left-arrow>
Mark <Ctrl+F5>
Maximize <Alt +>
Menu control <Alt>

Minimize <Alt ->
Move window <Alt+F7>
New model Ctrl+N

Next cell <Down_arrow>
Next Character <Right_arrow>

Next field <Tab>
Next window <Alt+F6>
Page down <Page Down>
Page up <Page Up>

Previous cell <Up_arrow>
Previous character <Left_arrow>

Previous field <Shift+Tab>
Refresh <F5>
Right word <Ctrl+right_arrow>
Select <Enter>
Size window <Alt+F8>

Keyboard and Mouse Commands
System button <Alt .>
Mouse
The following software actions are defined for the mouse:
In Window Objects:
Choose <Left-down-click>
Select <Left-release>
In Vessel Graphics:
Select element <Left-release>
Select detail <Right-down-click>

APPENDIX C
Appendix: PV Elite Error Messages

This appendix lists error messages that you might see if PV Elite abnormally terminates for any
reason.


APPENDIX D
FATAL ERROR #5000

General user input error.
 Meaning: During telephone access of the ESL device, erroneous data was entered.
Modification of the ESL is skipped and the modification routine exits.
FATAL ERROR #5001/5307

ESL device not found. The initial check local/network keys has failed to a valid license. Possible
causes for this problem include:
 Meaning:
 The ESL may not be an ICAS key. Check the label and make sure the 5-character code
is "MQCQX".
 The "Sentinel HASP License Manager" service is not running. Check the service and if
necessary, "start" it.
 The Sentinel Drivers may not have been loaded. This may be possible if the software
was copied onto the machine instead of installed.
 Required ports (1947, 475) could be blocked by a firewall. If a firewall is in use, make
sure these ports are open.
 Inoperable USB port. Try another port.
 The ESL is not plugged in.
 For older ESLs, a "firmware update" may be necessary. Check the firmware version in
"Admin Control Center" and if less than 3.21, update the firmware.
 Incorrect or expired license data on the ESL. Contact ICAS Sales if this is the case.
 Incorrect data (IP address) specified in "NETHASP.INI" or in "Admin Control Center".
FATAL ERROR #5002

The ESL device was detected, but a rigorous check of its behavior failed. See reasons for
FATAL ERROR # 5001 for additional information and possible causes.
FATAL ERROR #5003

The ESL device was detected, but the expected memory signature in register 0 was not found.
See reasons for error 5001 for additional information and possible causes.

FATAL ERROR #5004

The detected ESL device checks out okay except that it is for the wrong version of the program.
For example, the ESL device is for a DEALER or limited version of the software.
FATAL ERROR #5005

A problem resetting the keydisk "kill" bits was encountered.
FATAL ERROR #5006

An incorrect access code was entered in "ESLPHON". This routine is only entered during an
attempt to modify the data stored on ESL.
Recovery: Terminate the program and restart it.
FATAL ERROR #5007

Improper program version.
Meaning: The hardwired release date of the program is greater than the maximum allowed by
ESL. The current ESL is not authorized to run this version of the software.
Recovery: Your ESL can be reauthorized remotely, via e-mail or fax. To do this, click [OK]
below. When prompted to review another error message, click [Cancel]. This will leave you on
the Main program menu. Pull down the ESL menu and select the option: "Generate Fax Codes".
E-mail these codes to query.icas@intergraph.com with the following information:
 your name
 your company name
 your ESL ID number
 your return e-mail address (plus phone or fax number just in case of problems)
 a statement that you received error #5007
 the "access codes"
Intergraph CAS will respond via e-mail with the necessary reauthorization codes. To enter this
data, you need to return to the "ESL Menu" and select the option: "Specify Reauthorization
Codes".

FATAL ERROR #5008

An error occurred while attempting to setup memory on the ESL. This prevents all advanced
access to the ESL device. Error occurred in "AMTST" routine.
FATAL ERROR #5009

Access error in CAESAR II module ELEM. Proper testing flags were not set properly. Either the
ESL is not functioning for some reason or some other corruption has occurred (for example,
remapping the port, switch box, and so forth).
FATAL ERROR #5010

Same as 5009 except in the program ROT.
FATAL ERROR #5011

Same as 5009 except in the program RUN107.
FATAL ERROR #5012

Access to the program is denied because the "kill unlimited keydisk" bit is still set.
FATAL ERROR #5013

Access to the program is denied because the "kill limited keydisk" bit is still set.
FATAL ERROR #5014

Error encountered while performing diskette reset. This occurs when the main menu program
attempts to kill a keydisk.
FATAL ERROR #5015

Error encountered while reformatting a keydisk, probably write protected.

FATAL ERROR #5016

Error encountered while wiping a keydisk track.
FATAL ERROR #5017

The initial check of the ESL was successful, however, a later check could not find the device.
This could be caused by moving the ESL device between computers.
FATAL ERROR #5018

The ESL device is used in several computation routines throughout the program. One of these
routines has returned an incorrect result.
This is most likely caused by either an ESL malfunction or a security breach.
Recovery: Ensure that the ESL is attached to the parallel port and try this operation again. If
problems still occur, contact Intergraph CAS for assistance.
FATAL ERROR #5019

A hard disk access problem has been encountered.
Recovery: Check that you have access rights to the current data directory and that there is
adequate free space on the disk to perform the analysis. If this problem persists, please contact
Intergraph CAS for assistance.
FATAL ERROR #5020

Error encountered in obtaining instruction codes from the user's input string during a remote
(fax) update of the ESL. This indicates that data is missing from one of the input instruction
lines.
Recovery: Review the instructions and insure they are input exactly as shown on the fax. If
problems persist, please contact Intergraph CAS.
FATAL ERROR #5021

Error encountered parsing a user's input instructions during remote ESL updating. This indicates
"non-numeric" data in the instruction codes.
Recovery: Review the instructions and ensure they are input exactly as shown on the fax. If
problems persist, please contact Intergraph CAS.
Error encountered in a user instruction string. The instruction did not begin with the proper
access code.
Recovery: Re-issue the commands and ensure that the first value on every instruction line is
the same.

FATAL ERROR #5023

This error indicates the ESL is not authorized to run a specific module of the current software
package.
There are two causes for this error:
1. The most common reason for this error is to have two white ESLs for the same software
program on the same machine. The software will only read the first white ESL that is
attached to the printer port. Please swap the ESLs and try again.
2. This module of the software is not allowed access with the ESL in use. Check Module
Access Flags on this ESL by viewing the ESL data (from the Main Menu). After running this
program, check the Module Access Flags.
For CADWorx:
 Module Access Flags = 2: CADWorx/PIPE is only allowed access.
 Module Access Flags = 4: CADWorx/P&ID is only allowed access.
 Module Access Flags = 6: CADWorx/PIPE and CADWorx/P&ID are both allowed
access.
For CAESAR II:
 Module Access Flags = 2: CAESAR II is only allowed access.
 Module Access Flags = 4: CATIA interface is only allowed.
 Module Access Flags = 6: CAESAR II and CATIA interface are both allowed access.
Recovery: Please contact Intergraph CAS for assistance.
FATAL ERROR #5024

At least one set of reauthorization codes has been entered more than once. This is not allowed.
Recovery: Please make sure that you only specify a given set of reauthorization codes once.
FATAL ERROR #5205

A problem was encountered destroying the key on a keydisk.
FATAL ERROR #5300

HASP error searching for a valid program number. This indicates that the ESL in use is not set
up to access the current program.

FATAL ERROR #5301

Time-out, a write operation did not succeed. (HASP error code -1).
FATAL ERROR #5302

Invalid address. The requested memory address is out of range. (HASP error code -2).
FATAL ERROR #5303

No HASP ESL found. (HASP error code -3).
FATAL ERROR #5304

A HASP ESL was found but the memory could not be accessed. (HASP error code -4). Typically
this means that a HASP ESL for a different program was detected, but the ESL for the current
program was not.
FATAL ERROR #5305

The verification of the "write to memory" failed. (HASP error code -5).
FATAL ERROR #5306

An invalid service was requested. (HASP error code -999).
FATAL ERROR #5308

No NETHASP server found. . (HASP error code 4).
This error can also be generated by attempting to run a DEALER version of Intergraph CAS
program on a network where the HASPSERV manager has not been loaded, or you are not
logged on. In any event, there are no network considerations for DEALER versions of Intergraph
CAS products. Dealer versions require a local (green) ESL.
Recovery: Check whether you have access rights and permission to access this file.

FATAL ERROR #5309

Cannot read the NETHASP server address file. (HASP error code 5).
FATAL ERROR #5310

Cannot close the NETHASP server address file. (HASP error code 6).
FATAL ERROR #5311

No answer from NETHASP server. Delete all copies of the HASPADDR.DAT and
NEWHADDR.DAT files. (HASP error code 8).
FATAL ERROR #5312

A HASP service was requested before LOGIN. (HASP error code 10).
FATAL ERROR #5313

Communication error with HASP ESL. (HASP error code 2).
Recovery: Check equipment and verify that the protocol is installed properly.
FATAL ERROR #5314

FATAL ERROR #5315


FATAL ERROR #5316

FATAL ERROR #5317

NETHASP has not succeeded to allocate memory. This is a Windows problem. (HASP error
code 21).
FATAL ERROR #5318

NETHASP has not succeeded to free memory. This is a Windows problem. (HASP error code
22).
FATAL ERROR #5319

The appropriate NETHASP ESL is not connected to the NETHASP server. (HASP error code
129).
FATAL ERROR #5320

The program number specified is not in the program list of the NETHASP memory. (HASP error
code 130).
This error can also be generated by attempting to run a Intergraph CAS program on a network
where the network ESL has not been programmed to allow access to this particular program.
Attempting to run a DEALER version of any Intergraph CAS product utilizing a network ESL will
also generate this error.
FATAL ERROR #5321

Error occured reading from NETHASP memory. (HASP error code 131).
FATAL ERROR #5322

Error occured writing to NETHASP memory. (HASP error code 132).

FATAL ERROR #5323

The current LOGIN request has exceeded the number of stations which may run the software
concurrently. (HASP error code 133).
FATAL ERROR #5324

The current LOGIN request has exceeded the number of authorized activations for the software.
(HASP error code 134).
FATAL ERROR #5325

A LOGOUT request was issued before a LOGIN request. (HASP error code 135).
FATAL ERROR #5326

The HASP server is busy. (HASP error code 136).
Meaning: This may occur if the NETHASP system is not well adapted to the network.
Recovery: Possible solutions include adjusting the "timeout" parameter of the HASP server.
FATAL ERROR #5327

There is no space in the user list. (HASP error code 137).
Recovery: Possible solutions include adjusting the "number of users" parameter of the HASP
server.
FATAL ERROR #5328

NETHASP internal error occurred. The number of Licensed Stations is larger than that allowed
by this particular ESL. (HASP error code 138).
FATAL ERROR #5329

The NETHASP server crashed and was reactivated, or a call has been made to a HASP routine
before a LOGIN request. (HASP error code 139).

FATAL ERROR #5330

The NETHASP server does not serve your station's network. (HASP error code 140).
FATAL ERROR #5331

Unknown HASP ESL error countered.
FATAL ERROR #5332

A request to read more than 24 words from ESL memory has been made. Currently, memory
read requests are limited to 24 registers at a time.
FATAL ERROR #5333

No active NetHASP server was found. This applies to IPX and NetBios. (HASP error code 15).
FATAL ERROR #5334

Cannot Login because the SET_SERVER_BY_NAME call was not successful. (HASP error
code 18).
FATAL ERROR #5335

Syntax error in the NetHASP configuration file. This can be caused by an environment variable
with an illegal setting or TCP/IP enabled without an IP address. (HASP error code 19)
FATAL ERROR #5336

The path for the NETHASP.INI location is specified via the NHINIFILEPATH environment
variable, but the NETHASP.INI file could not be loaded there. (HASP error code 20).

FATAL ERROR #5337

Invalid NetHASP memory address. (HASP error code 23).
FATAL ERROR #5338

Invalid NetHASP service. (HASP error code 24).
FATAL ERROR #5339

Failed to load WINSOCK.DLL. Applies only to TCP/IP. (HASP error code 25).
FATAL ERROR #5340

Failed to unload WINSOCK.DLL. Applies only to TCP/IP. (HASP error code 26).
FATAL ERROR #5341

Cannot find the NetHASP Server matching the name specified in the NetHASP configuration
file. (HASP error code 142).
FATAL ERROR #5342

No NetHASP Server with the assigned name was found. This error is returned by the
SET_SERVER_BY_NAME service. (HASP error code 150).
FATAL ERROR #5343

Two or more different NetHASP servers with the assigned name were found. This error is
returned by the SET_SERVER_BY_NAME service. (HASP error code 151).
FATAL ERROR #5344

A Winsock.dll startup error occurred. This applies only to TCP/IP environments. (HASP error
code 28).

FATAL ERROR #5345

NetHASP services are not supported. (HASP error code 40)
FATAL ERROR #5346

An invalid HASP service has been requested. (HASP error code 141)
FATAL ERROR #5347

Cannot open the HASP device driver. This applies to WIN32 applications. Install the HASP
device driver. (HASP error code -100)
FATAL ERROR #5348

Cannot read the HASP device driver. This applies to WIN32 applications. (HASP error code
-101)
FATAL ERROR #5349

Cannot close the HASP device driver. This applies to WIN32 applications. (HASP error code
-102)
FATAL ERROR #5350

Cannot open the HASP device driver. This applies to DOS, extended DOS, and Windows
applications attempting to access the HASP device driver. (HASP error code -110)
Recovery: Install the HASP device driver.
FATAL ERROR #5351

Cannot read the HASP device driver. This applies to DOS, extended DOS, and Windows
FATAL ERROR #5352

Cannot close the HASP device driver. This applies to DOS, extended DOS, and Windows

FATAL ERROR #5353

Cannot allocate DOS memory. This applies to extended DOS and Windows applications with
stand-alone ESLs. Try freeing DOS memory. (HASP error code -120)
FATAL ERROR #5354

Error freeing DOS memory. This applies to extended DOS and Windows applications with
stand-alone ESLs. (HASP error code -121)
FATAL ERROR #5355

Failed to close the socket, applies to TCP/IP. (HASP error code 30)
FATAL ERROR #5356

You tried to set the protocol with SetProtocol service without performing a NetHASP LOGOUT,
or after performing a NetHASP LOGIN. (HASP error code 33)
FATAL ERROR #5357

This error is returned when the application tries to communicate with an older version of the
NetHASP license manager. (HASP error code 155)
Recovery: Reload the latest NetHASP license manager on the machine where the network lock
is attached. The NetHASP license manager install program is located at:
..\ASSIDRV\LMSETUP.EXE.
If you are using the Red Network Lock, please contact your network Administrator for more help
before contacting Intergraph CAS. If you do contact Intergraph CAS for support, please have
your network Administrator available to assist Intergraph CAS Personnel.
FATAL ERROR #5358

The parallel port is currently unavailable. Another device attached to it, such as a printer, is
active. (HASP error code -6)
Recovery: Retry the operation.

FATAL ERROR #5359

The size of the buffer is too small. This error only occurs with services that have a minimum
buffer size requirement. (HASP error code -7)
FATAL ERROR #5360

The hardware does not support the requested service. This service requires a HASP4
generation key to be connected. (HASP error code -8)
FATAL ERROR #5361

Invalid pointer. The pointer passed to the service is not valid. (HASP error code -9)
FATAL ERROR #5362

Access to the ESL is prohibited because the application is running through a remote screen on
Citrix Winframe or Windows Terminal Server (the application can only run on the console
screen). (HASP error code -10)
FATAL ERROR #5363

Access to the ESL is prohibited because the application is running on Citrix Winframe or
Windows Terminal Server (service pack 4+ required to detect if this is running on the console
screen). (HASP error code -11)
FATAL ERROR #5364

A parameter passed to the service is not valid or is out of range. (HASP error code -12)
FATAL ERROR #6001

The request exceeds the HASP HL memory range. (HASP HL error 1)

FATAL ERROR #6002

An unknown "program number feature" has been requested. (HASP HL error 2)
FATAL ERROR #6003

The system is out of memory. (HASP HL error 3)
FATAL ERROR #6004

There are too many open handles. (HASP HL error 4)
FATAL ERROR #6005

Access to the requested feature is denied. (HASP HL error 5)
FATAL ERROR #6006

The legacy decryption function cannot work on the current feature. (HASP HL error 6)
FATAL ERROR #6007

The HASP HL key is no longer available. (HASP HL error 7)
FATAL ERROR #6008

Decrypted data length is too short to execute the function call. (HASP HL error 8)
FATAL ERROR #6009

An invalid handle has been passed to a function. (HASP HL error 9)
FATAL ERROR #6010

The specified "fileid" is not recognized by the API. (HASP HL error 10)

FATAL ERROR #6011

The installed driver is too old to execute the requested function. (HASP HL error 11)
FATAL ERROR #6012

A real-time clock (rtc) is not available. (HASP HL error 12)
FATAL ERROR #6013

Generic error from host system call. (HASP HL error 13)
FATAL ERROR #6014

The required HASP driver is not installed. (HASP HL error 14)
FATAL ERROR #6015

Unrecognized file format for update. (HASP HL error 15)
FATAL ERROR #6016

The requested function cannot be executed in this context. (HASP HL error 16)
FATAL ERROR #6017

The binary data passed to the function does not contain an update. (HASP HL error 17)
FATAL ERROR #6018

The HASP HL license you requested to update has not been found. (HASP HL error 18)
FATAL ERROR #6019

The required XML tags are not found. Contents in the binary data are missing or invalid. (HASP
HL error 19)

FATAL ERROR #6020

The update request is not supported by the HASP HL key. (HASP HL error 20)
FATAL ERROR #6021

The update counter is not set properly. (HASP HL error 21)
FATAL ERROR #6022

An invalid vendor code has been passed.(HASP HL error 22)
FATAL ERROR #6023

The used hardware does not support the encryption type. (HASP HL error 23)
FATAL ERROR #6024

The passed time value is beyond the supported value range. (HASP HL error 24)
FATAL ERROR #6025

Real-time clock battery has run out of power. (HASP HL error 25)
FATAL ERROR #6026

Acknowledge data requested by the update ack_data parameter is NULL. (HASP HL error 26)
FATAL ERROR #6027

The program is running remotely on a Terminal Server.(HASP HL error 27)
FATAL ERROR #6028

The type of feature requested is not implemented. (HASP HL error 28)

FATAL ERROR #6029

Unknown algorithm used in V2C file. (HASP HL error 29)
FATAL ERROR #6030

The signature verification operation has failed. (HASP HL error 30)
FATAL ERROR #6031

The requested feature is no longer available. (HASP HL error 31)
This error can also be generated with network licensing if all of the licenses are in use and
another license request is made.
FATAL ERROR #6032

SRM error - buffer corruption occurred.
FATAL ERROR #6033

Communication error between the HASP API and the local HASP License Manager. This error
can be caused by a number of issues:
 no HASP driver running
 no ESL attached to the machine
FATAL ERROR #6038

The current LOGIN request has exceeded the number of stations which may run the software
concurrently. (SRM error code 38)
FATAL ERROR #6039

This error indicates a broken session, which can happen if the machine "power save" kicks in.
The license will "time out" and when the machine wakes up, any running applications will not
have a license. (SRM error code 39)
Recovery: Stop and restart the application.

FATAL ERROR #6040

This error is caused by a communication error between the local and remote license managers.
Recovery: Check that the network cables are still plugged in.
FATAL ERROR #6041

The requested program license has expired. This may occur with "detached" network licenses.
FATAL ERROR #6042

The HASP License Manager is out-of-date.
Recovery: Update all associated Aladdin drivers and License Managers.
FATAL ERROR #6050

Unable to locate any licenses for this product. A machine setup restored from an "image" can
generate this error.
FATAL ERROR #6500

Object not initialized correctly. (HASP HL error 500)
FATAL ERROR #6501

Parsed parameter is incorrect. (HASP HL error 501)
FATAL ERROR #6502

Logging in twice into the same object. (HASP HL error 502)
FATAL ERROR #6503

Logging out twice from the same object. (HASP HL error 503)

FATAL ERROR #6525

Error related to incorrect use of system or platform. (HASP HL error 525)
FATAL ERROR #6698

The requested type of feature is not implemented. (HASP HL error 698)

Glossary
remaining strength factor
FCA
future corrosion allowance
gl
length of groove-like flaw
gw
width of groove-like flaw
LTA
local thin area
MAPnc
Maximum Allowable Pressure in a new and cold condition
MAWP
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
Slen
Maximum length between ring stiffeners
wmax
maximum pit depth

Glossary

Index
Body Flange (Additional Element Data) •
3 252
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Data • 326
3D Graphics Toolbar • 226 BS6399-97 Wind Data • 330
3D Tab • 225 Building a Heat Exchanger • 40
A C
Add a Detail • 64 Calculating and Displaying Vessel Analysis
Adding Details • 34 Results • 423
Additional Element Data (General Input Calculator • 218
Tab) • 246 Chile NCh2369 En Español • 373
Additional Weld Data (Nozzle Main Tab) • Chile NCh2369 Seismic Data • 371
82 China GB 50009 Wind Data • 332
Analysis • 49 China GB 50011 Seismic Data • 379
Analyze • 191 Common Detail Parameters • 65
Analyze Panel • 191 Component Analysis • 186
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Compute Ligament Efficiencies • 218
Details • 52 Configuration • 196
API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis • 181 Conical (Additional Element Data) • 248
Appendix Costa Rica 2002 Seismic Data • 379
PV Elite Error Messages • 489 Create / Review Units • 203
As/Nz 1170 Create a custom material based on an
2002 Wind Data • 317 existing material • 207
AS/NZ 1170.4 Seismic Data • 357 Create a new custom material • 206
ASCE 7-02/05 Seismic Data • 366 Create a new units file • 204
ASCE 7-98 Seismic Data • 364 Create Database • 191
ASCE-2010 Seismic Data • 369 Customize company name • 432
ASCE-2010 Wind Data • 325 Customize report header • 432
ASCE-88 Seismic Data • 359 Customize the title page • 432
ASCE-93 Seismic Data • 360
ASCE-93 Wind Data • 322
ASCE-95 Seismic Data • 362 D
ASCE-95, ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC Datum Line Options Dialog Box • 305
2006 Wind Data • 324 Defining the Basic Vessel • 39
ASME Appendix 9 Jacket • 172 Design and Analysis of Vessel Details • 50
Auxiliary Panel • 188 Design Constraints Tab • 299
Design Data (Design Constraints Tab) • 299
B Design Modification (Design Constraints
Tab) • 305
Backing Ring Data (Spherical Details Panel • 63
Cover/Backing Ring Tab) • 164 Diagnostics Tab • 229
Base Plate Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog DXF File Generated by PV Elite During
Box) • 118 Runtime • 192
Basering Analysis Considerations • 275 DXF File Generation Option • 56
Basering Design Data Tab (Basering Dialog DXF Options Tab (Configuration Dialog) •
Box) • 280 202
Basering Dialog Box • 274
Before You Begin PV Elite Installation • 27

Index
E FATAL ERROR #5308 • 496

FATAL ERROR #5309 • 497
Edit an existing units file • 204
Element Data (General Input Tab) • 236
Elements Panel • 62
Elliptical (Additional Element Data) • 246
EN-2005 Wind Data • 334
Enter Re-Authorization Codes • 231
Enter U-1 Form Information • 218
Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous
Options Dialog Box • 311
Error Check Only • 192
Error Checking • 38, 192
ESL Installation • 18
Esl Tab • 231
Euro Code Wind Data • 335
Exit • 59
Expansion Joint Data Tab (Heat Exchanger
Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) • 151
F FATAL ERROR #5328 • 499
FATAL ERROR #5000 • 491 FATAL ERROR #5329 • 499
FATAL ERROR #5001/5307 • 491 FATAL ERROR #5330 • 500

Index
FATAL ERROR #5361 • 504 Flip Element Orientation • 188

FATAL ERROR #5362 • 504 Floating Head Factors (Spherical
FATAL ERROR #5363 • 504 Cover/Backing Ring Tab) • 163
FATAL ERROR #5364 • 504 Floating TubeSheet Tab (Heat Exchanger
FATAL ERROR #6001 • 504 Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) • 158
FATAL ERROR #6002 • 505 Force and Moment • 99
FATAL ERROR #6003 • 505 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • 23
FATAL ERROR #6005 • 505 G
FATAL ERROR #6007 • 505 G Loading Seismic Data • 382
FATAL ERROR #6008 • 505 General Input Tab • 235
FATAL ERROR #6009 • 505 General Topics FAQ • 24
FATAL ERROR #6010 • 505 Generic Clip • 165
FATAL ERROR #6011 • 506 Getting Started and Workflows • 31
FATAL ERROR #6012 • 506 gl • 511
FATAL ERROR #6013 • 506 gw • 511
FATAL ERROR #6015 • 506 H
FATAL ERROR #6016 • 506 Halfpipe Jacket • 125
FATAL ERROR #6017 • 506 Help Tab • 233
FATAL ERROR #6018 • 506 Home Tab • 61
I
FATAL ERROR #6022 • 507 IBC 2000 Seismic Data • 382
FATAL ERROR #6026 • 507 IBC-03 and IBC 2006 Wind Data • 337
FATAL ERROR #6027 • 507 Import/Export • 58
FATAL ERROR #6028 • 507 Input • 186
FATAL ERROR #6029 • 508 Input Processors • 33
FATAL ERROR #6030 • 508 Input/Output Panel • 186
FATAL ERROR #6031 • 508 Install a local lock • 18
FATAL ERROR #6032 • 508 Install a network lock • 18
FATAL ERROR #6033 • 508 Installation • 27
FATAL ERROR #6038 • 508 Installing PV Elite from the Product Media •
FATAL ERROR #6039 • 508 28
FATAL ERROR #6040 • 509 Installing PV Elite in Silent Mode • 29
FATAL ERROR #6041 • 509 Insulation • 123
FATAL ERROR #6042 • 509 Integral Flat Head with a Large Centrally
FATAL ERROR #6050 • 509 Located Opening Dialog Box • 251
FATAL ERROR #6500 • 509 IS-1893 RSM Seismic Data • 392
FATAL ERROR #6501 • 509 IS-1893 SCM Seismic Data • 394
FATAL ERROR #6502 • 509 IS-875 Wind Data • 338
FATAL ERROR #6525 • 510 J
FATAL ERROR #6698 • 510 Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab
FCA • 511 (Configuration Dialog) • 196
File Panel • 61 JPI-7R-35-2004 Wind Data • 340
File Tab • 57
Flange Dialog Box • 258

Index
K Nozzle Design Options (Load Cases Tab) •

313
Keyboard and Mouse Commands • 487
Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box •
78
L Nozzle Main Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis
Layout Pattern Tab • 150 Dialog Box) • 71
Leg Input Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box) Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab) • 73
• 115
Legs • 115 O
Licensing • 17
Open • 57
Lifting Lug Data • 168
Optional Steps • 428
Lining • 124
Output Processor • 431
Liquid • 120
Output Review and Report Generation • 53
List Dialog • 189
Load Cases Tab • 307
Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger P
Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) • 155 Packing • 102
Local Stress Analysis (WRC 107, 297 or Pad or Hub Properties (Nozzle Main Tab) •
Annex G) Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis 80
Dialog Box) • 90 PD
LTA • 511 5500 Annex G Analysis • 91
Lug • 111 PDVSA En Español • 406
PDVSA Seismic Data • 401
M Performing the Analysis • 50
Phone Update • 231
MAPnc • 511
Platform • 100
Material Database Dialog Box • 433
Preview/Print • 58
Material Database Editor • 205
Print Setup • 58
Material Dialog Boxes • 433
Purchasing Licenses FAQ • 24
Material Properties • 207
PV Elite Analysis • 423
Material Properties Dialog Box • 474
PV Elite Overview • 13
MAWP • 511
Mexico 1993 En Español • 345
Mexico 1993 Wind Data • 341 Q
Mexico Sismo En Español • 396 Quick Installation Workflow • 22
Mexico Sismo Seismic Data • 395
Miscellaneous (Nozzle Main Tab) • 83 R
Modeling Basics • 38
Modify a Detail • 65 Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel
Image • 55
References • 296
N Report Headings (Heading Tab) • 297
NBC 1995 Seismic Data • 397 Report Print Options Dialog Box • 157
NBC 2005 Seismic Data • 399 Res. Spectrum Seismic Data • 412
NBC 2010 Seismic Data • 401 Review Database • 186
NBC-2010 Wind Data • 351 Review Reports • 192
NBC-95 and NBC-2005 Wind Data • 350
NetHASP License Manager / NETHASP.INI S
Instructions • 19
New • 62 Saddle • 104
Notes on Network ESLs • 19 Save • 58
Nozzle • 70 Save As • 58
Nozzle Analysis • 429 Save reports to Microsoft Word • 432
Seamless Pipe Selection Dialog Box • 189

Index
Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab) • 355 User Border Creation • 190
Select Units • 203 User-Defined Wind Data • 354
Set Default Values Tab (Configuration Tab) Utilities Panel • 187
• 202
Set Interface Language • 32 V
Setting default fonts • 432
Setting Up the Required Parameters • 190 Verifying the Installed Product Program
Skirt (Additional Element Data) • 274 Structure • 30
Skirt Access Openings Dialog Box • 294 Vessel Example Problems • 485
Skirt Opening Analysis Considerations • View Tab • 223
288
Slen • 511 W
SmartPlant License Manager Installation • Weight • 96
20 Welded Flat (Additional Element Data) •
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design 250
Constraints • 35 What Can Be Designed? • 14
Spherical (Additional Element Data) • 247 What Distinguishes PV Elite From our
Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab (Heat Competitors? • 14
Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) • What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc • 11
161 Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab) • 315
Status Bar • 34 wmax • 511
Stiffening Ring • 67 WRC 107/537 Analysis - Global Load
Stress Combination Load Cases (Load Convention • 94
Cases Tab) • 308 WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load
Convention • 92
T WRC 297 Analysis • 95
Tailing Lug Data Tab (Basering Design
Data Tab) • 287
Thin Joint Options • 154
Tools Tab • 195
Toricone Dialog Box • 249
Torispherical (Additional Element Data) •
247
Tray • 111
Troubleshooting Network Locks • 20
Tube Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet
Input Dialog Box) • 140
Tube Layout Assistant • 149
Tubesheet • 128
Tubesheet Properties Tab (Heat Exchanger
Tubesheet Input Dialog Box) • 133
Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab
(Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog
Box) • 129
U
UBC 1994 Seismic Data • 416
UBC 1997 Seismic Data • 417
UBC Wind Data • 353
Understanding the Interface • 31
Units File Dialog Box • 205
Units/Code Panel • 193

PV Elite: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

PV Elite: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PV Elite: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PV Elite

Version 2013 (V15)

November 13, 2012

PV Elite Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 13

Getting Started and Workflows ................................................................................................................ 31

File Tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 57

PV Elite User's Guide 3

Home Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 61

Tools Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 195

4 PV Elite User's Guide

Select Units ......................................................................................................................................... 203

View Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 223

3D Tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 225

Diagnostics Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 229

Esl Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 231

Help Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 233

General Input Tab .................................................................................................................................... 235

Report Headings (Heading Tab) ............................................................................................................. 297

Design Constraints Tab .......................................................................................................................... 299

Load Cases Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 307

Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab) .................................................................................................................. 315

PV Elite User's Guide 5

ASCE-95, ASCE-98/02/05/IBC-03, and IBC 2006 Wind Data............................................................ 324

Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab) ........................................................................................................ 355

PV Elite Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 423

6 PV Elite User's Guide

Output Processor .................................................................................................................................... 431

Material Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................................................. 433

Vessel Example Problems ...................................................................................................................... 485

Keyboard and Mouse Commands ......................................................................................................... 487

Appendix: PV Elite Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 489

PV Elite User's Guide 7

FATAL ERROR #5311 ........................................................................................................................ 497

8 PV Elite User's Guide

FATAL ERROR #5364 ........................................................................................................................ 504

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 511

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 513

PV Elite User's Guide 9

10 PV Elite User's Guide

Code Updates and Analysis changes:

Print directly to PDF printing in all modules

PV Elite User's Guide 11

 Office 2010 style themes

12 PV Elite User's Guide

PV Elite features include:

PV Elite User's Guide 13

What Distinguishes PV Elite From our Competitors?

What Can Be Designed?

14 PV Elite User's Guide

Complete Vertical Vessels

Complete Horizontal Vessels

PV Elite User's Guide 15

16 PV Elite User's Guide

External Software Lock (ESL) Keys

PV Elite User's Guide 17

What do you want to do?

Install a local lock